sx4 2016

ENGLISH 22.
0 mm
SERVICE STATION INFORMATION
Fuel recommendation: Brake and clutch fluid:

See page 1-1 DOT4 or SAE J1704
Engine oil recommendation: TCSS transaxle oil:

Gasoline engine: “SUZUKI TCSS GEAR OIL 0001” or “PETRONAS
(M16A engine models) TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE”
Classification: ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5
API SL, SM or SN TCSS actuation tank fluid:
ILSAC GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5 “SUZUKI TCSS ACTUATOR FLUID 1001” or
Viscosity: SAE 0W-20, 5W-30, 10W-30, 10W-40 “PETRONAS TUTELA CS SPEED”
(K10C and K14C engine models)
Classification: ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5 Automatic transaxle fluid:
OWNER’S MANUAL
SUZUKI AT-OIL AW-1
SX4
API SL, SM or SN
ILSAC GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5
Tire cold pressure:
Viscosity: SAE 5W-30, 10W-30, 10W-40
See the “Tire Information Label” located on the
Diesel engine: driver’s door lock pillar.
Classification: ACEA C2 Keep With Vehicle At All Times.
Viscosity: SAE 0W-30 Contains Important Information
On Safety, Operation & Maintenance.
For further details, see “Engine Oil and Filter” in the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.
99011-83RM0-01E
Part No. 99011-83RM0-01E June, 2016 Printed in Hungary
Suzuki Red: Magenta 100%, Yellow 100%

Suzuki Blue: Cyan 100%, Magenta 70%
Takumi Blue: Cyan 100%, Black 85%
Black
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ENGLISH 22.0 mm
SERVICE STATION INFORMATION
Fuel recommendation: Brake and clutch fluid:

See page 1-1 DOT4 or SAE J1704
Engine oil recommendation: TCSS transaxle oil:

Gasoline engine: “SUZUKI TCSS GEAR OIL 0001” or “PETRONAS
(M16A engine models) TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE”
API SL, SM or SN TCSS actuation tank fluid:
ILSAC GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5 “SUZUKI TCSS ACTUATOR FLUID 1001” or
Viscosity: SAE 0W-20, 5W-30, 10W-30, 10W-40 “PETRONAS TUTELA CS SPEED”
(K10C and K14C engine models)
Classification: ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5 Automatic transaxle fluid:
OWNER’S MANUAL
SUZUKI AT-OIL AW-1
SX4 S-CROSS
API SL, SM or SN
ILSAC GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5
Tire cold pressure:
Viscosity: SAE 5W-30, 10W-30, 10W-40
See the “Tire Information Label” located on the
Diesel engine: driver’s door lock pillar.
Classification: ACEA C2 Keep With Vehicle At All Times.
Viscosity: SAE 0W-30 Contains Important Information
On Safety, Operation & Maintenance.
For further details, see “Engine Oil and Filter” in the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.
99011-83RM0-01E
Part No. 99011-83RM0-01E June, 2016 Printed in Hungary
Suzuki Red: Magenta 100%, Yellow 100%

Suzuki Blue: Cyan 100%, Magenta 70%
Takumi Blue: Cyan 100%, Black 85%
Black

This owner’s manual applies to the SX4 series.
83RM018
NOTE: The illustrated model is one of the SX4 series.
Copyright © 2016 All Rights Reserved

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Magyar Suzuki Corporation Ltd.
83RM0-01E

FOREWORD IMPORTANT
This manual should be considered a per- All information in this manual is based WARNING/ CAUTION/NOTICE/
manent part of the vehicle and should on the latest product information avail- NOTE
remain with the vehicle when resold or oth- able at the time of publication. Due to Please read this manual and follow its
erwise transferred to a new owner or oper- improvements or other changes, there instructions carefully. To emphasize spe-
ator. Please read this manual carefully may be discrepancies between informa- cial information, the symbol and the
before operating your new SUZUKI and tion in this manual and your vehicle. words WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE
review the manual from time to time. It MAGYAR SUZUKI CORPORATION and NOTE have special meanings. Pay
contains important information on safety, reserves the right to make production particular attention to messages high-
operation and maintenance. changes at any time, without notice and lighted by these signal words:
without incurring any obligation to
make the same or similar changes to WARNING
vehicles previously built or sold.
Indicates a potential hazard that
This vehicle may not comply with stan- could result in death or serious
dards or regulations of other countries. injury.
Before attempting to register this vehi-
cle in any other country, check all appli-
cable regulations and make any CAUTION
necessary modifications. Indicates a potential hazard that
could result in minor or moderate
injury.
NOTE:
Please see the warning label of which NOTICE
name is “Air bag symbol meaning” in the
Indicates a potential hazard that
“BEFORE DRIVING” section for a frontal
protection air bag. could result in vehicle damage.
NOTE:
Indicates special information to make
maintenance easier or instructions clearer.
83RM0-01E

MODIFICATION WARNING
WARNING
Do not modify this vehicle. Modifica-
tion could adversely affect safety,
handling, performance, or durability
and may violate governmental regula-
tions. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
75F135
NOTICE
The circle with a slash in this manual
Improper installation of mobile com-
means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-
pen”. munication equipment such as cellu-
lar telephones or CB (Citizen’s Band)
radios may cause electronic interfer-
ence with your vehicle’s ignition sys-
tem, resulting in vehicle performance
problems. Consult your SUZUKI
dealer or qualified service technician
for advice on installing such mobile
communication equipment.
83RM0-01E

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family. Your choice was a wise one; SUZUKI products are a great value
that will give you years of driving pleasure.
This Owner’s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe, enjoyable, and trouble-free experience with your SUZUKI. In it you will learn
about the vehicle’s operation, its safety features and maintenance requirements. Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle.
Afterwards, keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference.
Should you resell the vehicle, please leave this Manual with it for the next owner.
In addition to the Owner’s Manual, the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle’s warranties. We recommend you
read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information.
When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI, we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership. Their fac-
tory-trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories.
NOTE:
“SUZUKI dealer” means Authorized Suzuki Service Workshop (in Europe).
83RM0-01E

RECOMMENDATION OF GENUINE SUZUKI PARTS AND ACCESSORIES USE
SUZUKI strongly recommends the use of genuine SUZUKI parts* and accessories. Genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories are built to
the highest standards of quality and performance, and are designed to fit your vehicle’s exact specifications.
A wide variety of non-genuine replacement parts and accessories for SUZUKI vehicles are currently available in the market. Using these
parts and accessories can affect the vehicle performance and shorten its useful life. Therefore, installation of non-genuine SUZUKI parts
and accessories is not covered under warranty.
Non-Genuine SUZUKI Parts and Accessories

Some parts and accessories may be approved by certain authorities in your country.
Some parts and accessories are sold as SUZUKI-authorized replacement parts and accessories. Some genuine SUZUKI parts and
accessories are sold as re-use parts and accessories. These parts and accessories are non-genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories and
use of these parts is not covered under warranty.
Re-use of Genuine SUZUKI Parts and Accessories

The resale or re-use of the following items which could give rise to safety hazards for users is expressly forbidden:
• Air bag components and all other pyrotechnic items, including their components (e.g. cushion, control devices and sensors)
• Seat belt system, including their components (e.g. webbing, buckles, and retractors)
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner components contain explosive chemicals. These components should be removed and disposed
of properly by SUZUKI-authorized service shop or scrap yard to avoid unintended explosion before scrapping.
*The parts remanufactured under SUZUKI’s approval can be used as genuine SUZUKI parts in Europe.
83RM0-01E

SERVICE STATION GUIDE
1. Fuel (see section 1)
2. Engine hood (see section 5)
3. Tire changing tools (see section 8)
4. Engine oil dipstick <Yellow> 5 (D16AA Diesel engine)
(see section 7)
5. Engine coolant (see section 7) 8 (RHD)
6. Windshield washer fluid
(see section 7)
6
7. Battery (see section 7) 2 1
8. Tire pressure (see Tire Information (RHD)
Label on driver’s door lock pillar) 5
9. Spare tire (see section 7) / 3
2 4
Flat Tire Repair Kit (see section 8) 9
(LHD)
7 2 1
8 (LHD) 1
83RM006
LHD: Left Hand Drive

RHD: Right Hand Drive
83RM0-01E

MEMO
83RM0-01E

TABLE OF CONTENTS FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1
BEFORE DRIVING 2
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3
DRIVING TIPS 4
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7
EMERGENCY SERVICE 8
APPEARANCE CARE 9
GENERAL INFORMATION 10
SPECIFICATIONS 11
SUPPLEMENT 12
INDEX 13
83RM0-01E

ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXTERIOR, FRONT EXAMPLE

1. Engine Hood (P.5-2)
2. Windshield Wiper (P.2-106)
3. Sunroof (if equipped) (P.5-9) 1 2 3 4
4. Roof Rails (if equipped) (P.5-19)
5. Frame Hook (P.5-20)
6. Radar Sensor (if equipped) (P.3-97)
7. Parking Sensor (if equipped) (P.3-61)
8. Front Fog Light (if equipped)
(P.2-103, 7-56)/
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)
(if equipped) (P.2-103, 7-57)
9. Headlight (P.2-98, 7-53)
10. Outside Rearview Mirror (P.2-23)
11. Door Locks (P.2-2)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
83RM019
83RM0-01E

EXTERIOR, REAR EXAMPLE

1. Radio Antenna (P.5-38)
2. High-mount Stop Light (P.7-60)
3. Rear Window Wiper (P.2-109) 1 2 3
4. Fuel Filler Cap (P.5-1)
5. Rear Combination Light (P.7-58)
6. Reversing Light (P.7-59)
7. Rearview Camera (if equipped)
(P.3-68)
8. Rear Fog Light (P.2-103, 7-62)
9. License Plate Light (P.7-60)
10. Tailgate (P.2-5)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
61MM0A037
83RM0-01E

INTERIOR, FRONT EXAMPLE

1. Electric Window Controls (P.2-19)/
Electric Mirrors Control
Switch (P.2-23)/ 1 2 3
Outside Rearview Mirrors A
Folding Switch (if equipped) (P.2-24)
2. Front Passenger’s Front
Air Bag (P.2-52)
3. Glove Box (P.5-11)/
Air Bag Deactivation Switch (P.2-61)
4. Front Seats (P.2-24)/ B C
Side Air Bags (P.2-56)
5. Parking Brake Lever (P.3-10)
6. Front Armrest with Console
Box (if equipped) (P.5-14)
7. Driving Mode Switch (if equipped)
(P.3-36)
4 5 6 7
61MM0A038
83RM0-01E

1. Sun Visor (P.5-4)

2.
3.
Front Interior Light (P.5-5, 7-62)
Inside Rearview Mirror (P.2-22)
VIEW A EXAMPLE
4. Overhead Console (if equipped)
(P.5-12) 1 2
5. Sunroof Switch (if equipped) (P.5-9)
6. Hands-free Microphone (if equipped)
(P.5-65)
3 4 5 6
61MM0A039
83RM0-01E

1. Lighting Control Lever (P.2-98)/

Turn Signal Control Lever (P.2-104)
2. Remote Audio Controls (if equipped)
VIEW B 1 2 3 EXAMPLE
(P.5-76)
3. Driver’s Front Air Bag (P.2-52)
4. Engine Hood Release Handle (P.5-2)
5. Headlight Leveling Switch
(if equipped) (P.2-104)/
Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped)
(P.2-103)/
ESP® OFF Switch (P.3-73)/
Parking Sensor Switch (if equipped)
(P.3-61)/
“ENG A-STOP OFF” Switch
“Radar Brake Support OFF” Switch
“FAR/NEAR setting” Switch
(if equipped) (P.3-94)
6. Driver’s Knee Air Bag (P.2-52)
7. Tilt/Telescoping (if equipped) Steering
Lock Lever (P.2-110)
8. Fuel Lid Opener Lever (P.5-1)
4 5 6 7
61MM0A089
83RM0-01E

1. Adaptive Cruise Control Switch

Cruise Control Switches (if equipped)
VIEW C 1 2 3 4 5 6 EXAMPLE
(P.3-57)/
Speed Limiter Switches (if equipped)
(P.3-59)
2. Instrument Cluster (P.2-63)/
Information Display (P.2-66)
3. Windshield Wiper and Washer
Lever (P.2-106)/
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer Switch (P.2-109)
4. Audio (if equipped) (P.5-39)
5. Hazard Warning Switch (P.2-106)
6. Front Passenger Air Bag Deactivation
System indicator (P.2-61)
7. Fuses (P.7-51)
8. Ignition Switch (Vehicle without
Keyless Push Start System) (P.3-3)
9. Engine Switch (Vehicle with Keyless
Push Start System) (P.3-5)
10. Gearshift Lever (P.3-20)
11. Front Seat Heater Switch
(if equipped) (P.2-26)
12. Accessory Socket (P.5-8)
13. Heating and Air Conditioning
System (P.5-23)/
Heated Rear Window and Heated 7 8 9
Outside Rearview Mirrors
(if equipped) Switch (P.2-111)
10 11 12 13
61MM0A092
83RM0-01E

INTERIOR, REAR EXAMPLE

1. Seat Belts (P.2-31)
2. Center Interior Light (P.5-5, 7-62)
3. Assist Grip (P.5-11) 1 2 3 2 4 5
4. Lap-Shoulder Belt with Detachable
Connector (P.2-34)
5. Side Curtain Air Bags (P.2-56)
6. Rear Seats (P.2-27)
7. Rear Armrest with Cup
Holders (if equipped) (P.5-15)
6 7
61MM0A041
83RM0-01E

LUGGAGE EXAMPLE
1 2
COMPARTMENT
1. Shopping Hook (P.5-17) 3 4 5
2. Luggage Compartment
Cover (if equipped) (P.5-18)
3. Accessory Socket (if equipped)
(P.5-8)
4. Luggage Compartment
Light (if equipped) (P.5-5, 7-62)
5. Cargo Net
Hooks (if equipped) (P.5-18)
6. Luggage Compartment Pocket
(P.5-16)
7. Spare Tire (if equipped)
(P.7-46, 8-1)
8. Wheel Brace (P.8-1)
9. Jack (if equipped) (P.8-1)
10. Jack Handle (P.8-1)
11. Towing Hook (P.5-20)
12. Luggage Compartment 12
Board (if equipped) (P.5-18)
13. Flat Tire Repair Kit (if equipped) 6 7 8 9 10 11
(P.8-5)
Models with flat tire repair kit
13
83RM053
83RM0-01E

MEMO
83RM0-01E

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1
Fuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1
65D394
83RM0-01E

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Gasoline/Ethanol blends
Fuel Recommendation Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol NOTICE
(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, are
commercially available in some areas. The fuel tank has an air space to
Blends of this type may be used in your allow for fuel expansion in hot
Gasoline Engine vehicle if they are no more than 10% etha- weather. If you continue to add fuel
nol ( ). Make sure this gasoline-ethanol after the filler nozzle has automati-
blend has octane ratings no lower than cally shut off or an initial blowback
EXAMPLE occurs, the air chamber will become
those recommended for gasoline.
full. Exposure to heat when fully
Gasoline/Methanol blends fuelled in this manner will result in
Blends of unleaded gasoline and methanol leakage due to fuel expansion. To
(wood alcohol) are also commercially prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling
available in some areas. DO NOT USE after the filler nozzle has automati-
fuels containing more than 5% methanol cally shut off, or when using an alter-
under any circumstances. Fuel system native non-automatic system, initial
damage or vehicle performance problems vent blowback occurs.
or resulting from the use of such fuels are not
the responsibility of SUZUKI and may not NOTICE
be covered under the New Vehicle War-
83RM082 ranty. Be careful not to spill fuel containing
Fuels containing 5% or less methanol may alcohol while refueling. If fuel is
You must use unleaded gasoline with an be suitable for use in your vehicle if they spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up
octane number (RON) of 91 or higher (or contain cosolvents and corrosion inhibi- immediately. Fuels containing alco-
RON of 95 or higher if it is stated on the tors. hol can cause paint damage, which is
fuel filler lid). These vehicles are also iden- not covered under the New Vehicle
tified by a label attached near the fuel filler NOTE: Limited Warranty.
pipe that states: “UNLEADED FUEL If you are not satisfied with the driveability
ONLY”, “NUR UNVERBLEITES BENZIN”, or fuel economy of your vehicle when you
“ENDAST BLYFRI BENSIN” or “SOLO are using a gasoline/alcohol blend, you
GASOLINA SIN PLOMO”. should switch back to unleaded gasoline
If the “RON 95” label is attached, you must containing no alcohol.
use unleaded gasoline with an octane
number (RON) of 95 or higher.
1-1
83RM0-01E

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Diesel Engine NOTICE

The diesel fuel should be with Cetane Be careful not to spill fuel containing
Index higher than 50 and sulfur content alcohol while refueling. If fuel is
less than 10 ppm (parts per million) and up spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up
to 7 % of Biodiesel ( ) as FAME (Fatty immediately. Fuels containing alco-
Acid Methyl Ester). You should use the die- hol can cause paint damage, which is
sel fuel conformable to EN590 that corre- not covered under the New Vehicle
sponded to Euro VI emission control. Limited Warranty.
Do not use marine diesel fuel, heating oils
and so on forth. If you use improper diesel
fuel, it may cause serious engine damage.
NOTICE
The fuel tank has an air space to
allow for fuel expansion in hot
weather. If you continue to add fuel
after the filler nozzle has automati-
cally shut off or an initial blowback
occurs, the air chamber will become
full. Exposure to heat when fully
fuelled in this manner will result in
leakage due to fuel expansion. To
prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling
after the filler nozzle has automati-
cally shut off, or when using an alter-
native non-automatic system, initial
vent blowback occurs.
1-2
83RM0-01E

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
MEMO
1-3
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
BEFORE DRIVING
Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1
Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-2 2
Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/
Keyless Entry System Transmitter .................................... 2-6
Theft Deterrent Alarm System (if equipped) ..................... 2-16
Windows .............................................................................. 2-19
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-22
Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-24
Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-27
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-31
Child Restraint System for Countries applied for
UN Regulation No.16 ........................................................... 2-42
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-51
Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-63
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-64
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-64
60G404
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-64
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-65
Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-65
Information Display ............................................................. 2-66
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-85
Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-98
Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) .............................. 2-103
Headlight Leveling Switch (if equipped) ......................... 2-104
Turn Signal Control Lever ................................................ 2-104
Hazard Warning Switch .................................................... 2-106
Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever .............................. 2-106
Tilt/Telescoping (if equipped) Steering Lock Lever ....... 2-110
Horn .................................................................................... 2-111
Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview
Mirrors (if equipped) Switch ............................................. 2-111
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE:
Keys Immobilizer System If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
This system is designed to help prevent tem warning light blinks or comes on, a
vehicle theft by electronically disabling the message may be shown on the information
EXAMPLE engine starting system. display.
The engine can be started only with your
vehicle’s original immobilizer ignition key For vehicles without keyless push start
or keyless push start system remote con- system
troller which has an electronic identification If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch to
code programmed into it. The key or the “LOCK” position, then turn it back to
remote controller communicates the identi- the “ON” position.
fication code to the vehicle when the igni- If the light still blinks after the ignition
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or switch is turned back to the “ON” position,
the engine switch is pressed to change the there may be something wrong with your
ignition mode to “ON”. If you need to make key or with the immobilizer system. Ask
spare keys or remote controllers, see your your SUZUKI dealer to have the system
SUZUKI dealer. The vehicle must be pro- inspected.
54G489 grammed with the correct identification
Your vehicle comes with a pair of identical code for the spare. A key made by an ordi- For vehicles with keyless push start
keys. Keep the spare key in a safe place. nary locksmith will not work. system
One key can open all of the locks on the If this light blinks, change the ignition mode
vehicle. to “LOCK” (OFF), then change back to
“ON”. Also refer to “If the master warning
The key identification number is stamped indicator light blinks and the engine cannot
on a metal tag provided with the keys or on be started” in “Starting the Engine (Vehicle
the keys. Keep the tag (if equipped) in a with Keyless Push Start System)” in the
safe place. If you lose your keys, you will “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
need this number to have new keys made. If the light still blinks after the ignition mode
80JM122
Write the number below for your future ref- is changed back to “ON”, there may be
erence. If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys- something wrong with your key or with the
tem warning light blinks when the ignition immobilizer system. Ask your SUZUKI
KEY NUMBER: switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition dealer to have the system inspected.
mode is “ON”, the engine will not start.
2-1
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
The immobilizer/keyless push start system This immobilizer system, model I61M0 for
warning light may also blinks if the remote keyless entry model and TWK1A001 for Door Locks
controller is not in the vehicle when you keyless engine start model are in compli-
close the door or attempt to start the ance with the essential requirements and
engine. other provisions of the Directive 1999/5/ Side Door Locks
EC.
NOTE:
• If you lose your immobilizer ignition key
or remote controller, see your SUZUKI Ignition Key Reminder (if equipped)
(2)
dealer as soon as possible to have the A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
lost one deactivated, then have the new you to remove the ignition key if it is in the
key or remote controller made by them. ignition switch when the driver’s door is (1)
• If you own other vehicles with immobi- opened. (3)
lizer keys, keep those keys away from
the ignition switch or the engine switch
when using your SUZUKI, or the engine
may not be started because they may
interfere with your SUZUKI’s immobilizer
(4)
system.
• If you attach any metal objects to the
60B008
immobilizer key or remote controller, it
may not start the engine. (1) UNLOCK
(2) LOCK
NOTICE (3) Rear
(4) Front
The immobilizer key and remote con-
troller are sensitive electronic instru- To lock a front door from outside the vehi-
ments. To avoid damaging them: cle:
• Do not expose them to impacts,
moisture or high temperature such • Insert the key and turn the top of the key
as on the dashboard under direct toward the rear of the vehicle, or
sunlight. • Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and
• Keep them away from magnetic hold the door handle as you close the
objects. door.
2-2
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
To unlock a front door from outside the NOTE:

vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of Central Door Locking System You can switch the function that unlocks all
the key toward the front of the vehicle. doors from twice operations to once opera-
tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode
(1) of the information display. For details on
(2)
(1) (2) how to use the information display, refer to
“Information Display” in this section.
To unlock the driver’s door only, insert the
(3)
key in that door lock and turn the top of the
key toward the front of the vehicle once.
EXAMPLE
(4)
EXAMPLE (1)
54G294
61MM0A044 (2)
(1) LOCK
(1) LOCK (2) UNLOCK
(2) UNLOCK (3) Rear
(4) Front
To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn
the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob You can lock and unlock all doors (includ-
rearward to unlock the door. ing the tailgate) simultaneously by using
To lock a rear door from outside the vehi- the key in the driver’s door lock.
61MM0A045
cle, turn the lock knob forward and close To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the
the door. You do not need to pull and hold key in the driver’s door lock and turn the (1) LOCK
the door handle as you close the door. top of the key toward the rear of the vehi- (2) UNLOCK
cle once.
NOTE: You can also lock or unlock all doors by
Be sure to hold the door handle when you To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert depressing the front or rear of the switch,
close a locked front door, or the door will the key in the driver’s door lock and turn respectively.
not remain locked. the top of the key toward the front of the
vehicle twice.
2-3
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE: NOTE:
• You can also lock or unlock all doors by • You can also activate the dead lock sys-
operating the transmitter or remote con- tem by operating the transmitter or
troller. Refer to “Keyless Push Start Sys- remote controller. Refer to “Keyless
tem Remote Controller/Keyless Entry Push Start System Remote Controller/
System Transmitter” in this section. Keyless Entry System Transmitter” in
• If your vehicle is equipped with the key- this section.
less push start system, you can also lock • If your vehicle is equipped with the key- Front
or unlock all doors by pushing the less push start system, you can also
request switch. Refer to “Keyless Push activate the dead lock system by push-
Start System Remote Controller/Key- ing the request switch. Refer to “Keyless
less Entry System Transmitter” in this Push Start System Remote Controller/
section. Keyless Entry System Transmitter” in Rear
this section.
83E105
Dead Lock System (if equipped)
WARNING To activate this system:
This system is designed to help prevent Insert the key in the driver’s door lock and
tamper-unlocking of the door locks. Do not activate the dead lock system turn the top of the key toward the rear of
if there are occupants in the vehicle. the vehicle twice within 3 seconds.
You can activate this system by turning the They will be locked in the vehicle and
key in the driver’s door lock. cannot unlock the doors from inside. You cannot use the lock knobs to unlock
the side doors when this system is acti-
NOTE: vated.
• The dead lock system will not operate if
one or more door(s) is(are) not closed
and latched completely. Make sure all
doors (including the tailgate) are com-
pletely closed and latched when activat-
ing the dead lock system.
• The dead lock system is released auto-
matically allowing all the side doors to be
unlocked when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position or the engine
switch is pressed to change the ignition
mode to “ON”.
2-4
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
2 times
Child-Proof Locks (rear door) Tailgate
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
Front (2)
(1)
Rear
83E107 (1)
To release this system:
To unlock all doors (including the tailgate), 61MM0A046 61MM0A047
insert the key in the driver’s door lock and (1) LOCK (1) Tailgate unlatch switch
turn the top of the key toward the front of (2) UNLOCK
the vehicle twice. You can lock and unlock the tailgate by
Each of the rear doors is equipped with a using the key in the driver’s door lock.
NOTE: child-proof lock which can be used to help
You can switch the function that unlocks all To open the tailgate, push and hold the tail-
prevent unwanted opening of the door
doors from twice operations to once opera- from inside the vehicle. When the lock gate unlatch switch (1) and lift the tailgate.
tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode lever is in the “LOCK” position (1), the rear
of the information display. For details on NOTE:
door can only be opened from outside.
how to use the information display, refer to When the tailgate is closed incompletely,
When the lock lever is in the “UNLOCK”
“Information Display” in this section. follow the procedure below:
position (2), the rear door can be opened
1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and
To unlock only the driver’s door, insert the from inside or outside.
open the tailgate.
key in that door lock and turn the top of the 2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate.
key toward the front of the vehicle once. WARNING 3) Make sure that the tailgate is closed
Be sure to place the child-proof lock completely.
in the “LOCK” position whenever
children are seated in the rear.
2-5
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING Keyless Push Start System

Always make sure that the tailgate is Remote Controller/Keyless
closed and latched securely. Com- Entry System Transmitter
pletely closing the tailgate helps pre-
vent occupants from being thrown
from the vehicle in the event of an
Type A Type B
accident. Completely closing it also
helps keep exhaust gases from enter-
ing the vehicle.
If you cannot unlatch the tailgate by push- (2)

ing the unlatch switch (1) due to a dis-
charged battery or malfunction, follow the 54P000205
procedures below to unlatch the tailgate
from inside the vehicle. 2) Push open the tailgate from inside by
1) Remove the luggage compartment pushing up on the emergency lever (2)
cover (if equipped) and fold the rear using a flat-bladed screwdriver or the
seat forward for easier access. Refer to jack handle. The tailgate will be latched
“Folding Rear Seats” section for details again by closing the tailgate simply.
68LM205
on how to fold the rear seat forward.
If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by push- Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-
ing the unlatch switch (1), have the vehicle less push start system remote controller
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. (Type A) or a keyless entry system trans-
mitter (Type B). The remote controller has
CAUTION a keyless entry system and a keyless push
start system. The transmitter has only a
Make sure there is no one near the keyless entry system. For details, refer to
tailgate when pushing open the tail- the following explanations.
gate from inside the vehicle.
2-6
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
There are two ways to lock or unlock all

WARNING Keyless Push Start System Remote doors (including the tailgate) simultane-
Controller (Type A) ously by operating the remote controller
Radio waves from the keyless push near the vehicle.
start system antenna(s) may interfere The remote controller enables the follow-
with operation of electrical medical ing operations:
• You can lock or unlock the doors by Central door locking system
equipment such as pacemakers. Fail- • To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but-
ure to take the precautions listed operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons
on the remote controller. Refer to the ton (1) once.
below can increase the risk of severe • To unlock only the driver’s door, push the
injury or death due to radio wave explanation in this section.
• You can lock or unlock the doors by “UNLOCK” button (2) once.
interference. • To unlock other doors, push the
• Anyone who uses electrical medi- pushing the request switch. For details,
refer to the explanation in this section. “UNLOCK” button (2) once again.
cal equipment such as a pace-
maker should consult the medical • You can start the engine without using
an ignition key. For details, refer to NOTE:
equipment supplier or their medical You can switch the function that unlocks all
advisor about whether radio waves “Engine Switch” in the “OPERATING
YOUR VEHICLE” section. doors from twice operations to once opera-
from the antenna(s) can interfere tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode
with the medical equipment. of the information display. For details on
• If radio wave interference is a con- how to use the information display, refer to
cern, have the function of the “Information Display” in this section.
antenna(s) disabled by your
(2)
SUZUKI dealer. The turn signal lights will flash once and
the exterior buzzer will sound once when
(1) the doors are locked.
Central door locking system with the

dead lock system (if equipped)
If you want to prevent tamper-unlocking of
the door locks, use this method. When the
dead lock system is activated, operating
68LM206 the lock knobs will not unlock the side
doors.
(1) “LOCK” button
(2) “UNLOCK” button To activate this system:
To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” button
(1) twice within 3 seconds.
2-7
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
To release this system: • If the interior light switch is in the Keyless unlocking/locking using the
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the “DOOR” position, the interior light will request switches
“UNLOCK” button (2) once. turn on for about 15 seconds and then
• To unlock other doors, push the fade out. If you press the engine switch
“UNLOCK” button (2) once again. during this time, the light will start to fade
out immediately.
NOTE: Be sure the doors are locked after you
You can switch the function that unlocks all operate the “LOCK” button (1).
doors from twice operations to once opera- If no door is opened within about 30 sec-
tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) is
of the information display. For details on operated, the doors will automatically lock
how to use the information display, refer to again.
“Information Display” in this section.
NOTE:
(1)
WARNING • The maximum operating distance of the EXAMPLE
remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),
Do not activate the dead lock system 61MM0A049
but this can vary depending on the sur-
if there are occupants in the vehicle. When the remote controller is within the
roundings, especially near other trans-
They will be locked in the vehicle and operating range described in this section,
mitting devices such as radio towers or
cannot unlock the doors from inside. you can lock or unlock the doors (including
CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.
• The door locks cannot be operated with the tailgate) by pushing the request switch
The turn signal lights will flash once and the remote controller if the ignition mode (1) on the driver’s door handle, front pas-
the exterior buzzer will sound once when is other than the “LOCK” (OFF). senger’s door handle or tailgate. If you
the doors are locked, and then the turn sig- • When any door is open, if you push the want to prevent tamper-unlocking of the
nal lights will flash once and the exterior “LOCK” button on the remote controller, door locks, you can activate the dead lock
buzzer will sound once again when the the exterior buzzer will sound and doors system.
doors are locked with the dead lock sys- cannot be locked.
tem. To lock or dead lock all doors when all
• If you lose one of the remote controllers, doors are unlocked:
With the remote controller inside the vehi- ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos- • To lock all doors, push one of the
cle, if you push the “LOCK” button on the sible for a replacement. Be sure to have request switches once.
remote controller, the exterior buzzer will your dealer program the new remote • To lock all doors with the dead lock sys-
sound and doors cannot be locked. controller code in your vehicle’s memory tem, push one of the request switches
so that the old code is erased. twice within about 3 seconds.
When the doors are unlocked:
• The turn signal lights will flash twice and
the exterior buzzer will sound twice.
2-8
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
The turn signal lights will flash once and during this time, the light will start to fade When the remote controller is within
the exterior buzzer will sound once when out immediately. approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a
the doors are locked, and then the turn sig- front door handle or the tailgate switch, you
Be sure the doors are locked after you
nal lights will flash once and the exterior can lock or unlock the doors by pushing
operate the request switch to lock the
buzzer will sound once again when the the request switch.
doors.
doors are locked with the dead lock sys-
tem. NOTE:
NOTE:
• If the remote controller is outside the
• The door locks cannot be operated by
WARNING the request switch under the following
request switch operating range
described above, you will not be able to
Do not activate the dead lock system conditions:
operate the request switch.
if there are occupants in the vehicle. – If any door is open or is not completely
• If the battery of the remote controller
They will be locked in the vehicle and closed.
runs down or there are strong radio
cannot unlock the doors from inside. – If the ignition mode is other than
waves or noise, the request switch oper-
“LOCK” (OFF).
ating range may be reduced or the
To unlock a door or all doors: • If no doors are opened within about 30
remote controller may be inoperative.
• Push one of the request switches once seconds after unlocking the doors by
• If the remote controller is too close to the
to unlock only one door. pushing the request switch, the doors
door glass, the request switches may not
• Push one of the request switches twice will be locked again automatically.
operate.
to unlock all doors. • If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-
EXAMPLE cle, the request switches may not oper-
NOTE: (1) ate normally.
You can switch the function that unlocks all • The remote controller will only operate a
doors from twice operations to once opera- request switch if it is within the switch’s
tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode operating range. For example, if the
of the information display. For details on (1) remote controller is within the operating
how to use the information display, refer to range of the driver’s door request switch
“Information Display” in this section. but not the front passenger’s door
request switch or the tailgate request
When the doors are unlocked: switch, the driver’s door switch can be
• The turn signal lights will flash twice and (1)
operated but the front passenger’s door
the exterior buzzer will sound twice. switch or tailgate switch cannot be oper-
• If the interior light switch is in the ated.
“DOOR” position, the interior light will 80J056
turn on for about 15 seconds and then (1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)
fade out. If you press the engine switch
2-9
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
• Be sure that the driver always carries the

NOTICE remote controller.
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,
The remote controller is a sensitive ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-
electronic instrument. To avoid dam- sible for a replacement. Be sure to have
aging the remote controller: (A)
your dealer program the new remote
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois- controller code in your vehicle’s memory
ture or high temperature such as so that the old code is erased.
by leaving it on the dashboard • You can use up to four remote control-
under direct sunlight. lers and the keys for your vehicle. Ask
• Keep the remote controller away your SUZUKI dealer for details.
from magnetic objects such as a • The battery life of the remote controller
television. is about two years, but it can vary
68LM247
depending on usage conditions.
NOTE: To remove the key from the remote control-
The keyless push start system may not ler, push the button (A) in the direction of
function correctly in certain environments the arrow and pull the key out from the
or under certain operating conditions such remote controller.
as the following:
• When there are strong signals coming Request switch warning buzzer
from a television, power station or a cel- This exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 sec-
lular phone. onds in the following conditions to warn
• When the remote controller is in contact you that the request switch is not working:
with or covered by a metal object. • The request switch is pressed after all
• When a radio wave type remote keyless doors are closed with the ignition mode
entry is used nearby. changed to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing
• When the remote controller is placed the engine switch.
near an electronic device such as per- 57L21016
• The request switch is pressed in any of
sonal computer. To stow the key into the remote controller, the following conditions after changing
Some additional precautions you should push the key in the remote controller until the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by
take and information you should be aware you hear a click. pressing the engine switch.
of are: – The remote controller is left inside the
• Make sure the key is stowed in the vehicle.
remote controller. If the remote controller – Any door (including the tailgate) is
becomes unreliable, you will not be able open.
to lock or unlock the doors.
2-10
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Press the request switch again after doing The indicator light will turn off within sev- Replacement of the battery
the following: eral seconds after the remote controller is If the remote controller becomes unreli-
With the ignition mode changed to “LOCK” returned to an area of the vehicle other able, replace the battery.
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bring than the rear luggage area.
out the remote controller if it is inside the
If the remote controller is left in the vehicle NOTICE
vehicle and check that all doors are com-
and you lock the driver’s door or front pas- When replacing the battery by your-
pletely closed.
senger’s door as described below, the door self, touch a metallic object in
will be automatically unlocked. advance to remove static electricity
Reminder function
• If you open the driver’s door and lock the charged in your body or clothes. Oth-
door by turning the lock knob forward or erwise, the remote controller may be
pushing the power door locking switch, damaged.
the driver’s door will be automatically
unlocked. To replace the battery of the remote con-
• If you open the front passenger’s door troller:
and lock the door by turning the lock
knob forward or pushing the power door
locking switch, the front passenger’s
door will be automatically unlocked.
NOTE:
EXAMPLE • The reminder will not operate when the
remote controller is on the instrument
83RM073 panel, in the glove box, in a storage
If the remote controller is not in the vehicle compartment, in the sun visor or on the
under the following conditions, the buzzer floor etc.
sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds • Be sure that the driver always carries the
and the immobilizer/keyless push start sys- remote controller.
tem warning light on the instrument cluster • Do not leave the remote controller in the
blinks: vehicle when leaving the vehicle. 71LMT0201
When one or more doors are opened and 1) Pull the key out from the remote con-
all of the doors are later closed with the troller.
ignition mode is other than “LOCK”. 2) Insert a flat blade screwdriver covered
with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote
controller and pry it open.
2-11
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Swallowing a lithium battery may
cause serious internal injury. Do not
allow anyone to swallow a lithium (1)
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
(1) from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact a physician immediately.
NOTICE
The remote controller is a sensitive
electronic instrument. To avoid dam-
68LM210 aging it, do not expose it to dust or 80JM133
moisture or tamper with internal parts.
(1) Lithium disc type battery: (1) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol
CR2032 or equivalent
NOTE: The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1)
3) Replace the battery (1) so its + terminal Used batteries must be disposed properly indicates that used battery should be col-
faces the bottom of the case as shown according to applicable rules or regulations lected separately from ordinary household
in the illustration. and must not be disposed with ordinary trash.
4) Close the remote controller firmly. household trash.
5) Make sure the door locks can be oper- By ensuring the used battery is disposed
ated with the remote controller. or recycled correctly, you will help prevent
6) Dispose of the used battery properly potential negative consequences for the
according to applicable rules or regula- environment and human health, which
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter- could otherwise be caused by inappropri-
ies with ordinary household trash. ate trash handling of the battery. The recy-
cling of materials will help to conserve
natural resources. For more detailed infor-
mation about disposing or recycling of the
used battery, consult your SUZUKI dealer.
2-12
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Type A Central door locking system

The keyless push start system, controller Keyless Entry System Transmitter • To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but-
model S57L0, receiver model R57L1 and (Type B) ton (1) once.
key model TS008 are in compliance with • To unlock only the driver’s door, push the
the essential requirements and other provi- “UNLOCK” button (2) once.
sions of Directive 1999/5/EC. • To unlock other doors, push the
“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.
NOTE:
You can switch the function that unlocks all
doors from twice operations to once opera-
tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode
of the information display. For details on
(1) how to use the information display, refer to
(2) “Information Display” in this section.
Central door locking system with the

81A184 dead lock system (if equipped)
If you want to prevent tamper-unlocking of
(1) “LOCK” button
the door locks, use this method. When the
(2) “UNLOCK” button
dead lock system is activated, operating
the lock knobs will not unlock the side
There are two ways to lock or unlock all
doors.
doors (including the tailgate) simultane-
ously by operating the transmitter near the To activate this system:
vehicle. To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” button
(1) twice within 3 seconds.
To release this system:
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the
“UNLOCK” button (2) once.
• To unlock other doors, push the
“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.
2-13
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE: operated, the doors will automatically lock Replacement of the battery
You can switch the function that unlocks all again. If the transmitter becomes unreliable,
doors from twice operations to once opera- replace the battery.
tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode NOTE:
of the information display. For details on • The maximum operating distance of the NOTICE
how to use the information display, refer to keyless entry system transmitter is about
“Information Display” in this section. 5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending When replacing the battery by your-
on the surroundings, especially near self, touch a metallic object in
advance to remove static electricity
WARNING other transmitting devices such as radio
charged in your body or clothes. Oth-
towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.
Do not activate the dead lock system • The door locks cannot be operated with erwise, the transmitter may be dam-
if there are occupants in the vehicle. the transmitter, if the ignition key is aged.
They will be locked in the vehicle and inserted in the ignition switch.
cannot unlock the doors from inside. • When any door is open, the door locks To replace the battery of the transmitter:
can be operated only unlock with the
The turn signal lights will flash once when transmitter, and the turn signal light will
the doors are locked and then the turn sig- not flash.
nal lights will flash once again when the • If you lose one of the transmitters, ask (1)
doors are locked with the dead lock sys- your SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible
tem. for a replacement. Be sure to have your (2)
When the doors are unlocked: dealer program the new transmitter code
• The turn signal lights will flash twice. in your vehicle’s memory so that the old
• If the interior light switch is in the code is erased.
“DOOR” position, the interior light will
turn on for about 15 seconds and then NOTICE
fade out. If you insert the key into the The transmitter is a sensitive elec-
ignition switch during this time, the light tronic instrument. To avoid damaging
will start to fade out immediately. the transmitter: 68LM248
Be sure the doors are locked after you • Do not expose it to impacts, mois-
1) Remove the screw (1), and open the
operate the “LOCK” button (1). ture or high temperature such as
transmitter cover.
by leaving it on the dashboard
2) Remove the transmitter (2).
NOTE: under direct sunlight.
If no door is opened within about 30 sec- • Keep the transmitter away from
onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) is magnetic objects such as a televi-
sion.
2-14
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
(2) Swallowing a lithium battery may
cause serious internal injury. Do not
allow anyone to swallow a lithium (1)
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact a physician immediately.
(3)
NOTICE
The transmitter is a sensitive elec-
tronic instrument. To avoid damaging
68LM249 it, do not expose it to dust or mois- 80JM133
ture or tamper with internal parts.
(3) Lithium disc type battery: (1) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol
CR1616 or equivalent
NOTE: The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1)
3) Put the edge of a flat blade screwdriver Used batteries must be disposed properly indicates that used battery should be col-
in the slot of the transmitter (2) and pry according to applicable rules or regulations lected separately from ordinary household
it open. and must not be disposed with ordinary trash.
4) Replace the battery (3) so its + terminal household trash.
faces the “+” mark of the transmitter. By ensuring the used battery is disposed
5) Close the transmitter and install it into or recycled correctly, you will help prevent
the transmitter holder. potential negative consequences for the
6) Close the transmitter cover, install and environment and human health, which
tighten the screw (1). could otherwise be caused by inappropri-
7) Make sure the door locks can be operate trash handling of the battery. The recy-
ated with the transmitter. cling of materials will help to conserve
8) Dispose of the used battery properly natural resources. For more detailed infor-
according to applicable rules or regula- mation about disposing or recycling of the
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter- used battery, consult your SUZUKI dealer.
ies with ordinary household trash.
2-15
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Type B NOTE:
The Keyless Entry System, Transmitter Theft Deterrent Alarm System • The theft deterrent alarm system gener-
model T61M0 and Receiver model R57L1 (if equipped) ates alarms when any of the predeter-
are in compliance with the essential mined conditions is met. However, the
requirements and other provisions of NOTE: system does not have any function of
Directive 1999/5/EC. For the theft deterrent light of Israel and blocking unauthorized entry into your
Russia models, refer to “For Israel and vehicle.
Russia” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section. • Always use the keyless push start sys-
tem remote controller, the request switch
The theft deterrent alarm system is armed or the keyless entry system transmitter
in about 20 seconds after you lock the to unlock the doors when the theft deter-
doors. (The system, however, is not armed rent alarm system has been armed.
when the engine hood is open.) Using a key instead will trigger the
Keyless push start system – Use the alarm.
remote controller or push the request • If a person who does not know the theft
switch on the driver’s door handle, front deterrent alarm system is going to drive
passenger’s door handle or tailgate. your vehicle, we recommend you explain
Keyless entry system – Use the transmit- the system and its operation to the per-
ter. son, or disable the system beforehand.
Once the system is armed, any attempt to Mistakenly triggering the alarm may
open a door by using any other means (*) cause a nuisance to others.
than the keyless push start system remote • Even if the theft deterrent alarm system
controller, the request switch or the key- is armed, you should still be careful to
less entry system transmitter, or open the guard against theft. Do not leave money
engine hood, will cause the alarm to be or things of value in your vehicle.
triggered.
* These means include the following:
– The key
– The lock knob on a door
– The power door locking switch
2-16
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
How to arm the theft deterrent alarm NOTE: How to stop the alarm
system (when enabled) • To prevent the alarm from being acci- Should the alarm be triggered accidentally,
Lock all doors (including the tailgate) using dentally triggered, avoid arming it while unlock the doors using the keyless push
the keyless push start system remote con- anyone remains inside the vehicle. The start system remote controller, the request
troller, the request switch or the keyless alarm will be triggered if any person switch or the keyless entry system trans-
entry system transmitter. The theft deter- inside unlocks a door by operating the mitter, or press the engine switch to
rent light (1) will start blinking, and the theft lock knob or power door locking switch change the ignition mode to “ON” or turn
deterrent alarm system will be armed in and opens a door, or opens the engine the ignition switch to “ON” position. The
about 20 seconds. hood. alarm will then stop.
While the system is being armed, the indi- • The theft deterrent alarm system is not
cator continues to blink at intervals of armed when all doors are locked using NOTE:
approximately 2 seconds. the key from outside, or using the door • Even after the alarm has stopped, if you
lock knobs or the power door locking lock the doors using the keyless push
switch from inside. start system remote controller, the
• If any door is not operated within approx- request switch or the keyless entry sys-
imately 30 seconds after the doors have tem transmitter, the theft deterrent alarm
been unlocked using the keyless push system will be rearmed with a delay of
start system remote controller, the about 20 seconds.
request switch or the keyless entry sys- • If you disconnect the battery while the
tem transmitter, the doors are automati- theft deterrent alarm system is in the
cally locked again. At the same time, the armed condition or the alarm is actually
theft deterrent alarm system is armed if in operation, the alarm will be triggered
(1) the system is in the enabled state. or re-triggered when the battery is then
reconnected, although, in the latter case,
How to disarm the theft deterrent alarm the alarm remains stopped for the period
system between disconnection and reconnec-
61MM0A134 Simply unlock the doors using the keyless tion of the battery.
push start system remote controller, the • Even after the alarm has stopped at the
request switch or the keyless entry system end of the predetermined operation time,
transmitter. The theft deterrent light will go it will be triggered again if any door or
out, indicating that the theft deterrent alarm engine hood is opened without disarm-
system is disarmed. ing the theft deterrent alarm system.
2-17
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Checking whether the alarm has been How to switch the state of the theft
triggered during parking deterrent alarm system EXAMPLE
If the alarm was triggered due to an unau- You can switch the theft deterrent alarm
thorized entry into the vehicle and you then system from the enabled state to the dis-
press the engine switch to change the igni- abled state, and vice versa, using the fol- (3)
tion mode to “ON” or turn the ignition lowing method. (2)
switch to “ON” position, the theft deterrent
light will blink rapidly for about 8 seconds
and a buzzer will beep 4 times during this (2) (3)
period. If this happens, check whether your
vehicle has been broken into while you
were away from it.
(4)
Enabling and disabling the theft deter-
rent alarm system 61MM0A136
The theft deterrent alarm system can be (2) UNLOCK
either “enabled” or “disabled”. (3) LOCK
(1)
When enabled (factory setting)

When the system is enabled, it causes the EXAMPLE
hazard warning lights to flash for about 40 61MM0A135
(6)
seconds if any of the alarm trigger condi- (5)
tions is met. The system also causes the
interior buzzer to beep intermittently for
about 10 seconds, which is followed by EXAMPLE
61MM0A137
intermittent sounding of the horn for about
30 seconds.
The theft deterrent light continues to blink
during this time.
When disabled
When the system is disabled, it stays dis-
armed even if you perform any system
arming operation.
2-18
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
1) With the ignition mode “ON” or the igni- Every time you perform the series of the
tion switch in the “ON” position, close above steps, the state of the theft deterrent Windows
all the doors and engine hood, and turn alarm system changes from the currently
the lock knob (1) on the driver’s door in selected one to the other. You can check
the unlocking direction (2) (rearward). whether the system is enabled or disabled Electric Window Controls
Turn the knob on the lighting control by the number of interior buzzer beeps at
lever to the OFF position (5). the end of the procedure as follows. The electric windows can only be operated
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
System state Number of beeps position or the ignition mode is “ON”.
NOTE:
All operations included in the following Disabled
steps 2) and 3) must be completed within Once Driver’s side
(Mode A)
15 seconds. EXAMPLE
Enabled
2) Turn the knob on the lighting control 4 times
(Mode D)
lever to the position (6) and then to (1)
the OFF position (5). Repeat this oper- NOTE:
ation 4 times with the control finally • You cannot disable the theft deterrent
(3)
lever set to the OFF position. alarm system while it is in the armed
3) Push the lock end (3) (forward end) of condition.
(2)
the power door lock switch (4) to lock • If you fail to complete the operations in
the doors, and then the unlock end (2) step 2) and 3) within 15 seconds, per-
(4)
(backward end) to unlock the doors. form the procedure again from the
Repeat these operations 3 times and beginning.
finally push the lock end of the switch. • Make sure all doors are closed when
61MM0A051
performing the above procedure.
The driver’s door has a switch (1) to oper-
NOTE: ate the driver’s window, and a switch (2) to
You can also switch the theft deterrent operate the front passenger’s window or
alarm system from the enabled state to the there are switches (3), (4), to operate the
disabled state, and vice versa, via the set- rear left and right passenger windows,
ting mode of the information display. For respectively.
details on how to use the information dis-
play, refer to “Information Display” in this
section.
2-19
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Passenger’s door Lock switch

EXAMPLE CLOSE EXAMPLE
(5)
OPEN
81A009
61MM0A052 61MM0A053
To open a window, push the top part of the
The passenger’s door has a switch (5) to The driver’s door also has a lock switch for
switch and to close the window lift up the
operate the passenger’s window. the passenger’s window(s). When you
top part of the switch.
push in the lock switch, the passenger’s
The driver’s window has “auto-down” and window(s) cannot be raised or lowered by
“auto-up” features for added convenience operating any of the switches (2), (3), (4)
(at toll booths or drive-through restaurants, or (5). To restore normal operation, release
for example). This means the driver can the lock switch by pushing again.
open or close the window without holding
the window switch in the “Down” or “Up”
position. Press down or lift up the driver’s
window switch completely and release it.
To stop the window before it reaches the
full-down or full-up position, pull up or push
down the switch briefly.
2-20
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING Pinching Prevention Function CAUTION

• You should always lock the pas- The driver’s window is equipped with the • The pinching prevention function
senger’s window operation when pinching prevention function. The function does not act while you are holding
there are children in the vehicle. detects a foreign object caught in the win- the window switch in the “Up”
Children can be seriously injured if dow while being closed by the “auto-up” position.
they get part of their body caught feature, which you can close the window • The pinching prevention function
by the window during operation. without holding the window switch in the may not detect an object caught in
• To avoid injuring an occupant by “Up” position, and stops the window clos- the window just before the window
window entrapment, be sure no ing to prevent damage. is fully closed.
part of the occupant’s body such as
hands or head is in the path of the WARNING
NOTE:
electric windows when closing To avoid injuring an occupant by win- Even if you cannot close the window by the
them. dow entrapment, be sure no part of auto-up feature because there may be
• Always remove the ignition key or the occupant’s body such as hands something wrong with the pinching preven-
take the keyless push start system or head is in the path of the electric tion function, you can close the window by
remote controller with you when window when closing it. holding the window switch in the “Up” posi-
leaving the vehicle even if only for The function may not detect the tion.
a short time. Also do not leave chil- object depending on size, hardness, If you drive in extreme off-road condition,
dren alone in a parked vehicle. and position of the object caught by the pinching prevention function may oper-
Unattended children could use the the closing window. ate accidentally because the window react
electric window switches and get to vehicle jolting.
trapped by the window.
The Pinching Prevention Function Ini-
NOTE: tialization
If you drive with one of the rear windows When you disconnect and re-connect the
open, you may hear a loud sound caused battery or replace the fuse, the function will
by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open be deactivated. In this condition, the auto-
the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or down feature will be deactivated, while the
narrow the rear window opening. auto-up feature may remain being acti-
vated. The pinching prevention function
needs to be initialized.
2-21
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
To initialize the pinching prevention func- When driving at night, you can move the
tion, use the following procedure: Mirrors selector tab to the night position to reduce
1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” glare from the headlights of vehicles
position or press the engine switch to behind you.
change the ignition mode to “ON”. Inside Rearview Mirror
2) Open the driver’s window fully by hold- WARNING
ing the window switch in the “Down”
position. • Always adjust the mirror with the
3) Close the driver’s window by holding selector set to the day position.
the switch in the “Up” position, and • Only use the night position if it is
keep holding the switch for 2 seconds necessary to reduce glare from the
after the window fully closed. headlights of vehicles behind you.
4) Check the driver’s window if the auto- Be aware that in this position you
down/up feature work. 68LMT0205 may not be able to see some
objects that could be seen in the
day position.
WARNING
Whenever you disconnect and recon-
nect the battery or replace the fuse,
the pinching prevention function (1)
needs to be initialized.
The pinching prevention function will (2) (3)
not be activated until the initialization 68LMT0206
complete. (2) Day driving
(3) Night driving
If the auto-down/up feature would not work
after initialization, there might be some- You can adjust the inside rearview mirror
thing wrong with the pinching prevention by hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-
function. Have your vehicle inspected by cle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, set
an authorized SUZUKI dealer. the selector tab (1) to the day position,
then move the mirror up, down or sideways
by hand to obtain the best view.
2-22
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
• The auto dimming rearview mirror is

Auto Dimming Rearview Mirror automatically deactivated while the gear- Outside Rearview Mirrors
(if equipped) shift lever is in the “R” position. Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you
can just see the side of your vehicle in the
mirrors.
WARNING
Be careful when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle or other object
(3) seen in the side convex mirror. Be
(3) aware that objects look smaller and
(1) (2) appear farther away than when seen
in a flat mirror.
(1)
57L30019 57L30020 (2)
You can adjust the auto dimming rearview (3)

mirror by hand so you can see to the rear WARNING
of your vehicle in the mirror. This rearview Do not touch or cover the sensor (3)
(4)
mirror has a function of automatically since this may impair normal opera-
(1)
reducing glare from the lights of vehicles tion of the system. Blocking glare
behind you. The function works when the from the sensor with an object such (2) L R (3)
ignition mode has been changed to “ON” as a shade, sticker, accessory or bag-
by pressing the engine switch. gage may also impair proper opera- (4)
• The mirror is always set to the automatic tion of the system.
dimming mode when the engine switch
is in the “ON” mode. 61MM0A054
• When the “AUTO” switch (2) is pushed, NOTICE The switch to control the electric mirrors is
the green indicator (1) is lit, indicating located on the driver’s door panel. You can
that the mirror is set to the automatic Do not hook anything heavy on the
mirror, or the mirror may break under adjust the mirrors when the ignition switch
dimming mode. To cancel the automatic is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, or the igni-
dimming mode, push the “AUTO” switch the weight.
tion mode is “ACC” or “ON”. To adjust the
(2); the indicator (1) then goes out. mirrors:
2-23
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
1) Move the selector switch to the left or

right to select the mirror you wish to Outside Rearview Mirrors Folding Front Seats
adjust. Switch (if equipped)
2) Press the outer part of the switch that
corresponds to the direction in which EXAMPLE Seat Adjustment
you wish to move the mirror.
(1)
3) Return the selector switch to the center
position to help prevent unintended WARNING
adjustment. Never attempt to adjust the driver’s
NOTE: seat or seatback while driving. The
If your vehicle is equipped with the heated seat or seatback could move unex-
outside rearview mirrors, refer to “Heated pectedly, causing loss of control.
Rear Window and Heated Outside Rear- Make sure that the driver’s seat and
view Mirrors (if equipped) Switch” in this seatback are properly adjusted
section. before you start driving.
61MM0A055 WARNING
You can fold the mirrors when you park the To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
vehicle in a narrow space. When the igni- which reduces the effectiveness of
tion switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the seat belts as a safety device,
or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”, make sure that the seats are adjusted
push the folding switch (1) to fold and before the seat belts are fastened.
unfold the mirrors. Make sure the mirrors
are completely unfolded before you start
driving. WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in an
CAUTION upright position when driving, or seat
Moving mirrors can pinch and injure belt effectiveness may be reduced.
a hand. Do not allow any one’s hand Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-
to get near the mirrors when folding mum protection when seatbacks are
and unfolding the mirrors. in the upright position.
2-24
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Seat position adjustment lever (1)

EXAMPLE Pull the lever up and slide the seat.
Seatback angle adjustment lever (2)

Pull the lever up and move the seatback.
Seat height adjustment lever (3)

(if equipped)
Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push the
lever down to lower the seat.
After adjustment, try to move the seat and

seatback forward and rearward to ensure
that it is securely latched.
(2)
(3)
(1)
61MM0A005
2-25
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE:
Head Restraints It may be necessary to recline the seat- Front Seat Heater (if equipped)
back to provide enough overhead clear-
ance to remove the head restraint.
Front
EXAMPLE
(3) (4) (1) (2)
80J001 61MM0A093
Head restraints are designed to help (1) Left seat heater switch
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case (2) Right seat heater switch
of an accident. Adjust the head restraint to 61MM0A032 (3) “LO” side
the position which places the center of the To raise the front head restraint, pull (4) “HI” side
head restraint closest to the top of your upward on the restraint until it clicks. To When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas- lower the restraint, push down on the
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high position or the ignition mode is “ON”, push
restraint while holding in the lock lever. If a one or both of the seat heater switch(es) to
as possible. head restraint must be removed (for clean- warm the corresponding seat(s).
ing, replacement, etc.), push in the lock • When a seat heater switch is pushed,
WARNING lever and pull the head restraint all the way the heater inside the corresponding seat
• Never drive the vehicle with the out. operates.
head restraints removed.
• Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.
2-26
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
• To select the low heat range, push the

“LO” side (3) of the switch. the low side WARNING Rear Seats
indicator light will illuminate when the
heater is on. Improperly using the seat heater can
• To select the high heat range, push the be hazardous. An occupant can suf-
fer burns even if the heating tempera-
Seat Adjustment
“HI” side (4) of the switch. the high side
indicator light will illuminate when the ture is fairly low, if the occupant is
heater is on. wearing thin pants, a thin skirt or WARNING
• To turn off the heater, return the switch to shorts and leaves the heater on for
long periods. To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
the level position. Make sure the indica- which reduces the effectiveness of
tor light goes off. Avoid using the seat heater for these
occupants: the seat belts as a safety device,
• People who have reduced feeling in make sure that the seats are adjusted
their legs, including the elderly or before the seat belts are fastened.
those with certain disabilities.
• Small children, or anyone with sen- WARNING
sitive skin.
• People who are asleep or under the All seatbacks should always be in an
influence of alcohol or other drugs upright position when driving, or seat
which make them tired. belt effectiveness may be reduced.
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-
mum protection when seatbacks are
NOTICE in the upright position.
To avoid damaging the heater ele-
ment:
86G064 • Do not subject the front seats to
heavy impacts, such as children
jumping on them.
• Do not cover the seat with any
insulating materials such as blan-
kets or cushions.
2-27
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Seatback angle adjustment lever (1)

EXAMPLE (if equipped)
Pull the lever up and move the seatback.
After adjustment, try to move the seatback

LOCK forward and rearward to ensure that it is
(1)
securely latched.
CAUTION
After securing the rear seatback,
make sure that it is locked securely. If
it is not, red will appear beside the
lever.
UNLOCK
Red
61MM0A056
2-28
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Rear
Head Restraints Folding Rear Seats
Head restraints are designed to help
EXAMPLE The rear seats of your vehicle can be
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case folded forward to provide additional cargo
of an accident. space.
To fold the rear seats forward:
WARNING
1) Lower the head restraint fully.
• Never drive the vehicle with the 2) Stow the rear center lap-shoulder belt.
head restraints removed. Refer to “Lap-Shoulder Belt with
• Do not attempt to adjust the head Detachable Connector” later in this sec-
restraint while driving. tion.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to fold forward the
EXAMPLE
61MM0A033
seatback to provide enough overhead
clearance to remove the head restraint. To raise the rear head restraint, pull
upward on the restraint until it clicks. To
Adjust the head restraint to the position lower the restraint, push down on the
which places the center of the head restraint while holding in the lock lever. If a
restraint closest to the top of your ears. If head restraint must be removed (for clean-
this is not possible for very tall passengers, ing, replacement, etc.), push in the lock
adjust the head restraint as high as possi- lever and pull the head restraint all the way
ble. out.
When installing a child restraint system,
raise the head restraint to the most upper
position. 61MM0A057
3) Pull the release lever on the top of each

split seat, and fold the seatbacks for-
ward.
2-29
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTICE EXAMPLE NOTICE

After folding the rear seatback for- LOCK • When returning the rear seatback
ward, do not allow any foreign mate- to the normal position, do not allow
rial to enter the lock opening. This any foreign material to enter the
may cause damage to the inside of lock opening. This may prevent the
the lock and prevent the seatback seatback from being locked
from being locked securely. UNLOCK securely.
Red
• When returning the rear seatback
to the normal position, be sure to
WARNING handle it carefully by hand to avoid
If you need to carry cargo in the pas- any damage to the lock itself. Do
senger compartment with the rear not push it by using some material
seat back folded forward, be sure to 61MM0A058
or by applying excessive force.
secure the cargo or it may be thrown • As the lock is designed exclusively
Raise the seatback until it locks into place. for securing the rear seatback, do
about, causing injury. Never pile
cargo higher than the seatbacks. After returning the seat, try to move the not use it for any other purpose.
seatback forward and rearward to ensure Incorrect use of it may cause dam-
To return the seat to the normal position, that it is securely latched. age to the inside of the lock and
follow the procedure below. prevent the seatback from being
CAUTION locked securely.
CAUTION Do not put your hand into the rear
When returning the rear seatback to seatback lock opening, or your finger
the normal position, be careful that may get caught and be injured.
your finger is not caught between the
lock and the striker.
CAUTION
After securing the rear seatback,
NOTICE make sure that it is locked securely. If
When returning the rear seatback to it is not, red will appear beside the
the normal position, make sure that release lever.
there is nothing around the striker.
Any foreign materials prevent the
seatback from being locked securely.
2-30
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Seat Belts and Child Restraint

Systems
Above the pelvis Across the pelvis
65D606 65D201
WARNING WARNING
• Never allow persons to ride in the (Continued)
65D231S
cargo area of a vehicle. In the event • Seat belts should never be worn
of an accident, there is a much with the straps twisted and should
WARNING greater risk of injury for persons be adjusted as tightly as is com-
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times. who are not riding in a seat with fortable to provide the protection
their seat belt securely fastened. for which they have been designed.
• Seat belts should always be A slack belt will provide less pro-
WARNING adjusted as follows: tection than one which is snug.
– the lap portion of the belt should • Make sure that each seat belt
An air bag supplements, or adds to, be worn low across the pelvis, buckle is inserted into the proper
the frontal crash protection offered not across the waist. buckle catch. It is possible to cross
by seat belts. The driver and all pas- – the shoulder straps should be the buckles in the rear seat.
sengers must be properly restrained worn on the outside shoulder (Continued)
by wearing seat belts at all times, only, and never under the arm.
whether or not an air bag is mounted – the shoulder straps should be
at their seating position, to minimize away from your face and neck,
the risk of severe injury or death in but not falling off your shoulder.
the event of a crash. (Continued)
2-31
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING WARNING
(Continued) (Continued)
• Never use the same seat belt on • For children, if the shoulder belt
more than one occupant and never irritates the neck or face, move the
as low as possible attach a seat belt over an infant or child closer to the center of the
across the hips child being held on an occupant’s vehicle.
lap. Such seat belt use could cause • Avoid contamination of seat belt
serious injury in the event of an webbing by polishes, oils, chemi-
accident. cals, and particularly battery acid.
• Periodically inspect seat belt Cleaning may safely be carried out
assemblies for excessive wear and using mild soap and water.
damage. Seat belts should be • Do not insert any items such as
65D199
replaced if webbing becomes coins, clips, etc. into the seat belt
frayed, contaminated, or damaged buckles, and be careful not to spill
in any way. It is essential to replace liquids into these parts. If foreign
WARNING the entire seat belt assembly after it materials get into a seat belt
(Continued) has been worn in a severe impact, buckle, the seat belt may not work
• Pregnant women should use seat even if damage to the assembly is properly.
belts, although specific recommen- not obvious. • All seatbacks should always be in
dations about driving should be • Children age 12 and under should an upright position when driving,
made by the woman’s medical advi- ride properly restrained in the rear or seat belt effectiveness may be
sor. Remember that the lap portion seat. reduced. Seat belts are designed to
of the belt should be worn as low • Infants and small children should offer maximum protection when
as possible across the hips, as never be transported unless they seatbacks are in the upright posi-
shown in the diagram. are properly restrained. Restraint tion.
• Do not wear your seat belt over systems for infants and small chil-
hard or breakable objects in your dren can be purchased locally and
pockets or on your clothing. If an should be used. Make sure that the
accident occurs, objects such as system you purchase meets appli-
glasses, pens, etc. under the seat cable safety standards. Read and
belt can cause injury. follow all the directions provided
(Continued) by the manufacturer.
(Continued)
2-32
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Emergency locking retractor (ELR) Low on hips
The seat belt has an emergency locking
retractor (ELR), which is designed to lock
the seat belt only during a sudden stop or
impact. It also may lock if you pull the belt
across your body very quickly. If this hap-
pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, then
pull the belt across your body more slowly.
Safety reminder
Sit up straight and
fully back 60A040 60A036
To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and
during a collision, position the lap portion well back in the seat, pull the latch plate
Low on hips of the belt across your lap as low on your attached to the seat belt across your body
hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit and press it straight into the buckle until
by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt you hear a “click”.
upward through the latch plate. The length
of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself EXAMPLE
to allow freedom of movement.
60A038
80J2008
2-33
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE:
The word “CENTER” is marked on the Lap-Shoulder Belt with Detachable
buckle for the rear center belt. The buckles Connector
are designed so a latch plate cannot be CENTER
inserted into the wrong buckle. EXAMPLE (2)
(3)
(1)
61MM0A060
Fastening
Before fastening the rear center lap-shoul-
61MM0A059 der belt, make sure the detachable con-
The rear center lap-shoulder belt has a nector (1) is securely latched and the
60A039
buckle, a latch plate and a detachable con- webbing is not twisted.
To unfasten the seat belt, push the red nector. The buckle is marked as “CEN- To fasten the belt, sit up straight and well
“PRESS” button on the buckle and retract TER” for distinction from the rear left seat back in the seat, pull the latch plate (2)
the belt slowly while attaching a hand to belt buckle. The rear center seat belt across your body and press it straight into
the belt or/and the latch plate. buckle and the connector are designed so the buckle (3) until you hear a “click”.
as not to allow a wrong latch plate to be
inserted.
When the rear seatback is in the upright
position, keep the detachable connector
latched. Only when the rear seatback will
be folded down, unlatch the detachable
connector. To latch and unlatch the con-
nector, see “Unlatching and latching
detachable connector” later in this section.
2-34
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Unlatching and latching detachable

connector
EXAMPLE
(1)
(3)
61MM0A094 61MM0A062
Unfastening
61MM0A063
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button WARNING
on the buckle (3) and retract the belt slowly Unlatching
while attaching a hand to the belt or/and To minimize risk of severe injury or To unlatch the connector:
the latch plate. death in the event of a crash, always 1) Insert a key or a latch plate into the slot
wear seat belt with both latches (1) on the connector and allow the belt
buckled. to retract.
2) Once the belt has completely retracted,
stow the belt in the holder. Refer to
“Stowing rear center lap-shoulder belt”
for details later in this section.
NOTICE
When the rear seatback is folded for-
ward, be sure to unlatch the connec-
tor of rear center lap-shoulder belt.
Otherwise, the seat belt webbing can
be damaged.
61MM0A061
2-35
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Latching Stowing rear center lap-shoulder belt

To latch the connector: Be sure to stow the belt after the belt is
1) Pull the belt out from the holder. retracted completely.
(3)
(2)
(2) (1)
(3)
61MM0A064 61MM0A065
2) Insert the connector latch plate (2) into To stow the belt, insert the latch plate into
the connector (3) so as to align the tri- the slit (1). Then insert the connector latch
angle marks until you hear a “click”. plate (2) into the roof holder slot (3).
WARNING
Make sure the detachable connector
is securely latched and the webbing
is not twisted.
2-36
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
(1) Driver’s seat belt reminder light / front

Seat Belt Reminder passenger’s seat belt reminder light
(2) Rear passenger’s seat belt reminder
EXAMPLE light (rear left)*1
(1) light (rear center)*2
light (rear right)*2
*1 This symbol represents that the

seat belt is unfastened.
*2 This symbol represents that the
seat belt is fastened.
When the driver and/or passenger(s)

do(does) not buckle his or her seat belt,
the seat belt reminder light will come on or
blink and a buzzer will sound as a
reminder to the driver and/or passenger(s)
to buckle his or her seat belt. For more
details, refer to the explanation below.
(2)(3)(4)
WARNING
It is absolutely essential that the
driver and passengers wear their seat
belts at all times. Persons who are
not wearing seat belts have a much
greater risk of injury if an accident
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-
83RM056 ling your seat belt before putting the
key in the ignition or pressing the
engine switch.
2-37
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE: Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

The driver’s seat belt reminder light / front The front passenger’s seat belt reminder Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster
passenger’s seat belt reminder light is for will activate only when there is a passen-
both the driver and front passenger. ger sitting in the front seat. In some situa- EXAMPLE
tions, however, such as when you place
Driver’s seat belt reminder heavy objects in the front seat, the seat
If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled belt reminder can be activated as if there
when the ignition switch is turned to the were a passenger present. The front pas-
“ON” position or the engine switch is senger’s seat belt reminder works in the
pressed to change the ignition mode to same manner as the driver’s seat belt
“ON”, the reminder works as follows: reminder.
1) The seat belt reminder light will come
on. Rear passenger’s seat belt reminder
2) After the vehicle’s speed has reached If a rear seat belt is not fastened when the
about 15 km/h, the seat belt reminder engine is started, all the rear passenger’s
light will blink and a buzzer will sound seat belt reminder lights will come on for
for about 95 seconds. about 35 seconds and then go out. Within 64J198
3) After step 2) has finished, the reminder this 35 seconds, the corresponding Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that
light will remain on until the driver’s seat reminder is highlighted. The reminder the shoulder belt rides on the center of the
belt is buckled. fades when the seat belt is fastened. outboard shoulder. To move upward, slide
If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt the anchor up. To move downward, slide
The rear passenger’s seat belt reminder
and later unbuckles the seat belt, the the anchor down while pulling the lock
lights will also come on for about 35 sec-
reminder system will be activated from knob out. After adjustment, make sure that
onds in the following conditions.
step 1) or step 2) according to the vehicle’s the anchor is securely locked.
• If a seat belt is unfastened when the
speed. When the vehicle’s speed is below
vehicle speed is less than 15 km/h, the
about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from
step 1). When the vehicle’s speed is above
corresponding light will be highlighted. WARNING
• If a seat belt is unfastened when the
about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from Be sure that the shoulder belt is posi-
vehicle speed is more than 15 km/h, the
step 2). tioned on the center of the outside
corresponding light will be highlighted
The reminder will be automatically can- shoulder. The belt should be away
and a buzzer will sound.
celed when the driver’s seat belt is buckled from your face and neck, but not fall-
or the ignition switch is turned off, or the The reminder will be automatically can- ing off your shoulder. Misadjustment
engine switch is pressed to change the celed when the rear seat belt is buckled or of the belt could reduce the effective-
ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF). the ignition switch is turned off, or the ness of the safety belt in a crash.
engine switch is pressed to change the
ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF).
2-38
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Seat Belt Inspection WARNING Child Restraint Systems

Be sure to inspect all seat belt
EXAMPLE assemblies after any collision. Any
seat belt assembly which was in use
during a collision (other than a very
minor one) should be replaced, even
if damage to the assembly is not
obvious. Any seat belt assembly
which was not in use during a colli-
sion should be replaced if it does not
function properly, it is damaged in
any way or the seat belt pretension-
ers were activated (that is, if the front
air bags were activated).
65D209S 60G332S
Periodically inspect the seat belts to make Infant restraint - rear seat only
sure they work properly and are not dam-
aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch EXAMPLE
plates, retractors, anchorages, and guide
loops. Replace any seat belts which do not
work properly or are damaged.
80JC007
2-39
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Child restraint sure that the restraint system you select

meets applicable safety standards.
EXAMPLE
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by either seat
belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-
shoulder belts) or by special rigid lower
anchor bars built into the seat. Whenever
possible, SUZUKI recommends that child
restraint systems be installed on the rear
seat. According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in
rear seating positions than in front seating
positions.
80JC016
(For Countries applied for UN Regula- 58MS030
tion No.16)
Booster seat When purchasing a child restraint and WARNING
EXAMPLE install it to your SUZUKI, refer to the infor-
mation about suitability for child restrains When using a child restraint system
shown in “Child Restraint System for on the front passenger’s seat, the
Countries applied for UN Regulation front passenger’s air bag system
No.16” in this section. must be deactivated; otherwise
deployment of the front passenger’s
NOTE: air bag could result in the death or
Observe any statutory regulation about serious injury of the child.
child restraints.
WARNING
If you install a child restraint system
in the rear seat, slide the front seat
80JC008 far enough forward so that the child’s
SUZUKI highly recommends that you use feet do not touch the front seatback.
a child restraint system to restrain infants This will help avoid injury to the child
and small children. Many different types of in the event of an accident.
child restraint systems are available; make
2-40
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Children could be endangered in a
crash if their child restraint systems
are not properly secured in the vehi-
cle. When installing a child restraint
system, be sure to follow the instruc-
tions below. Be sure to secure the
child in the restraint system accord-
ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING
65D608
In an accident or sudden stop, the
rear seat armrest (if equipped) could
fall forward. If there is a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear
center seating position, the falling
armrest could injure the child. Do not
install a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear center seating position.
65D609
2-41
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Child Restraint System for Countries applied for UN Regulation No.16
Child Restraint
The suitability of each passenger’s seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child restraint system is shown in the table below.
Whenever you carry children under 12 years of age or smaller than 150 cm, properly use the child restraints which conform to UN Regu-
lation No.44, the standard for child restraints, referring to the table.
Table of vehicle handbook information on child restraint systems installation suitability for various seating positions
In case the front passenger airbag is activated.
Seating position (or other site)

Mass Group Intermediate Intermediate
Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center
Outboard Center
group 0 up to 10 kg X U U N.A. N.A.
group 0+ up to 13 kg X U U N.A. N.A.
group I 9 to 18 kg X U U N.A. N.A.
group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF N.A. N.A.
group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF N.A. N.A.
2-42
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
In case the front passenger airbag is deactivated.

Seating position (or other site)
Mass Group Intermediate Intermediate
Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center
Outboard Center
group 0 up to 10 kg U U U N.A. N.A.
group 0+ up to 13 kg U U U N.A. N.A.
group I 9 to 18 kg U U U N.A. N.A.
group II 15 to 25 kg UF UF UF N.A. N.A.
group III 22 to 36 kg UF UF UF N.A. N.A.
Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:
U =Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group
UF =Suitable for forward-facing ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group
L =Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list.
These restraints may be of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories.
B =Built-in restraint approved for this mass group
X =Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
NOTE:
‘universal’ is the category in the UN Regulation No.44.
2-43
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Table of vehicle handbook information on ISOFIX child restraint systems installation suitability for various ISOFIX positions
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Size
Mass Group Fixture Front Rear Rear Intermediate Intermediate Others
class
Passenger Outboard Center Outboard Center sites
F ISO/L1 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
carrycot
G ISO/L2 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
group 0 up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 N.A. IL,IUF1) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
E ISO/R1 N.A. IL,IUF1) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
group 0+ up to 13 kg D ISO/R2 N.A. IL,IUF1) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
C ISO/R3 N.A. IL,IUF2) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
D ISO/R2 N.A. IL,IUF1) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
C ISO/R3 N.A. IL,IUF2) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 N.A. IL,IUF1) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
B1 ISO/F2X N.A. IL,IUF3) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
A ISO/F3 N.A. IL,IUF1) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
group II 15 to 25 kg N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
group III 22 to 36 kg N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
2-44
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Key of letters to be inserted in the above table

IUF =Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group
IL =Suitable for particular ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
The ISOFIX CRS must be approved for the specific vehicle type.
X =ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.
NOTE:
1) The head restraint should be in a used position.
SUZUKI recommends FAIR child seat and platform.
SUZUKI Genuine Accessory part number:
990E0-68L01-000 ISOFIX Platform
990E0-68L01-001 Child seat for eastern Europe (PL, H, CZ, SK, SLO, RO, BG, GR, CY)
990E0-68L01-002 Child seat for central and southern Europe (F, B, NL, L, E, P, I, D, AT, IR, GB, M)
990E0-68L01-003 Child seat for northern Europe (S, FIN, DK, EST, LV, LT)
Ask authorized SUZUKI dealer for detailed district information.
SUZUKI recommends Duo Plus child seat.
SUZUKI Genuine Accessory part number: 99000-990YA-020
NOTE:
‘universal’ is the category in the UN Regulation No.44.
2-45
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Whenever possible, SUZUKI recom-

Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat mends that child restraint systems be Installation with ISOFIX type
Belts installed on the rear seat. According to Anchorages
accident statistics, children are safer when
NOTICE properly restrained in rear seating posi-
tions than in front seating positions.
Before installing a child restraint sys- • If you must install the child restraint sys-
tem in the rear seat, raise the head tem on the front passenger’s seat, be
restraint to the most upper position. sure to follow instructions below.
– Deactivate the front passenger’s front
NOTE: air bag by the front passenger air bag
If the most upper position head restraint deactivation system.
interferes a child restraint system and pre- – Slide the seat to the most rear position
vents the child restraint system from being by the seat position adjustment lever.
installed securely, remove the head – Adjust the seatback at the 5th step
restraint. inclined position (counted from most
Stow the removed head restraint in the lug- upright position) by the seatback angle EXAMPLE
gage compartment so it will not inconve- adjustment lever. 61MM0A007
nience the occupants. – If your vehicle is equipped with the
Your vehicle is equipped with the lower
seat height adjustment lever, raise the
ELR type belt anchorages in the rear seat outboard seat-
seat to the most upper position by this
ing positions for securing a ISOFIX type of
lever.
EXAMPLE child restraints with the connecting bars.
Install your child restraint system accord- The lower anchorages are located where
ing to the instructions provided by the child the rear of the seat cushion meets the bot-
restraint system manufacturer. tom of the seatback.
Make sure that the seat belt is securely
latched.
WARNING
Try to move the child restraint system in all Be sure to install the ISOFIX type of
directions to make sure it is securely child restraint(s) in the only outboard
installed. seating positions, not in the central
position for rear seat.
80JC021
2-46
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Install the ISOFIX type child restraint sys-

tem according to the instructions provided NOTICE EXAMPLE
by the child restraint system manufacturer.
After installing, try moving the child Before installing a child restraint sys-
restraint system in all directions especially tem in the rear seat, raise the head
forward to make sure the connecting bars restraint to the most upper position.
are securely latched to the anchorages.
NOTE:
EXAMPLE If the most upper position head restraint
interferes a child restraint system and pre-
vents the child restraint system from being
installed securely, remove the head
restraint.
Stow the removed head restraint in the lug-
gage compartment so it will not inconve- 68LM268
nience the occupants.
3) Use your hands to carefully align the
connecting bar tips with the anchor-
EXAMPLE ages. Take care not to pinch your fin-
gers.
68LM267
EXAMPLE
Your vehicle is equipped with the top strap
anchorages, be sure to use the top strap of
the child restraint according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Here is a general instruction:

1) Raise the head restraint to the most 78F114
upper position.
2) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,
inserting the connecting bars to the
anchorages between the seat cushion 54G184
and the seatback.
2-47
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
4) Push the child restraint toward the by the child restraint system manufac-
anchorages so that the connecting bar Installation of Child Restraint with turer. Be sure to attach the top strap to
tips are partially hooked to the anchor- Top Strap the corresponding anchor located
ages. Use your hands to confirm the directly behind the child restraint. Do
position. EXAMPLE not attach the top strap to the luggage
Front restraint loops (if equipped).
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Do not attach the child restraint top
TOP TETHER strap to the luggage restraint loops (if
equipped). Incorrectly attached top
strap will reduce the intended effec-
tiveness of the child restraint system.
Type 1
61MM0A153
54G185
Some child restraint systems require the
use of a top strap. Top strap anchor brack-
5) Grasp the front of the child restraint and ets are provided in your vehicle at the loca-
push the child restraint forcefully to tions shown in the illustrations. The
latch the connecting bars. Make sure number of the anchor bracket provided in
they are securely latched by trying to your vehicle depends on the vehicle speci-
move the child restraint system in all fication. Install the child restraint system as
directions, especially forward. Type 2
follows:
6) Attach the top strap referring to “Instal- 1) Remove the luggage compartment
lation of Child Restraint with Top Strap” cover (if equipped).
section below. 2) Secure the child restraint on the rear
seat using the procedure described
above for securing a restraint system
that does not require a top strap.
3) Hook the top strap to the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap
according to the instructions provided 86G032
2-48
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
4) When routing the top strap, be sure to To determine if your vehicle is equipped These conditions are not harmful and do
pass the top strap as shown in the illus- with a seat belt pretensioner system at the not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
tration. (Refer to “Head Restraints” sec- front seating positions, check the label on
tion for details on how to raise or lower the front seat belt at the bottom part. If the The driver and all passengers must be
the head restraint.) letters “p” and/or “PRE” appear as illus- properly restrained by wearing seat belts
5) Make sure that cargo does not interfere trated, your vehicle is equipped with the at all times, whether or not a pretensioner
with routing of the top strap. seat belt pretensioner system. You can use is equipped at their seating position, to
the pretensioner seat belts in the same minimize the risk of severe injury or death
manner as ordinary seat belts. in the event of a crash.
Seat Belt Pretensioner System Read this section and the “Supplemental
Restraint System (air bags)” section to Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do
EXAMPLE learn more about the pretensioner system. not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the
and/or belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn
The seat belt pretensioner system works low across the pelvis, not across the waist.
with the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” sec-
SYSTEM (Air Bags). The crash sensors tion and the instructions and precautions
and the electronic controller of the air bag about the seat belts in this “Seat Belts and
system also control the seat belt preten- Child Restraint Systems” section for details
sioners. The pretensioners are triggered on proper seat and seat belt adjustments.
only when there is a frontal or side crash
severe enough to trigger the air bags and Please note that the pretensioners along
the seat belts are fastened. For precau- with the air bags will activate in severe
Label tions and general information including frontal or side collisions. They are not
servicing the pretensioner system, refer to designed to activate in rear impacts, roll-
the “Supplemental Restraint System (air overs, or minor frontal collisions. The pre-
63J269
bags)” section in addition to this “Seat Belt tensioners can be activated only once. If
Pretensioner System” section, and follow the pretensioners are activated (that is, if
WARNING all those precautions. the air bags are activated), have the pre-
This section of the owner’s manual The pretensioner is located in each front tensioner system serviced by an autho-
describes your SUZUKI’s SEAT BELT seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight- rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.
PRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Please ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu-
read and follow ALL these instruc- pant’s body more snugly in the event of a If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument
tions carefully to minimize your risk frontal or side crash. The retractors will cluster does not blink or come on briefly
of severe injury or death. remain locked after the pretensioners are when the ignition switch is turned to the
activated. Upon activation, some noise will “ON” position or the engine switch is
occur and some smoke may be released. pressed to change the ignition mode to
2-49
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
“ON”, stays on for more than 10 seconds,

or comes on while driving, the pretensioner
system or the air bag system may not work
properly. Have both systems inspected by
an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as
possible.
Service on or around the pretensioner sys-

tem components or wiring must be per-
formed only by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer who is specially trained. Improper
service could result in unintended activa-
tion of pretensioners or could render the
pretensioner inoperative. Either of these
two conditions may result in personal
injury.
To prevent damage or unintended activa-

tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-
tery is disconnected and the ignition switch
has been in the “LOCK” position or the
ignition mode has been “LOCK” (OFF) for
at least 90 seconds before performing any
electrical service work on your SUZUKI.
Do not touch pretensioner system compo-

nents or wiring. The wires are wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the
couplers are yellow. When scrapping your
SUZUKI, ask your SUZUKI dealer, body
repair shop, or scrap yard for assistance.
2-50
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Supplemental Restraint EXAMPLE

System (air bags) 2
4
8
WARNING 4 9*
This section of the owner’s manual 3
describes the protection provided by
your SUZUKI’s SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags).
6 9
Please read and follow ALL these 7
instructions carefully to minimize 1
your risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a collision. 9*
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple- 5 9*

mental Restraint System consisting of the 6
following components in addition to a lap- 9
shoulder belt at each seating position. 3
9*
1. Driver’s front air bag module
2. Front passenger’s front air bag mod-
ule
3. Side air bag module
4. Side curtain air bag module
5. Driver’s knee air bag module
6. Seat belt pretensioners 61MM0B110
7. Air bag controller
8. Forward crash sensor
9. Side crash sensor
* if equipped
2-51
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Air bag symbol meaning

WARNING Front Air Bags
EXAMPLE
An air bag supplements, or adds to,
the crash protection offered by seat EXAMPLE
belts. The driver and all passengers
must be properly restrained by wear-
ing seat belts at all times, whether or
not an air bag is mounted at their
seating position, to minimize the risk
of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
“AIR BAG” light
72M00150 57L21189
You may find this label on the sun visor. Front air bags are designed to inflate in
severe frontal collisions when the ignition
WARNING switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition
NEVER use a rearward facing child mode is “ON”.
63J030
restraint on a seat protected by an
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument NOTE:
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
cluster does not blink or come on when the In a frontal angle collision, the side air
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” bags and side curtain air bags may inflate.
can occur.
position, or the ignition mode is first
changed to “ON”, or the “AIR BAG” light Front air bags are not designed to inflate in
stays on, or comes on while driving, the air rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or
bag system (or the seat belt pretensioner minor frontal collisions, since they would
system) may not work properly. Have the offer no protection in those types of acci-
air bag system inspected by an authorized dents. Remember, since an air bag
SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible. deploys only one time during an accident,
seat belts are needed to restrain occu-
pants from further movements during the
accident.
2-52
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute Front passenger’s front air bag located behind the passenger’s side of the
for seat belts. To maximize your protection, dashboard.
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be EXAMPLE The driver’s knee air bag is located in the
aware that no system can prevent all pos- dashboard below the steering wheel. The
sible injuries that may occur in an accident. words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into the
air bag covers to identify the location of the
Driver’s front air bag air bags.
EXAMPLE
61MM0A067
Driver’s knee air bag

EXAMPLE
61MM0A066
58MS030
WARNING
When using child restraint system on
the front passenger’s seat, the front
passenger’s air bag system must be
deactivated; otherwise deployment of
the front passenger’s air bag could
68LM20206
result in the death or serious injury of
the child.
The driver’s front air bag is located behind
the center pad of the steering wheel and Please refer to the “Seat Belts and Child
the front passenger’s front air bag is Restraint Systems” section in this section
for details on securing your child.
2-53
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Conditions of front air bags deployment Conditions of front air bags may inflate
(inflation) Receiving a strong impact to the lower
body of your vehicle, the front air bags will
inflate in many cases.
80J101
• Landing hard or falling

80J097
• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall that Front air bags might inflate in a strong
80J099
does not move or deform in more than impact
about 25 km/h (15 mph) • Hitting a curb or medial strip Front air bags do not inflate basically in
rear collision, side collision or rollovers,
etc., however, these might inflate in a
strong impact.
(1)
(1)
80J098E 80J100E
• In collisions such as above at an angle • Falling into a deep hole or ditch

of about 30 degrees (1) or less from the
80J120
front
• Collision from the rear
2-54
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Front air bags may not inflate

The front air bags may not inflate when the
impact is absorbed since the collision
object moved, vehicle body deformed, or
collision angle was greater than about 30
degrees from the front.
80J119 80J104
• Collision from the side • Collision with a utility pole or stumpage

80J102
• Approximately 50 km/h (30 mph) or

lower speed frontal collision to a stopped (1)
vehicle
80J110 80J105E
• Vehicle rollover • Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail at

an angle of greater than about 30
degrees (1) from the front
80J103
• Collision that the front of your vehicle

goes under the bed of a truck etc.
2-55
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
needed to restrain occupants from further

Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air movements during the accident.
Bags
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute
EXAMPLE for seat belts. To maximize your protection,
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be
aware that no system can prevent all pos-
sible injuries that may occur in an accident.
Side air bags
80J106
EXAMPLE
• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform in less than
about 25 km/h (15 mph)
68KM090
Side air bags and side curtain air bags are

designed to inflate in severe side impact
collisions when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position or the ignition mode is “ON”.
Side air bags and side curtain air bags are 61MM0A068
not designed to inflate in frontal or rear col- Side air bags are located in the part of the
lisions, rollovers or minor side collisions, front seatbacks closest to the doors. The
80J107 since they would offer no protection in “SRS AIRBAG” labels are attached to the
• Collision angle is offset from the vehicle those types of accidents. Only the side air seatbacks to identify the location of the
angle (offset collision) bag and side curtain air bag on the side of side air bags.
the vehicle that is struck will inflate. How-
ever, in a frontal angle collision, the side air
bags and side curtain air bags may inflate.
Remember, since an air bag deploys only
one time during an accident, seat belts are
2-56
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Side curtain air bags Conditions of side air bags and side Side air bags and side curtain air bags
curtain air bags deployment (inflation) may inflate in a strong impact
EXAMPLE
80J102
• Collision from the front

80J119
61MM0A069 • In collisions from the side by a vehicle

Side curtain air bags are located in the roof equivalent to your vehicle in more than
lining. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are about 25 km/h (15 mph) or in greater col-
molded into the pillar to identify the loca- lisions from the side
tion of the side curtain air bags.
80J120
• Collision from the rear
2-57
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Side air bags and side curtain air bags

may not inflate
80J123 80J125
• Collision from the side at an angle • Collision from the side by a motorcycle
80J121
or bicycle
80J124
80J122 80J126
• Collision from the side with a high-height
• Collision from the side to the vehicle vehicle • Collision with a utility pole or stumpage
body other than the passenger compart-
ment
2-58
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully

in order to reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable
consequence of the quick inflation is that
the air bag may irritate bare skin, such as
the facial area against a front air bag. Also,
upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and
some powder and smoke will be released.
These conditions are not harmful and do
not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Be aware,
80J110
however, that some air bag components
may be hot for a while after inflation.
• Vehicle rollover
A seat belt helps keep you in the proper
position for maximum protection when an 65D610
How the System Works air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far
In a frontal collision, the crash sensors will back as possible while still maintaining
detect rapid deceleration, and if the con- control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your
troller judges that the deceleration rep- seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the
resents a severe frontal crash, the steering wheel or dashboard. Front occu-
controller will trigger the inflators. If your pants should not lean on or sleep against
vehicle is equipped with side air bags and the door. Please refer to the “Seat Adjust-
side curtain air bags, crash sensors will ment” section and the “Seat Belts and
detect a side collision, and if the controller Child Restraint Systems” section in this
judges that the side collision is severe section for details on proper seat and seat
enough, it will trigger the side air bag and belt adjustments.
side curtain air bag inflators. The inflators
inflate the appropriate air bags with nitro-
gen or argon gas. The inflated air bags
provide a cushion for your head (front air 54G582
bags and side curtain air bags only) and
upper body. The air bag inflates and
deflates so quickly that you may not even
realize that it has activated. The air bag will
neither hinder your view nor make it harder
to exit the vehicle.
2-59
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
controller could be damaged. If it does,

WARNING WARNING have the air bag system inspected by the
SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.
• The driver should not lean over the (Continued)
steering wheel. The front passen- • Do not paint, put a sticker on, or Special procedures are required for servic-
ger should not rest his or her body attach things like accessories to ing or replacing an air bag. For that rea-
against the dashboard, or other- the dashboard below the steering son, only an authorized SUZUKI dealer
wise get too close to the dash- wheel. Failure to observe this pre- should be allowed to service or replace
board. For vehicles with side air caution may prevent normal infla- your air bags. Please remind anyone who
bags and side curtain air bag, tion of the driver’s knee air bag in services your SUZUKI that it has air bags.
occupants should not lean on or the event of a collision. Service on or around air bag components
sleep against the door. In these sit- or wiring must be performed only by an
uations, the out-of-position occu- Note that even though your vehicle may be authorized SUZUKI dealer. Improper ser-
pant would be too close to an moderately damaged in a collision, the col- vice could result in unintended air bag
inflating air bag, and may suffer lision may not have been severe enough to deployment or could render the air bag
severe injury. trigger the front, side, or side curtain air inoperative. Either of these two conditions
• Do not attach any objects to, or bags to inflate. If your vehicle sustains may result in severe injury.
place any objects over, the steering ANY front-end or side damage, have the
wheel or dashboard. Do not place air bag system inspected by an authorized To prevent damage or unintended inflation
any objects between the air bag SUZUKI dealer to ensure it is in proper of the air bag system, be sure the battery
and the driver or front passenger. working order. is disconnected and the ignition switch has
These objects may interfere with air been in the “LOCK” position or the ignition
bag operation or may be propelled Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic mode has been “LOCK” (OFF) for at least
by the air bag in the event of a module which records information about 90 seconds before performing any electri-
crash. Either of these conditions the air bag system if the air bags deploy in cal service work on your SUZUKI. Do not
may cause severe injury. a crash. The module records information touch air bag system components or wires.
• For vehicles with side air bags, do about overall system status, which sensors The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or
not place seat covers on the front activated the deployment. yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow
seats, because seat covers could for easy identification.
restrict the air bag’s inflation. Also, Servicing the air bag system
If the air bags inflate, have the air bags Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflated
do not place any cup holders on the
and related components replaced by an air bag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,
door, as the cup holder could be
authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos- body repair shop or scrap yard for help
propelled by the air bag in the event
sible. with disposal.
of a crash. Either of these condi-
tions may cause severe injury. If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and
(Continued) the driver’s floor is submerged, the air bag
2-60
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
When the front passenger’s air bag is acti-

Front Passenger Air Bag Deactiva- vated, both the “PASSENGER AIR BAG
tion System ON” indicator (1) and “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” indicator (2) come on for a few
seconds then go out.
After then only the “PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON” indicator (1) comes on for about
1 minute and then goes out.
When the front passenger’s air bag is
deactivated, both the “PASSENGER AIR
(2) BAG ON” indicator (1) and “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” indicator (2) come for a few
seconds then go out.
After then only the “PASSENGER AIR 58MS030
(1) BAG OFF” indicator (2) comes on.
When you activate or deactivate the front WARNING
61MM0A070 passenger’s air bag, make sure which indi-
cator is on before starting the engine. When using child restraint system on
The front passenger’s front air bag must the front passenger’s seat, the front
be deactivated if a child restraint system is passenger’s air bag must be deacti-
to be installed on the front passenger’s Side air bags, side curtain air bags and
seat belt pretensioners are not connected vated; otherwise deployment of the
seat. front passenger’s air bag could result
When the ignition switch is turned to the to the air bag deactivation system. Even if
the front passenger’s air bag is deacti- in the death or serious injury of the
“ON” position or the engine switch is child.
pressed to change the ignition mode to vated, side air bags, side curtain air bags
“ON”, the “PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and seat belt pretensioners are still acti-
indicator (1) or “PASSENGER AIR BAG vated.
WARNING
OFF” indicator (2) shows whether the front
passenger’s air bag is activated or deacti- Make sure the front passenger’s air
vated. bag is activated and the “PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG ON” indicator (1) is on
whenever there is no child restraint
installed on the front passenger’s
seat.
2-61
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
According to accident statistics, children To deactivate the front passenger’s air To activate the front passenger’s air bag,
are safer when properly restrained on rear bag, follow the instructions below before follow the instructions below before start-
seats than front passenger’s seat. When- starting the engine. ing the engine.
ever possible, SUZUKI recommends that 1) Make sure the ignition switch is in the 1) Make sure the ignition switch is in the
child restraint systems be installed on the “LOCK” position or the engine switch is “LOCK” position or the engine switch is
rear seat. in the “LOCK” (OFF) mode. in the “LOCK” (OFF) mode.
2) Insert the key into the air bag deactiva- 2) Insert the key into the air bag deactiva-
Air bag deactivation switch tion switch (3), then push and turn the tion switch (3), then push and turn the
key to the “OFF” (air bag off) position, key to the “ON” (air bag on) position,
and pull out the key. and pull out the key.
3) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” 3) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
(3) position or press the engine switch to position or press the engine switch to
change the ignition mode to “ON”. Both change the ignition mode to “ON”. Both
the indicators come on for a few sec- the indicators come on for a few sec-
onds then go out. onds then go out.
After then only the “PASSENGER AIR After then only the “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” indicator (2) comes on to BAG ON” indicator (1) comes on for
remind you that the front passenger’s about 1 minute and then goes out to
air bag is deactivated. remind you that the front passenger’s
air bag is activated.
EXAMPLE
61MM473
The air bag deactivation switch (3) is

installed only for use when a rearward-fac-
ing child restraint system or infant restraint
system is installed in the front passenger’s
seat. The switch is located at the upper
corner inside the glove box.
2-62
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Instrument Cluster
1. Speedometer
2. Tachometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Temperature gauge
5. Information display
6. Warning and indicator lights
EXAMPLE 2 6 1
6 4 5 3 6
83RM072
2-63
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Refer to “Low Fuel Warning Light” in

Speedometer Fuel Gauge “Warning and Indicator Lights” in this sec-
tion for details.
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler
door is located on the left side of the vehi-
Tachometer cle.
The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute.
NOTICE
Never drive the vehicle with the
engine revving in the red zone or
(1) (2)
severe engine damage can result.
Keep the engine speed below the red EXAMPLE
zone even when downshifting to a 83RM074
lower gear position.
Refer to “Downshifting maximum When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
allowable speeds” in the “OPERAT- position or the ignition mode is “ON”, this
ING YOUR VEHICLE” section. gauge gives an approximate indication of
the amount of fuel in the fuel tank. “F”
stands for full and “E” stands for empty.
If the indicator gets off the graduation of
“E” (not character “E”), refill the tank as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
The indicator moves a little depending on
road conditions (for example, slope or
curve) and driving conditions because of
fuel moving in the tank.
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,

fill the fuel tank immediately.
2-64
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
To reduce the brightness of the instrument

Temperature Gauge Brightness Control panel lights, turn the indicator selector
knob (1) counterclockwise.
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE WARNING

If you attempt to adjust the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights
while driving.
(1) NOTE:
• If you do not turn the knob within several
seconds of activating the brightness
83RM058 83RM042 control, the brightness control display
will be canceled automatically.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” When the ignition switch is turned to the • When you reconnect the battery, the
position or the ignition mode is “ON”, this “ON” position or the engine switch is brightness of the instrument panel lights
gauge indicates the engine coolant tem- pressed to change the ignition mode to will be reinitialized. Readjust the bright-
perature. Under normal driving conditions, “ON”, the instrument cluster lights come ness according to your preference.
the indicator should stay within the normal, on.
acceptable temperature range between NOTE:
“H” and “C”. If the indicator approaches Your vehicle has a system to automatically
dim the brightness of the instrument panel If you select the high brightness level when
“H”, overheating is indicated. Follow the the position lights or headlights are on, the
instructions for engine overheating in the lights when the position lights or headlights
are on. instrument panel lights are not dimmed.
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.
You can change the brightness of the
NOTICE instrument panel lights regardless of
whether the position lights or headlights
Continuing to drive the vehicle when are off or on.
engine overheating is indicated can
result in severe engine damage. To increase the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights, turn the indicator selec-
tor knob (1) clockwise.
2-65
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Display (E)
Information Display EXAMPLE Selector position
(3) (for automatic transaxle or TCSS models) /
The information display is shown when the Gear position
ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the (for automatic transaxle or TCSS models) /
ignition mode is “ON”. (2)
Gearshift indicator
Display (F)
Trip meter
(A) (B) (C) Display (G)

Odometer
(D)
83RM044
(2) Indicator selector knob

(E) (F) (3) Trip meter selector knob
(G)
(1) The information display shows the follow-
ing information.
83RM043
(1) Information display Display (A)

Clock
Display (B)
Driving mode (for 4WD models)
61MM0A159
Display (C)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
Thermometer
“ON” position or the engine switch is
Display (D) pressed to change the ignition mode to
Warning and indicator messages / “ON”, the message shown in the above
Fuel consumption / Driving range / illustration will appear on the display for
Average speed / Oil life (for diesel engine several seconds.
models)
2-66
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Some warning and indicator messages

may appear on the display when the igni- Thermometer Fuel Consumption / Driving Range /
tion switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi- The display (C) shows the thermometer. Average Speed / Oil Life (for diesel
tion, or the ignition mode is “ACC” or engine models)
“LOCK” (OFF). The thermometer indicates the outside
temperature. When there are no warning or indicator
messages on the display (D), you can
Clock select one of the following indications to
appear on the display: instantaneous fuel
The display (A) shows the time. consumption, average fuel consumption,
To set the clock, follow the “Setting mode” driving range, average speed, oil life or no
instructions in this section. indication.
Driving Mode (for 4WD models)

The display (B) shows the driving mode. 61MS409
For details on how to use the four-mode If the outside temperature nears freezing,
4WD system, refer to “Four-mode 4WD the message shown in the above illustra-
System” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI- tion will appear on the display.
CLE” section.
NOTE:
The outside temperature indication is not
the actual outside temperature when driv-
ing at low speed, or when stopped.
2-67
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
To switch the display indication, push the

EXAMPLE indicator selector knob (2) quickly.
(a) (b) (c) NOTE:

The value of fuel consumption, driving
range and average speed shown in the
display are affected by conditions such as
the following;
• road condition
• surrounding traffic condition
• driving condition
• vehicle condition
• a malfunction which causes the malfunc-
tion indicator light to come on or blink
(f) (e) (d)
61MM0A228
(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption

(b) Average fuel consumption
(c) Driving range
(d) Average speed
(e) Oil life (for diesel engine models)
(f) No indication
2-68
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Instantaneous fuel consumption the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” NOTE:
The display shows instantaneous fuel con- position or the engine switch is pressed to If you add only a small amount of fuel
sumption with a bar graph only when the change the ignition mode to “ON”. Unless when you select “Reset after refuel”, the
vehicle is moving. you reset the value of average fuel con- average fuel consumption value may not
sumption, the display indicates the value of be reset.
NOTE: average fuel consumption which includes
• The display does not show the bar graph average fuel consumption during previous Driving range
unless the vehicle is moving. driving. If you selected driving range the last time
• Depending on the vehicle’s specification, you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
the fuel consumption units of initial set- NOTE: “---” for a few seconds and then indicates
ting are indicated as L/100km, km/L or When you reconnect the negative (–) ter- the current driving range when the ignition
MPG. minal to the battery, the value of average switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
• For “L/100km” or “km/L” setting, the indi- fuel consumption will be shown after driv- engine switch is pressed to change the
cated maximum value of instantaneous ing for a period of time. ignition mode to “ON”.
fuel consumption is 30. No more than 30
The driving range shown in the display is
will be indicated on the display even if You can select when the value of average
the approximate distance you can drive
the actual instantaneous fuel consump- fuel consumption is reset from among the
until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on
tion is higher. following three methods;
current driving conditions.
• For “MPG” setting, the indicated maxi- • Reset after refuel: the value of average
mum value of instantaneous fuel con- fuel consumption will be reset automati- When the low fuel warning light comes on,
sumption is 80. No more than 80 will be cally by refueling. the display “---” will appear.
indicated on the display even if the • Reset with trip A: the value of average If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is fuel consumption will be reset automati- the fuel tank immediately regardless of the
higher. cally by resetting trip meter A. value of driving range shown in the display.
• The indication on the display may be • Reset manually: the value of average
delayed if fuel consumption is greatly fuel consumption will be reset by push- As the driving range after refueling is cal-
affected by driving conditions. ing and holding the indicator selector culated based on the most recent driving
• The display shows estimated values. knob (2) when the display indicates the condition, the value is different each time
Indications may not be the same as average fuel consumption. you refuel.
actual values.
To change when the value of average fuel NOTE:
Average fuel consumption consumption is reset, refer to “Setting • If you refuel when the ignition switch is in
If you selected average fuel consumption Mode” later in this section. the “ON” position or the ignition mode is
the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis- “ON”, the driving range may not indicate
play shows the last value of average fuel the correct value.
consumption from previous driving when
2-69
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
• When you reconnect the negative (–) Oil life (for diesel engine models)
terminal to the battery, the value of driv- The display indicates the remaining dis- NOTICE
ing range will be shown after driving for a tance until the next timing of the engine oil
period of time. and oil filter change. When the remaining Change the engine oil and filter
distance becomes 0 km, the oil change immediately when the remaining dis-
Average Speed request light in the instrument cluster also tance of the oil life monitoring indica-
If you selected average speed the last time starts blinking to alert that you should tion becomes close to 0 km. If you
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates change the engine oil and oil filter immedi- keep operating the engine with 0 km
the last value of average speed from ately. indication of oil life monitoring,
previous driving when the ignition switch is If you selected oil life the last time you severe engine damage can result.
turned to the “ON” position or the engine drove the vehicle, the display indicates “---”
switch is pressed to change the ignition for a few seconds and then indicates the
mode to “ON”. Unless you reset the value current distance until the next changing
of average speed, the display indicates the engine oil when the ignition switch is
value of average speed which includes turned to the “ON” position or the engine
average speed during previous driving. switch is pressed to change the ignition
To reset the value of average speed, push mode to “ON”.
and hold the indicator selector knob (2) for
about 2 seconds when the display indicates Whenever the engine oil and oil filter are
an average speed. The display shows “---” changed, the oil life monitoring must be
and then indicates a new average speed reset in order to monitor the next oil and oil
after driving for a short time. filter change timing properly. To reset the
indicator, consult your SUZUKI dealer.
NOTE: When the oil life monitoring is reset, the oil
When you reconnect the negative (–) ter- life monitoring indicates 30000 km. If the
minal to the battery, the value of average oil change request light was blinking, it will
speed will be shown after driving for a go out.
period of time.
2-70
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
– When the gearshift lever is in “D” or

Selector Position / Gear Position / “M”, the display shows the current Trip Meter
Gearshift Indicator gear position. The display (F) shows the trip meter.
The display (E) shows some of the follow- NOTE: The trip meter can be used to measure the
ing indications. For TCSS models, when the gearshift distance traveled on short trips or between
lever position and the selector / gear posi- fuel stops.
EXAMPLE tion indication in the information display You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B
(4) (5) are unmatched, the indication will blink and independently.
the interior buzzer will sound. Refer to
(6) (7) “Twin Clutch System by Suzuki (TCSS)” in To reset the trip meter to zero, push and
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec- hold the trip meter selector knob (3) for
tion for details. about 2 seconds when the display shows
54P020201 the trip meter.
Manual mode indicator (for automatic
(4) Selector position transaxle or TCSS models)
(5) Gear position When you are using the manual mode, the Odometer
(6) Manual mode indicator display shows the manual mode indicator The display (G) shows the odometer.
(7) Drive mode indicator (6).
The odometer records the total distance
Selector position (for automatic tran- NOTE: the vehicle has been driven.
saxle or TCSS models) / For TCSS models, the manual mode indi-
Gear position (for automatic transaxle cator will only appear when the gearshift NOTICE
or TCSS models) lever is in “M”.
The display shows the transaxle selector Keep track of your odometer reading
Drive mode indicator (for TCSS models) and check the maintenance sched-
position (4) or the gear position (5). When the gearshift lever is in “D”, the dis-
• For automatic transaxle models; ule regularly for required services.
play shows the drive mode indicator (7). Increased wear or damage to certain
– When the manual mode is not in use,
the display shows the selector posi- For details on how to use the transaxle, parts can result from failure to per-
tion. refer to “Using the Transaxle” in the form required services at the proper
– When using the manual mode, the dis- “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. mileage intervals.
play shows the current gear position. Gearshift indicator
• For TCSS models; Refer to “Gearshift Indicator” in the
– When the gearshift lever is in “P”, “R” “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
or “N”, the display shows the selector
position.
2-71
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE: Fuel reset (Average fuel consumption

Setting Mode • If you push and hold the indicator selec- reset setting)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” tor knob (2) to enter the setting mode You can change when the value of aver-
position or the ignition mode is “ON” and when the display (D) shows average fuel age fuel consumption is reset.
the vehicle is stationary, you can enter the consumption or average speed, the
setting mode of the information display by value will be reset simultaneously. If you Temperature
pushing and holding the indicator selector do not want to reset the value, push the (Temperature units setting)
knob (2) for more than 3 seconds. indicator selector knob quickly to switch You can change the units that temperature
the indication of the display. is displayed in.
• To select the setting that you want to • If you turn the ignition switch, press the
change, turn the indicator selector knob NOTE:
engine switch or start to move the vehi-
(2) left or right. When you change the units that tempera-
cle when the display is in the setting
• To change the setting, push the indicator ture is displayed in, the automatic heating
mode, the setting mode will be canceled
selector knob (2). and air conditioning system (if equipped)
automatically.
• To exit the setting mode, select “Back” temperature display units will be changed
and push the indicator selector knob (2). automatically.
Distance unit
(Odo/trip meter distance units setting)
EXAMPLE Set Sensors
You can change the units odo/trip meter
(Parking sensors (if equipped) setting)
distance is displayed in.
The parking sensor can be switched
NOTE: between the normal mode and trailer
When you change the units odo/trip meter mode.
distance is displayed in, the trip meter will
be reset automatically. Clock setting
• To change the hour indication, turn the
Fuel economy indicator selector knob (2) left or right
(Fuel consumption units setting) repeatedly when the hour indication
You can change the units that fuel con- appears as reversed color. To change
sumption is displayed in. the hour indication quickly, turn and hold
the indicator selector knob (2). To set the
61MM0A161 Language hour indication, push the indicator selec-
NOTE: You can change the language of the infor- tor knob (2) and the minute indication
The currently selected setting item is indi- mation display. appears as reversed color.
cated enclosed by a frame.
2-72
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
• To change the minute indication, turn the return the turn signal control lever immedi- IS A/C (ENG A-STOP system setting)
indicator selector knob (2) left or right ately after moving it. (if equipped)
repeatedly when the minute indication • When using the automatic heating and
appears as reversed color. To change Antitheft (Theft deterrent alarm system air conditioning system (if equipped),
the minute indication quickly, turn and (if equipped) setting) you can select one of the following
hold the indicator selector knob (2). To You can switch the theft deterrent alarm engine auto stop settings.
set the minute indication, push the indi- system from the enabled state to the dis- – Standard
cator selector knob (2). abled state, and vice versa. – Economy
The state of the theft deterrent alarm sys- – Comfort
You can also switch the time indication tem is shown on the information display as
between 12-hour and 24-hour format. follows:
• When “Economy” is selected, engine
auto stop condition is eased, compared
• Mode A: Disabled state
Door Lock (Door lock setting) • Mode D: Enabled state
with “Standard”. Engine auto stop condi-
You can choose either once or twice oper- tion will occur more frequently, the stop
ation(s) to unlock all doors (including the Oil change (Oil life monitoring system
time will be longer, leading to reduction
tailgate) or release the dead lock system (if reset setting) (if equipped)
of fuel consumption.
equipped) by turning the key, or operating The oil life monitoring system must be
• When “Comfort” is selected, engine auto
the keyless entry system transmitter, key- reset after changing the engine oil and oil
stop condition becomes severe, com-
less push start system remote controller or filter.
pared with “Standard”. Engine auto stop
request switch. condition will occur less frequently, the
stop time will be shorter, leading to more
If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless TPMS (Tire pressure monitoring system
comfortable cabin condition by air condi-
push start system, you can also turn off or setting)
tioner.
on the buzzer sound when the door(s) • You can check the current tire inflation
is(are) locked or unlocked. pressure on the information display.
Default (initialization setting)
• You can set one of the initial value of tire
If you select “YES” and push the indicator
Lights (Light setting) pressure below that is indicated on the
selector knob (2), all settings will be reini-
Foot light (Footwell lights setting) tire information label.
tialized.
The footwell lights can be programmed for – Comfort Mode
interlocked operation with either lighting – Eco Mode
control or door operation and for no light- – Load Mode
ing. Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-
Lane change (Turn signal lights setting) CLE” section for details.
The turn signal and its indicator can be set
whether they flash three times even if you
2-73
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
• When you push and hold the indicator

Warning and Indicator Messages selector knob (2) for about 2 seconds
The display shows warning and indicator while a message is displayed, the mes-
messages to let you know about certain sage will disappear temporarily. If the
vehicle problems. problem that caused the message is not
A tone may also sound to alert you. corrected, the message will appear
again after 5 seconds.
If warning and indicator messages appear
on the display, follow the messages.
Master warning indicator light
78K049
When the display shows warning and indi-

cator messages, the master warning indi-
cator light may also blink.
NOTE:
• When the problem that causes a mes-
sage to appear is corrected, the mes-
sage will disappear.
• If a message is displayed, and other
problems requiring a message occur, the
message for each of the problems will
be alternately displayed about every 5
seconds.
2-74
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator messages

All models
Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
Message Indicator Light
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- A door or tailgate is not properly closed.
(only while vehicle rior buzzer; only while vehi- Stop in a safe place and close the door or
is in motion) cle is in motion) tailgate properly. (#1)
61MM0A162
Blinks Continuous beep (from inte- The headlights and/or the position lights are
rior buzzer) left on. Turn them off.
61MM0A172
Off “Beep” (one time from inte- Fuel is low. Refill immediately. (#1)
rior buzzer)
61MM0A174
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.
2-75
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING

Off Off The road may be icy. Drive very carefully.
(#1)
61MS409
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- If this message is displayed, have your
rior buzzer) vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.
61MM0A180
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- You should change the engine oil and oil fil-
rior buzzer) ter immediately.
The oil life monitoring system must be reset
after changing the engine oil and oil filter.
Refer to “Oil Change Request Light” in this
section.
61MM0A224
2-76
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Diesel engine models

Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be a problem with the fuel filter.
rior buzzer) Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer.
61MM0A225
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There is a possibility to have water in the
rior buzzer) fuel filter.
Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
61MM0A226
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be a problem with the diesel
rior buzzer) particulate filter.
61MM0A223
2-77
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING

Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- You should regenerate the DPF®.
rior buzzer) Refer to “Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®)” in
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-
tion.
61MM0A222
2-78
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Models with keyless push start system

Off Off The brake pedal (for automatic transaxle or
TCSS models) or the clutch pedal (for man-
ual transaxle models) is depressed. Press
the engine switch to start the engine.
61MM0A164
Off Off This message is displayed when the “ACC”

position is selected as the power supply
position. (#1)
61MM0A163
Off Off This message is displayed when the “ON”

position is selected as the power supply
position. (#1)
61MM0A173
2-79
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING

Blinks Series of beeps under cer- The remote controller may be outside the
tain conditions (for about 2 vehicle or its battery may have become dis-
seconds from exterior and/or charged. Locate the remote controller or
interior buzzers) touch the engine switch with the remote
controller.
If the message still appears, replace the
remote controller battery.
61MM0A170
61MM0A171
Off Off The remote controller battery is about to

become flat. Replace the battery. (#1)
61MM0A177
2-80
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING

Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There is a problem with the keyless push
rior buzzer) start system.
61MM0A169
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- The steering lock is not disengaged. While
rior buzzer) lightly turning the steering wheel in both
directions, press the engine switch again.
61MM0A175
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There is a problem with the steering lock
rior buzzer) system.
61MM0A168
2-81
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING

Manual Transaxle Off Off The engine switch is pressed without
depressing the brake and clutch pedals. Try
again as instructed by the message.
61MM0A166
Automatic Transaxle or TCSS Off Off The engine switch is pressed with the gear-
shift lever in a position other than “P”. Try
again as instructed by the message.
61MM0A167
Automatic Transaxle or TCSS Off Off The engine switch is pressed with the gear-
shift lever in a position other than “P” or “N”
and/or without depressing the brake pedal.
Try again as instructed by the message.
61MM0A165
2-82
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Models with automatic transaxle

Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- The automatic transaxle fluid temperature
rior buzzer) becomes too high.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the
fluid cool down.
61MM0A221
2-83
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Models with ESP®

Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be a problem with the ESP®
rior buzzer) system.
61MM0A178
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be a problem with the hill hold
rior buzzer) control system.
61MM0A179
NOTE:
• When you operate the four-mode 4WD system (if equipped), the information display may show messages other than those in the
above chart. Refer to “Four-mode 4WD System” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a parking sensor system, the information display also indicates warning and indicator messages
related to the system. For information on these messages, refer to “Parking Sensors” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
• If your vehicle is equipped with the radar brake support system, the information display also indicates warning and indicator messages
related to the system. For information on these messages, refer to “Radar Brake Support System” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-
CLE” section.
• If your vehicle is equipped with the adaptive cruise control system, the information display also indicates warning and indicator mes-
sages related to the system. For information on these messages, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control System” in the “OPERATING
YOUR VEHICLE” section.
2-84
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
on the vehicle’s tire information placard.

Warning and Indicator Lights Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire WARNING
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
NOTE: tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces Failure to take corrective action when
If warning and indicator lights blink or fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may the low tire pressure warning light is
come on, the corresponding messages affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping not working or when it comes on and
may be shown on the information display. ability. Each tire, including the spare, blinks while driving can lead to an
should be checked at least once a month accident.
when cold and set to the recommended If the low tire pressure warning light
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light does not come on for 2 seconds after
(if equipped) inflation pressure as specified in the vehi-
cle placard. the ignition switch is turned to the
The low tire pressure warning light is also pressed to change the ignition mode
used to inform you of a TPMS malfunction. to “ON”, or comes on and blinks
When the system detects a malfunction, while driving, have your vehicle
this light will blink for about 75 seconds inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
and then remain continuously illuminated. dealer. Even if the light turns off after
This sequence will be repeated after the blinking, indicating that the monitor-
52D305
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- ing system has recovered, you
tion or the engine switch is pressed to should still have the system checked
As an added fuel efficiency feature, your change the ignition mode to “ON” as long by your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres- as the malfunction exists.
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that uses
a low tire pressure warning light to inform NOTE:
you when one or more of your tires is sig- The low tire pressure warning light may not
nificantly under-inflated. come on immediately if you have a sudden
When the ignition switch is turned to the loss of air pressure.
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can
check that the light is working.
When the low tire pressure warning light is
lit, one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure as indicated
2-85
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING WARNING WARNING

The load-carrying capacity of your Continuing to drive with the low tire (Continued)
tires is reduced at lower inflation pressure warning light on can lead to • If your vehicle is equipped with a
pressures. If your tires are even mod- an accident, resulting in severe injury flat tire repair kit instead of a spare
erately under-inflated, the load on the or death. tire, refer to “Flat Tire Repair Kit” in
tires may exceed the load-carrying If the low tire pressure warning light the “EMERGENCY SERVICE” sec-
capacity of the tires, which could lead comes on and stays on, reduce your tion for instructions on how to per-
to tire failure. The low tire pressure speed and avoid abrupt steering and form an emergency repair of a flat
warning light will not alert you to this braking. Be aware that driving on a tire.
condition, because it only comes on significantly under-inflated tire can • If one or more of your tires is
when one or more of your tires cause the tire to overheat and can under-inflated, adjust the inflation
becomes significantly under-inflated. lead to tire failure, and may affect pressure in all of your tires to the
Check and adjust your tire inflation steering control and brake effective- recommended inflation pressure as
pressure at least once a month. Refer ness. Stop in a safe place as soon as soon as possible.
to “Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND possible and check your tires.
MAINTENANCE” section. • If you have a flat tire, replace it with Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”
the spare tire (if equipped). Refer to in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”
“Jacking Instructions” in the section for additional details on the tire
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section pressure monitoring system. Refer to
for the tire replacement method. “Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND MAIN-
Also refer to “Replacing Tires and/ TENANCE” section for information on
or Wheels” for instructions on how maintaining proper tire pressure.
to restore normal operation of the
TPMS after you have had a flat tire.
(Continued)
2-86
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
If the brake system warning light comes on

Brake System Warning Light while you are driving the vehicle, it may WARNING
mean that there is something wrong with
the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens, If any of the following conditions
you should: occur, you should immediately ask
your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully. brake system.
• If the brake system warning light
WARNING does not go out after the engine
has been started and the parking
65D477 Remember that stopping distance brake has been fully released.
may be longer, you may have to push • If the brake system warning light
Three different types of operations exist harder on the pedal, and the pedal
depending on the vehicle’s specification. does not come on when the igni-
may go down farther than normal. tion switch is turned to the “ON”
1) The light comes on briefly when the position or the engine switch is
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” 2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and pressed to change the ignition
position or the engine switch is pressed stopping on the shoulder of the road. mode to “ON”.
to change the ignition mode to “ON”. 3) If you determine that it is safe, drive • If the brake system warning light
2) The light comes on when the parking cautiously at low speed to the nearest comes on at any time during vehi-
brake is engaged with the ignition dealer for repairs, cle operation.
switch in the “ON” position or the igni- or
tion mode “ON”. 4) Have the vehicle towed to the nearest
NOTE:
3) The light comes on when under either dealer for repairs.
Because the brake system is self-adjust-
or both of above two conditions.
ing, the fluid level will drop as the brake
The light also comes on when the fluid in pads become worn. Replenishing the
the brake fluid reservoir falls below the brake fluid reservoir is considered normal
specified level. periodic maintenance.
The light should go out after starting the NOTE:
engine and fully releasing the parking (Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer)
brake, if the fluid level in the brake fluid A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
reservoir is adequate. you to release the parking brake if you
The light also comes on together with the start the vehicle without releasing the park-
ABS warning light when the rear brake ing brake. Make sure that the parking
force control function (proportioning valve brake is fully released and the brake sys-
function) of the ABS system fails. tem warning light turns off.
2-87
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
there may be something wrong with both check that the light is working. If the light
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) the rear brake force control function and stays on, or comes on when driving and
Warning Light anti-lock function of the ABS system. remains on, there may be something
wrong with the ESP® systems (other than
If one of these happens, have the system
ABS). You should have the system
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brake
dealer.
system will function as an ordinary brake
system that does not have this ABS sys-
For details of the ESP® systems, refer to
tem.
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in
65D529
For details of ABS system, refer to “Anti- the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-
Lock Brake System (ABS)” in the “OPER- tion.
When the ignition switch is turned to the ATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
“ON” position or the engine switch is WARNING
“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can ESP® Warning Light The ESP® systems cannot prevent
check that the light is working. accidents. Always drive carefully.
If the light stays on, or comes on when
driving, there may be something wrong
with the ABS.
If this happens:
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” or
change the ignition mode to “LOCK” 52KM133
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler
and then start the engine again.
AG.
If the warning light comes on briefly then
turns off, the system is normal. If the warn- This light blinks 5 times per second when
ing light still stays on, the system will be one of the ESP® systems other than ABS
something wrong. is activated. If this light blinks, drive care-
fully.
If the light and the brake system warning
light stay on, or come on simultaneously When the ignition switch is turned to the
when driving, your ABS system is “ON” position or the engine switch is
equipped with the rear brake force control pressed to change the ignition mode to
function (proportioning valve function) and “ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can
2-88
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
ESP® OFF Indicator Light Oil Pressure Light Charging Light
57L30045 50G051 50G052
When the ignition switch is turned to the This light comes on when the ignition This light comes on when the ignition
“ON” position or the engine switch is switch is turned to the “ON” position or the switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
pressed to change the ignition mode to engine switch is pressed to change the engine switch is pressed to change the
“ON”, this light comes on briefly so you can ignition mode to “ON”, and goes out when ignition mode to “ON”, and goes out when
check that the light is working. the engine is started. The light will come the engine is started. The light will come
on and remain on if there is insufficient oil on and remain on if there is something
When the ESP® OFF switch is pushed to pressure. If the light comes on when driv- wrong with the battery charging system. If
turn off the ESP® systems (other than ing, pull off the road as soon as you can the light comes on when the engine is run-
ABS), the ESP® OFF indicator light comes and stop the engine. ning, the charging system should be
on and stays on. Check the oil level and add oil if necessary. inspected immediately by your SUZUKI
For details of the ESP® systems, refer to If there is enough oil, the lubrication sys- dealer.
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in tem should be inspected by your SUZUKI
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec- dealer before you drive the vehicle again.
tion.
NOTICE
• If you operate the engine with this
light on, severe engine damage can
result.
• Do not rely on the oil pressure light
to indicate the need to add oil. Be
sure to periodically check the
engine oil level.
2-89
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Seat Belt Reminder Light “AIR BAG” Light Malfunction Indicator Light
60G049 63J030 65D530
When the driver and/or front passenger This light blinks or comes on for several Your vehicle has a computer-controlled
do(does) not buckle his or her seat belt, seconds when the ignition switch is turned emission control system. A malfunction
the seat belt reminder light will come on or to the “ON” position or the engine switch is indicator light is provided on the instrument
blink. pressed to change the ignition mode to panel to indicate when it is necessary to
For details about the seat belt reminder, “ON” so you can check if the light is work- have the emission control system serviced.
refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint ing. The malfunction indicator light comes on
Systems” in this section. when the ignition switch is turned to the
The light will come on and stay on if there “ON” position or the engine switch is
is a problem in the air bag system or the pressed to change the ignition mode to
seat belt pretensioner system. “ON” to let you know the light is working
and goes out when the engine is started.
WARNING
If the malfunction indicator light comes on
If the “AIR BAG” light does not blink or blinks when the engine is running, there
or come on briefly when the ignition is a damage in the emission control sys-
switch is turned to the “ON” position tem.
or the engine switch is pressed to Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKI dealer to
change the ignition mode to “ON”, have the damage fixed.
stays on for more than 10 seconds,
or comes on while driving, the air bag (For EU specification vehicle)
system or the seat belt pretensioner Also, if this light comes on when the
system may not work properly. Have engine is running, there is the problem with
both systems inspected by an autho- the automatic transaxle system. Ask your
rized SUZUKI dealer. SUZUKI dealer to have the system
inspected.
2-90
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
(For TCSS models)

NOTICE • If the light comes on, it may become fol- Immobilizer/Keyless Push Start
lowings: System Warning Light
Continuing to drive the vehicle when – The transaxle gear will not be changed
the malfunction indicator light is on even if you shift the gearshift lever.
or blinking can cause permanent – The transaxle gear will change to “N”
damage to the vehicle’s emission automatically when the vehicle stops,
control system, and can affect fuel also the selector position indication in
economy and driveability. the information display will show “N”.
– The engine will stall automatically
Transaxle Warning Light when the vehicle stops. 80JM122
(if equipped) – You cannot start the engine.
• If you perform any of the following oper- “ON” position or the engine switch is
ations, the light will blink and the interior pressed to change the ignition mode to
buzzer will sound. It means that the “ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can
clutch is under heavy load and becomes check that the light is working. If this light
hot. In this case, stop the vehicle in a stays on, there is a problem with the sys-
safe place and press the engine switch tem.
to change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
(OFF), then change back to “ON”. Start
80J219
the vehicle after making sure the light Open Door Warning Light
This light comes on for several seconds goes off and the buzzer does not sound.
when the ignition switch is turned to the – On an uphill, you alternate between
“ON” position or the engine switch is stop and start.
pressed to change the ignition mode to – On an uphill, you hold the vehicle at a
“ON” so you can check the light is working. stop using only the creeping function.
If this light comes on when the engine is – You keep depressing the accelerator
running, there is a problem with the tran- pedal with depressing the brake pedal.
saxle system. Ask your SUZUKI dealer to – You keep depressing the accelerator
54G391
have the system inspected. pedal without releasing the parking
brake. This light remains on until all doors (includ-
ing the tailgate) are completely closed.
If any door (including the tailgate) is open
when the vehicle is moving, a ding sounds
to remind you to close all doors completely.
2-91
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
However, repeating these operations could

Low Fuel Warning Light Electric Power Steering Light cause the power steering system dam-
aged.
NOTE:
If the power steering system does not work
properly, you will feel heavier to steer but
you still will be able to steer.
54G343 79J039
NOTE:
If the steering is operated, you may hear a
If this light comes on, fill the fuel tank This light comes on when the ignition noise. This is normal and indicates that the
immediately. switch is turned to the “ON” position or the power steering system works properly.
engine switch is pressed to change the
When this light comes on, a ding sounds ignition mode to “ON”, and goes out when
once to remind you to fill the fuel. Automatic Headlight Leveling
the engine is started.
If you do not fill the fuel, a ding sounds System Warning Light (if equipped)
every time when the ignition switch is If this light comes on while driving, the
turned to the “ON” position or the engine power steering system may not work prop-
switch is pressed to change the ignition erly. Have the system inspected by your
mode to “ON”. SUZUKI dealer.
NOTE: NOTE:
The activation point of this light varies Following operations of the steering wheel
depending on road conditions (for exam- while parking or driving at a very low-
ple, slope or curve) and driving conditions speed may have steering effort bigger 64J046
because of fuel moving in the tank. gradually. This is not a malfunction of the
steering system, but the power steering When the ignition switch is turned to the
control system limits the power assist in “ON” position or the engine switch is
order to prevent them from overheating. pressed to change the ignition mode to
• The steering wheel is operated very “ON”, this light comes on briefly to let you
often. know the light is working.
• The steering wheel is kept in a fully If this light comes on, there is a problem
turned position for a long while. with the automatic headlight leveling sys-
When the power steering control system tem. Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKI
cool down, the power steering system dealer to have the problem corrected.
back to the original condition.
2-92
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Rear Fog Light Indicator Light Turn Signal Indicators Main Beam (high beam) Indicator
Light
54G491 50G055
50G056
The rear fog light indicator light comes on When you turn on the left or right turn sig-
when the rear fog light operates. nals, the corresponding green arrow on the This indicator comes on when headlight
instrument panel will flash along with the main beams (high beams) are turned on.
respective turn signal lights. When you
LED Headlight Warning Light turn on the hazard warning switch, both
(if equipped) arrows will flash along with all of the turn Illumination Indicator Light
signal lights.
54P000234 64J045
When the ignition switch is turned to the This indicator light comes on while the
“ON” position or the engine switch is position lights, tail light and/or the head-
pressed to change the ignition mode to lights are on.
“ON”, this light comes on briefly so you can
If this light comes on, there is a problem
with the LED headlight. Park the vehicle in
a safe place and consult your SUZUKI
dealer to have the problem corrected.
2-93
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
you it is necessary to change the engine oil

4WD Warning Light (if equipped) Oil Change Request Light and oil filter. When the engine oil and oil fil-
(if equipped) ter are changed, and the oil life monitoring
system is reset, this light will go out.
Whenever the engine oil is changed, the
light must be reset to monitor the next oil
change timing properly. The light will go
out after the reset. For the resetting proce-
dure, refer to “Information Display” in this
57L30042
section.
79JM007
When you press the engine switch to NOTICE
change the ignition mode to “ON”, the light Your vehicle has the oil life monitoring sys-
comes on briefly so you can check that the tem and related Oil Change Request Light Severe engine damage will result, if
light is working. that alerts you to change the engine oil and you keep operating the engine after
• This light comes on if there is any prob- filter. this light blinking.
lem with the four-mode 4WD system. Change the engine oil and filter
The system will be deactivated automati- This light comes on for several seconds immediately when the light blinks.
cally. when the ignition switch is turned to the
• The light blinks if the vehicle is in either “ON” position or the engine switch is NOTE:
of the following conditions, and the sys- pressed to change the ignition mode to This light is used to facilitate the oil and oil
tem will be deactivated automatically. “ON” so you can check that light is working. filter change according to the maintenance
– Wheels of different diameters are fitted (For gasoline engine models) schedule.
to the vehicle. When this light blinks, change engine oil
– Drive train components overheat as a (For diesel engine models)
and oil filter immediately. For details on If this light blinks when the engine is run-
result of spinning of a drive wheel in how to change the engine oil and oil filter,
the mud or snow. ning, you should change the engine oil and
refer to “Changing Engine Oil and Filter” in oil filter immediately since the monitoring
NOTE: the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” system has calculated that oil life has been
Should the light blink, immediately move section. diminished by a deterioration of engine oil.
the vehicle to a safe place and park it there If either of odometer reading or time is When the engine oil and oil filter are
to protect the drive train components. If reached to the value which is set by the changed, and the oil life monitoring system
you let the engine run at idle for a while system, this light blinks when the ignition is reset, this light will go out. For details on
except for the case of different sized switch is in the “ON” position or the engine how to change the engine oil, refer to
wheels are fitted, the light will go out and switch is pressed to change the ignition “Changing Engine Oil and Filter” in
the system will resume. mode to “ON”. In addition, the message is “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-
shown on the information display to tell tion.
2-94
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Whenever the engine oil is changed, the

light must be reset to monitor the next oil Glow Plug Indicator Light Fuel Filter Warning Light
change timing properly. To reset the light, (For Diesel Engine Model) (For Diesel Engine Model)
consult your SUZUKI dealer.
NOTICE
Severe engine damage will result, if
you keep operating the engine after
this light blinking.
Change the engine oil and filter
immediately when the light blinks. 60A543 60A541
If the coolant temperature is cool enough, This light comes on for several seconds
NOTE: this light comes on when the ignition when the ignition switch is turned to the
Note that engine oil degrades faster under switch is turned to the “ON” position or the “ON” position or the engine switch is
the following circumstances: engine switch is pressed to change the pressed to change the ignition mode to
– Mainly urban use of the vehicle, requir- ignition mode to “ON” and goes out when “ON” so you can check that light is work-
ing more frequent regeneration of the the glow plug is heated enough for engine ing.
DPF®; starting. If the light comes on when driving, there is
– Use of the vehicle for short drives, in a possibility to have water in the fuel filter.
which the engine does not have time to Drain water as soon as possible. Have
reach its regular operating temperature; your vehicle inspected by an authorized
– Repeated interruptions to the regenera- SUZUKI dealer.
tion process signaled by the DPF® warn-
ing light coming on.
2-95
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
For details of the DPF®, refer to “Diesel

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®) Particulate Filter” in the “OPERATING “ENG A-STOP” Indicator Light
Warning Light (For Diesel Engine YOUR VEHICLE” section. (if equipped)
Model)
NOTICE
Be sure to regenerate the DPF® when
the DPF® warning light comes on.
Failure to regenerate the DPF® will
cause the vehicle malfunction due to
the clogged filter.
72M00032
64J244
This light comes on for several seconds “ON” position or the engine switch is
when the ignition switch is turned to the pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON” position or the engine switch is “ON”, this light comes on briefly to let you
pressed to change the ignition mode to know the light is working.
“ON” so you can check that light is work- When the engine is stopped by the “ENG
ing. If the light comes on when driving, the A-STOP” system, this light comes on.
DPF® is nearly clogged. To go out the
warning light, the vehicle must stay in For details, refer to “ENG A-STOP System
motion until regeneration has been com- (Engine Auto Stop Start System)” in the
pleted. “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
The process normally takes about 25 min-
utes.
The optimum condition to end the process
are achieved by keeping the vehicle in
motion at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph) or
higher, or an engine speed higher than
2,000 rpm.
If you drive your vehicle until the light goes
out, the regeneration of the DPF® will be
completed.
2-96
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
For details, refer to “Radar Brake Support

“ENG A-STOP OFF” Light Radar Brake Support System Warn- System” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-
(if equipped) ing Light (if equipped) CLE” section.
Radar Brake Support OFF Indicator

Light (if equipped)
72M00159 72M20304
When the ignition switch is turned to the When the engine switch is pressed to
“ON” position or the engine switch is change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light
pressed to change the ignition mode to comes on briefly to let you know the light is
72M20303
“ON”, this light comes on briefly to let you working.
know the light is working. When the engine switch is pressed to
When the brake support system is acti- change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light
When you push the “ENG A-STOP OFF” vated, this light blinks rapidly.
comes on briefly to let you know the light is
switch, this light comes on.
In the following situations, this light will working.
If this light blinks when driving, there may come on and the radar brake support sys- In the following situations, this light will
be something wrong with the ENG A- tem will stop functioning when the ignition come on and the radar brake support sys-
STOP system. You should have the sys- mode is “ON”. tem will stop functioning when the ignition
tem inspected by an authorized SUZUKI • When there is a problem with the radar mode is “ON”.
dealer. brake support system. In this case, you • When the “Radar Brake Support OFF”
should have the system inspected by an switch is pushed and held to turn off the
For details, refer to “ENG A-STOP System
authorized SUZUKI dealer. radar brake support system.
(Engine Auto Stop Start System)” in the
• When dirt is detected on the surface of • When the ESP® OFF switch is pushed to
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
the radar sensor. In this case, clean the
turn off the ESP® systems (other than
sensor.
ABS), the ESP® OFF indicator light will
• When there is a problem with the ABS or
also come on.
ESP®. The ABS warning light or the
ESP® warning light will also come on. For details, refer to “Radar Brake Support
• When there is a problem with the brake System” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-
control systems. CLE” section.
2-97
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Adaptive Cruise Control System Master Warning Indicator Light Lighting Control Lever
Warning Light (if equipped)
78K049
54P000233
When the information display shows warn-
When the engine switch is pressed to ing and indicator messages, this indicator
change the ignition mode to “ON”, this light light may also blink.
comes on briefly so you can check that the
For details, refer to “Information Display” in
light is working.
this section.
If this light stays on, there is a problem with
57L21128
the adaptive cruise control system. Have
the system inspected by your SUZUKI
dealer. WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the
steering wheel.
2-98
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Lighting Operation
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(3)
(2)
(1)
61MM0A073
With the headlights on, push the lever for-

61MM0A072 ward to switch to the high beams (main
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob beams) or pull the lever toward you to
on the end of the lever. There are three switch to the low beams. When the high
positions: beams (main beams) are on, a light on the
instrument panel will come on. To momen-
OFF (1) tarily activate the high beams (main
All lights are off. beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever
slightly toward you and release it when you
(2) have completed the signal.
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light and instrument lights are on, but
headlights are off.
(3)
plate light, instrument lights and headlights
are on.
2-99
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Your vehicle’s lighting system is controlled by two main systems: the Lighting switch and
Automatic Lights Operation the Auto-On Headlight System (when the lighting switch is in the “AUTO” position).
(if equipped) The two systems work together to operate your lights as shown in the following chart:
EXAMPLE ON: Lights ON

LIGHT: When it is light around the light sensor (5).
DARK: When it is dark around the light sensor (5).
(4) (3)
Ignition mode
Lighting “LOCK” (OFF) Ignition mode “ON”
switch posi- Main lights to be
operated or “ACC”
tion
LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK
(1)
(2) Position lights,
– – – –
(1) OFF Tail lights
Headlights – – – –
61MM0A074 Position lights,
– – – ON
(2) AUTO Tail lights
Headlights – – – ON
(5)
Position lights, ON ON ON ON
(3) Tail lights
Headlights – – – –
Position lights,
ON ON ON ON
(4) Tail lights
Headlights ON ON ON ON
61MM0A096
2-100
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob (4)

on the end of the lever. There are four CAUTION Front position lights, tail lights, license
positions: plate light, instrument lights and headlights
If the light sensor area of the wind- are on.
OFF (1) shield is covered with mud, ice, or
All lights are off. other similar substances, the head-
lights and position lights may be EXAMPLE
AUTO (2) turned on even when it is still light
This function works when the ignition outside. Before removing such sub-
mode has been changed to “ON” by press- stances from the windshield, always
ing the engine switch. The headlights and set the wiper control lever to the
position lights are turned on and off auto- “OFF” position. If the lever is left in
matically according to the amount of out- the “AUTO” position, the wipers
side light detected by a sensor. They go could unexpectedly operate and
out automatically when you change the cause injury, and could also be dam-
ignition mode to “ACC” or “LOCK” by aged.
pressing the engine switch.
NOTE:
The light sensor (5) for sensing the amount • Avoid covering the light sensor area of 61MM0A075
of outside light is installed on the upper the windshield with a sticker. The sticker
part of the windshield. It also serves as the may impair the performance of the sen- With the headlights on, push the lever for-
rain sensor for the rain-sensing wipers. sor and make the system unable to con- ward to switch to the high beams (main
trol operation of the lights correctly. beams) or pull the lever toward you to
• If you changed the ignition mode to “ON” switch to the low beams. When the high
by pressing the engine switch and the beams (main beams) are on, a light on the
“AUTO” position remains selected, the instrument panel will come on. To momen-
headlights and position lights come on tarily activate the high beams (main
automatically as the outside gets dark beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever
even with the engine not running. Leav- slightly toward you and release it when you
ing the lights lit for a long time may lead have completed the signal.
to a completely discharged battery.
(3)
plate light and instrument lights are on, but
headlights are off.
2-101
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Auto-on headlight system Rain-triggered automatic lighting oper-

WARNING ation
The setting of the auto-on headlight sys-
It takes about 5 seconds for the light tem can be changed to make it turn on the
sensor to react to a change in light- headlights:
ing conditions. To help avoid an acci- • when the rain sensor senses heavy rain-
dent due to reduced visibility, turn on fall
your headlights before driving into a • when the rain sensor senses light and
tunnel, parking structure or the like. heavy rainfall (in coordination with rain-
sensing wiper operation), or
NOTE: • independently from rain-sensing wiper
The light sensor reacts even to infrared operation.
rays, so it may operate incorrectly when
there are strong infrared rays.
Light Reminder Buzzer
61MM0A097 Reprogramming the automatic light The interior buzzer continuously beeps if
function you open the driver’s door without turning
The Auto-on headlight system automati- The following settings of the automatic
cally turns on all lights that are operated by off the headlights and position lights. This
light function can be customized to your function is triggered under the following
the lighting control lever on the steering preference. Please contact an authorized
column, when the following three condi- condition:
SUZUKI dealer if you want the function The headlights and/or position lights are
tions are all met. reprogrammed. on even after the ignition switch is turned
Conditions for Auto-on headlight system off, or the engine switch is pressed to
operation: Sensitivity of the light sensor change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
1) It is dark around the light sensor (5). The amount of outside light needed to turn (OFF).
2) The lighting control lever is in the the lights on and off is pre-set at the fac-
“AUTO” position. tory. The sensitivity of the light sensor can The buzzer stops sounding when you turn
3) You press the engine switch to change be adjusted so that the lights are turned on off the headlights and position lights.
the ignition mode to “ON”. and off when it is: NOTE:
• lighter outside than the pre-set condition, A message is indicated on the information
This system is operated by a signal from or
the light sensor (5) on the front windshield. display in the instrument cluster while the
• darker outside than the pre-set condition buzzer is sounding.
Do not cover the sensor (5). If you do, the
system will not work correctly.
2-102
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) Rear Fog Light Switch Front Fog Light Switch
System
(if equipped)
When the engine is started, this system EXAMPLE
turns on the daytime running lights.
Conditions for D.R.L. system operation
1) The engine is running.
2) Headlights and front fog light (if
equipped) are off.
NOTE:
Brightness of the daytime running lights is
different from the brightness of the position
lights, but it is not a malfunction.
61MM0A214
To turn the rear fog light on, twist the knob

as shown in the illustration with the head- 64J058
lights are on. When the rear fog light is on, The front fog light comes on when the fog
an indicator light on the instrument cluster light switch is pushed in with the position
will come on. lights, tail lights and/or the headlights are
on. An indicator light above the switch will
be lit when the front fog light is on.
NOTE:
In some countries the lighting operation
may be different from the above descrip-
tion according to local regulations.
2-103
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Headlight Leveling Switch Vehicle Load

Switch Position
Turn Signal Control Lever
(if equipped) Condition
Driver only 0
Driver +
1 passenger 0
(in front seat)
Driver +
4 passengers, 1
no cargo
Driver +
4 passengers, 3
cargo added
Driver +
4
full cargo 57L21128
80JM040
Level the headlight beam according to the WARNING

load condition of your vehicle by turning To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
this switch. The chart below shows the ate controls by reaching through the
appropriate switch position for different steering wheel.
vehicle-load conditions.
2-104
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Lane change signal NOTE:

Turn Signal Operation You can customize the setting for the num-
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position ber of times of flashing of the turn signal
or the ignition mode “ON”, move the lever and its indicator (1 to 4 times). Please ask
up or down to activate the right or left turn an authorized SUZUKI dealer for the cus-
signals. tomization.
Normal turn signal
EXAMPLE
61MM0A077
Move the lever part-way in the direction to

turn and hold it there.
• The turn signal and its indicator flash
while the lever is held at the moved posi-
EXAMPLE tion.
The turn signal and its indicator flash three
61MM0A076 times even if you return the lever immedi-
Move the lever all the way upward or ately after moving it.
downward to signal. When the turn is com-
pleted, the signal will cancel and the lever NOTE:
will return to its normal position. The turn signal and its indicator can be set
whether they flash three times after the
turn signal lever is returned via the infor-
mation display. Refer to “Information Dis-
play” in this section.
2-105
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Hazard Warning Switch Windshield Wiper and Washer Wiper and Washer Operation
Lever When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or the ignition mode is “ON”, you
EXAMPLE can use the wiper/washer lever or switch (if
equipped).
Windshield Wipers
EXAMPLE
61MM0A078
Push in the hazard warning switch to acti- 65D611

vate the hazard warning lights. All turn sig-
nal lights and both turn signal indicators
will flash simultaneously. To turn off the WARNING
lights, push the switch again. To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
Use the hazard warning lights to warn ate controls by reaching through the 61MM0A079
other traffic during emergency parking or steering wheel.
when your vehicle could otherwise become To turn the windshield wipers on, move the
a traffic hazard. lever down to one of the three operating
positions. In the “INT” position, the wipers
operate intermittently. The “INT” position is
very convenient for driving in mist or light
rain. In the “LO” position, the wipers oper-
ate at a steady low speed. In the “HI” posi-
tion, the wipers operate at a steady high
speed. To turn off the wipers, move the
lever back to the “OFF” position.
2-106
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”

position, the windshield wipers will turn on Windshield Wipers with Rain Sens-
ing Function (if equipped) EXAMPLE
continuously at low speed.
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
61MM0A082
If the control lever has on “AUTO” position,

you can change the system’s sensitivity to
61MM0A080 61MM0A081 rain/snow by turning the knob of the con-
If the lever is equipped with the “INT TIME” Press the engine switch to change the igni- trol lever forward for increased sensitivity
control, turn the control forward or rear- tion mode to “ON”. To turn the rain-sensing or rearward for decreased sensitivity.
ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera- wipers on, move the lever down to one of
tion to the desired interval. the three operating positions. In the
“AUTO” position (if provided), the wipers
(1)
automatically operate when the wiper sys-
tem senses rain or snow. In the “LO” posi-
tion, the wipers operate at a steady low
speed. In the “HI” position, the wipers
operate at a steady high speed. To turn off
the wipers, move the lever back to the
“OFF” position.
Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”
position; the wipers will operate continu-
ously at low speed for as long as you hold
the lever in the “MIST” position. 61MM0A098
(1) Rain sensor
2-107
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
– There were already raindrops on the Reprogramming the rain-sensing wiper

CAUTION windshield before starting rain-sensing function
wiper operation. You should remove The AUTO position operation of the rain-
• Observe the following instructions the raindrops by operating the wipers sensing wiper function can be customized
when the wiper lever is set to the under manual control. to your preference by reprogramming its
“AUTO” position with the engine – The rain sensor is hotter than 80°C setting as follows. Please contact an
switch in the “ON” mode. Other- (176°F) in the sun or lower than –10°C authorized SUZUKI dealer for this customi-
wise, the wipers could unexpect- (14°F) in freezing weather. (The wip- zation.
edly operate and cause injury, and ers do not operate under this condi-
could also be damaged. tion.) Full-automatic wiping (factory setting)
– Do not touch or wipe the rain – The windshield is coated with a water- The system automatically selects the most
sensor area of the windshield repellent substance, which causes appropriate of the following wiping modes:
with a cloth. raindrops to run down quickly. This will no wiping, intermittent wiping, low-speed
– Do not hit the windshield or rain give a clearer view and the wipers wiping, and high-speed wiping.
sensor. may seem to operate too frequently. In
• Be sure to set the wiper control this case, decrease the system’s sen- Semi-automatic wiping
lever to the “OFF” position before sitivity. The system automatically selects the most
washing the vehicle in an auto- – The sensor area is covered with a appropriate of the following wiping modes:
matic car wash or cleaning the sticker. intermittent wiping, low-speed wiping, or
windshield. – The wiper blades are damaged. You high-speed wiping. (The wipers do not stop
should replace them. automatically.)
NOTE:
• Under the following conditions, the rain • The following conditions may indicate Intermittent wiping
sensor may not be able to sense rain or problems with the rain-sensing wiper The wipers operate only in the intermittent
snow correctly, and thus the rain-sensing system. If your system exhibits any of wiping mode. The wiping interval can be
wiper function may not work or may work the following conditions, have it changed with the knob on the control lever.
incorrectly. (Use a position other than inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
“AUTO” under these conditions.) dealer.
– Rain or snow does not hit the rain sen- – Rainfall/snowfall rate varies but the
sor area of the windshield, or the snow wiping interval remains constant.
is not of a type that is able to be – Rain/snow is falling but the wipers do
detected by the sensor. not operate.
– The rain sensor area is covered with
mud, ice or other similar substance.
You should remove any foreign sub-
stance.
2-108
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Windshield Washer NOTICE Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch

To help prevent damage to the wind-
EXAMPLE shield wiper and washer system EXAMPLE
components, you should take the fol- Washer
lowing precautions:
• Do not continue to hold in the lever Wiper
when there is no windshield
washer fluid being sprayed or the
washer motor can be damaged.
• Do not attempt to remove dirt from
a dry windshield with the wipers or
you can damage the windshield
Intermittent wiper
and the wiper blades. Always wet
the windshield with washer fluid
before operating the wipers.
61MM0A099 61MM0A100
• Clear ice or packed snow from the
To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the wiper blades before using the wip- To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear
lever toward you. The windshield wipers ers. wiper switch on the end of the lever for-
will automatically turn on at low speed if • Check the washer fluid level regu- ward to the “ON” position. If your vehicle is
they are not already on and the “INT” posi- larly. Check it often when the equipped the “INT” position, the rear wiper
tion is equipped. weather is bad. operates intermittently when you twist the
• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir switch forward to the “INT” position. To turn
WARNING 3/4 full during cold weather to allow the rear wiper off, twist the switch rearward
room for expansion if the tempera- to the “OFF” position.
• To prevent windshield icing in cold
weather, turn on the defroster to ture falls low enough to freeze the With the rear wiper in the “OFF” position,
heat the windshield before and solution. twist the switch rearward and hold it there
during windshield washer use. to spray window washer fluid.
• Do not use radiator antifreeze in With the rear wiper in the “ON” position,
the windshield washer reservoir. It turn the switch forward and hold it there to
can severely impair visibility when spray window washer fluid.
sprayed on the windshield, and can
also damage your vehicle’s paint.
2-109
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
NOTICE Tilt/Telescoping (if equipped) WARNING

Clear ice or snow from the rear win- Steering Lock Lever Never attempt to adjust the steering
dow and rear wiper blade before wheel while the vehicle is moving or
using the rear wiper. Accumulated you could lose control of the vehicle.
ice or snow could prevent the wiper EXAMPLE
blade from moving, causing damage
to the wiper motor.
(1)
(2)
61MM0A085
(1) LOCK
(2) UNLOCK
The lock lever is located under the steering

column. To adjust the steering wheel
height and fore-aft position:
1) Push down the lock lever to unlock the
steering column.
2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
height and fore-aft position and lock the
steering column by pulling up the lock
lever.
3) Try moving the steering wheel up and
down and back and forth to make sure
it is securely locked in position.
2-110
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
Type 2
Horn Heated Rear Window and
EXAMPLE
Heated Outside Rearview
EXAMPLE Mirrors (if equipped) Switch
Type 1
EXAMPLE
2 3
1 4
0
A/C
61MM0A087
REAR
When the rear window is misted, push this
68LM240 switch (1) to clear the window.
Press the horn button of the steering wheel
to sound the horn. The horn will sound with EXAMPLE
the ignition switch in any position or any
61MM0A086
ignition mode.
(2)
61MM0A088
If the outside rearview mirror has the mark

(2), it is also equipped with the heated out-
side rearview mirrors. When you push the
2-111
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
switch (1), both the heated outside rear-

view mirrors and the heated rear window
will operate simultaneously.
An indicator light will be lit when the defog-
ger is on. The defogger will work only
when the engine is running. To turn off the
defogger, push the switch (1) again.
NOTICE
The heated rear window and the
heated outside rearview mirrors (if
equipped) use a large amount of elec-
tricity. Be sure to turn off after the
window and mirrors have become
clear.
NOTE:
• The defogger will work only when the
engine is running.
• The defogger will automatically turn off
after the defogger remains on for 15 min-
utes to prevent discharging of the bat-
tery.
• If your vehicle is equipped the heated
outside rearview mirrors, only the
driver’s side outside rearview mirror has
the mark (2), but both the outside rear-
view mirrors work simultaneously.
2-112
83RM0-01E

BEFORE DRIVING
MEMO
2-113
83RM0-01E

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1
Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 3-1
Engine Oil Consumption .................................................... 3-2
Ignition Switch 3
(Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) .................. 3-3
Engine Switch
(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System) ........................ 3-5
Keyless Push Start System (if equipped) ......................... 3-6
Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 3-10
Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-11
Starting the Engine
(Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) .................. 3-12
Starting the Engine
(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System) ........................ 3-14
Using the Transaxle ............................................................ 3-20
Gearshift Indicator .............................................................. 3-33
60G408
Four-mode 4WD System (if equipped) .............................. 3-36
ENG A-STOP System
(Engine Auto Stop Start System) (if equipped) ................ 3-42
Adaptive Cruise Control System (if equipped) ................. 3-47
Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................... 3-57
Speed Limiter (if equipped) ................................................ 3-59
Parking Sensors (if equipped) ........................................... 3-61
Rearview Camera (if equipped) .......................................... 3-68
Braking ................................................................................. 3-71
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) ................................. 3-73
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if equipped) .. 3-77
Radar Brake Support System (if equipped) ...................... 3-86
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) (if equipped) ................... 3-102
83RM0-01E

Exhaust Gas Warning WARNING Daily Inspection Checklist

(Continued)
• Do not park with the engine run-
ning for a long period of time, even
Before Driving
in an open area. If it is necessary to
sit for a short time in a parked vehi-
cle with the engine running, make
sure the air intake selector is set to
“FRESH AIR” and the blower is at
high speed.
• Avoid operating the vehicle with
the tailgate or trunk open. If it is
necessary to operate the vehicle
with the tailgate or trunk open,
make sure the sunroof (if equipped)
52D334
and all windows are closed, and the
blower is at high speed with the air
intake selector set to “FRESH AIR”.
WARNING • To allow proper operation of your 60A187S
Avoid breathing exhaust gases. vehicle’s ventilation system, keep 1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights
Exhaust gases contain carbon mon- the air inlet grille in front of the and reflectors are clean and unob-
oxide, a potentially lethal gas that is windshield clear of snow, leaves or structed.
colorless and odorless. Since carbon other obstructions at all times. 2) Visually check the tires for the following
monoxide is difficult to detect by • Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear points:
itself, be sure to take the following of snow and other material to help – the depth of the tread groove
precautions to help prevent carbon reduce the buildup of exhaust – abnormal wear, cracks and damage
monoxide from entering your vehicle. gases under the vehicle. This is – loose wheel bolts
• Do not leave the engine running in particularly important when parked – existence of foreign material such as
garages or other confined areas. in blizzard conditions. nails, stones, etc.
(Continued) • Have the exhaust system inspected Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND
periodically for damage and leaks. MAINTENANCE” section for details.
Any damage or leaks should be 3) Look for fluid and oil leaks.
repaired immediately.
3-1
83RM0-01E

NOTE: vehicle. Make sure that you cannot

It is normal for water to drip from the air open the hood all the way without Engine Oil Consumption
conditioning system after use. releasing the secondary latch. Be sure
to close the hood securely after check- It is normal for the engine to consume
4) Make sure the hood is fully closed and ing for proper latch operation. See the some engine oil during normal vehicle
latched. item “All latches, hinges and locks” of operation.
5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights, “CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “Periodic
The amount of engine oil consumed
brake lights and horn for proper opera- Maintenance Schedule” in the
depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
tion. “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
quality of the oil and the conditions the
6) Adjust the seat and head restraint. section for lubrication schedule.
vehicle is driven under.
7) Check the brake pedal and the parking
More oil is consumed during high-speed
brake lever. WARNING driving and when there is frequent acceler-
8) Adjust the mirrors.
Make sure the hood is fully closed ation and deceleration. Under high loads,
9) Make sure that you and all passengers
and latched before driving. If it is not, your engine also will consume more oil.
have properly fastened your seat belts.
it can fly up unexpectedly during A new engine also consumes more oil,
10)Make sure that all warning lights come
driving, obstructing your view and since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder
on as the ignition switch is turned to the
resulting in an accident. walls have not yet become conditioned.
New engines reach the normal level of oil
Once a month, or each time you fill your consumption only after approximately
“ON”.
fuel tank, check the tire pressure using a 5000 km (3000 miles) driving.
11)Check all gauges.
12)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM tire pressure gauge. Also check the tire
pressure of the spare tire. Oil consumption:
WARNING light turns off when the park-
Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km
ing brake is released.
(1 Qt. per 600 miles)
Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel When judging the amount of oil consump-
tank, perform the following under-hood tion, note that the oil may become diluted
checks: and make it difficult to accurately judge the
true oil level.
1) Engine oil level
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
2) Coolant level
repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
3) Brake fluid level
mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
4) Battery solution level
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
5) Windshield washer fluid level
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more of driv-
6) Hood latch operation
ing. This is because the oil is gradually
Pull the hood release handle inside the
becoming diluted with fuel or moisture,
3-2
83RM0-01E

making it appear that the oil level has not

changed. Ignition Switch EXAMPLE
You should also be aware that the diluting (Vehicle without Keyless
ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle
is subsequently driven at high speeds, Push Start System)
such as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after high-speed driving.
60B041
The ignition switch has the following four

positions:
LOCK
This is the normal parking position. It is the
65D611
only position in which the key can be
removed.
WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the
steering wheel.
3-3
83RM0-01E

Manual transaxle ACC

Accessories such as the radio can oper-
Turn to “LOCK”
ate, but the engine is off.
ON
This is the normal operating position. All
Push
electrical systems are on.
START
This is the position for starting the engine
using the starter motor. The key should be
released from this position as soon as the
engine starts.
60G033
Ignition key reminder (if equipped) 81A297S
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
• Manual transaxle vehicles you to remove the ignition key if it is in the
You must push in the key to turn it to the WARNING
ignition switch when the driver’s door is
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and opened. • Never return the ignition switch to
prevents normal use of the steering the “LOCK” position and remove
wheel after the key is removed. the ignition key while the vehicle is
• Automatic transaxle vehicles moving. The steering wheel will
The gearshift lever must be in the “P” lock and you will not be able to
(Park) position to turn the key to the steer the vehicle.
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition and (Continued)
prevents normal use of the steering
wheel and gearshift lever.
To release the steering lock, insert the key
and turn it clockwise to one of the other
positions. If you have trouble turning the
key to unlock the steering, try turning the
steering wheel slightly to the right or left
while turning the key.
3-4
83RM0-01E

IGNITION SWITCH POSITION. Refer to

WARNING Engine Switch “Information Display” in the “BEFORE
(Vehicle with Keyless Push DRIVING” section for details.
(Continued)
• Always return the ignition switch to Start System) ON
the “LOCK” position and remove • With the engine off
the ignition key when leaving the You can use such electric equipment as
vehicle even if only for a short time. the power windows and wipers with the
Also do not leave children alone in EXAMPLE
engine off. When this ignition mode is
a parked vehicle. Unattended chil- selected by pressing the engine switch,
dren could cause accidental move- the information display in the instrument
ment of the vehicle or could tamper cluster shows the following message:
with power windows or power sun- “ON” IGNITION SWITCH POSITION.
roof. They also could suffer from
heat stroke in warm or hot weather. • With the engine on
These could result in severe injury All electric equipment is operational. The
or even death. vehicle can be driven when you have
selected this ignition mode by pressing
the engine switch.
NOTICE
• Do not use the starter motor for 61MM0B001
START
more than 12 seconds at a time. If Automatic transaxle or TCSS – Provided
LOCK (OFF) you have the keyless push start system
the engine does not start, wait 15 This mode is for parking the vehicle. When
seconds before trying again. If the remote controller with you, the engine
this mode is selected by pressing the automatically starts when you press the
engine does not start after several engine switch and then any door (including
attempts, check the fuel and igni- engine switch to select this ignition mode
the tailgate) is opened or closed, the steer- after placing the gearshift lever in the “P”
tion systems or consult your ing will be locked automatically.
SUZUKI dealer. position and depressing the brake pedal.
• Do not leave the ignition switch in (If you need to re-start the engine while the
ACC vehicle is moving, shift into “N”.)
the “ON” position if the engine is Press the engine switch to select this igni-
not running as the battery will dis- tion mode to use such electric equipment
charge. as the audio system, outside rearview mir-
rors and accessory socket with the engine
off. When this position is selected, the
information display in the instrument clus-
ter shows the following message: “ACC”
3-5
83RM0-01E

Manual transaxle – Provided you have the

keyless push start system remote control- Unreleased Steering Lock Warning Keyless Push Start System
ler with you, the engine automatically If the steering lock remains engaged when (if equipped)
starts when you press the engine switch to you press the engine switch to change the
select this ignition mode after shifting to ignition mode to “ON”, the information dis- Provided the keyless push start system
“N” (Neutral) and depressing the brake and play in the instrument cluster shows the remote controller is within the “interior
clutch pedals. message: “TRN. STEERING WHEEL TO workable area” (refer to the related expla-
RELEASE LOCK”. Refer to “Information nation in this section), you can use the
NOTE: Display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” sec- engine switch for starting the engine and
You do not need to keep the engine switch tion for details. selecting an ignition mode (“ACC” or
pressed to start the engine. “ON”). In addition, the following functions
NOTE: can be used:
NOTICE The steering lock may not be released if
some load is acting on the steering wheel. • Keyless entry function. Refer to “Keyless
Do not leave the engine switch in the Push Start System Remote Controller” in
“ACC” or “ON” mode when the If this happens, turn the steering wheel to
the right or left to relieve it from the load the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
engine is not running. Avoid using details.
the radio or other electric accesso- before you press the engine switch again
to change to the desired ignition mode. • Locking and unlocking doors (including
ries for a long time when the engine the tailgate) using a request switch.
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” mode Refer to “Keyless Push Start System
when the engine is not running, oth- Remote Controller” in the “BEFORE
erwise the battery may discharge. DRIVING” section for details.
• Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to
NOTE: “Immobilizer System” in the “BEFORE
In the presence of strong radio signals or DRIVING” section for details.
noise, you may not be able to change the
ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” or to start
the engine using the engine switch. In this Engine Switch Illumination
case, the information display on the instru- The engine switch is illuminated (lit) in the
ment cluster will show the following mes- following situations:
sage: KEY FOB NOT DETECTED. • When the engine is off and the driver’s
door is open, or for 15 seconds after the
driver’s door is closed. The illumination
will fade out after the 15 seconds past.
3-6
83RM0-01E

• When the engine is off and the position Every time you press the engine switch,
lights are on. The illumination will go out Selection of Ignition Modes the ignition mode changes as follows.
when the position lights are turned off. Press the engine switch to select the
• When the engine is on and the position “ACC” or “ON” mode as follows when you Automatic transaxle or TCSS
lights and/or the headlights are on. The use an electric accessory or check the
illumination will go out when the head- operation of instruments without running
lights are turned off. the engine. Gearshift
P
lever in
1) Bring the keyless push start system

remote controller with you and sit in the
driver’s seat. LOCK ACC ON
2) Manual transaxle – Without depressing (OFF) (Audio equipment)
the clutch pedal, press the engine
switch (1). Gearshift lever in a
Automatic transaxle or TCSS – Without position other than P
depressing the brake pedal, press the
engine switch (1).
57L31006
Manual transaxle
82K253
NOTE:
To save the battery, the illumination will be
automatically turned off when both of the
following conditions are simultaneously
met:
• The headlights and position lights are (1)
LOCK ACC ON
turned off. (OFF) (Audio equipment)
• A period of 15 minutes has elapsed after
opening the driver’s door.
82K254
60MS117
3-7
83RM0-01E

NOTE: NOTE:
• Automatic transaxle or TCSS – If the EXAMPLE • If you still cannot select the ignition
gearshift lever is in any position other modes, there may be some problem with
than “P”, or if the knob button is pushed (1) the keyless push start system. Contact
when the gearshift lever is in “P” position an authorized SUZUKI dealer for an
the ignition mode cannot be returned to inspection of the system.
“LOCK” (OFF). • The immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
• When selecting the ignition modes, the tem warning light will come on for about
information display in the instrument 5 seconds while the master warning indi-
cluster shows certain messages. Refer cator light is blinking. In addition, the
to “Information Display” in the “BEFORE (2) information display in the instrument
DRIVING” section for details. cluster will show a message during this
time. Refer to “Information Display” in
If the master warning indicator light the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
blinks and the ignition modes cannot 58MST0302 details.
be selected 1) Without depressing the brake pedal • You may customize the system to cause
Your keyless push start system remote con- and the clutch pedal, push the engine the interior buzzer to sound once for the
troller may not be sensed as being within the switch (1). “remote controller out of sensing range”
“interior workable area” (refer to the related 2) Within about 10 seconds during which warning. To incorporate this customiza-
explanation in this section). Try again after the master warning indicator light in the tion, please contact an authorized
making sure you have the remote controller instrument cluster is blinking and the SUZUKI dealer.
with you. If the ignition modes still cannot be “PLACE KEY FOB ON START • If the battery of the remote controller is
selected, the battery of the remote controller SWITCH” message appears on the about to become completely discharged,
may be discharged. To be able to select an information display, touch the engine the corresponding message will appear
ignition mode, you must then use the follow- switch with the “LOCK” button end of on the information display when you
ing method: the remote controller (2) for about 2 press the engine switch to change the
seconds. ignition mode to “ON”. Refer to “Informa-
tion Display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”
section for details. For details on replac-
ing the battery, refer to the “Keyless
Push Start System Remote Controller” in
the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
3-8
83RM0-01E

(OFF) by pressing the engine switch and

“Remote Controller Outside” Warn- then perform the engine starting opera-
ing (2)
tion. Refer to “Starting the Engine” in this
When either of the conditions described section.
below is met, the system issues a “remote • Always keep the remote controller with
controller outside” warning by sounding the you as the driver.
interior and exterior buzzers. At the same
time, the immobilizer/keyless push start Interior Workable Area for Engine
system warning light comes on and the
master warning indicator light blinks.
Starting, Ignition Mode Selection
and “Remote Controller Outside”
• Any door is opened and then closed Warning
while the remote controller is not inside
the vehicle and the engine is running or (1)
the ignition mode has been changed to 83RM045
“ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine
switch. (1) Immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
• The remote controller is not inside the tem warning light (blinks)
vehicle when you attempt to start the (2) Master warning indicator light (blinks)
engine after changing the ignition mode
to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine NOTE:
switch. • If the warning is given, locate the remote
controller as soon as possible.
• Any attempt to start the engine will fail (1)
while the warning is active. The mes-
sage appearing on the information dis-
play in the instrument cluster will also
indicate this condition. Refer to “Informa- 61MM0B002
tion display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” (1) Interior workable area
section for details.
• Normally, the immobilizer/keyless push The “interior workable area” for these func-
start system warning light should go out tions is defined as all the interior spaces
and the master warning indicator light except for the space above the instrument
should stop blinking shortly after the panel.
remote controller is brought back inside
the vehicle. If they remain lit and blink-
ing, change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
3-9
83RM0-01E

NOTE: For automatic transaxle or TCSS vehicles,

• Even when the remote controller is in the Parking Brake Lever always set the parking brake before mov-
“interior workable area”, if it is in any of ing the gearshift lever to the “P” (PARK)
the following conditions, you may not be position. If you park on an incline and shift
able to start the engine or select the igni- EXAMPLE into “P” before setting the parking brake,
tion modes, and the “remote controller the weight of the vehicle may make it diffi-
outside” warning may be given. (1) cult to shift out of “P” when you are ready
– The remote controller’s battery is low. to drive the vehicle.
– The remote controller is affected by (2) When preparing to drive the vehicle, move
strong radio signals or noise.
the gearshift lever out of the “P” position
– The remote controller is in contact with
before releasing the parking brake.
or covered by a metallic object.
– The remote controller is in stowage (3)
like the glove box or a door pocket. WARNING
– The remote controller is in the sun • Never drive your vehicle with the
visor pocket or on the floor. parking brake on: rear brake effec-
• Even when the remote controller is out- tiveness can be reduced from over-
side the “interior workable area”, if it is in 54G039 heating, brake life may be
any of the following conditions, you may (1) To set shortened, or permanent brake
be able to start the engine or select the (2) To release damage may result.
ignition mode. The “remote controller (3) To release • If the parking brake does not hold
outside” warning may not be given at the vehicle securely or does not
that time. The parking brake lever is located between fully release, have your vehicle
– The remote controller is outside the the seats. To set the parking brake, hold inspected immediately by an autho-
vehicle but very close to a door. the brake pedal down and pull the parking rized SUZUKI dealer.
– The remote controller is on the instru- brake lever all the way up. To release the
ment panel. parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,
push the button on the end of the lever
with your thumb, and lower the lever to its
original position.
3-10
83RM0-01E

WARNING Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer Pedal

Always set the parking brake fully A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
before leaving your vehicle or it may you to release the parking brake if you Manual transaxle
move, causing injury or damage. start the vehicle without releasing the park-
When parking, make sure the gear- ing brake. Make sure that the parking EXAMPLE
shift lever for manual transaxle vehi- brake is fully released and the brake sys-
cles is in reverse or first gear and the tem warning light turns off.
gearshift lever for automatic tran- (1) (2)
saxle or TCSS vehicles is in “P”
(Park). Remember, even though the
transaxle is in gear or in Park, you
must set the parking brake fully.
(3)
WARNING
When parking the vehicle in
extremely cold weather, the following 80J2121
procedure should be used: Automatic transaxle or TCSS
1) Set the parking brake.
2) Manual transaxle – turn off the EXAMPLE
engine, then shift into reverse or
first gear.
Automatic transaxle or TCSS – (2)
shift into “P” (Park) and turn off
the engine.
3) Get out of the vehicle and put
chocks under the wheels.
4) Release the parking brake.
When you return to your vehicle, (3)
you must remember to first set the
parking brake, then remove the
wheel chocks.
80J2122
3-11
83RM0-01E

Clutch Pedal (1) WARNING Starting the Engine

(For manual transaxle) Do not “ride” the brakes by applying (Vehicle without Keyless
The clutch pedal is used to disengage the them continuously or resting your
drive to the wheels when starting the Push Start System)
foot on the pedal. This will result in
engine, stopping, or shifting the gearshift overheating of the brakes which
lever. Depressing the pedal disengages could cause unpredictable braking
the clutch. Before Starting the Engine
action, longer stopping distances, or
permanent brake damage.
WARNING
Do not drive with your foot resting on MT
the clutch pedal. It could result in Accelerator Pedal (3)
excessive clutch wear, clutch dam- This pedal controls the speed of the
age, or unexpected loss of engine engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal
braking. increases power output and speed.
Brake Pedal (2) AT

Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with front
and rear disc brakes. Depressing the
brake pedal applies both sets of brakes.
You may hear occasional brake squeal 83RM005
when you apply the brakes. This is a nor- 1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
mal condition caused by environmental 2) Manual transaxle – Shift into “N” (Neu-
factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc. tral) and depress the clutch pedal all
the way to the floor. Hold the clutch
WARNING pedal while starting the engine.
If brake squeal is excessive and Automatic transaxle – If the gearshift
occurs each time the brakes are lever is not in “P” (Park) position, shift
applied, you should have the brakes into “P” (Park). (If you need to re-start
checked by your SUZUKI dealer. the engine while the vehicle is moving,
shift into “N”.)
3-12
83RM0-01E

NOTE: If the engine does not start after 12 sec- (For Diesel Engine Model)
Automatic transaxle vehicles have a starter onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,
Cold engine
interlock device which is designed to keep then press down the accelerator pedal to
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
the starter from operating if the transaxle is 1/3 of its travel and try cranking the engine
tion and wait until the glow plug indicator
in any of the drive positions. again. Release the key and accelerator
goes out if it comes on. Crank the engine
pedal when the engine starts.
by turning the ignition key to “START”.
WARNING Release the key when the engine starts.
If the engine still does not start, try holding
Make sure that the parking brake is the accelerator pedal all the way to the
set fully and the transaxle is in Neu- floor while cranking. This should clear the NOTICE
tral (or Park for vehicles with an auto- engine if it is flooded.
matic transaxle) before attempting to • Stop turning the starter immedi-
start the engine. ately after the engine has started or
Caution when stopping the engine with the starter system can be damaged.
turbocharger • Do not crank the engine for more
Starting a Cold and Warm Engine When stopping the engine after climbing or than 30 seconds at a time. If the
high speed driving, let the engine idle for engine doesn’t start on the first try,
(For Gasoline Engine Model) about one minute or more (if it is not pro- wait about 15 seconds before try-
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and ing again.
crank the engine by turning the ignition key engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
to “START”. Release the key when the from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated Warm engine
engine starts. engine oil will damage the bearings of the Crank the engine by turning the ignition
turbocharger. key to “START”. Release the key when the
NOTICE engine starts.
• Stop turning the starter immedi- Caution when stopping the engine with
ately after the engine has started or turbocharger
the starter system can be damaged. When stopping the engine after climbing or
• Do not crank the engine for more high speed driving, let the engine idle for
than 12 seconds at a time. If the about one minute or more (if it is not pro-
engine doesn’t start on the first try, hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and
wait about 15 seconds before try- engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
ing again. from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated
engine oil will damage the bearings of the
turbocharger.
3-13
83RM0-01E

Restarting diesel engine after fuel- 1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
empty stop Starting the Engine 2) Manual transaxle – Shift to “N” (Neutral)
If the engine stops and the low fuel warn- (Vehicle with Keyless Push and fully depress the clutch pedal. Hold
ing light and the malfunction indicator light the clutch and brake pedals fully
come on, use the following procedure: Start System) depressed.
1) Fill the fuel tank. Automatic transaxle or TCSS – If the
2) Hold the ignition key in “ON” position for gearshift lever is not in the “P” (Park)
5-10 seconds to feed fuel.
Before Starting the Engine position, shift it to “P”. Hold the brake
3) Perform above engine starting proce- pedal fully depressed.
dure to start the engine.
If the malfunction indicator light still comes MT
on after the engine started, there may be
some problem with the engine. Ask your
SUZUKI dealer to have the engine
inspected.
AT
(1)
TCSS
82K254
3) The “PUSH START SWITCH” message

will appear on the information display in
83RM007 the instrument cluster. Push the engine
switch (1). When the engine is started,
the starter motor will automatically stop.
3-14
83RM0-01E

NOTE:
WARNING • You do not need to keep the engine Stopping the engine
switch pressed to start the engine. • Depress the engine switch to stop the
Make sure that the parking brake is • The engine of a manual transaxle vehi-
set fully and the transaxle is in Neu- engine after the vehicle stopped com-
cle will not start unless the clutch pedal pletely.
tral (or Park for vehicles with an auto- is depressed.
matic transaxle or TCSS) before • In case of emergency, you can stop the
• Automatic transaxle or TCSS vehicles engine by quickly pushing the engine
attempting to start the engine. have a starter interlock device which is switch more than 3 times, or pushing
designed to keep the starter from operat- and holding the engine switch more than
NOTICE ing if the transaxle is in any of the drive 2 seconds while the vehicle in motion.
positions.
• Do not depress the accelerator • During the engine starting procedure, NOTE:
during the engine starting proce- messages on the information display will Except in emergency, do not stop the
dure. help you. Refer to “Information Display” engine while the vehicle in motion.
• If the engine does not respond in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for The steering and braking operation will
when you try to start it with the details. require more efforts when the engine
engine switch or if the engine • You should turn off such loads as the stopped.
switch repeats cycling through the headlights and air conditioning system to Refer to “Braking” in this section.
“LOCK” (OFF) - “ACC” - “ON” facilitate starting of the engine.
mode, the vehicle battery may be • Even if you fail to start the engine, the NOTICE
discharged. Check the voltage of starter motor will stop turning automati-
the vehicle battery before trying cally after a short time. After the starter If you stop the engine while the vehi-
again. motor has stopped or if there is some cle is in motion, the automatic tran-
problem with the system, the starter saxle may be damaged.
motor will rotate only while the engine Avoid stopping the engine while driv-
switch is being pressed. ing.
• If the engine has been stopped and

stayed as it as for while after the engine
was stopped unexpectedly or was raced
before stopped, a clicking sound may be
heard from around the engine when
engine restarted. This is not a malfunc-
tion. In this case, always let the engine
idle before stop it.
3-15
83RM0-01E

Caution when stopping the engine with (For Diesel Engine Model)
Starting a Cold and Warm Engine turbocharger
Cold engine
When stopping the engine after climbing or
(For Gasoline Engine Model) Depress the clutch and brake pedals fully
high speed driving, let the engine idle for
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, and press the engine switch to crank the
about one minute or more (if it is not pro-
crank the engine by pressing the engine engine. If the glow plug indicator light
hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and
switch to change the ignition mode to comes on, the engine will start automati-
engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
“START”. cally after the glow plug indicator light goes
from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated
off or 10 seconds past.
engine oil will damage the bearings of the
NOTICE turbocharger.
NOTICE
Do not crank the engine for more
than 12 seconds at a time. Do not crank the engine for more
If the engine doesn’t start on the first than 30 seconds at a time.
try, wait about 15 seconds before try- If the engine doesn’t start on the first
ing again. try, wait about 15 seconds before try-
ing again.
After pressing the engine switch to change
the ignition mode to “START”, the starter Warm engine
cranks the engine for about 12 seconds Crank the engine by pressing the engine
before it can start the engine. If the engine switch to change the ignition mode to
fails to start at the first attempt, wait about “START”.
15 seconds, then try again while keeping
the engine switch pressed while pressing Caution when stopping the engine with
down the accelerator pedal to 1/3 of its turbocharger
travel. Release the accelerator pedal when When stopping the engine after climbing or
the engine starts. high speed driving, let the engine idle for
about one minute or more (if it is not pro-
If the engine still does not start, try holding hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and
the accelerator pedal all the way to the engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
floor while cranking. This should clear the from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated
engine if it is flooded. engine oil will damage the bearings of the
If you are unable to start the engine using turbocharger.
this procedure, consult your SUZUKI
dealer.
3-16
83RM0-01E

Restarting diesel engine after fuel- If the master warning indicator light 3) The “PUSH START SWITCH.” mes-
empty stop blinks and the engine cannot be started sage will appear on the information dis-
If the engine stops and the low fuel warn- Your keyless push start system remote play in the instrument cluster. Press the
ing light and the malfunction indicator light controller may not be sensed as being engine switch (1).
come on, use the following procedure: within the “interior workable area”. Try 4) Within about 10 seconds of blinking of
1) Fill the fuel tank. again after making sure that you have the the master warning indicator light in the
2) Press the engine switch to change the remote controller with you. If the engine instrument cluster, touch the engine
ignition mode to “ON” for 5-10 seconds still cannot be started, the battery of the switch with the “LOCK” button end of
to feed fuel. remote controller may be discharged. You the remote controller (2) for about 2
3) Perform above engine starting proce- must then use the following method to be seconds.
dure to start the engine. able to start the engine.
If the malfunction indicator light still comes NOTE:
on after the engine started, there may be EXAMPLE • If you still cannot start the engine after
some problem with the engine. Ask your several attempts using the above
SUZUKI dealer to have the engine (1) method, there may be a problem else-
inspected. where, such as a low battery. Contact
your SUZUKI dealer for inspection.
• The immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
tem warning light will come on for about
5 seconds while the master warning indi-
cator light is blinking. In addition, the
(2) information display will show a certain
message during this time. Refer to
“Information Display” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section for details.
58MST0302 • You may customize the system to cause
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully. the interior buzzer to sound once for the
2) Manual Transaxle – Shift to “N” (Neu- “remote controller out of sensing range”
tral) and fully depress the clutch pedal. warning. Please contact an authorized
Hold the clutch and brake pedals fully SUZUKI dealer for the customization.
depressed.
Automatic transaxle or TCSS – If the
gearshift lever is not in the “P” (Park)
position, shift it to “P”. Hold the brake
pedal fully depressed.
3-17
83RM0-01E

• If the battery of the remote controller is “LOCK” (OFF) mode reminder buzzer
about to be completely discharged, a Returning the ignition mode to If the driver’s door is opened without
message warning this will appear on the “LOCK” (OFF) returning the ignition mode to “LOCK”
information display when the ignition (OFF) by pressing the engine switch, a
mode is changed to “ON” by pressing Automatic transaxle or TCSS – To ensure buzzer sounds to warn you of this state.
the engine switch. For details on replac- safety, the ignition mode can be returned
to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine • If you open the driver’s door after press-
ing the battery, refer to the “Keyless
switch only when the gearshift lever is ing the engine switch to change the igni-
Push Start System Remote Controller” in
placed in the “P” position without pressing tion mode to “ACC”, the interior buzzer
the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
the knob button. beeps intermittently.
• The buzzer will stop sounding if you then
NOTE: push the engine switch twice, thus bring-
In the case of an automatic transaxle or ing it back the ignition mode to “LOCK”
TCSS model, the engine cannot be (OFF).
returned to the “LOCK” (OFF) position if
the gearshift lever is in any other position NOTE:
than “P”. Whenever you leave the vehicle, make
Certain problems like a fault in engine sys- sure you have returned the ignition mode
tem may prevent the engine switch from to “LOCK” (OFF) using the engine switch
going back to the “LOCK” (OFF) mode. If and then lock the doors. Without returning
this happens, have the vehicle inspected the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), you
by an authorized SUZUKI dealer after cannot use a request switch or keyless
doing the following: push start system remote controller to lock
• Lock the doors using the key to prevent the doors.
theft. (The request switches and the key-
less push start system remote controller Steering lock warning buzzer
cannot be used to lock them.) If the steering lock fails to engage due to a
• Disconnect the negative cable from the fault in the system when the ignition mode
battery to prevent discharge. is turned to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the
engine switch and then any door (including
the tailgate) is opened or closed, the inte-
rior buzzer will warn you of this condition
with repeated short beeps. If this happens,
have the vehicle inspected by an autho-
3-18
83RM0-01E

This is due to the particle filter regenerat-

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®) ing automatically, and does not affect the NOTICE
(For Diesel Engine Model) way the vehicle runs.
Be sure to regenerate the DPF® when
The DPF® filters off the soot particles in DPF® warning light the DPF® warning light comes on.
the exhaust gas, so the DPF® could get Failure to regenerate the DPF® will
clogged depending on the driving condi- cause a vehicle malfunction due to
tion. The DPF® is cleaned by the regener- the clogged filter.
ating function that combusts the soot
particles in the DPF® by raising the NOTE:
exhaust gas temperature during driving or When the soot particles accumulated in
idling. the DPF® are combusted, the amount of
64J244 the engine oil may increase due to the dilu-
When a certain amount of soot particles is
If the DPF® warning light comes on when tion with the fuel. This is not a vehicle mal-
accumulated in the DPF®, the DPF® will
driving, the DPF® is nearly clogged. You function. The soot particles accumulated in
regenerate automatically to avoid clogging
should regenerate the DPF® when the the DPF® are combusted automatically
the filter. When the DPF® regenerates
DPF® warning light comes on. To go out during driving. However, they may not be
during idling, the engine revolutions will
the warning light, the vehicle must stay in combusted in the following cases.
increase by about 100 rpm and the radia-
motion until regeneration has been com- • When you drive at low speed for a long
tor fan will operate. Therefore, you may
pleted. time.
hear a little louder engine sounds (includ-
The process normally takes about 25 min- • When you repeat a short-time or short-
ing the fan sounds) and/or the exhaust gas
utes. distance driving.
temperature could be higher due to com-
bustion of the soot particles. The optimum condition to end the process 1) When the DPF® warning light comes
are achieved by keeping the vehicle in on, drive at a speed of 50 km/h (31
CAUTION motion at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph) or mph) or higher for more than 25 min-
higher, or an engine speed higher than utes to regenerate the DPF® properly.
Keep away from the exhaust pipe 2,000 rpm. For details, refer to “Diesel Particulate
when the engine is running. If the However, you should drive carefully and Filter” in this section.
DPF® is regenerating, the exhaust within the legal speed limit, and should 2) When the oil change request light
gas temperature could be higher. take in to consideration the surrounding blinks, change the engine oil and oil fil-
traffic condition. ter, and reset the oil life monitoring sys-
NOTE: If you drive your vehicle until the light goes tem. To reset the oil life monitoring
When you drive or idle your vehicle, white out, the regeneration of the DPF® will be system, consult your SUZUKI dealer.
smoke may be emitted depending on the completed. 3) When the engine oil level exceeds the
grade of fuel used. MAX level on the dipstick, consult your
SUZUKI dealer.
3-19
83RM0-01E

6MT model
Using the Transaxle
Manual Transaxle
5MT model
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
61MS2A004 61MS2A005
Starting off Reverse gear (6MT model): with lifting up

To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the ring, shift the gearshift lever to the right,
way to the floor and shift into 1st gear. engage gear.
EXAMPLE After releasing the parking brake, gradually
79MH0303 release the clutch. When you hear a
change in the engine’s sound, slowly press
the accelerator while continuing to gradu-
ally release the clutch.
Shifting
All forward gears are synchronized, which
provides for quiet, and easy shifting.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the
way to the floor before shifting gears. Keep
the engine speed does not rise into the red
zone of the tachometer.
3-20
83RM0-01E

Downshifting maximum allowable For D16AA engine models

speeds Downshifting km/h (mph) WARNING
For M16A engine models • Reduce your speed and downshift
2nd to 1st 45 (28)
to a lower gear before going down
Downshifting km/h (mph) 3rd to 2nd 75 (47) a long or steep hill. A lower gear
2nd to 1st 45 (28) will allow the engine to provide
4th to 3rd 130 (81) braking. Avoid riding the brakes or
3rd to 2nd 90 (56) 5th to 4th 180 (112)* they may overheat, resulting in
brake failure.
4th to 3rd 135 (84) 6th to 5th 225 (140)* • When driving on slippery roads, be
5th to 4th 190 (118)* sure to slow down before down-
*NOTE: shifting. Excessive and/or sudden
You may not accelerate to the maximum changes in engine speed may
For K10C engine models cause loss of traction, which could
allowable speed because of the driving sit-
Downshifting km/h (mph) uation and/or the vehicle condition. cause you to lose control.
2nd to 1st 40 (25)
NOTICE NOTICE
3rd to 2nd 80 (50)
When downshifting to a lower gear, Make sure that the vehicle is com-
4th to 3rd 125 (78) make sure not to downshift at the
pletely stationary before you shift
speed faster than the maximum
5th to 4th 170 (106)* into reverse.
allowable speeds for the next lower
speed, or severe engine damage can
For K14C engine models result. NOTICE
Downshifting km/h (mph) • To help avoid clutch damage, do
2nd to 1st 45 (28) not use the clutch pedal as a foot-
rest while driving or use the clutch
3rd to 2nd 85 (53) to keep the vehicle stationary on a
slope. Depress the clutch fully
4th to 3rd 130 (81) when shifting.
5th to 4th 175 (109)* • When shifting or starting off, do not
race the engine. Racing the engine
6th to 5th 210 (130)* can shorten engine life and cause
negative effect to smooth shifting.
3-21
83RM0-01E

The gearshift lever has a lock mechanism NOTE:

6-Speed Automatic Transaxle to help prevent accidental shifting. To shift • Always shift the gearshift lever without
the gearshift lever: pushing in the knob button (1) except
Gearshift lever when you shift from “P” to “R”, from “D”
EXAMPLE to “M”, from “N” to “R” or from “R” to “P”.
EXAMPLE If you always push in the knob button (1)
when shifting the gearshift lever, you
could shift into “P”, “R” or “M” by mistake.
• If driver’s or passenger’s knee hits the
gearshift lever while driving, the lever
could move and the gear could be
changed unexpectedly.
Use the gearshift lever positions as fol-

lows:
P (Park)
71LS10303
Use this position to lock the transaxle
71LS10302 when the vehicle is parked or when start-
(1) Knob button ing the engine. Shift into Park only when
The gearshift lever is designed so that it
cannot be shifted out of the “P” position the vehicle is completely stationary.
Shift with the knob button (1)
unless the ignition switch is in the “ON” pushed in and the brake pedal R (Reverse)
position or the ignition mode is “ON” and depressed. Use this position to reverse the vehicle
the brake pedal is depressed. from stop. Make sure that vehicle is com-
Shift with the knob button (1) pletely stationary before shifting into
WARNING pushed in. Reverse.
Always depress the brake pedal
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or NOTICE
Shift without the knob button (1)
“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station- pushed in. Do not shift the gearshift lever into
ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to “R” while moving forward, or the
help prevent the vehicle from moving transaxle may be damaged. If you
unexpectedly when you shift. shift into “R” when the vehicle speed
is over 11 km/h (7 mph), the transaxle
will not shift into reverse.
3-22
83RM0-01E

N (Neutral) Manual mode

Use this position for starting the engine if NOTICE The automatic transaxle can shift gears
the engine stalls and you need to restart it automatically. When using the manual
while the vehicle is moving. You may also Be sure to take the following precau- mode, you can shift gears in the same
shift into Neutral and depress the brake tions to help avoid damage to the manner as conventional manual transaxle.
pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during automatic transaxle: To use the manual mode, shift the gearshift
idling. • Make sure that the vehicle is com- lever from “D” to “M”.
pletely stationary before shifting
D (Drive) into “P” or “R”.
Use this position for all normal driving. • Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”, EXAMPLE
“D” or “M” when the engine is run-
With the gearshift lever in “D” range you
ning above idle speed.
can get an automatic downshift by press-
• Do not rev the engine with the
ing the accelerator pedal. The higher the
transaxle in a drive position (“R”,
vehicle speed is, the more you need to
“D” or “M”) and the front wheels
press the accelerator pedal to get a down-
not moving.
shift.
• Do not use the accelerator to hold
M (manual mode) the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi-
Use this position for driving in the manual cle’s brakes.
mode.
Refer to “Manual mode” later in this section
for details on how to use the manual mode. 71LS10304
EXAMPLE (1) (2)
61MM0A184
(1) Manual mode indicator

(2) Gear position
The information display shows the manual

mode indicator (1) and the current gear
position (2).
3-23
83RM0-01E

NOTE: Using the shift paddle

• The indicated gear position on the infor-
mation display when you shift from “D” to
“M” is the gear position that was
selected automatically when the gear-
shift lever was in “D”.
• You can change to the manual mode
temporarily by pulling the shift paddle on
the steering wheel toward you when the
gearshift lever is in “D”.
Shifting in the manual mode

You can shift gears from 1st to 6th depend-
ing on driving speed.
71LS10307
71LS10306
NOTE: To shift down, pull the “–” side shift paddle,
• When the engine is revved, the gear is To shift up, pull the “+” side shift paddle,
located on left side of the steering wheel,
shifted up automatically to prevent dam- located on right side of the steering wheel,
toward you. When you release your finger
age to the engine and the transaxle. toward you. When you release your finger
from the switch, the switch will return to the
• When the driving speed becomes slow, from the switch, the switch will return to the
original position.
the gear shifts down automatically, and original position.
when the vehicle stops, the gear position NOTE:
will be in 1st gear without shifting the • To shift gears continuously, release your
gearshift lever. finger from the shift paddle, then pull the
• If you depress the accelerator pedal a shift paddle again. You cannot shift
certain amount, the gear shifts down gears continuously while holding the
automatically even if the gearshift lever shift paddle toward you.
is in the manual mode. • When you pull the both “+” and “–” shift
paddle simultaneously, the gear may not
NOTE: shift.
When you change gear, sometimes the
transaxle may not shift to the desired gear
but a buzzer sounds instead. This is to
maintain good drivability and to protect the
transaxle.
3-24
83RM0-01E

Canceling the manual mode 1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly

To cancel the manual mode, shift the gear- If You Cannot Shift Automatic Tran- applied.
shift lever from “M” to “D”. saxle Gearshift Lever Out of “P” 2) If the engine is running, stop the
(PARK) engine.
Temporary manual mode 3) Make sure the key is in the “ON” or
Pull the shift paddle toward you when driv- Left Hand Drive Vehicle “ACC” position, or the ignition mode is
ing with the gearshift lever in the “D” posi- “ON” or “ACC”.
tion. The information display shows the 4) Remove the cover (1) over the button.
manual mode indicator (1) and the current 5) With the release button (1) pushed by
(1) (2)
gear position (2). the key or the flat end rod, push the
knob button (2) and shift the gearshift
EXAMPLE (1) (2) lever to the desired position.
This procedure is for emergency use only.
If repeated use of this procedure is neces-
sary, or the procedure does not work as
described, take the vehicle to your dealer
61MM0A184 for repair.
(1) Manual mode indicator EXAMPLE
(2) Gear position
71LS10310
The temporary manual mode will be can- Vehicles with an automatic transaxle have
celed automatically in the following situa- an electrically operated park-lock feature.
tions. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, or
• When you press and hold the accelera- there is some other electrical failure, the
tor pedal for a certain period of time with- automatic transaxle cannot be shifted out
out shifting gears. of Park in the normal way. Jump starting
• When driving speed becomes slow. may correct the condition. If not, follow the
procedure described below. This proce-
dure will permit shifting the transaxle out of
Park.
3-25
83RM0-01E

Right Hand Drive Vehicle 1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly

applied. Twin Clutch System by Suzuki
2) If the engine is running, stop the (TCSS)
engine.
(1)
(2) 3) Make sure the key is in the “ON” or NOTICE
“ACC” position, or the ignition mode is
“ON” or “ACC”. Do not depress the accelerator pedal
4) With the release button (1) pushed, with depressing the brake pedal. This
push the knob button (2) and shift the can cause damage or overheating to
gearshift lever to the desired position. the clutch.
This procedure is for emergency use only. NOTE:
If repeated use of this procedure is neces- You may hear an operating noise when the
sary, or the procedure does not work as driver’s door is opened. This sound is nor-
EXAMPLE described, take the vehicle to your dealer mal and indicates that the TCSS runs
71LS10311
for repair. automatically.
Vehicles with an automatic transaxle have
an electrically operated park-lock feature. Gearshift lever
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, or
there is some other electrical failure, the EXAMPLE
automatic transaxle cannot be shifted out
of Park in the normal way. Jump starting
may correct the condition. If not, follow the
procedure described below. This proce-
dure will permit shifting the transaxle out of
Park.
61MM446
3-26
83RM0-01E

The gearshift lever is designed so that it NOTE:

cannot be shifted out of the “P” position • Always shift the gearshift lever without
unless the ignition mode is “ON” and the Shift with the knob button pushing in the knob button (1) except
brake pedal is depressed. (1) pushed in and the brake when you shift from “P” to “R”, from “N”
pedal depressed. to “R” or from “R” to “P”. If you always
WARNING push in the knob button (1) when shifting
the gearshift lever, you could shift into
Always depress the brake pedal Shift without the knob but- “P” or “R” by mistake.
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or ton (1) pushed in. • If driver’s or passenger’s knee hits the
“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station- gearshift lever while driving, the lever
ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to could move and the gear could be
help prevent the vehicle from moving changed unexpectedly.
unexpectedly when you shift. Shift with the knob button • When the gearshift lever position and
(1) pushed in. the selector / gear position indication in
The gearshift lever has a lock mechanism the information display are unmatched,
to help prevent accidental shifting. To shift the indication will blink and the interior
the gearshift lever: When you release your
hand from the gearshift buzzer will sound. If the indication blink-
lever, it will return to the ing and the buzzer sounds continue for a
EXAMPLE (1) original position. few seconds, depress the brake pedal,
shift the gearshift lever to “P”, and then
shift the gearshift lever again.
NOTICE
If you keep depressing the brake
pedal for longer than 15 minutes
when the gearshift lever is in “P”
position, the lever cannot be shifted
out of “P” position. In this case,
release your foot from the brake
pedal, then depress again. If the gear-
shift lever cannot be shifted yet, there
may be something wrong with the
gearshift lever. Ask your SUZUKI
61MM463 dealer to have it inspected.
(1) Knob button
3-27
83RM0-01E

Use the gearshift lever positions as fol- D (Drive) NOTE:

lows: Use this position for all normal driving. Warning buzzer will sound in the following
cases:
With the gearshift lever in “D” range you
P (Park) • If the manual shifting is not accepted.
can get an automatic downshift by press-
Use this position to lock the transaxle • If you shift into “D” when the reverse
ing the accelerator pedal. The higher the
when the vehicle is parked or when start- speed is over 10 km/h (6 mph).
vehicle speed is, the more you need to
ing the engine. Shift into Park only when • If you shift into “R” when the forward
press the accelerator pedal to get a down-
the vehicle is completely stationary. speed is over 10 km/h (6 mph).
shift. • If the driver’s door is opened when the
R (Reverse) gearshift lever is in a position other than
M (manual mode)
Use this position to reverse the vehicle “P” and the engine is running.
Use this position for driving in the manual
from stop. Make sure that vehicle is com- • If the automatic gear shifting or manual
mode.
pletely stationary before shifting into shifting is prohibited due to a vehicle
Refer to “Manual mode” later in this section
Reverse. malfunction.
for details on how to use the manual mode.
• If the gear is not engaged and it
NOTICE NOTICE becomes “N” automatically.
Do not shift the gearshift lever into • If the clutch temperature rises above the
“R” or into “D” or “M” from “R” while Be sure to take the following precau- specified temperature.
the vehicle is in motion. If you shift tions to help avoid damage to the • If the gearshift lever or TCSS has a
when the vehicle speed is over 10 TCSS: problem.
km/h (6 mph), the gear will not be • Make sure that the vehicle is com-
changed, the selector position in the pletely stationary before shifting
information display will blink, and the into “P” or “R”.
interior buzzer will sound. This con- • Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,
trol helps to prevent damage to the “D” or “M” when the engine is run-
transaxle. ning above idle speed.
• Do not rev the engine with the
transaxle in a drive position (“R”,
N (Neutral) “D” or “M”) and the wheels not
Use this position for starting the engine if moving.
the engine stalls and you need to restart it • Do not use the accelerator to hold
while the vehicle is moving. You may also the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi-
shift into Neutral and depress the brake cle’s brakes.
pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during
idling.
3-28
83RM0-01E

Creeping function How to operate in the drive mode

This vehicle has a creeping function that Normal driving: WARNING
helps the vehicle to start smoothly by 1) Start the engine as instructed in “Start-
engaging the clutch. When the gearshift ing the engine” in this section. While driving the vehicle, do not shift
lever is in any of the positions “D”, “M” or 2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the gearshift lever to the “N” posi-
“R”, and you release your foot from the the gearshift lever to the “D” position. tion. The engine brake may not work
brake pedal, the vehicle starts slowly with- When the gearshift lever is shifted to and you may get involved in an unex-
out depressing the accelerator pedal. The the “D” position, the gear will be shifted pected accident. If you return the
creeping function is disabled in the follow- to 1st. gearshift lever from “N” to “D”
ing conditions: because of unintended shifting, the
• The brake pedal is depressed gear position will be shifted accord-
• The parking brake lever is engaged ing to the current vehicle speed.
CAUTION NOTICE
Always keep your foot on the brake If the gearshift lever cannot shift into
pedal while stopped with the engine 61MM464
any position, or the gear is changed
running. This operation prevents the NOTE: to “N” position automatically when
vehicle from moving due to unin- If 1st gear cannot be engaged even though the vehicle stops, there may be a sys-
tended activation of the creeping the gearshift lever has been shifted to the tematic malfunction. In this case, ask
function. “D” position, the system will re-try shifting your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the
automatically. This will take some time, TCSS as soon as possible.
Drive mode noise may be heard from the gears, and
When the drive mode is activated, the shifting gear shock may occur. However,
most appropriate gear position is automati- they do not indicate a malfunction. If the
cally selected upon operation of the accel- system is unable to re-try shifting, you
erator pedal and variation of vehicle should depress the brake pedal and shift
speed. the gearshift lever to “N” position, then shift
to “D” again.
3) Release the parking brake and brake

pedal.
4) Depress the accelerator pedal slowly.
3-29
83RM0-01E

Starting off on an uphill: Starting off on a downhill: Manual mode

1) Apply the parking brake firmly so that 1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the When using the manual mode, you can
the vehicle does not roll backwards. gearshift lever to the “D” position. Make shift gears in the same manner as conven-
2) Shift the gearshift lever to the “D” posi- sure that the gear is in 1st by checking tional manual transaxle.
tion while depressing the brake pedal. the gear position indication. To use the manual mode, shift the gearshift
Make sure that the gear position indica- 2) Release the brake pedal and depress lever from “D” to “M”.
tion in the information display shows the accelerator pedal slowly. Even if the
1st gear. accelerator pedal is not depressed, the EXAMPLE
3) Release the brake pedal and depress clutch will be engaged when the vehicle
the accelerator pedal gradually, and speed increases.
when the vehicle starts to move,
release the parking brake and depress Using engine braking:
the accelerator pedal to start off. When driving on a downhill slope, down-
shifting is recommended. So you can use
NOTICE engine braking.
By pulling the “–” side shift paddle or by
On an uphill slope, never hold the placing the gearshift lever in the “M” posi-
vehicle at a stop using only the accel- tion, the manual mode is selected, and you
erator pedal or the creeping function. can shift to a lower gear manually. For
If you perform this operation for a details of downshift operation, refer to
certain period of time, the warning “Manual mode” or “Temporary manual 61MM448
buzzer will sound, and in some cases mode”.
the engine will stall. This can also
shorten the life cycle of the clutch, or EXAMPLE (1) (2)
cause excessive damage to the
clutch.
NOTE:
When you start the vehicle by the above 61MM0A184
procedure, the hill hold control system may
(1) Manual mode indicator
not work. Refer to “Hill Hold Control Sys-
(2) Gear position
tem” in this section for details.
The information display shows the manual
mode indicator and the current gear posi-
tion.
3-30
83RM0-01E

NOTE: Using the gearshift lever Using the shift paddle

You can change to the manual mode tem-
porarily by pulling the shift paddle on the (2)
steering wheel toward you when the gear-
shift lever is in “D”.
Shifting in the manual mode

You can shift gears from 1st to 6th depend-
ing on driving speed.
NOTE:
• When the engine is revved, the gear (1)
may shift up automatically to prevent
damage to the engine and the transaxle.
• When the driving speed becomes slow, 61MM449 71LS10306
the gear shifts down automatically, and
when the vehicle stops, the gear position (1) “+” side (shift up) To shift up, pull the “+” side shift paddle,
will be in 1st gear without shifting the (2) “–” side (shift down) located on right side of the steering wheel,
gearshift lever. toward you. When you release your finger
To shift up, pull the gearshift lever to the from the switch, the switch will return to the
NOTE: “+” side (rearward). When you release your original position.
When you change gear, sometimes the hand from the gearshift lever, the lever will
transaxle may not shift to the desired gear return to the “M” position automatically.
but a buzzer sounds instead. This is to To shift down, push the gearshift lever to
maintain good drivability and to protect the the “–” side (forward). When you release
transaxle. your hand from the gearshift lever, the
lever will return to the “M” position auto-
matically.
NOTE:
To shift gears continuously, release your
hand from the gearshift lever, then shift the
lever again. You cannot shift gears contin-
uously while holding the lever in the “+” or
“–” position.
3-31
83RM0-01E

Canceling the manual mode

To cancel the manual mode, shift the gear- If You Cannot Shift TCSS Gearshift
shift lever from “M” to “D”. Lever Out of “P” (PARK)
Temporary manual mode Left Hand Drive Vehicle

Pull the shift paddle toward you when driv-
ing with the gearshift lever in the “D” posi-
tion. The information display shows the (2)
(1)
current gear position.
EXAMPLE (1)
71LS10307
To shift down, pull the “–” side shift paddle, 61MM450

located on left side of the steering wheel,
toward you. When you release your finger (1) Gear position EXAMPLE
from the switch, the switch will return to the
original position. NOTE: 61MM451
The manual mode indicator does not Vehicles with a TCSS have an electrically
NOTE: appear in the temporary manual mode. operated park-lock feature. If the vehicle’s
• To shift gears continuously, release your battery is discharged, or there is some
finger from the shift paddle, then pull the The temporary manual mode will be can- other electrical failure, the TCSS cannot be
shift paddle again. You cannot shift celed automatically in the following situa- shifted out of Park in the normal way. Jump
gears continuously while holding the tions. starting may correct the condition. If not,
shift paddle toward you. • When you press and hold the accelera- follow the procedure described below. This
• When you operate both shift paddles tor pedal for a certain period of time with- procedure will permit shifting the transaxle
and gearshift lever simultaneously, the out shifting gears. out of Park.
gear may not be shifted. • When driving speed becomes slow.
1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
2) If the engine is running, stop the
engine.
3) Make sure the ignition mode is “ON” or
“ACC”.
3-32
83RM0-01E

4) Remove the cover (1) over the button. procedure will permit shifting the transaxle
5) While pushing the release button at the out of Park. Gearshift Indicator
bottom of the removed cover (1) by the
1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly
key or the flat end rod, push the knob
applied.
button (2) and shift the gearshift lever to EXAMPLE
2) If the engine is running, stop the
the desired position.
engine.
This procedure is for emergency use only. 3) Make sure the ignition mode is “ON” or
If repeated use of this procedure is neces- “ACC”.
sary, or the procedure does not work as 4) While pushing the release button (1),
described, consult your SUZUKI dealer or push the knob button (2) and shift the
a roadside assistance service. gearshift lever to the desired position.
This procedure is for emergency use only.
Right Hand Drive Vehicle
If repeated use of this procedure is neces-
sary, or the procedure does not work as (1)
described, consult your SUZUKI dealer or
(2) a roadside assistance service.
(1) 61MM0A133
(1) Gearshift indicator

In the following cases, the gearshift indica-
tor is indicated on the information display
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or the ignition mode is “ON”.
• For manual transaxle vehicle, when the
gearshift lever is in a position other than
EXAMPLE “N” (Neutral).
61MM452 • For automatic transaxle or TCSS vehi-
cle, when using the manual mode.
Vehicles with a TCSS have an electrically
• For vehicles equipped with the cruise
operated park-lock feature. If the vehicle’s
control, when the system is not in use.
battery is discharged, or there is some
• For vehicles equipped with the radar
other electrical failure, the TCSS cannot be
brake support system, when the forward
shifted out of Park in the normal way. Jump
collision warning is not working.
starting may correct the condition. If not,
follow the procedure described below. This
3-33
83RM0-01E

The electronic control system monitors NOTE:

driving condition (such as vehicle speed WARNING • For manual transaxle, the gearshift indi-
and/or engine revolution), and it shows cator is not indicated when the gear
which gear position is optimal for your driv- The gearshift indicator is designed to position is in “N” (Neutral).
ing with the indication on the display. indicate optimal gear position for • For manual transaxle, if you depress the
your driving, however, a driver will clutch pedal while UP/DOWN arrow is
Manual transaxle vehicle not be relieved from the duty of care indicated, the indication will disappear.
If UP/DOWN arrow and the gear position of driving operation or gear change • In ordinary driving, UP arrow will disap-
other than currently selected are indicated with this indicator. pear when you release your foot from
on the display while driving, we recom- To drive safe, do not gaze the gear- the accelerator pedal.
mend you to shift up or down the gear to shift indicator, pay attention to your If your vehicle is equipped with the adap-
indicated position. It is the optimal gear driving situation and shift up or down tive cruise control and while it is working,
position for a driving condition that reduces if necessary. however, UP/DOWN arrow (for manual
the over revolution and stress to the transaxle vehicle) or UP arrow (for auto-
engine, and improves fuel consumption. matic transaxle or TCSS vehicle, when
Automatic transaxle or TCSS vehicle using the manual mode) may be indi-
(when using the manual mode) cated continuously depending on driv-
If UP arrow is indicated on the display ing conditions. It means that the
while driving, we recommend you to shift indicated gear position is optimal for the
up the gear until the arrow disappears. It is current cruising speed.
the optimal gear position for a driving con- • The indication of gearshift indicator tim-
dition that reduces the over revolution and ing may differ depending on the vehicle
stress to the engine, and improves fuel condition and/or driving situation even in
consumption. the same vehicle speed and engine rev-
olution.
For details on how to use the transaxle,
refer to “Using the Transaxle” in this sec-
tion.
3-34
83RM0-01E

Example of the gearshift indicator
Manual transaxle
Indication Description
Lower gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution. Changing to a higher gear posi-
tion is recommended.
• In this case, shifting up to 4th gear position is recommended.
Current gear position is optimal for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution.
• In this case, your vehicle is running in 3rd gear position.
Higher gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution. Changing to a lower gear posi-
tion is recommended.
• In this case, shifting down to 2nd gear position is recommended.
Automatic transaxle or TCSS (when using the manual mode)
Lower gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution. Changing to a higher gear posi-
(2) tion is recommended.
• In this case, shifting up 5th or upper gear position is recommended.
Current gear position is optimal for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution.
(2)
• In this case, your vehicle is running in 4th gear position.
NOTE:
For TCSS models, the manual mode indicator (2) does not appear in the temporary manual mode.
3-35
83RM0-01E

SPORT
Four-mode 4WD System This mode is optimized for sporty driving. EXAMPLE
(if equipped) The system apportions torque to promote (3)
cornering performance.
• In the vehicle with automatic transaxle,
this mode optimizes the throttle/torque W SPO
NO R
EXAMPLE characteristics with small and moderate
T
S
(1)
throttle openings to keep the engine PUSH
LOCK
W SPO
R
speed high for good response. AUTO
NO
• In the vehicle with TCSS, this mode opti-
T
S
LOCK PUSH
AUTO mizes the accelerator/torque character- DR
IV E EC
T
M ODE SEL
DR
IVE EC
T
istics, the gear change timing and the
gear change speed for the faster accel-
MO DE S E L
(4) (2)
eration and better response.
61MM0B005
SNOW
This mode is optimal for snowy, unpaved, Selecting AUTO mode
and other slippery surfaces. This mode Push the “PUSH AUTO” part (2) of the
enhances traction during acceleration on driving mode switch.
61MM0B004 slippery surfaces, and enables stable cor- Selecting SPORT mode
(1) Driving mode switch nering on slippery surfaces. Turn the dial (3) of the driving mode switch
The four-mode 4WD system enables you LOCK clockwise to the “SPORT” position.
to select the driving mode according to This mode is for extricating the car from Selecting SNOW mode
driving conditions by operating the driving snow, mud, or sand. Turn the dial (3) of the driving mode switch
mode switch. counterclockwise to the “SNOW” position.
Driving Mode Switch Operation Selecting LOCK mode
Driving Modes Operate the driving mode switch according When the vehicle speed is less than 60
to the appropriate procedure described km/h (37 mph) and the SNOW mode is
AUTO below. selected, push the “LOCK” part (4) of the
This mode prioritizes fuel economy in typi- driving mode switch.
cal driving conditions. The system How to turn on driving mode switch
The driving mode switch will activate when NOTE:
switches the driving mode to 4WD if it
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position or If the vehicle speed exceeds about 60 km/h
detects wheel spin.
the ignition mode is “ON”. in the LOCK mode, the driving mode
changes to the SNOW mode automatically.
Even when the vehicle speed reduces, on
3-36
83RM0-01E

the other hand, the driving mode does not The 4WD warning light warns of this
return to the LOCK mode automatically. You condition by blinking. At the same time, NOTICE
should select the LOCK mode according to the information display shows this mes-
the driving conditions. sage: “AWD SYSTEM HIGH TEMP (Continued)
AWD IS OFF”. • If the 4WD warning light comes on
NOTE: or blinks when driving, there may
• The information display shows current be something wrong with the four-
driving mode. mode 4WD system. Have the sys-
• When the ignition switch is turned to the tem inspected by an authorized
“ON” position or the engine switch is SUZUKI dealer.
“ON”, the AUTO mode is selected auto-
matically. NOTICE
• The driving mode switch can be oper- 57L30042
Unevenly worn tires can cause prob-
ated when the vehicle is either stopped When the 4WD warning light blinks, park lems with the 4WD system. Be sure to
or moving. the vehicle at a safe place and run the rotate the tires according to the main-
• Make sure that the front wheels are in engine idle. After a while, the 4WD warn- tenance schedule. Refer to “Tires”
the straight ahead position when operating light will go out and the system will and “Maintenance Schedule” in the
ing the driving mode switch. resume. “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
• While making turns or accelerating and section for proper tire rotation proce-
decelerating, operating the driving mode NOTICE dures.
switch, turning the ignition switch to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position or pressing • Note that 4WD vehicles are not all-
the engine switch to change the ignition around vehicles. Be sure to Warning and Indicator Messages
mode to “ACC” or “LOCK” may cause a observe the following instructions
shock, but this is not a system malfunc- when driving your vehicle. The information display shows the warning
tion. – Do not drive through water such and indicator message when the four-
• When you operate your vehicle under as by crossing a river. mode 4WD system is operated, or has a
conditions that involve wheel spin, such – Do not drive continuously in problem.
as driving off-road in the sand or water places such as sand and mud
or when a wheel has run off the road, the where front wheels tend to race.
difference in the amount of revolution – When any wheel is in the air for
between front wheels and rear wheels such reason as running off the
increases (wheels run idle). If this state road, do not race it needlessly.
continues, the oil temperature of the (Continued)
driving system parts increases.
3-37
83RM0-01E


Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be a problem with the four-
rior buzzer) mode 4WD system.
61MM0A185
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- Tires of different sizes may be fitted or tires
rior buzzer) may be insufficiently inflated.
61MM0A186
3-38
83RM0-01E


Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- Drive train components may be over-
rior buzzer) heated.
Stop in a safe place and allow the engine to
idle.
61MM0A187
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- If this message is displayed, have your
rior buzzer) vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.
61MM0A203
3-39
83RM0-01E


Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- The “LOCK” part of the driving mode switch
rior buzzer) is pushed when the vehicle speed is more
than 60 km/h (37 mph). (#1)
Refer to “Selecting LOCK mode” in this
section.
61MM0A204
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- The “LOCK” part of the driving mode switch
rior buzzer) is pushed without selecting the SNOW
mode. (#1)
Refer to “Selecting LOCK mode” in this
section.
61MM0A188
3-40
83RM0-01E


Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be a problem with the driving
rior buzzer) mode switch. Have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
61MM0A189
3-41
83RM0-01E

ENG A-STOP System WARNING

(Engine Auto Stop Start (Continued)
• When the engine does not restart
System) (if equipped) automatically even if you operate
properly, start the engine using the
The ENG A-STOP system (Engine Auto ignition switch or engine switch.
Stop Start System) automatically stops and – Keep stopping on the road may
restarts the engine without operating the result in rear collision.
ignition switch or the engine switch when – In case the vehicle moves, the
the vehicle is stopped, such as at a traffic steering and braking operation
signal or in a traffic jam, to reduce exhaust will require more efforts.
gases and fuel consumption.
• When the vehicle will be stopped for a NOTICE
72M2042
long time or when you will leave the
vehicle unattended, turn the ignition Only use the vehicle battery types
switch to the “LOCK” position or press WARNING that have been approved by SUZUKI
the engine switch to stop the engine. vehicle manufacture, otherwise you
• Do not go out the vehicle when the could damage your vehicle, and the
engine is stopping by the ENG A- ENG A-STOP system could not be
NOTE: STOP system. This may result in an
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto air available. If a vehicle battery has to
accident. be replaced, consult your authorized
conditioning system, you can change the – For manual transaxle vehicle, if
auto engine stop condition via the informa- SUZUKI dealer.
the driver’s seat belt is unfas-
tion display. Refer to “Information Display” tened and the driver’s door is
in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section. opened, the engine will stall. The ENG A-STOP system is automatically
– For automatic transaxle or TCSS activated when the ignition switch is turned
vehicle, if the driver’s seat belt is to the “ON” position or the engine switch is
unfastened even if the brake pressed to change the ignition mode to
pedal is pressed down, or the “ON”.
driver’s door is opened, the
engine will be restarted to warn The system activation also requires the fol-
you that the engine was stopped lowing conditions:
automatically by the ENG A- • Driver’s seat belt is fastened.
STOP system. • Driver’s door is closed.
(Continued) • Engine hood is closed.
3-42
83RM0-01E

For more details, refer to the explanation • The “ENG A-STOP OFF” light blinks.
below. • Engine coolant temperature is either low
or high.
• Vehicle battery performance is low.
Automatically Stopping the Engine • The temperature of the vehicle battery is
either low or high.
Manual transaxle models • Brake booster vacuum pressure is low.
1) With the clutch pedal fully depressed, • Depressing the accelerator pedal.
stop the vehicle. (1) • Blower speed selector is set to the “ON”
mode and the inside of the vehicle has
EXAMPLE not sufficiently cooled and warmed (for
the vehicle with automatic air condition-
ing).
• The defrost switch is set to the “ON”
83RM075 mode (for the vehicle with automatic air
3) Release the clutch pedal. conditioning).
The “ENG A-STOP” indicator light • During or after the ABS or ESP® system
(green) (1) in the instrument cluster will is activated, and the vehicle is stopped.
illuminate and the engine will stop auto- • During the first period use, to initialize
matically. the system.
• After the engine restarted automatically,
NOTICE and the vehicle speed had not exceeded
approximately 6 km/h.
61MM701 The brake booster becomes inoperative • When the engine is started with the hood
2) While depressing the brake and clutch and the pedal effort will increase when open.
pedal, place the gearshift lever in the the engine is stopped automatically. • When the vehicle is stopped after back-
“N” (Neutral) position. If the vehicle is moving, press down ing up.
the brake pedal harder than usual. • The signal to prevent stopping the
engine is received from any electronic
NOTE: control systems other than the ENG A-
The ENG A-STOP system will not operate STOP system.
and engine does not stop automatically
under the following conditions:
• The “ENG A-STOP OFF” switch is
pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP
system.
3-43
83RM0-01E

Automatic transaxle or TCSS models • When the engine is started with the hood
1) With the gearshift lever in “D” or “N”, NOTICE open.
depress brake pedal and stop the vehi- • The vehicle has stopped on a steep hill.
cle. The brake booster becomes inoperative • The gearshift lever is in a position other
and the pedal effort will increase when than “D” or “N”.
the engine is stopped automatically. • The vehicle is driven in the manual
EXAMPLE If the vehicle is moving, press down mode.
the brake pedal harder than usual. • When the vehicle has stopped without
depressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: • The signal to prevent stopping the
The ENG A-STOP system will not operate engine is received from any electronic
and engine does not stop automatically control systems other than the ENG A-
under the following conditions: STOP system.
61MM453 pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP
system.
• The “ENG A-STOP OFF” light blinks.
• Engine coolant temperature is either low
or high.
• The temperature of the vehicle battery is
either low or high.
• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low.
(1) • Depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Blower speed selector is set to the “ON”
83RM076
2) The “ENG A-STOP” indicator light not sufficiently cooled and warmed.
(green) (1) in the instrument cluster will • The defrost switch is set to the “ON”
illuminate and the engine will stop auto- mode.
matically. • During or after the ABS or ESP® system
is activated, and the vehicle is stopped.
• During the first period use, to initialize
the system.
• After the engine restarted automatically,
and the vehicle speed had not exceeded
approximately 5 km/h.
3-44
83RM0-01E

• Blower speed selector is set to the “ON”

Automatically Restarting the Engine NOTICE mode and the inside of the vehicle has
not sufficiently cooled and warmed (for
Manual transaxle models The ENG A-STOP system will not the vehicle with automatic air condition-
operate and engine does not restart ing).
automatically or the engine stalls
with warning buzzer under the follow-
ing conditions: mode (for the vehicle with automatic air
• Driver’s seat belt is not fastened conditioning).
and driver’s door is open. • Electric power consumption is high, such
• Engine hood is open. as when the heated rear window and
• If the gearshift lever is moved to a heated outside rearview mirrors (if
position other than the “N” (Neu- equipped) switch is “ON” or other electri-
(1) cal components (audio, air conditioning
tral) position without depressing
the clutch pedal. etc.) are operating.
When the engine stalls, restart the • The “ENG A-STOP OFF” switch is
engine by usual operation. pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP
Refer to “Starting the Engine” in this system.
83RM077 NOTE:
Depress the clutch pedal while the gear- NOTE: When the engine restarts, the sound of the
shift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position. If the engine stalled by a rapid clutch oper- audio may be interrupted.
“ENG A-STOP” indicator light (green) (1) in ation, the engine will restart with the gear This is normal and not the malfunction of
the instrument cluster will be turned off and positioned “N” (neutral) and the clutch the audio system.
the engine will restart automatically. pedal depressed.
NOTE:
Under the following conditions, the engine
will restart automatically even if the engine
was stopped by the ENG A-STOP system:
• When the vehicle coasts down a slope.
• An engine stopped, and a few minutes
passed.
3-45
83RM0-01E

Automatic transaxle or TCSS models NOTE: NOTE:

Under the following conditions, the engine When the engine restarts, the sound of the
will restart automatically even if the engine audio may be interrupted.
was stopped by the ENG A-STOP system: This is normal and not the malfunction of
• When the vehicle coasts down a slope. the audio system.
• An engine stopped, and a few minutes
passed.
(1) • Blower speed selector is set to the “ON”
not sufficiently cooled and warmed.
mode.
• Electric power consumption is high, such
83RM078 as when the heated rear window and
Release the brake pedal. heated outside rearview mirrors (if
“ENG A-STOP” indicator light (green) (1) in equipped) switch is “ON” or other electri-
the instrument cluster will be turned off and cal components (audio, air conditioning
the engine will restart automatically. etc.) are operating.
NOTICE pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP
system.
The ENG A-STOP system will not • The accelerator pedal is depressed.
operate and engine does not restart • The gearshift lever is shifted into “P”, “R”
automatically or the engine stalls or “M”.
with warning buzzer under the follow- • After the gearshift lever is shifted to “N”,
ing condition: it is returned to “D”.
• Engine hood is open. • When the driver’s seat belt is unfas-
When the engine stalls, restart the tened.
engine by usual operation. • When the driver’s door is opened.
Refer to “Starting the Engine” in this
3-46
83RM0-01E

To Deactivate the ENG A-STOP Sys- “ENG A-STOP OFF” Light Adaptive Cruise Control
tem If the “ENG A-STOP OFF” light blinks System (if equipped)
when driving, there may be something
Type A wrong with the ENG A-STOP system. You
should have the system inspected by an The adaptive cruise control system allows
authorized SUZUKI dealer. For details, you to maintain a steady speed without
refer to “Warning and Indicator Lights” in keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
the “BEFORE DRIVING” section. You can use the adaptive cruise control
system under the following conditions:
• Driver’s seat belt is fastened.

• Open door warning light is off.
• Parking brake is completely released.
• Speed limiter is not used.
• For manual transaxle vehicle, the gear
position is in 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th (if
equipped).
61MM0A101
• For automatic transaxle or TCSS, the
Type B select lever is in “D” position, or the gear
position is in 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th in the
manual mode.
• The vehicle speed is about 40 km/h (25
mph) or higher.
• ESP® OFF switch is not pushed and the
system is not turned off.
61MM414
Push the “ENG A-STOP OFF” switch. The

“ENG A-STOP OFF” light will come on.
3-47
83RM0-01E

The adaptive cruise control system has the • Possible detecting distance between
WARNING following four controls. your vehicle and a vehicle ahead is
within about 100 m (328 ft).
• Deceleration control by the adap- (1) Constant-speed control
tive cruise control system is lim- (There is no vehicle ahead) (3) Following control
ited. Therefore, you are requested (A vehicle ahead is within radar range
to pay enough attention for safety and going at a steady speed)
driving, by checking the surround- EXAMPLE
ing traffic always and operating
brake pedal and/or accelerator EXAMPLE
pedal as necessary.
• In the following situations, the tilt
and/or height of the vehicle is
changed, the system does not 83RM008
function properly and unexpected
accidents may occur. Your vehicle cruises at the set speed.
83RM010
– With a modified suspension • The vehicle speed can be set between
(Altering the vehicle height, etc.) 40 km/h (25 mph) to 160 km/h (100 Your vehicle follows the vehicle ahead,
– With non-specified sized tires mph). keeping a constant distance, without
equipped exceeding the set speed.
– With worn or extremely uneven (2) Deceleration control
NOTE:
tires equipped (A vehicle ahead is within radar range
• When your vehicle is getting close to the
– With low, or high, tire pressure and going slower than the set speed)
vehicle ahead while deceleration control
or following control is functioning, a fron-
EXAMPLE tal collision warning is activated.
• When operating brake pedal during fol-
lowing control, you might feel that a
brake is heavy. However, this is normal
in the brake system. This occurs
because of the feature of adaptive cruise
83RM009
control system.
Your vehicle slows down, and maintains
the same speed as the speed of the vehi-
cle ahead to maintain the following dis-
tance.
3-48
83RM0-01E

(4) Acceleration control

(A vehicle ahead goes out of range) Situations where the Radar will not
Activate Properly EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Do not use the adaptive cruise con-
trol system under the following situa-
tions. Otherwise, the system will not 83RM013
function properly and unexpected
accidents may occur. • Highway gate
83RM011
• When your vehicle cannot move in a
The adaptive cruise control system accel- straight manner without consistently
erates your vehicle to the set speed, and Under the following situations, there is a steering, due to an accident or break-
then maintains it. high possibility that deceleration control, down
following control and acceleration control • When your vehicle is running left turn
will not function properly, even if a vehicle lane or right turn lane
ahead is within radar range. • When the radiator grill or front bumper
• When your vehicle is driven in a traffic hit a hard object
jam • When the system is temporarily stopped
• When your vehicle is driven on sharp or malfunctioning, some of the following
curves indicator and messages will come on:
• When your vehicle is driven on slippery – Adaptive cruise control system warn-
road such as ice or snow-covered road ing light
• When your vehicle is driven on steep hill – “INSPECT CRUISE SYSTEM” mes-
sage
EXAMPLE – “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT: NOT
ACTIVE BY SENSOR.” message
– “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT SYS
INSPECTION REQUIRED” message
– “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT FCN
TEMPORARILY DISABLED” message
83RM012
• When your vehicle is driven on the road

with many steep uphills and downhills
• When your vehicle is towing a trailer
3-49
83RM0-01E

Situations where the Radar may not Situations where the Radar may
Activate Properly EXAMPLE Activate Properly
Under the following situations, the radar Under the following situations, the radar
may not detect a vehicle ahead correctly system detects a vehicle on the neighbor-
and frontal collision warning may not func- ing lane or roadside objects and frontal col-
tion. You need to decelerate the vehicle lision warning may function.
operating brakes as necessary.
83RM014 • At a corner or narrow traffic lane
• When a vehicle ahead is running slowly • When the bicycles or motorcycles are • The vehicle position in your lane
or stopping at the end of the line in a traf- running on the edge of your lane is unstable due to steering operation etc.
fic jam or the tollgate • Objects protruding from the road’s
• When your vehicle is approaching WARNING surface such as manhole covers and
repairing road other metal objects, as well as falling
• While running inside of tunnel Always drive safely with proper driv- objects or level changes in the road
• When the radar sensor is covered in ing operations depending on traffic
snow, water or dirt situation. WARNING
• When there is bad weather such as
heavy rain or fog, a blizzard or sand- Always drive safely with proper driv-
storm or when the vehicle in front of you ing operations depending on traffic
is surrounded by water, snow or sand situation.
• A vehicle ahead has extremely small
rear end area such as an unloaded
trailer
• When your vehicle is weighed down by
heavy items in the luggage compartment
or rear seat
• When your vehicle is running at 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher speed
• When a vehicle ahead is cutting in sud-
denly
3-50
83RM0-01E

Information display 3) Push “SET –” switch (5), “SET” indica-

Setting Cruising Speed tor (8) and set speed indication (10)
EXAMPLE appear on the information display.
Adaptive cruise control switch Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
(7) (6)
EXAMPLE and the set speed will be maintained. At
this time, vehicle ahead detecting indi-
cator (9) will vary as follows, depending
(3) on the presence or absence of the vehi-
cle ahead.
(1)
(4) Indication Description
(2) A vehicle ahead is not
(5) (8) (9) (10) detected. In this case, the
vehicle is in the state of
54P010315
constant-speed control.
(6) Following distance indicator
54P000346 (7) Cruise indicator A vehicle ahead is
(1) Following distance setting switch (8) “SET” indicator detected. In this case, the
(2) “CRUISE” switch (9) Vehicle ahead detecting indicator vehicle is in the state of
(3) “CANCEL” switch (10) Set speed indication deceleration control and
(4) “RES +” switch following control.
(5) “SET –” switch 1) Turn on the adaptive cruise control sys-
tem by pushing “CRUISE” switch (2).
When the cruise indicator (7), following WARNING
distance indicator (6) and vehicle If the cruising speed is accidentally
ahead detecting indicator (9) appear on set, you could lose control of the
the information display, you can set vehicle. This could lead to an acci-
cruising speed. dent, resulting in severe injury or
2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desired death.
speed. Turn off the adaptive cruise control
system and check that the cruise
indicator (7) disappears when the
system is not in use.
3-51
83RM0-01E

Changing following distance

While cruise indicator (7) is on, you can adjust a following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead as follows, by pressing
following distance setting switch (1).
Short (“Dist: 1”)

A following distance will be kept shorter, compared with Middle setting.
Middle (“Dist: 2”)

This is an initial setting. When your vehicle is driven at 80 km/h (50 mph), a following distance will be
kept as about 40 m (131 ft).
Long (“Dist: 3”)

A following distance will be kept longer, compared with Middle setting.
WARNING
Maintain a safe following distance depending on traffic situation. Otherwise, it could result in severe injury or death.
NOTE:
• When turning off the engine, the previously set distance in the memory is canceled and the system is initialized.
• An appropriate following distance will vary depending on vehicle speed.
3-52
83RM0-01E

NOTE:
Changing Speed Temporarily When the brake pedal is depressed, “SET” Canceling Adaptive Cruise Control
When the cruising speed is maintained, indicator (8) disappears until you reset the “SET” indicator (8) will disappear and the
you can temporarily accelerate or deceler- cruising speed. adaptive cruise control system will be can-
ate. celed temporarily under the following con-
Using “RES +” switch or “SET –” switch ditions:
To accelerate, depress the accelerator To reset at a faster cruising speed, press
repeatedly or hold push “RES +” switch Common:
pedal. When you take your foot off the
(4). Vehicle speed will steadily increase. • When “CANCEL” switch (3) is pushed
pedal, your vehicle will return to the set
When you release the switch, the new • When brake pedal is depressed
speed.
speed will be maintained. • When your vehicle speed falls below
about 40 km/h (25 mph)
To decelerate, depress the brake pedal.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, press • When your vehicle skids and ESP® is
The set speed will be canceled and “SET”
indicator (8) will disappear. To resume the repeatedly or hold push “SET –” switch (5) activated
previously set speed, push “RES +” switch until the vehicle has slowed to the desired • When radar sensor is covered in snow,
(4) and turn on “SET” indicator (8) again speed, and then release the switch. The water or dirt
when vehicle speed is above about 40 km/ new speed will be maintained. • When engine speed is too high or too
h (25 mph). The vehicle will accelerate to low
the previously set speed and maintain its NOTE: • When driver’s door is open
speed. • You can adjust the set speed by 1 km/h • When driver’s seat belt is unfastened
(or 1 mph) by pushing “RES +” switch (4) • When parking brake is applied
or “SET –” switch (5) quickly. • When “LIMIT” switch is pressed
Changing Cruising Speed • You can adjust the set speed by 5 km/h • When ESP® OFF switch is pressed
(or 5 mph) by pushing and holding “RES For manual transaxle vehicle:
Using the accelerator pedal +” switch (4) or “SET –” switch (5). • When clutch pedal is continuously
To reset at a faster cruising speed, acceler- • While deceleration control or following depressed
ate to the desired speed using the accelera- control is activated, the vehicle is not • When gear position is changed to “N”
tor pedal and push “SET –” switch (5). The accelerated even though resetting to (Neutral)
new speed will be maintained. higher cruising speed by continuous • When gear position is changed to 1st or
pushing “RES +” switch (4) is operated. 2nd
Using the brake pedal However, if the vehicle ahead disap-
To reset at a slower cruising speed, decel- pears, the vehicle is accelerated auto- For automatic transaxle or TCSS vehicle:
erate to the desired speed using the brake matically to the set speed. • When gear position is changed from 3rd
pedal and push “SET –” switch (5). The to 2nd in the manual mode
new speed will be maintained.
3-53
83RM0-01E

To resume the previously set speed, push “Radar Brake Support System” in this sec-
“RES +” switch (4) and turn on “SET” indi- Frontal Collision Warning tion.
cator (8). The vehicle speed must be
above about 40 km/h (25 mph) when the WARNING
vehicle is not under the above conditions.
• Do not use the adaptive cruise con-
To turn off the adaptive cruise control sys- trol system in a heavy traffic area
tem, push “CRUISE” switch (2) and check where the frontal collision warning
that the cruise indicator (7) disappears. (1) frequently activates.
Also, if any warning indication or message • Even if the distance between your
related to the adaptive cruise control sys-
54P000353 vehicle and the vehicle ahead is
tem is displayed on the instrument cluster, If your vehicle gets too close to the vehicle short, frontal collision warning may
the adaptive cruise control system will be ahead as described below, the interior not alert you under the following
turned off. buzzer sounds, the indicator (1) appears circumstances:
on the information display at the same – The vehicle ahead of you is going
NOTE: time, to promote deceleration. at almost the same speed as, or
If you turn off the adaptive cruise control • The vehicle ahead of you slows down faster than your vehicle.
system, the previously set speed in the abruptly. – When the vehicle ahead of you is
memory is cleared. Reset your cruising • Another vehicle cuts in front of you. going away from your vehicle.
speed again. – Right after setting up to the
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an desired speed.
appropriate distance from the vehicle – While depressing the accelerator
ahead. The buzzer timing of frontal colli- pedal or right after releasing the
sion warning varies depending on the vehi- pedal.
cle speed and a following distance – While decelerating by depressing
between your vehicle and the vehicle the brake pedal.
ahead.
There are different frontal collision warning Handling the Radar Sensor
operations in adaptive cruise control sys- For details on radar sensor, refer to “Radar
tem and radar brake support system. Brake Support System” in this section.
Therefore, the interior buzzer in adaptive
cruise control system sounds a little earlier
than the buzzer in radar brake support sys-
tem. For details of frontal collision warning
in radar brake support system, refer to
3-54
83RM0-01E

Warning and Indicator Messages

The information display shows the warning and indicator messages to let you know about certain problems of the adaptive cruise control
system.
Warning and Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
indicator message indicator light
Blinks Beep (one time from interior buzzer) There may be malfunction of the adap-
tive cruise control system. Contact your
SUZUKI dealer for inspection.
54P000356
Blinks Beep (one time from interior buzzer) The radar brake support system is dis-
abled temporarily because dirt is
detected on the sensor, or millimeter-
waves from the radar sensor cause dif-
fused reflection. If the message does
not disappear for a while, wipe the sen-
sor with a soft cloth.
54P000355
3-55
83RM0-01E

Warning and indicator Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
message indicator Light
Blinks Beep (one time from interior There may be a problem with the radar
buzzer) brake support system.
54P000357
Blinks Beep (one time from interior There may be a problem with the radar
buzzer) brake support system and the system is
disabled temporarily.
If the message does not disappear for a
while, have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized SUZUKI dealer.
54P000358
3-56
83RM0-01E

Cruise Control (if equipped) To Set Cruising Speed

1) Turn on the cruise control system by
The cruise control system allows you to (1) pushing the “CRUISE” switch (1). When
maintain a steady speed without keeping the cruise indicator (5) comes on, you
your foot on the accelerator pedal. The can set cruising speed.
controls for operating the cruise control 2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
system are on the steering wheel. (2) (3) speed.
You can use the cruise control system with 3) Push the “SET –” switch (4) and turn on
the following conditions: the set indicator (6). Take your foot off
(4) the accelerator pedal and the set speed
• For manual transaxle vehicle, the gear
position is in 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th (if will be maintained.
equipped).
• For automatic transaxle or TCSS vehi- WARNING
61MS417
cle, the select lever is in “D” position, or If the cruising speed is set by acci-
the gear position is in 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th (1) “CRUISE” switch dent, you cannot decelerate or could
in the manual mode. (2) “CANCEL” switch loose control of the vehicle. This
• The vehicle speed is about 40 km/h (25 (3) “RES +” switch could lead to an accident, resulting in
mph) or higher. (4) “SET –” switch severe injury or death.
Turn off the cruise control system
WARNING and make sure the cruise indicator
To help avoid loss of vehicle control, (5) is off when the system is not in
do not use the cruise control system use.
when driving in heavy traffic, on slip-
pery or winding roads, or on steep Information display
downgrades. EXAMPLE
(5) (6)
61MS418
(5) Cruise indicator

(6) Set indicator
3-57
83RM0-01E

When you push the “CRUISE” switch (1),

the system is on and the cruise indicator To Change Speed Temporarily To Change Cruising Speed
(5) will come on. When the vehicle’s speed When the cruising speed is maintained, Using the accelerator pedal
is controlled by the cruise control system, you can temporarily accelerate or deceler- To reset at a faster cruising speed, accel-
the set indicator (6) will come on. ate. erate to the desired speed using the accel-
erator pedal and push the “SET –” switch
Be careful of the following when operat- To accelerate, depress the accelerator (4). The new speed will be maintained.
ing with the cruise control pedal. When you take your foot off the
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the pedal, your vehicle will return to the set Using the brake pedal
radar brake support system, it cannot auto- speed. To reset at a slower cruising speed, decel-
matically adjust to the speed of the vehicle To decelerate, depress the brake pedal. erate to the desired speed using the brake
in front of you. Turn off the cruise control The set speed will be canceled and the set pedal and push the “SET –” switch (4). The
system if you cannot operate safely at a indicator (6) will go off. new speed will be maintained.
cruising speed. To resume the previously set speed, push NOTE:
Even in the following conditions, the set the “RES +” switch (3) and turn on the set When the brake pedal is depressed, the
indicator (6) will not disappear and the indicator (6) again when vehicle speed is set indicator (6) goes off until reset the
cruising speed will not be canceled. above 40 km/h (25 mph). The vehicle will cruising speed.
• When the forward collision warning is accelerate to and maintain the previously
working. If you depress the brake pedal, set speed. Using the “RES +” switch or the “SET –”
the cruise speed will be canceled tempo- switch
rarily. NOTE: To reset at a faster cruising speed, press
• When “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT: NOT For automatic transaxle or TCSS vehicle, repeatedly or hold push the “RES +” switch
ACTIVE BY SENSOR.” message when the cruising speed is maintained, (3). Vehicle speed will steadily increase.
appears and the radar brake support you cannot decelerate by using the engine When you release the switch, the new
system stops functioning. For safety pur- brake even if you downshift from higher speed will be maintained.
poses, push the “CRUISE” switch (1) to gear to 3rd in the manual mode.
To decelerate while the cruise control is To reset at a slower cruising speed, press
turn off the cruise indicator (5). repeatedly or hold push the “SET –” switch
on, depress the brake pedal or push the
If the automatic brake system is working, “SET –” switch (4). (4) until the vehicle has slowed to the
the cruise indicator (5) will turn off and the desired speed, then release the switch.
cruise control system will be canceled. The new speed will be maintained.
Once you have determined that the condi- NOTE:
tions are once again safe, reset the cruise You can adjust the set speed by approxi-
speed. mately 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) by pushing the
“RES +” switch (3) or the “SET –” switch
(4) quickly.
3-58
83RM0-01E

Models with cruise control

Cancellation of the Cruise Control Speed Limiter (if equipped)
The set indicator (6) will go off and the
cruise control will be canceled temporarily
with following procedures: EXAMPLE (1)
• Push the “CANCEL” switch (2).
• Depress the brake pedal.
• For manual transaxle, depress the clutch (2) (3)
pedal.
• For automatic transaxle or TCSS, down- 61MS419
shift from 3rd to 2nd in the manual (4)
The speed limiter allows you to choose a
mode. maximum speed that you do not wish to
• The vehicle speed falls more than about exceed.
20 percent from the set speed.
• Any time the vehicle speed falls below Models with adaptive cruise control 61MS420
40 km/h (25 mph). (1) Speed limiter switch
• When the vehicle skids and ESP® is (2) “CANCEL” switch
activated. (3) “RES +” switch
To resume the previously set speed, push (4) “SET –” switch
(2)
the “RES +” switch (3) and turn on the set
indicator (6). Besides, the vehicle speed
has to be above 40 km/h (25 mph) when (3)
the vehicle is not in the above conditions.
To turn off the cruise control system, push
the “CRUISE” switch (1) and make sure (4)
the cruise indicator (5) is off.
(1)
Also, if the malfunction indicator light in the
instrument cluster comes on or blinks, the
cruise control system will be turned off. 54P000364
(1) Speed limiter switch

NOTE:
(2) “CANCEL” switch
If you turn off the cruise control system, the
(3) “RES +” switch
previously set speed in the memory is
(4) “SET –” switch
cleared. Reset your cruising speed again.
3-59
83RM0-01E

To Set Maximum Speed To Override the Maximum Speed To Change Speed Setting
1) Turn on the speed limiter system by You can exceed the maximum speed tem-
pushing the speed limiter switch (1). porarily by quickly depressing the acceler- Setting to the current speed
When the limit indicator (5) comes on, ator pedal all the way down. While the 1) Push the “CANCEL” switch (2).
you can set maximum speed. vehicle speed is being exceeded, the 2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed indication (7) on the information dis- speed.
speed. play will flash and the buzzer will sound 3) Push the “SET –” switch (4) and turn on
3) Push the “SET –” switch (4) and turn on briefly. the set indicator (6). The current vehicle
the set indicator (6). The current vehicle If the accelerator pedal is released to speed is set as the maximum speed.
speed is set as the maximum speed. return below the maximum speed, the Using the “RES +” switch or the “SET –”
speed indication (7) will stop flashing and switch
NOTE: then stay lit, and the function will restore. To change to a faster speed, press repeat-
If you push the “SET –” switch (4) when edly or hold push the “RES +” switch (3).
the vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h or NOTE:
20 mph, the maximum speed will be set to • When you depress the accelerator pedal To change to a slower speed, press
30 km/h or 20 mph. slowly, the vehicle speed may not repeatedly or hold push the “SET –” switch
exceed the maximum speed. If you wish (4).
Information display to override the maximum speed,
depress the accelerator pedal all the NOTE:
EXAMPLE way down quickly or push the “CANCEL” • You can adjust the set speed by 1 km/h
switch (2) to cancel the maximum speed or 1 mph by pushing the “RES +” switch
temporarily. (3) or the “SET –” switch (4) quickly.
• The speed indication (7) will also flash • You can adjust the set speed by 5 km/h
and the buzzer will sound if the speed or 5 mph by pushing and holding the
(5) (6) (7) “RES +” switch (3) or the “SET –” switch
limiter can not prevent the vehicle from
61MS421 exceeding the maximum speed such as (4).
going down a steep hill, or under exces- • If the current vehicle speed exceeds the
(5) Limit indicator
sive acceleration. In this case, deceler- maximum speed when changing to the
(6) Set indicator
ate to return below the maximum speed slower speed using the “RES +” switch
(7) Speed indication
using the brake pedal. (3) or the “SET –” switch (4), the speed
indication (7) will flash and the buzzer
When you push the speed limiter switch
will sound.
(1), the system is on and the limit indicator
(5) will come on. When the vehicle’s maxi-
mum speed is set, the set indicator (6) will
come on.
3-60
83RM0-01E

obstacle and return from it, from which it

Cancellation of the Speed Limiter Parking Sensors (if equipped) determines the obstacle’s position.
• To cancel the speed limiter, push the • The parking sensor function can be used
“CANCEL” switch (2). The set indicator when you press the engine switch to
(6) will go off. EXAMPLE change the ignition mode to “ON”, the
• To resume the previously set speed, gearshift lever is in a position other than
push the “RES +” switch (3) and turn on “P” (for automatic transaxle or TCSS
the set indicator (6). models) and the parking sensor switch is
in the “ON” position. This function is
To turn off the speed limiter system, push helpful in the following cases: pulling
the speed limiter switch (1) and make sure over to the curb; parallel-parking the
the limit indicator (5) is off. (1) vehicle; steering the vehicle into a
Also, you can turn off the speed limiter by garage; driving along an alley; and mov-
turning off the engine. ing slowly in a place with obstacles.
NOTE: 61MM0A192 WARNING
If you turn off the speed limiter system, the
previously set speed in the memory is (1) Symbol representing an obstacle • The parking sensor warns you of
cleared. Set your speed again. detected by parking sensor* obstacles with buzzers and by
* This symbol represents an obstacle showing you the location of the
that is located to the right rear at obstacles on the information dis-
the vehicle. play. However, you must still pay
full attention yourself while driving.
• The parking sensor system uses ultra- • The sensors can detect obstacles
sonic sensors to detect obstacles near only within a limited area and only
the front and rear bumpers. If obstacles when the vehicle is moving within a
are sensed while you are parking or limited speed range. So, in tricky
moving the vehicle slowly, the system areas, you must move the vehicle
warns you by sounding a buzzer and slowly while checking around it
displaying symbols representing the using your direct vision or rearview
obstacles on the information display in mirrors. There is increased risk of
the instrument cluster. an accident if you control the vehi-
• The system emits an ultrasonic wave cle relying only on the parking sen-
and the relevant sensor detects the sor.
return of the wave reflected by an obsta-
cle. The system measures the time
taken by the ultrasonic wave to reach the
3-61
83RM0-01E

On the rear bumper

Sensor Locations NOTICE
On the front bumper EXAMPLE • Avoid hitting the sensor areas or
directing the nozzle of a high-pres-
EXAMPLE sure car washer onto the sensor
areas. Otherwise, the sensors may
be damaged.
• If the bumper hits a hard object, the
sensors on it may not work prop-
erly. If this occurs, have the sen-
sors inspected by an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.
(4) (3) (3) (4)
61MM0B009
(2) (1) (1) (2) (3) Rear center sensors (2 places)
83RM021 (4) Rear corner sensors (2 places)
(1) Front center sensors (2 places)
(2) Front corner sensors (2 places)
3-62
83RM0-01E

Working sensors
The sensors that work depends on the position of the gearshift lever as follows:
Manual transaxle Automatic transaxle TCSS

Gearshift lever position
R N, 1st – 5th or 6th R N, D or M R N, D or M
On
Center Off (with the parking brake Off On Off On
lever released)
Front sensors
On
Corner On (with the parking brake On On On On
lever released)
Center On Off On Off On Off
Rear sensors
Corner On Off On Off On Off
3-63
83RM0-01E

Approximate areas where obstacles can

be detected WARNING WARNING
EXAMPLE – Sensors are wet from water – Sensors are at an angle to a
splashes or heavy rain. highly reflective object such as
– Sensors are covered by a hand, glass. (Ultrasonic waves are not
sticker, accessory, etc. reflected back from the obstacle.)
– There is an accessory or other • Sensors may not be able to cor-
object attached within the sen- rectly detect the following types of
sor’s sensing area. obstacles:
– Items such as tow hooks, com- – Objects made of a thin material
mercially available corner poles, like wire netting and ropes
radio antenna, etc. are installed – Square-shaped curbstones or
on the bumper. other objects with sharp edges
– The height of the bumper is – Tall objects with a large upper
61MM0B010
changed due to alteration to the part like a road sign
suspension or other causes. – Low-profile objects such as curb-
• An obstacle within about 20 cm (8 in) – The sensor areas are extremely stones
from a sensor or just below a sensor is hot from direct sunlight or cold – Sound-absorbing objects such
not detectable. due to freezing weather. as cotton and snow
• The sensors can detect an obstacle up – The vehicle is on a rough sur-
to about 1 m (3 ft) from the front of the face, slope, gravel road or grass NOTE:
vehicle, or about 1.5 m (5 ft) from the field. • Thin poles or obstacles lower than the
rear of vehicle. – The vehicle is at a steep angle. sensors may become undetectable as
– Sensors have intercepted ultra- the vehicle moves closer to them even if
WARNING sonic noise from another vehi- they have been detected from longer
• Under the following conditions, the cle’s horn, engine, air braking distances.
parking sensor system may not system (large vehicles), or park- • The system may calculate the distance
work normally because the sensors ing sensor. to a road sign or similar obstacle to be
cannot detect obstacles correctly. – Obstacles are too close to the shorter than the actual distance.
– Sensors are covered with mud, sensors.
ice or other materials. (Such (Continued)
materials must be removed for
normal operation.)
(Continued)
3-64
83RM0-01E

• When the ignition mode is “ON” and the indicator light in the parking sensor switch is
How to Use the Parking Sensor on, indicating that the parking sensor is ready for operation under the following condi-
tions:
Parking sensor switch – The gearshift lever is in a position other than “P” (for automatic transaxle or TCSS
models).
– The vehicle’s forward moving speed is not more than approx. 9 km/h (6 mph) when
(2) deaccelerating the vehicle such as for parking.
– The vehicle’s forward moving speed is not more than approx. 13 km/h (9 mph) when
(1) accelerating.
• To deactivate the parking sensor, push the parking sensor switch and make sure the
indicator light goes off.
Switch position State

EXAMPLE
ON
• When the indicator light is on and all necessary conditions are
61MS403
met, system becomes ready for operation.
(1) Parking sensor switch
(2) Indicator
EXAMPLE
OFF
• The system does not operate. Push the switch to turn off the
indicator if you do not wish to use the parking sensor.
NOTE:
If you push the parking sensor switch from the OFF to ON position when the ignition mode
has been changed to “ON” by pressing the engine switch, the inside buzzer sounds.
3-65
83RM0-01E

Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound and a
Obstacle Indication by Parking Sen- symbol representing the obstacle appears on the information display in the instrument
sor cluster.
• A different symbol is displayed depending on the direction and distance of the obstacle.
EXAMPLE • A buzzer in the instrument panel sounds when a sensor at the front detects an obstacle.
(2) (1) (2) • A buzzer located behind the rear seat sounds when a sensor at the rear detects an
obstacle.
• Warnings when obstacles are detected by corner sensors
Distance (approx.) Buzzer Symbol
37.5 – 60 cm Short beeps at short intervals Three lines
(15 – 24 in)
25 – 37.5 cm
Short beeps at very short intervals Two lines
(4) (3) (4) (10 – 15 in)
Less than 25 cm
Continuous beep One line
61MM0A194 (10 in)
(1) Obstacle detected by front center
sensors • Warnings when obstacles are detected by center sensors
(2) Obstacle detected by front corner Distance (approx.) Buzzer Symbol
sensors
(3) Obstacle detected by rear center sen- 70 – 100 cm
Front (28 – 39 in)
sors Short beeps at long intervals
(4) Obstacle detected by rear corner sen- 65 – 150 cm
Rear Three lines
sors (26 – 59 in)
55 – 70 cm
Short beeps at short intervals
(22 – 28 in)
45 – 55 cm
Short beeps at very short intervals Two lines
(18 – 22 in)
Less than 45 cm
Continuous beep One line
(18 in)
NOTE:
• Symbols are displayed with a short delay after the detection of obstacles.
• If the system detects multiple obstacles simultaneously, the display shows all of their
positions using the corresponding symbols. However, the buzzers will sound only for
the nearest obstacles.
3-66
83RM0-01E

Set Sensors Warning and Indicator Messages

You can select either the normal or trailer If there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system, a message is dis-
mode of the parking sensor via the infor- played on the information display in the instrument cluster, and a symbol blinks and the
mation display. Refer to “Information Dis- buzzer sounds. If a message is displayed, follow its instruction.
play” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
Message Symbol Buzzer Probable cause and remedy
Normal mode
All sensors operate. Use this mode under Two blinking Series of There may be problem with the
normal conditions. lines in a sen- double parking sensor system.
Trailer mode sor location. beeps Have your vehicle inspected by
The rear corner and rear center sensors an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
are inhibited from operating. Use this
mode when towing a trailer.
NOTICE
One blinking Series of The indicated sensor is contami-
Make sure the normal mode is line in a sensor single nated.
selected with the parking sensor location. beeps Wipe it clean with a soft cloth.
when steering the vehicle into a
garage. If the parking sensor is left in
the trailer mode, the rear corner and
rear center sensors are not function-
ing.
3-67
83RM0-01E

Rearview Camera (if equipped) NOTICE Rearview Camera Location
When the gearshift lever is shifted to the If you use the rearview camera for a
“R” position while the ignition switch is in long time when the ignition switch is
the “ON” position or the ignition mode is in the “ON” position or the ignition
“ON”, the rearview camera system auto- mode is “ON”, but the engine is not
matically shows the view behind the vehi- running, the battery may discharge.
cle on the display. Do not leave the ignition switch in the
“ON” position or the ignition mode
WARNING “ON” for a long time when the engine
is not running.
The distance viewed in the rearview
camera may differ from the actual
distance according to the condition (1)
of road or the load the vehicle is car- EXAMPLE
rying. Since the camera display area
61MM0B011
is also limited, backing up by only
looking at the display may cause an (1) Rearview camera
accident or a collision with an object. The rearview camera is installed beside
The rearview camera cannot replace the license plate light.
the driver’s attention. The driver
alone is responsible for parking and
similar driving maneuvers.
NOTICE
• Use the rearview camera only to The rearview camera is a precision
provide driving assistance. instrument. If you strike the camera,
• Always drive carefully confirming it may be broken and cause damage
the safety of the rear and the sur- resulting in a catching fire or a mal-
rounding conditions by looking function.
directly with your eyes and using • Do not strike the camera.
the rear view mirror. • Do not remove snow or mud on the
• Make sure that the tailgate is camera lens with a stick.
securely closed when backing up.
3-68
83RM0-01E

Example of display range of rearview

NOTICE How to Use Rearview Camera camera
If water enters the rearview camera, it 1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
may cause a malfunction or catching position or press the engine switch to EXAMPLE
fire. change the ignition mode to “ON”.
Do not use high pressure water 2) Shift the gearshift lever in the “R” posi-
around the camera. tion. (1)
• The display automatically shows the
view behind the vehicle.
NOTICE • When the gearshift lever is shifted
from “R” to another gearshift lever
This lens is hard coated to prevent position, the display returns to the
damage or discoloration. Damage or previous display.
discoloration of lens may obscure
the image. NOTE:
• Do not use a brush to clean lens. The rearview camera display has first pri-
• Do not use alcohol, benzene or ority in any display mode. However, the 61MM0A015
thinner to clean the lens. rearview camera display does not show
• Do not use wax on the camera lens. the rear view while the system is initializ- EXAMPLE
ing.
NOTE: (1)
If body wax does get on the camera lens,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp- Display Range of Rearview Camera
ened with mild detergent diluted with The rearview camera display shows the
water, then wipe with a dry cloth. area behind the rear end of the tailgate.
The display cannot show objects which are
close to the bumper or under the bumper.
The rearview camera display cannot show
obstacles which are higher than the cam-
era. Upper parts of tall objects such as
road signs cannot be viewed on the dis-
play. 61MM0B012
(1) Display range
3-69
83RM0-01E

NOTE: Uphill Incline behind the Vehicle Downhill Incline behind the vehicle
• Images shown on the display from the
rearview camera are reversed images EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(mirror images).
• The colors of objects on the rearview (1) (1)
camera may differ from the actual object
colors.
• The rearview camera display may be dif-
ficult to see under the following condi-
tions, but this is not a system
malfunction. (2) (3)
– In dark areas, on a rainy day or at
(3) (2)
night.
– When the temperature around the lens
is too high/low, or the camera is wet
such as on a rainy day or during peri- 61MM0A016 61MM0A017
ods of high humidity (dew condensa- (1) Object (1) Object
tion may occur on the camera lens). (2) Actual distance (2) Actual distance
– When a foreign object such as mud or (3) Distance on the display (3) Distance on the display
a drop of water is stuck around the
camera lens. When there is an uphill incline behind the When there is a downhill incline behind the
– When strong light directly enters the vehicle, the object shown on the display vehicle, the object shown on the display
camera (vertical lines may be seen on appears farther away than the actual disappears closer than the actual distance.
the display). tance.
– Under fluorescent light. (The display
may flicker.)
– When the outside temperature is low
(the image on the display may be
darkened).
Example of rearview camera screen

indication
The distance viewed in the rearview cam-
era may differ from the actual distance
according to the condition of the road or
the load the vehicle is carrying.
3-70
83RM0-01E

If the rear view from the rearview cam-

era is not shown or there is a poor Braking WARNING
image
• If the rear view from the rearview camera If water gets into the brake devices,
is not shown. brake performance may become poor
– Check to make sure that the ignition and unpredictable. After driving
switch is in the “ON” position or the through water or washing the under-
ignition mode is “ON”. side of the vehicle, test the brakes
– Check to make sure that the gearshift while driving at a slow speed to see if
lever is shifted to the “R” position. they have maintained their normal
effectiveness. If the brakes are less
• If the image from the rearview camera is effective than normal, dry them by
poor. repeatedly applying the brakes while
– Check to make sure that the camera driving slowly until the brakes have
lens is not dirty. regained their normal effectiveness.
– Check to make sure that light from the
sun or the beam of the headlights from Power-Assisted Brakes
the vehicle behind is not shining 60G165S
directly into the lens. The distance needed to bring any vehicle Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If
to a halt increases with the speed of the power assistance is lost due to a stalled
If the rearview camera system is still not vehicle. The braking distance needed, for engine or other failures, the system is still
working properly after checking the above, example, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will be fully operational on reserve power and you
have the system inspected by an autho- approximately 4 times greater than the can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by
rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible. braking distance needed at 30 km/h (19 pressing the brake pedal once and holding
mph). Start to brake the vehicle when there it down. The reserve power is partly used
is plenty of distance between your vehicle up when you depress the brake pedal and
and the stopping point, and slow down reduces each time the pedal is pressed.
gradually. Apply smooth and even pressure to the
pedal. Do not pump the pedal.
3-71
83RM0-01E

it senses that the wheels are locking up.

WARNING You may feel the brake pedal moves a little WARNING
while the ABS is operating.
Even without reserve power in the (Continued)
brake system, you can still stop the NOTE: • On regular paved roads, some driv-
vehicle by pressing the brake pedal • The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is ers may be able to obtain slightly
harder than normally required. How- under about 9 km/h (6 mph). shorter stopping distances with
ever, the stopping distance may be • If the ABS system is activated, you may conventional brake systems than
longer. hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsat- with ABS.
ing in the brake pedal. This is normal • In both of the above conditions,
and indicates that the brake fluid pres- ABS will still offer the advantage of
Brake Assist System helping you maintain directional
sure is being controlled properly.
When you slam the brakes on, the brake • You may hear a clunking sound when control. However, remember that
assist system judges as an emergency you start the engine or after the vehicle ABS will not compensate for bad
stop and provides more powerful braking begins to move. This means that the road or weather conditions or poor
for a driver who cannot hold down the above systems are in the self-check driver judgment. Use good judg-
brake pedal firmly. mode. This sound does not indicate a ment and do not drive faster than
malfunction. conditions will safely allow.
NOTE:
If you quickly and forcefully depress the WARNING
brakes, you may hear a clicking sound in
the brake pedal. This is normal and indi- • On some types of loose surfaces
cates that the brake assist system is acti- (such as gravel, snow-covered
vated properly. roads, etc.) the stopping distance
required for an ABS-equipped vehi-
cle may be slightly greater than for
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) a comparable vehicle with a con-
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec- ventional brake system. With a con- (1)
tronically controlling braking pressure. It ventional brake system, skidding (2)
will also help you maintain steering control tires are able to “plow” the gravel
when braking on slippery surfaces or when or snow layer, shortening the stop-
braking hard. ping distance. ABS minimizes this
The ABS works automatically, so you do resistance effect. Allow for extra
63J081
not need any special braking technique. stopping distance when driving on
Just push the brake pedal down without loose surfaces. (1) ABS warning light
pumping. The ABS will operate whenever (Continued) (2) Brake system warning light
3-72
83RM0-01E

WARNING How the ABS Works Electronic Stability Program

• If the ABS warning light (1) on the A computer continuously monitors wheel (ESP®)
instrument panel comes on and speed. The computer compares the
stays on while driving, there may changes in wheel speed when braking. If ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler
be a problem with the ABS system. the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a AG.
Ask your SUZUKI dealer to inspect skidding situation, the computer will
the ABS system immediately. If the change braking pressure several times
ABS system becomes inoperative, each second to prevent the wheels from The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)
the brake system will function as locking. When you start your vehicle or helps to control the vehicle during corner-
an ordinary brake system that has when you accelerate after a hard stop, you ing if front wheels or rear wheels skid. It
no ABS. may hear a momentary motor or clicking also assists you in maintaining traction
• If the ABS warning light (1) and the noise as the system resets or checks itself. while accelerating on loose or slippery
Brake system warning light (2) on road surfaces. It does this by regulating
the instrument panel simultane- WARNING the engine’s output, and by selectively
ously stays on or comes on when The ABS may not work properly if applying the brakes. In addition, ESP®
driving, both anti-lock function and tires or wheels other than those helps to avoid skidding by controlling brak-
rear brake force control function specified in the owner’s manual are ing pressure.
(proportioning valve function) of used. This is because the ABS works
the ABS system may have failed. If by comparing changes in wheel WARNING
so, the rear wheels may easily skid speed. When replacing tires or The ESP® cannot enhance the vehi-
or the vehicle can even spin in the wheels, use only the size and type cle’s driving stability in all situations
worst case when braking on a slip- specified in this owner’s manual. and does not control your vehicle’s
pery road or when hard braking entire braking system. The ESP® can-
even on a dry paved road. Ask your not prevent accidents, including
SUZUKI dealer to inspect the ABS those resulting from excessive speed
system immediately. Drive care- in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe
fully, avoiding hard braking as and attentive driver can prevent acci-
much as possible. dents. The capabilities of an ESP®-
equipped vehicle must never be used
as a substitute for careful driving.
3-73
83RM0-01E

The ESP® has the following three sys- operate whenever it senses that wheels
tems: are locking up. You may feel the brake WARNING
pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating.
(For more information on ABS, see “Brak- • The ESP® may not work properly if
Stability Control System ing” in this section.) engine related parts such as the
muffler are not equivalent to stan-
The vehicle stability control system helps dard equipment or are extremely
provide integrated control of systems such WARNING deteriorated.
as anti-lock brakes, traction control, engine • The ESP® may not work properly if • Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-
control, etc. This system automatically tires or wheels other than those pension since the ESP® may not
controls the brakes and engine to help pre- specified in the Owner’s Manual operate correctly.
vent the vehicle from skidding when cor- are used. When replacing tires or
nering on a slippery road surface or when wheels, use only the size and type
turning the steering wheel abruptly. NOTE:
specified in this Owner’s Manual. • If the ESP® system is activated, you may
• The ESP® may not work properly if hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsat-
Traction Control System tires are not inflated to the recom- ing in the brake pedal. This is normal
mended tire inflation pressure. and indicates that the brake fluid pres-
The traction control system automatically • The ESP® may not work properly if sure is being controlled properly.
helps prevent the spinning of wheels when tires are fitted with tire chains. • You may hear a clunking sound when
the vehicle is started or accelerated on • The ESP® may not work properly if you start the engine or after the vehicle
slippery road surfaces. The system oper- the tires are excessively worn. Be begins to move. This means that the
ates only if it senses that some of the sure to replace tires when the tread above systems are in the self-check
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose wear indicators in the grooves mode. This sound does not indicate a
traction. When this happens, the system appear on the tread surface. malfunction.
operates the front or rear brakes and • The ESP® is not a substitute for
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-
tronically controlling braking pressure. It
will also help you maintain steering control
when braking on slippery surfaces or when
braking hard. The ABS works automati-
cally, so you do not have to use any spe-
cial braking technique. Just push the brake
pedal down without pumping. The ABS will
3-74
83RM0-01E

The ESP® indicator lights are described NOTE:

below: When the ESP® warning light comes on ESP® OFF Switch
and stays on while driving, indicating a
malfunction of the ESP® systems (other Type A
ESP® Warning Light than ABS), the brake system will function
as an ordinary ABS with no additional
ESP® functions.
ESP® OFF Indicator Light
(1)
52KM133
This light blinks 5 times per second when

one of the ESP® systems other than ABS
is activated. If this light blinks, drive care- 61MM0A197
fully. (1) ESP® OFF switch
57L30045
“ON” position, or the engine switch is You should turn the ESP® on during your Type B
pressed to change the ignition mode to ordinary driving, so that you have the ben-
“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can efits of all of the ESP® systems.
It may be required to turn the ESP® sys-
tems (other than ABS) off if your vehicle is
NOTICE stuck in sand, mud, or snow, where wheel
If the ESP® warning light comes on spin is necessary.
and stays on while driving, there may (1)
be a malfunction of the ESP® sys-
tems (other than ABS). You should
have the systems inspected by an
61MM429
(1) ESP® OFF switch
3-75
83RM0-01E

When the ESP® OFF switch located at the NOTE:

instrument panel is pushed and held to If your vehicle is equipped with the radar Hill Hold Control System
turn off the ESP® systems (other than brake support system, when the ESP® (if equipped)
ABS), the ESP® OFF indicator light in the system is turned off, the radar brake sup- The hill hold control system is designed to
instrument cluster comes on. port system will be turned off. assist you in starting to move up steep or
When you have turned the ESP® systems slippery hills. When you start to move up a
(other than ABS) off, make sure to turn hill, the system helps to prevent the vehicle
them back on before resuming ordinary from rolling downward (for approximately 2
driving. ABS Warning Light / Brake System
seconds) while you move your foot from
When you push the ESP® OFF switch Warning Light the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
again, the ESP® OFF indicator light will go See “Braking” in this section.
out and all of the ESP® systems will be WARNING
activated.
• Do not rely excessively on the hill
hold control system. The hill hold
control system may not prevent the
vehicle from rolling downward on a
hill under all load or road condi-
tions. Always be prepared to
depress the brake pedal to prevent
the vehicle from rolling downward.
Failure to pay attention and
depress the brake pedal to hold the
61MM0A178 vehicle on a hill when necessary,
If the message shown in the above illustra- may result in loss of control or an
tion appears on the information display, accident.
there may be a problem with the ESP® • The hill hold control system is not
system. Have your vehicle inspected by an designed to stop the vehicle on a
authorized SUZUKI dealer. hill.
(Continued)
NOTE:
The ESP® system will not activate while
this message is displayed.
3-76
83RM0-01E

WARNING Tire Pressure Monitoring

(Continued) System (TPMS) (if equipped)
• After you release your foot from the
brake pedal, start the vehicle to The tire pressure monitoring system is
move up immediately. If you designed to alert you when one or more of
release your foot from the brake the tires on your vehicle is significantly
pedal over 2 seconds, the hill hold under-inflated. A Tire Pressure Monitoring
control system will be canceled. If System (TPMS) sensor containing a
so, the vehicle may roll downward 61MM0A179 unique identification code is mounted on
depends on the degree of the slope If the message shown in the above illustra- each wheel. The TPMS sensors transmit
which can result in an accident. tion appears on the information display, tire pressure signals to the receiver of the
And, the engine may stall and the there may be a problem with the hill hold tire pressure monitoring system controller.
power assist for the steering and control system. Have your vehicle When the inflation pressure of one or more
brakes will not work so steering inspected by an authorized SUZUKI tires indicates significant under-inflation,
and braking will be much harder dealer. the low tire pressure warning light shown
than usual which can result in an below comes on.
accident or vehicle damage. NOTE:
The hill hold control system will not acti- NOTE:
vate while this message is displayed. The word “telltale” in this section, means
The hill hold control system activates for a an indicator.
maximum of about 2 seconds if your foot is
moved from the brake pedal when the fol-
lowing condition are all met.
1) The gearshift lever is in a forward gear
or reverse gear.
2) The parking brake is released.
3) For manual transaxle models, the
clutch pedal is depressed.
4) The vehicle is on an upward incline.
NOTE:
You may hear a sound coming from the
engine when the hill hold control system is
activated. This sound is normal and does
not indicate a malfunction.
3-77
83RM0-01E

affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ability. WARNING
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is Failure to take corrective action when
the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor- the low tire pressure warning light is
rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation not working or when it comes on and
has not reached the level to trigger illumi- blinks while driving can lead to an
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure tell- accident.
tale. If the low tire pressure warning light
does not come on for 2 seconds after
52D305 the ignition switch is turned to the
WARNING “ON” position or the engine switch is
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and Relying only on the tire pressure pressed to change the ignition mode
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- monitoring system to determine to “ON”, or comes on and blinks
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on when it is necessary to add air to the while driving, have your vehicle
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure tires can result in loss of control or inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different an accident. dealer. Even if the light turns off after
size than the size indicated on the vehicle Check tire inflation pressures blinking, indicating that the monitor-
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you monthly when the tires are cold and, ing system has recovered, you
should determine the proper tire inflation if necessary, adjust them to the rec- should still have the system checked
pressure for those tires.) ommended inflation pressure as by your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
As an added fuel efficiency feature, your specified on the vehicle’s tire infor-
vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres- mation placard and in this owner’s
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illumi- manual. Refer to “Tires” in the
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
or more of your tires is significantly under- section.
inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
3-78
83RM0-01E


The load-carrying capacity of your Continuing to drive with the low tire (Continued)
tires is reduced at lower inflation pressure warning light on can lead to • If your vehicle is equipped with a
pressures. If your tires are even mod- an accident, resulting in severe injury flat tire repair kit instead of a spare
erately under-inflated, the load on the or death. tire, refer to “Flat Tire Repair Kit” in
tires may exceed the load-carrying If the low tire pressure warning light the “EMERGENCY SERVICE” sec-
capacity of the tires, which could lead comes on and stays on, reduce your tion for instructions on how to per-
to tire failure. The low tire pressure speed and avoid abrupt steering and form an emergency repair of a flat
warning light will not alert you to this braking. Be aware that driving on a tire.
condition, because it only comes on significantly under-inflated tire can • If one or more of your tires is
when one or more of your tires cause the tire to overheat and can under-inflated, adjust the inflation
becomes significantly under-inflated. lead to tire failure, and may affect pressure in all of your tires to the
Check and adjust your tire inflation steering control and brake effective- recommended inflation pressure as
pressure at least once a month. Refer ness. Stop in a safe place as soon as soon as possible.
to “Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND possible and check your tires.
MAINTENANCE” section. • If you have a flat tire, replace it with The low tire pressure warning light can
the spare tire (if equipped). Refer to come on due to normal causes such as
“Jacking Instructions” in the natural air leaks and pressure changes
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section caused by changes in temperature or
for the tire replacement method. atmospheric pressure. Adjusting the air
Also refer to “Replacing Tires and/ pressure in the tires to the pressure shown
or Wheels” for instructions on how on the tire information placard should
to restore normal operation of the cause the low tire pressure warning light to
TPMS after you have had a flat tire. turn off.
(Continued)
To make the low tire pressure warning light
go off, adjust the tire pressures when the
tires are cold, and drive the vehicle for
about 10 minutes.
When the adjusted tire pressure is recog-
nized, the low tire pressure warning light
will go off and the information display
shows the current tire pressure (if you
select the TPMS monitor).
3-79
83RM0-01E

to be at the specified pressure when

NOTICE checked after driving, when the tires are
warm, could have pressure below the
If the low tire pressure warning light specification when the tires cool down.
does not go off even when you drive Also, tires that are inflated to the speci-
more than 10 minutes after adjusting fied pressure in a warm garage may
the cold tire pressure, there may be a have pressure below the specification
problem with the TPMS. Have your when the vehicle is driven outside in very
vehicle inspected by an authorized cold temperature. If you adjust the tire
SUZUKI dealer. pressure in a garage that is warmer than
61MM0A198
the outside temperature, you should add
If the light turns on again shortly after NOTE: 1 kPa to the recommended cold tire
adjusting the pressure in your tires, you • The information display shows the inflation pressure for every 0.8°C differ-
may have a flat tire. If you have a flat tire, above warning and indicator message ence between garage temperature and
replace it with the spare tire (if equipped). when this light comes on. outside temperature.
Refer to “Jacking Instructions” in the • When the tire inflation pressure is
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section. Refer adjusted in high altitude areas, the low
to “Replacing Tires and/or Wheels” for tire pressure light may not turn off even
instructions on how to restore normal oper- after tire inflation pressure adjustment. In
ation of the tire pressure monitoring sys- this case, adjust the inflation pressure to
tem after you have had a flat tire. a slightly higher pressure than is shown
on the tire information placard.
• The low tire pressure warning light may
turn off temporarily after coming on. This
could be due to surface temperature
increases after long distance driving or
traveling to a high temperature area.
Even if the tire pressure warning light
turns off after coming on, make sure to
check the inflation pressure of all tires.
• To reduce the chance that the low tire
pressure warning light will come on due
to normal changes in temperature and
atmospheric pressure, it is important to
check and adjust the tire pressures
when the tires are cold. Tires that appear
3-80
83RM0-01E

TPMS Malfunction Indicator NOTICE

Your vehicle has also been equipped with The tire pressure sensors can be
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate damaged if you do not take proper
when the system is not operating properly. precautions.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- • We highly recommend that you
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. have tires repaired or replaced by
When the system detects a malfunction, an authorized SUZUKI dealer. The
the telltale will flash for about 75 seconds tire pressure sensors can be dam-
and then remain continuously illuminated. aged by the installation or removal 61MM0A199
This sequence will continue upon subse- of tires. NOTE:
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- • Do not use liquid sealants for a flat The information display shows the above
function exists. tire unless your vehicle is equipped warning and indicator message when this
with a flat tire repair kit instead of a light comes on.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is not spare tire.
reset even after the engine is turned off; it
remains in the on state until the normal
conditions are restored. NOTICE
When the malfunction indicator is illumi- If the low tire pressure warning light
nated, the system may not be able to comes on frequently, there may be
detect or signal low tire pressure as something wrong with one or more of
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur the tires, tire pressure sensors, or the
for a variety of reasons, including the monitoring system.
installation of replacement or alternate If the low tire pressure warning light
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent comes on frequently, have your vehi-
the TPMS from functioning properly. cle inspected by an authorized
Always check the TPMS malfunction tell- SUZUKI dealer.
tale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
3-81
83RM0-01E

To check the current tire inflation pres-

TPMS Limitations TPMS Setting sure
The tire pressure monitoring system may • You can check the current tire inflation
not function properly under certain circum- pressure on the information display.
EXAMPLE
stances. In the following situations, the low • You can set one of the initial value of tire
tire pressure warning light may come on pressure below that is indicated on the
and remain on or may blink. tire information label.
• When you replace a flat tire with the – Comfort Mode
spare tire. – Eco Mode
• When you include a spare tire during a – Load Mode
tire rotation.
• When the TPMS sensor is damaged WARNING
during a tire replacement or liquid seal- (1)
ants are used to repair a flat tire. When the loading weight has
• When the TPMS sensor’s electronic sig- changed, adjust the tire pressure
nal is disturbed in one of the following according to the tire information label
ways: and set the initial value via the infor- 83RM042
– Electric devices or facilities using simi- mation display. If the loading weight, 1) When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
lar radio wave frequencies are nearby. tire pressure and initial value do not position or the ignition mode is “ON”
– A metallic film that may cause radio match, the tire pressure monitoring and the vehicle is stationary, push and
wave interference is attached on the system will not function properly. hold the indicator selector knob (1) on
window. the instrument cluster for more than 3
– A lot of snow or ice covers the vehicle, seconds to change the information dis-
in particular, around the wheels or play to the setting mode.
wheel housings.
– Snow tires that are not installed genu-
ine TPMS sensors or tire chains are
used.
• When you use non-genuine SUZUKI
wheels or tires.
• When the pressure of any tire is too
high.
• When there is a problem with the
receiver of the TPMS controller.
3-82
83RM0-01E

NOTE:
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE • If the low tire pressure warning light
comes on, the information display will be
switched to “Tyre Press” display and the
corresponding tire pressure indication
blinks to alert you which tire(s) is(are)
low pressure.
• The display may not show the tire infla-
tion pressure for about 10 minutes after
the vehicle begins to move. This is
because the TPMS system learns the
tire inflation pressure within this 10 min-
utes. The display will show the tire infla-
tion pressure after 10 minutes passed.
61MM0A231 61MM0A232 • If you stop the vehicle and turn the igni-
2) Turn the indicator selector knob (1) left 3) Turn the indicator selector knob (1) left tion switch to “LOCK” position or change
or right to select the “TPMS” and push or right to select the “Tyre Press” and the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), and
the indicator selector knob. push the indicator selector knob. leave it for 20 minutes or more, tire pres-
sure will be reset and will be indicated as
NOTE: 0 kPa when the engine is restarted. In
If you exit the setting mode, select the EXAMPLE this case, the current tire pressure indi-
“Back” and push the indicator selector cation will recover after driving for a
knob (1). while. However, if any of tire pressures
has been detected as low pressure
before stopping the engine, the tire pres-
sure indication may not recover and may
be indicated as “---”.
61MM0A233
4) The display shows current tire inflation

pressure.
3-83
83RM0-01E

To set the initial value of tire pressure

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(1)
61MM0A231 61MM0A232
83RM042
2) Turn the indicator selector knob (1) left 3) Turn the indicator selector knob (1) left
1) When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or right to select the “TPMS” and push or right to select the “TPMS Mode” and
position or the ignition mode is “ON”
the indicator selector knob. push the indicator selector knob.
and the vehicle is stationary, push and
hold the indicator selector knob (1) on NOTE:
the instrument cluster for more than 3 If you exit the setting mode, select the EXAMPLE
seconds to change the information dis- “Back” and push the indicator selector
play to the setting mode. knob (1).
61MM0A234
3-84
83RM0-01E

4) Turn the indicator selector knob (1) left The Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
or right to select the initial value and Replacing Tires and/or Wheels Transmitter model S180052024 and
push the indicator selector knob. If you got a flat tire and replaced it with the Receiver model 40398036 are in compli-
spare tire, SUZUKI recommends that you ance with the essential requirements and
have an authorized SUZUKI dealer mount other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/
a new tire on the wheel that had the flat 5/EC.
tire. The TPMS is already set up to recog-
nize the ID code of the original wheel, and
normal TPMS operation will be restored.
If you need to replace any wheels on your
vehicle, your dealer must make sure that
TPMS sensors are installed in the new
wheels and must set up the TPMS to rec-
ognize the new sensors.
NOTE:
61MM0A235 A TPMS sensor is not installed in the spare
tire. You should use the spare tire only in
5) When the display shows the message an emergency situation, and should
shown in the above illustration, the set- replace the spare tire as soon as possible
ting is completed. to restore normal TPMS operation.
WARNING
Use of tires or wheels not recom-
mended by SUZUKI can result in fail-
ure of the TPMS.
When replacing tires and wheels, use
only tires and wheels recommended
by SUZUKI as standard or optional
equipment for your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE” section for addi-
tional information.
3-85
83RM0-01E

NOTE:
Radar Brake Support System WARNING • While the system is working, if a vehicle
(if equipped) in front of you moves outside of the
(Continued) radar’s detection field or the vehicle can
• On the following surfaces, you may no longer be detected, the system may
Radar brake support system measures the not be able to decelerate even with
relative velocity of, and distance from, the stop functioning.
the warning brake system, brake • While the system is working, a braking
vehicle in front of you by radar and then assist system and automatic brake
attempts to avoid a collision by giving sound may be heard even if you do not
system functioning. depress the brake pedal, but this is nor-
warning and, in the event of a collision, – Sharp curves or extremely rough
attempts to reduce damage through brake mal.
surfaces
control. – On the following slippery sur- The Radar Brake Support System, model
faces MRRevo14F is in compliance with the
WARNING • Frozen or snow covered sur- essential requirements and other relevant
• Radar brake support system has faces provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
limits and may not function prop- • Over manholes or metal con-
erly depending on the driving construction plates
ditions. Do not rely excessively on • Gravel
the system and always drive in a • In the following situations, the tilt
safe manner. and/or height of the vehicle is
• For safety reasons, do not check changed, the system does not
the operation of the system your- function properly and unexpected
self. accidents may occur.
• Make sure all passengers wear – With a modified suspension
their seat belts when the vehicle is (Altering the vehicle height, etc.)
being operated. – With non-specified sized tires
When the system is activated, there equipped
is a risk of serious injury from – With worn or extremely uneven
being thrown. tires equipped
(Continued) – With low, or high, tire pressure
3-86
83RM0-01E

Forward collision warning

When there is a risk of a frontal collision, warning will be given through the information
display and sound.
EXAMPLE
buzzer
61MM702
3-87
83RM0-01E

Warning brake system

If the driver cannot take or is insufficient to take evasive action such as brake operation
and steering operation after frontal collision warning activates, the system applies brake
lightly.
EXAMPLE
buzzer
83RM050
CAUTION
In the following conditions, this warning brake system may not activate.
• When another vehicle is already parked on a road in the direction of move-
ment.
• When a vehicle ahead is changing lane and only a part of the vehicle is within
the radar sensor range.
NOTE:
When you operate brake after frontal collision warning activates, the warning brake sys-
tem does not activate. Brake assist system will activate in this case.
3-88
83RM0-01E

Brake assist system

When there is high probability of a frontal collision, the brake assist system provides more
powerful braking when you slam down on the brake pedal.
EXAMPLE
buzzer
61MM431
3-89
83RM0-01E

Automatic brake system

When a frontal collision is unavoidable at lower speeds, the brakes will powerfully brake
automatically. (#1)
EXAMPLE
buzzer
61MM432
(#1) After the vehicle has been stopped by the automatic brake system, flashing of the
radar brake support system warning light and forward collision warning will continue
until the brake system is released.
CAUTION
After the vehicle has been stopped by the automatic brake system, immediately
depress the brake pedal. If your vehicle is equipped with the automatic transaxle
or TCSS, and when the automatic brake system is released, the vehicle will start
to move by the creeping function. This may result in an accident.
NOTE:
If you do not depress the clutch pedal (if equipped) when the vehicle has been stopped by
the automatic brake system, the engine will stall.
3-90
83RM0-01E

It will not Activate in the Following It may not Activate in the Following
Situations Situations EXAMPLE
In the following situations, the system will In the following situations, the radar may
not activate. not detect the vehicle in front of you and
• When the engine is off (except when the the system may not activate.
engine is automatically stopped by the • When the radar sensor is covered in
ENG A-STOP system) snow, water or dirt
• When the gearshift lever is in the reverse • When there is bad weather such as
gear or “P” position (for automatic tran- heavy rain or fog, a blizzard or sand-
saxle or TCSS models) storm or when the vehicle in front of you
• When facing an oncoming vehicle is surrounded by water, snow or sand 81M40270
• When the following switches are pushed • When you are operating on a narrow • When you take evasive action with the
and the system is turned off. road steering wheel or accelerator pedal
– “Radar Brake Support OFF” switch • When another vehicle jumps out sud-
– ESP® OFF switch denly EXAMPLE
• When you suddenly accelerate and
• When the system is temporarily stopped approach the vehicle in front of you,
or malfunctioning, some of the following such as when you overtake the vehicle
indicator and messages will come on. in front of you
– The radar brake support system warn- • When swerving
ing light • When the vehicle cannot move in a
– “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT SYS straight manner without consistently
INSPECTION REQUIRED” message steering, due to an accident or break-
– “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT FCN down
TEMPORARILY DISABLED” message
61MM401
– “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT: NOT
ACTIVE BY SENSOR.” message • When only a part of the vehicle in front of
you is within the radar’s detection field,
such as when operating on a curvy road
3-91
83RM0-01E

In the Following Situations, It may

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE also Activate
In the following objects, the radar may
judge the following as a vehicle in front of
you and the system may activate.
54M3238 EXAMPLE
• Specially shaped vehicles such as car
carriers
61MM402
• When another vehicle suddenly changes

lanes or jumps out in front of you
When the following types of vehicles are in

front of you, the radar may not detect them
and the system may not activate. 61MM403
• Stopped vehicles or those operating at • Pedestrian bridges, elevated bridges,
extremely low speeds overpasses or road signs
• Vehicles carrying oddly shaped loads,
such as bicycles, on their roof or back, or
vehicles with articles protruding out from
the body’s circumference
• Trucks with low-lying backs
3-92
83RM0-01E

In situations such as the following, the

EXAMPLE radar may judge the following as a vehicle EXAMPLE
in front of you and the system may acti-
vate.
• When crossing narrow bridges
• When operating on hills that have vary-
ing slopes
• When a vehicle suddenly passes you
from a neighboring lane
• When the radar detects animals or trees
EXAMPLE 61MM407
61MM404 • When you pass by an oncoming vehicle

on a curvy road
• Toll gates, parking lot gates, railroad
crossing gates or height-limit signboards
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
61MM406
• When the radar detects pedestrians,

bicycles or motorcycles
54M3239
• When your vehicle is weighed down by

heavy items in the luggage compartment
61MM405
or rear seat
• Objects protruding from the road’s sur-
face, manhole covers, signs and other
metal objects, as well as falling objects
or level changes in the road
3-93
83RM0-01E

“FAR/NEAR setting” switch

Forward Collision Warning You can change the timing of when the for-
EXAMPLE
When you are operating at a speed of ward collision warning works, while the
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) or over and system is functioning, by using the “FAR/
there is a risk of a frontal collision, a warn- NEAR setting” switch.
ing will work. • Given the same relative velocity and dis-
• The interior buzzer will intermittently tance of the vehicle in front of you, the
beep and the indication (1) will appear. FAR setting will respond faster than the
NEAR setting.
61MM408
• When there is a roadside guard rail, or

sign, on a curve (2) (3)
(1)
61MM703
• When the forward collision warning

works, depending on the distance from
the vehicle in front of you and driving
conditions, take evasive action with the 61MM704
steering wheel or brake pedal.
• Press the “FAR/NEAR setting” switch to
change the forward collision warning
timing to NEAR (2).
• Press the “FAR/NEAR setting” switch
again to change the forward collision
warning timing back to FAR (3).
• Whenever you press the “FAR/NEAR
setting” switch, the interior buzzer will
beep and NEAR or FAR will appear on
the information display for several sec-
onds.
3-94
83RM0-01E

WARNING Warning Brake System CAUTION

If you attempt to press the “FAR/ When you are operating at a speed of In the following conditions, this warn-
NEAR setting” switch while driving, approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) or over ing brake system may not activate.
you could lose control of the vehicle. and if the driver cannot take or is insuffi- • When another vehicle is already
Do not press the “FAR/NEAR setting” cient to take evasive action such as brake parked on a road in the direction of
switch while driving. operation and steering operation after fron- movement.
tal collision warning activates, the system • When a vehicle ahead is changing
applies brake lightly. lane and only a part of the vehicle
NOTE: • While the warning brake system is work-
Even when you switch the forward collision is within the radar sensor range.
ing, the interior buzzer will intermittently
warning timing, the warning brake system, beep, the radar brake support system
brake assist system and automatic brake warning light (4) will blink, the indication NOTE:
system timing will not change. (1) will appear, and the brake lights will When you operate brake after frontal colli-
be turned on. sion warning activates, the warning brake
system does not activate. Brake assist
system will activate in this case.
(4) (1)
61MM705
3-95
83RM0-01E

Brake Assist System Automatic Brake System “Radar Brake Support OFF” Switch
When you are operating at a speed of When a frontal collision is judged to be You can turn off the radar brake support
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) or over and unavoidable at a speed of approximately 5 system.
there is a high probability of a frontal colli- km/h (3 mph) or over toward the moving • In the following situations, push and hold
sion, the brake assist system provides vehicle, or speeds between approximately the “Radar Brake Support OFF” switch
more powerful braking when you slam 5 km/h to 30 km/h (3 mph to 19 mph) to turn off the system as unexpected
down on the brake pedal. toward the stopping vehicle, the brakes will dangers may be possible if it is acti-
• While the brake assist system is work- powerfully brake automatically and will vated.
ing, the interior buzzer will intermittently attempt to avoid the collision or reduce the – When the vehicle is placed upon a tes-
beep, the radar brake support system damage of the collision. ter such as when undergoing a vehicle
warning light (4) will blink rapidly, and the • When the automatic brake system is inspection
indication (1) will appear. activated at a speed of approximately 15 – When the vehicle is being towed
km/h (9 mph) or under, collisions may be – When the vehicle is being carried on a
avoidable. car carrier
• While the automatic brake system is – When the vehicle is being carried on a
working, the interior buzzer will intermit- ferry
tently beep, the radar brake support sys- – When the vehicle is being operated on
tem warning light (4) will blink rapidly, the a race track
indication (1) will appear, and the brake – When the vehicle is placed upon a car
lights will be turned on. elevator or placed in a mechanical
parking lot
(4) (1) – With a spare tire or tire chains
equipped
61MM705 – When you have a temporarily repaired
flat tire
– When you have an accident or break-
down
– When the vehicle is used to tow a
trailer
(4) (1)
61MM705
3-96
83RM0-01E

• In the following situations, the radar sen- • When you want to turn off the system,
sor might not function properly. Turn it off push and hold the “Radar Brake Support Handling the Radar Sensor
and have it inspected by an authorized OFF” switch (1) until the interior buzzer The radar sensor (1) is located inside the
SUZUKI dealer. buzzes and the radar brake support OFF front bumper.
– When there is a minor collision and indicator light (2) comes on the instru-
the radar sensor is damaged or hin- ment cluster. EXAMPLE
dered
– When the warning brake system and Doing the followings will turn the system
automatic brake system is activated back on.
more than necessary • Push and hold the “Radar Brake Support
OFF” switch (1) until the interior buzzer
buzzes and the radar brake support OFF
indicator light (2) goes out
• Turning the engine off and then turning it
(1)
on again
WARNING
(1)
If you attempt to press the “Radar
83RM070
Brake Support OFF” switch while
driving, you could lose control of the If dirt is detected on the radar sensor, the
vehicle. radar brake support system will stop func-
61MM419
Do not press the “Radar Brake Sup- tioning and the following indicators and
port OFF” switch while driving. messages will call attention.
(2)
61MM437
3-97
83RM0-01E

WARNING WARNING
• Always keep the sensor surface (Continued)
clean. When it is dirty, wipe it down • Make sure to do the followings in
with a soft cloth that will not order to keep the radar sensor
(2) (3) (4) scratch the sensor. Also, when the functioning properly. If mishandled,
following things are covering or the radar sensor cannot accurately
attached to the sensor, they will be detect a vehicle in front of you, the
detected as dirt and the radar will system will not function properly
either take more time to detect and unexpected accidents may
things or it will not detect things at occur.
all. If this happens, the system will – Do not strike the radar sensor
(5) (6) not function normally and unex- forcefully. If there is a minor colli-
83RM071
pected accidents may occur. sion and the radar sensor is dam-
– Plastic bags (transparent, semi- aged or hindered, have it
(2) Master warning indicator light (blinks) transparent, colored or metal- inspected by an authorized
(3) Radar brake support system warning coated) SUZUKI dealer.
light (comes on) – Rain, snow, etc. – Do not stick or affix anything to
(4) Adaptive cruise control system warn- (Continued) the sensor, not even clear items.
ing light (comes on) – Do not do any customizing, coat-
(5) “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT: NOT ing or applying of non-genuine
ACTIVE BY SENSOR.” message SUZUKI parts to the radiator grill
(comes on) or front bumper. For repairs and
(6) “RADAR BRAKE SUPPORT FCN parts replacement, contact an
TEMPORARILY DISABLED” mes- authorized SUZUKI dealer.
sage (comes on) – Do not remove or disassemble
the radar sensor or any sur-
rounding parts.
– Do not sit on or lean against the
front bumper.
– When using a high pressure car
washer, do not point the nozzle
at, or around, the sensor.
(Continued)
3-98
83RM0-01E

NOTE:
WARNING In the following situations, the radar brake Warning and Indicator Messages
support system warning light (3) may come The information display shows the warning
(Continued) on, the message (5) may appear and the
– Do not push other vehicle or and indicator message to let you know
radar brake support system may be deacti- about certain problems of the radar brake
objects with the front bumper vated automatically, even if there is no dirt
when you pull out of a parking support system.
on the sensor.
area. • In tunnel
• A road where there are concrete walls
NOTE: on both sides
The system may not function properly if • A road where there are metal fences on
there is any snow or water on the radar one side
sensor. • Around overpasses or grade separated
crossings
When dirt is detected on the sensor • When there is bad weather such as
If the message (5) does not turn off, do the heavy rain or snow
following. • A road where there are puddles
1) Find a safe place to park and change In these situations, the radar brake support
the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by system is stop functioning temporarily,
pressing the engine switch. because millimeter-waves emanating from
2) Clean the sensor with a soft cloth. the radar sensor are diffused reflection and
3) Change the ignition mode to “ON” by a position of the vehicle in front of you can-
pressing the engine switch. not be detected correctly.
4) Make sure that the message (5) If you drive the vehicle for about 2 minutes
appears for about 3 seconds and then after the above situations have improved,
turn off. these indicator and message will turn off
and the radar brake support system will
• If you clean the sensor and drive the turn back on.
vehicle, but the message (5) appears
again, there might be another problem.
Contact an authorized SUZUKI dealer
for further assistance.
3-99
83RM0-01E


Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be malfunction of the adaptive
rior buzzer) cruise control system. Contact your
SUZUKI dealer for inspection.
54P000356
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be a problem with the radar
rior buzzer) brake support system.
61MM435
3-100
83RM0-01E


Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- There may be a problem with the radar
rior buzzer) brake support system and the system is
disabled temporarily.
while, have your vehicle inspected by an
61MM436
Blinks “Beep” (one time from inte- The radar brake support system is disabled
rior buzzer) temporarily because dirt is detected on the
sensor, or millimeter-waves from the radar
sensor are diffused reflection.
while, wipe the sensor with a soft cloth.
61MM439
3-101
83RM0-01E

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) (if equipped) WARNING

ESS stands for Emergency Stop Signal. Although the ESS is designed to
reduce the number of rear-end colli-
ESS is a feature that gives warning to a following vehicle by flashing all turn signal lights sions that occur from sudden brak-
faster than usual if all the following conditions are met. Also, within these conditions, it will ing, by warning a following vehicle, it
flash along with your turn signal in the instrument cluster. cannot prevent all collisions. Always
• When you slam down on the brakes at speeds of approximately 55 km/h (34 mph) or make an effort to drive safely and
over. avoid unnecessary sudden braking
• When the ABS is activated or when you suddenly brake similar to activating the ABS. when stopping or decelerating.
EXAMPLE NOTE:
• The ESS feature cannot be deactivated.
• Use of the hazard warning switch should
be given preference over the ESS.
• When driving on the following surfaces
and the ABS gives out momentarily, the
ESS may not function.
– When driving on slippery surfaces
– When driving over bumps in the road
such as highway joint seams
61MM417
The ESS will stop functioning in the following situations.

• When you release the brake.
• When the ABS is no longer activated.
• When you turn on the hazard warning switch.
• When the car is no longer rapidly decelerating.
3-102
83RM0-01E

MEMO
3-103
83RM0-01E

DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING TIPS
Running-in ........................................................................... 4-1
Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-1
Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 4-2
Highway Driving .................................................................. 4-3
Driving on Hills .................................................................... 4-3
Driving on Slippery Roads ................................................. 4-4 4
60G409
83RM0-01E

DRIVING TIPS
Running-in Catalytic Converter
NOTICE
The future performance and reliabil-
ity of the engine depends on the care
52D078S and restraint exercised during its
early life. It is especially important to
WARNING observe the following precautions
during the initial 960 km (600 miles)
• Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times. of vehicle operation.
Even though air bags are equipped • After starting, do not race the
at the front seating positions, the engine. Warm it up gradually.
driver and all passengers should • Avoid prolonged vehicle operation
be properly restrained at all times, at a constant speed. Moving parts
using the seat belts provided. Refer will break in better if you vary your
to the “Seat Belts and Child speed.
80G106
Restraint Systems” section for • Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
instructions on proper use of the full throttle starts. minimize the amount of harmful pollutants
seat belts. • Avoid hard braking, especially in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded
• Never drive while under the influ- during the first 320 km (200 miles) fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic
ence of alcohol or other drugs. of driving. converters is prohibited, because lead
Alcohol and drugs can seriously • Do not drive slowly with the trans- deactivates the pollutant-reducing compo-
impair your ability to drive safely, axle in a high gear. nents of the catalyst system.
greatly increasing the risk of injury • Drive the vehicle at moderate
to yourself and others. You should The converter is designed to last the life of
engine speeds. the vehicle under normal usage and when
also avoid driving when you are • Do not tow a trailer during the first
tired, sick, irritated, or under unleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-
960 km (600 miles) of vehicle oper- nance is required on the converter. How-
stress. ation. ever, it is very important to keep the engine
properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which can
result from an improperly tuned engine,
may cause overheating of the catalyst.
This may result in permanent heat damage
4-1
83RM0-01E

DRIVING TIPS
to the catalyst and other vehicle compo-

nents. Improving Fuel Economy
NOTICE The following instructions will help you
improve fuel economy.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst
or other vehicle damage: Avoid excessive idling
• Maintain the engine in the proper If you are to wait for more than a minute
operating condition. while you are parked, stop the engine and
• In the event of an engine malfunc- start it again later. When warming up a
tion, particularly one involving cold engine, allow the engine to idle until
engine misfire or other apparent the temperature gauge pointer comes up
loss of performance, have the vehi- to the “C” position (if the idling is not pro-
cle serviced promptly. hibited). In this position, the engine is suffi-
• Do not turn off the engine or inter- 54G584S
ciently warm for starting off.
rupt the ignition when the transaxle Avoid “fast” starts
is in gear and the vehicle is in Fast starts away from lights or stop signs
motion. WARNING
will consume fuel unnecessarily and
• Do not try to start the engine by Be careful where you park and drive; shorten engine life. Start off slowly.
pushing or towing the vehicle, or the catalytic converter and other
coasting down a hill. exhaust components can get very Avoid unnecessary stops
• Do not idle the engine with any hot. As with any vehicle, do not park Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-
spark plug wires disconnected or or operate this vehicle in areas where ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speed
removed, such as during diagnos- combustible materials such as dry whenever possible. Slowing down and
tic testing. grass or leaves can come in contact then accelerating again uses more fuel.
• Do not idle the vehicle for pro- with a hot exhaust system. Keep a steady cruising speed
longed periods if idling seems
Keep as constant a speed as road and
rough or there are other malfunc-
traffic conditions will permit.
tions.
• Do not allow the fuel tank to get
near the empty level.
4-2
83RM0-01E

DRIVING TIPS
Keep the air cleaner clean

Highway Driving Driving on Hills
EXAMPLE
When driving at highway speeds, pay Manual transaxle
attention to the following:
• Stopping distance progressively
increases with vehicle speed. Apply the
brakes far enough ahead of the stopping
point to allow for the extra stopping dis-
tance.
• On rainy days, “Hydroplaning” can
occur. “Hydroplaning” is the loss of direct 61MM706
contact between the road surface and
the vehicle’s tires due to a water film Automatic Transaxle
60A183S
forming between them. Steering or brak-
ing the vehicle while “Hydroplaning” can
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there be very difficult, and loss of control can
will be greater intake resistance, resulting occur. Keep speed down when the road
in decreased power output and increased surface is wet.
fuel consumption. • At high speeds, the vehicle may be
Keep weight to a minimum affected by side winds. Therefore,
The heavier the load, the more fuel the reduce speed and be prepared for unex- 83RM015
vehicle consumes. Take out any luggage pected buffeting, which can occur at the
exits of tunnels, when passing by a cut TCSS
or cargo when it is not necessary.
of a hill, or when being overtaken by
Keep tire pressures correct large vehicles, etc.
Underinflation of the tires can waste fuel
due to increased running resistance of the
tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the label on the driver’s
side door or the driver’s door lock pillar.
61MM468
4-3
83RM0-01E

DRIVING TIPS
• When climbing steep hills, the vehicle models are not sport/utility vehicles, and
may begin to slow down and show a lack Driving on Slippery Roads are not designed for off-road use.
of power. If this happens, you should
shift to a lower gear so that the engine
will again be operating in its normal Tire Chains
power range. Shift rapidly to prevent the Tire chains should only be used if they are
vehicle from losing momentum. needed to increase traction or are required
• When driving down a hill, the engine by law. Make sure that the chains you use
should be used for braking by shifting to are the correct size for your vehicle’s tires.
next lower gear. Also make sure that there is enough clear-
ance between the fenders and the chains
WARNING as installed on the tires.
Try not to hold the brake pedal down Install the chains on the front tires tightly,
too long or too often while going according to the chain manufacturer’s
down a steep or long hill. This could instructions. Retighten the chains after
cause the brakes to overheat, result- driving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if neces-
ing in reduced braking efficiency. 60G089S sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.
Failure to take this precaution could
result in loss of vehicle control. Under wet road conditions you should NOTICE
drive at a lower speed than on dry roads
due to possible slippage of tires during • If you hear the chains hitting
NOTICE braking. When driving on icy, snow-cov- against the vehicle body while driv-
ered, or muddy roads, reduce your speed ing, stop and tighten them.
When descending a down hill, and avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt • If your vehicle is equipped with full
NEVER turn the ignition key to the braking, or sharp steering movements. wheel caps, remove the wheel caps
“LOCK” position or press the engine before installing the chains or the
switch to change the ignition mode to Four-mode 4WD Models wheel caps can be damaged by the
“LOCK” (OFF). Emission control sys- Your four-mode 4WD is designed to get chain bands.
tem and automatic transaxle (if better traction on slippery roads than 2-
equipped) damage may result. wheel drive models. However, your four-
mode 4WD will not have as much traction
in deep snow, mud or sand as multipur-
pose 4WD vehicles. You should not
attempt to drive your four-mode 4WD in
deep snow, mud or sand. Four-mode 4WD
4-4
83RM0-01E

DRIVING TIPS
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck WARNING

If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud, or Do not allow anyone to stand near
sand, follow the directions below: the vehicle when you are rocking it,
1) Shift the transaxle back and forth and do not spin the wheels faster
between a forward range (or first gear than an indicated 40 km/h (25 mph)
for manual transaxle) and reverse. This on the speedometer. Personal injury
will create a rocking motion which may and/ or vehicle damage may result
give you enough momentum to free the from spinning the wheels too fast.
vehicle. Press gently on the accelerator
to keep wheel spinning to a minimum
wheel rpm. Remove your foot from the NOTICE
accelerator while shifting. Do not continue rocking the vehicle
Do not race the engine. Excessive for more than a few minutes. Pro- 54G638S
wheel spin will cause the tires to dig longed rocking can cause engine
deeper, making it more difficult to free overheating or transaxle damage.
the vehicle. WARNING
In addition to following the driving
NOTE: tips in this section, it is important to
If your vehicle is equipped the ESP®, you observe the following precautions.
may have to turn the ESP® system off in • Make sure your tires are in good
order to spin the wheels. condition and always maintain the
specified tire pressure. Refer to
2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few “Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND
minutes of rocking, we recommend you MAINTENANCE” section for
to consult your SUZUKI dealer or a details.
roadside assistance service. If a towing (Continued)
service is not available in an emer-
gency, your vehicle may be temporarily
towed by a towing cable or chain
secured to the towing hook either on
the front of the vehicle or on the rear of
the vehicle. Refer to “Frame Hooks” in
the “OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIP-
MENT” section.
4-5
83RM0-01E

DRIVING TIPS
WARNING
(Continued)
• Do not use tires other than those
specified by SUZUKI. Never use dif-
ferent sizes or types of tires on the
front and rear wheels. For informa-
tion regarding the specified tires,
refer to the Tire Information Label
located on the driver’s door lock
pillar.
• Never use oversized tires or spe-
cial shock absorbers and springs
to raise (jack up) your vehicle. This
will change the handling character-
istics. Oversized tires may also rub
against the fender over bumps,
causing vehicle damage or tire fail-
ure.
• After driving through water, test the
brakes while driving at a slow
speed to see if they have main-
tained their normal effectiveness. If
the brakes are less effective than
normal, dry them by repeatedly
applying the brakes while driving
slowly until the brakes have
regained their normal effective-
ness.
4-6
83RM0-01E

DRIVING TIPS
MEMO
4-7
83RM0-01E

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-1
Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-2
Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-4
Interior Light ........................................................................ 5-5
Accessory Socket ............................................................... 5-8
Sunroof (if equipped) .......................................................... 5-9
Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-11
Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-11 5
Overhead Console (if equipped) ........................................ 5-12
Cup Holder and Storage Area ............................................ 5-13
Footrest ................................................................................ 5-16
Floor Mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 5-17
Luggage Compartment Hooks ........................................... 5-17
Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped) ..................... 5-18
Luggage Compartment Board (if equipped) ..................... 5-18
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors (if equipped) ............... 5-19
60G407
Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-20
Heating and Air Conditioning System ............................... 5-23
Heating System ................................................................... 5-25
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ................. 5-28
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System
(Climate Control) ................................................................. 5-32
Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-38
Installation of Radio Frequency Transmitters .................. 5-38
Audio system (if equipped) ................................................ 5-39
83RM0-01E

The fuel filler cap is located on the left rear

Fuel Filler Cap side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door can EXAMPLE (1)
be unlocked by pulling up the opener lever
located on the outboard side of the driver’s
EXAMPLE seat and locked by simply closing the door.
(3)
Open Close (1) (1)
(2)
61MM0B104
NOTE:
The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap
61MM0B014
EXAMPLE (2) by hooking the groove (3) when refuel-
ing.
57L51093
EXAMPLE
To remove the fuel filler cap: To reinstall the fuel filler cap:
1) Open the fuel filler door. 1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear
2) Remove the cap by turning it counter- several clicks.
clockwise. 2) Close the fuel filler door.
CAUTION WARNING
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not
fuel may be under pressure and may smoke when refueling, and make
spray out, causing injury. sure there are no open flames or
sparks in the area.
62J058
5-1
83RM0-01E

WARNING Engine Hood EXAMPLE

If you need to replace the fuel cap,
use a genuine SUZUKI cap. Use of an
improper cap can result in a malfunc- EXAMPLE
tion of the fuel system or emission
control system. It may also result in
fuel leakage in the event of an acci-
dent.
83RM023
2) Push the under-hood release lever

sideways with your finger, as shown in
61MM0B015
the illustration. While pushing the lever,
To open the engine hood: lift up the engine hood.
1) Pull the hood release handle located on
the outboard side of the driver’s side of CAUTION
the instrument panel. This will disen-
gage the engine hood lock halfway. The release lever can be hot enough
to burn your finger right after driving.
Touch the lever after it becomes cool
enough.
NOTICE
Make sure that the wiper arms are not
raised before you lift up the engine
hood to avoid damaging the wiper
arms and the engine hood.
5-2
83RM0-01E

To close the engine hood:

EXAMPLE 1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the CAUTION
prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod
back to the holding clip. To avoid injury, be sure no part of the
occupant’s body such as hands or
head is in the path of the hood when
EXAMPLE closing it.
NOTICE
Pressing the hood from above may
damage the hood.
83RM024
3) While holding the hood, pull the prop

rod out from the holding clip, then insert
the end of the rod into the designated
83RM025
hole in the hood.
2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm above
CAUTION the hood latch, then let it drop down.
Make sure the hood is securely latched
• The prop rod can be hot enough to after closing.
burn your finger right after driving.
Touch the rod after it becomes cool
enough.
WARNING
• Insert the end of the rod into the Make sure the hood is fully closed
hole securely. If the rod drops off, and latched before driving. If it is not,
your body may be caught in the it can fly up unexpectedly during
hood. driving, obstructing your view and
• The rod may drop off when the resulting in an accident.
hood is hit by a wind. Be careful on
windy days.
5-3
83RM0-01E

Card holder (if equipped) Vanity mirror (if equipped)

Sun Visor
EXAMPLE
(1)
(4)
(2)
EXAMPLE (3)
80JM152 61MM0B018
(1) Mirror cover (3) Vanity mirror

79J161 (2) Card holder (4) Vanity mirror light (if equipped)
The sun visors can be pulled down to block
You can put a card in the card holder (2) on To use the vanity mirror (3) on the back of
glare coming through the windshield, or
the back of the sun visor. the sun visor, pull up the mirror cover (1).
they can be unhooked and turned to the
side to block glare coming through the side
window. NOTICE The vanity mirror light (4) comes on when
the mirror cover (1) is opened.
When you park your vehicle outdoors
NOTICE in direct sunlight or in hot weather,
WARNING
do not leave plastic cards in the
When unhooking and hooking a sun
holder. The heat may distort them. • Do not use the mirror while driving
visor, be sure to handle it by the hard
your vehicle or could lose control
plastic parts or the sun visor can be
of the vehicle.
damaged.
• When using the vanity mirror, do
not move too close to a front air
bag location or lean against it. If
the front air bag is accidentally
inflated, it could hit you hard.
5-4
83RM0-01E

NOTICE Interior Light EXAMPLE

If the vanity mirror has the light, do
not leave the mirror cover open for a
long time, or the battery will dis- EXAMPLE (1)
charge. (4) / (5)
(6)
(7) (7)
(2) (3) (2)
61MM0B019
(1) Glove box light (if equipped)

(2) Footwell lights (if equipped) (8)
(3) Instrument panel pocket light
(if equipped)
61MM0B020
(4) Front (without overhead console)

(5) Front (with overhead console)
(6) Center (without sunroof)
(7) Center (with sunroof)
(8) Luggage compartment (if equipped)
5-5
83RM0-01E

Glove Box Light (if equipped) (1) Front (without overhead console) (4) Front (with overhead console) (5)
Refer to “Glove Box” in this section.
EXAMPLE
Footwell Lights (if equipped) (2) CLOSE
A footwell light is provided in the leg space T I LT

PUSH
in front of each front seat. When any door OPEN
(including the tailgate) is open, the footwell

lights on both sides light automatically.
NOTE:
You can change the footwell lights opera-
tion via the information display. Refer to
DRIVING” section. (d) (c) (b) (a) (d)
61MM0A205 61MM0A106
Instrument Panel Pocket Light Push the switch to turn on the light and
(if equipped) (3) push it again to turn off the light.
Center (without sunroof) (6)
This light comes on while the position
lights, tail light and/or the headlights are
on. EXAMPLE
(c) (b) (a)
61MM0A107
5-6
83RM0-01E

key, or press the engine switch to

Center (with sunroof) (7) change the ignition mode to “ACC” or Luggage Compartment
“ON” during this time, the light will start (if equipped) (8)
to fade out immediately. After removing
(c) the key from the ignition switch, or after
pressing the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), the light
will turn on for about 15 seconds and
then fade out.
(b) • To save the battery, the light will be auto-
matically turned off when a period of 15
minutes has elapsed after any of the
doors is opened and other operations
are not done.
(a) (2) (1)
OFF (c)
The light remains off even when the door is
61MM0B022
opened.
61MM0B023
These light switches have three or four
positions which function as described SPOT LIGHT (d) When you open the tailgate with the lug-
below: When the light switch is in the DOOR or gage compartment light switch in the “ON”
OFF position, push the switch to turn on position (1), the light comes on and
ON (a) the light and push it again to turn off the remains on as long as you keep the tail-
• The light comes on and stays on regard- light. gate open.
less of whether the door is open or
• To save the battery, the light will be auto-
closed.
• To save the battery, the light will be auto-
minutes has elapsed after the tailgate is
opened and other operations are not
minutes has elapsed after the light
done.
comes on and other operations are not
done. When the luggage compartment light
DOOR (b) switch is in the “OFF” position (2), the light
• The light comes on while any of the remains off regardless of whether the tail-
doors is opened. After closing all doors, gate is open or close.
the light will remain on for about 15 sec-
onds and then fade out. If you insert the
5-7
83RM0-01E

The accessory socket will work when the

NOTICE Accessory Socket ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-
tion, or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”.
Do not leave the tailgate open with Center console Each socket can be used to provide 12
the luggage compartment light volt/120 watt/10 ampere power for electri-
switch in the “ON” position for a long EXAMPLE cal accessories when used alone. Make
time, or the battery will discharge. sure that the cap remains on the socket
when the socket is not in use.
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
• To prevent the fuse from being
blown, when using sockets at the
same time, do not exceed the total
combined power capacity of 12
volt/120 watt/10 ampere.
• Use of inappropriate electrical
accessories can cause damage to
61MM0B024 your vehicle’s electrical system.
Luggage compartment (if equipped) Make sure that any electrical
accessories you use are designed
EXAMPLE to plug into this type of socket.
61MM0A108
NOTE:
The number of doors involved in the light-
ing operation of the interior light depends
on the vehicle specification. If there is a
switch (rubber projection) at the door
opening as shown, the door is involved in
the lighting operation. The tailgate is also
involved in this operation even without the
rubber projection.
61MM0B105
5-8
83RM0-01E

To tilt the sunroof

Sunroof (if equipped) WARNING
You can tilt or slide the sunroof by operating • Never allow any part of your body
the sunroof switch after pressing the engine such as hands or head to get out of
switch to change the ignition mode to “ON”. the sunroof opening while the vehi-
cle is moving.
• Wear your seat belts and use child
restraints at all times. In an acci-
dent, you could be thrown from the OPEN
vehicle through an open sunroof. PUSH

T I LT
• Be sure there are no hands or other CLOSE
obstructions in the path of the sun-

roof when you close the sunroof. (1)
• Always take the keyless push start
system remote controller with you 61MM0A109
when leaving the vehicle even if To tilt the sunroof up from fully closed,
only for a short time. Also do not push the “PUSH TILT” part (1) of the sun-
leave children alone in a parked roof switch. The sunroof will tilt up fully.
vehicle. Unattended children could
use the sunroof switches and get NOTE:
65D612
trapped by the sunroof. If the sun shade is closed when tilting up,
the sun shade will open automatically.
To tilt the sunroof down from tilted up posi-
NOTICE tion, push the “PUSH TILT” part (1) of the
• Do not put your body weight on the sunroof switch again. The sunroof will tilt
roof around the sunroof such as by down. If you keep holding the “PUSH TILT”
sitting on it. part (1) of the sunroof switch for more than
• Remove water drops, snow, ice or one second, the sunroof and sun shade
sand from the sunroof before open- will be completely closed.
ing.
• Be sure to close the sunroof when you
leave the vehicle unattended.
• Periodically inspect the guide rail for dirt
and clean it if any dirt has accumulated.
5-9
83RM0-01E

To open the sunroof To close the sunroof There is a system to prevent being
You can close the sunroof manually by pinched by the sunroof.
pushing the sunroof switch to “CLOSE” When the system senses that something is
position (4). The sunroof will close, and pinched when the sunroof is sliding for-
then the sun shade will close. ward or tilting down, the sunroof will auto-
matically reverse direction and slide
When you push the sunroof switch to rearward or tilt up. This system will operate
“FULL CLOSE” position (5), the sunroof when the sunroof is closing or tilting down
(3) will fully close. When you push the sunroof automatically.
OPEN (2) switch to “FULL CLOSE” position (5)
PUSH
again, the sun shade will be fully closed. Make sure there are no hands or other
T I LT
obstructions in the path of the sunroof
When you keep holding the sunroof switch when you close the sunroof even though
(4)
CLOSE
to “FULL CLOSE” position (5) for more there is a system to prevent being pinched
(5) than one second, the sunroof and sun by the sunroof.
61MM0A110
shade will be fully closed.
To stop the sunroof or sun shade during
You can open the sunroof manually by operation, push the switch in any way WARNING
pushing the sunroof switch to “OPEN” briefly. The system to prevent being pinched
position (2). The sun shade will open, and by the sunroof may not work if the
then the sunroof will open. battery is not sufficiently charged.
When you push the sunroof switch to
“FULL OPEN” position (3), the sun shade
will fully open. When you push the sunroof CAUTION
switch to “FULL OPEN” position (3) again, The system to prevent being pinched
the sunroof will fully open. by the sunroof does not work in the
area where the sunroof is almost
When you keep holding the sunroof switch
completely closed.
to “FULL OPEN” position (3) for more than
one second, the sun shade and sunroof
will fully open. If the system to prevent being pinched by
To stop the sun shade or sunroof during the sunroof does not operate properly,
operation, push the switch in any way close the sunroof fully by using the sunroof
briefly. switch and ask your dealer to have the
system inspected.
5-10
83RM0-01E

Assist Grips (if equipped) Coat Hooks (if equipped) Glove Box
EXAMPLE
61MM0B025
54G249 61MM0B026
You can hang clothing on the coat hooks.
Assist grips are provided for convenience. These hooks are not designed for large or To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.
heavy items. To close it, push the lid until it latches
NOTICE securely.
To avoid damaging the assist grip WARNING
and the molded headlining, do not
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with side
hang down the assist grip. curtain air bags, do not hang sharp Never drive with the glove box lid
items like a hanger on the coat hook. open. It could cause injury if an acci-
When hanging the clothes, hang dent occurs.
them on the hook without using a
hanger.
5-11
83RM0-01E

EXAMPLE Overhead Console WARNING

(if equipped) • Do not drive with the overhead con-
sole lid open, or the articles stowed
inside could fall down during brak-
ing, acceleration or in the event of
a collision. Always close the lid
after putting something into or tak-
ing something out of the console.
• If you park your vehicle outdoors in
direct sunlight or in hot weather,
the overhead console can get very
hot since it is close to the roof. So,
61MM0B027
when parking in such conditions:
– Do not leave eyeglasses in the
The glove box light (if equipped) stays on overhead console. The heat may
while the lid is open. distort plastic lenses or frames.
(1) – Do not place flammable items,
61MM0A111 such as a lighter, in the overhead
Use this stowage to keep small articles. console. The heat may cause a
You can open the lid (1) by pressing the fire.
raised portion on it.
NOTICE
• Do not apply undue force to the lid
when closing it. Doing so could
break the lid and articles inside.
• Place glasses in a case when stow-
ing them in the overhead console,
or the lenses may be damaged.
5-12
83RM0-01E

Cup Holder and Storage Area Instrument Panel Pocket (1)
WARNING
EXAMPLE
Do not place any objects which may
fall out from the pocket when the
vehicle is moving.
(6) (7) (8) Failure to take the precaution may
(1) (2) (3)
(5) result in an object interfering with the
pedals and causing a loss of vehicle
control or an accident.
(4)
(6) (8)
(3)
61MM0B028
(1) Instrument panel pocket (2) Front cup holders

(3) Front bottle holder (4) Front armrest with console box
(if equipped)
(5) Front seat back pocket (if equipped) (6) Rear bottle holder
(7) Rear armrest with cup holders (8) Luggage compartment pocket
(if equipped)
5-13
83RM0-01E

Console box
Front Cup Holders (2) Front Bottle Holder (3) / Use this stowage for keeping small items.
Rear Bottle Holder (6) Open the compartment by raising the top
WARNING You should hold a bottle with a cap in the lid while keeping the lever (1) up.
holder.
Failure to take the precautions listed
below could cause personal injury or
EXAMPLE (1)
vehicle damage. Front Armrest with Console Box
• Be careful when you are using the (if equipped) (4)
cup holders to hold a cup contain-
ing hot liquid. Spilling out hot liq-
uid can cause burn injury. NOTICE
• Do not use the cup holders to hold To avoid damage to the armrest, do
sharp-edged, hard, or breakable not lean on it or allow a child to sit on
objects. Objects in the cup holders it.
may be thrown about during a sud-
den stop or impact, and could
cause personal injury. EXAMPLE
• Be careful not to spill liquid or 61MM0B029
insert any foreign materials into the
moving part of the gearshift lever, NOTE:
or any electrical components. Liq- Always close the lid after you put some-
uid or foreign materials may dam- thing into or take something out of the box.
age these parts.
61MM0B029
The armrest can be slid forward.
5-14
83RM0-01E

Universal serial bus (USB) socket

(if equipped) Front Seat Back Pocket Rear Armrest with Cup Holders
(if equipped) (5) (if equipped) (7)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
61MM0B029 EXAMPLE
The USB socket is provided in the console 61MM0B032 61MM0B033
box.
Connect your portable digital music player, This pocket is provided for holding light (1) Cup holders
etc. to this socket to enjoy music through and soft things such as gloves, newspa-
pers or magazines. The rear armrest is stowed in the center of
the vehicle’s audio system using it as a the seatback. Tilt it down forward to use.
source. Refer to “Audio System” in this
section. CAUTION
Do not put hard or breakable objects
in the pocket. If an accident occurs,
objects such as bottles, cans, etc.
can injure the occupants in the rear
seat.
5-15
83RM0-01E

WARNING Luggage Compartment Pocket (8) Footrest

• If the seat belt is obstructed by any
part of the armrest when fastened,
it cannot provide the intended pro- EXAMPLE
tection. After fastening the seat
belt, always check that the armrest
is not interfering with the belt. (1)
• In an accident or sudden stop, the
rear seat armrest could fall for-
ward. If there is a child in a rear-fac-
ing child restraint in the rear center
seating position, the falling armrest
could injure the child. Do not install
a rear-facing child restraint in the EXAMPLE (1)
rear center seating position.
61MM0B034
68LM543
To open the lid, slide the lever (1) and pull
the lid. Use the footrest (1) as a support for your
left foot.
5-16
83RM0-01E

Floor Mats (if equipped) WARNING Luggage Compartment Hooks

Failure to take the following precau-
tions may result in the driver’s side
floor mat interfering with the pedals
Shopping Hook
and causing a loss of vehicle control
or an accident. EXAMPLE
• Make sure that the floor mat grom-
mets are hooked to the fasteners.
• Never place additional floor mats
on top of the existing floor mat.
68LM554
To prevent the driver’s side floor mat from

sliding forward and possibly interfering with 83RM063
the operation of the pedals, genuine
SUZUKI floor mats are recommended. You can hang the shopping bag or other
Whenever you put the driver’s side floor suitable objects on the hook.
mat back in the vehicle after it has been This hook is not designed for large or
removed, be sure to hook the floor mat heavy items.
grommets to the fasteners and position the
floor mat properly in the footwell. NOTICE
When you replace the floor mats in your To avoid breaking the hook, do not
vehicle with a different type such as all- hang items heavier than following
weather floor mats, we highly recommend weight.
using genuine SUZUKI floor mats for Shopping hook: 2 kg (4.4 lbs)
proper fitting.
5-17
83RM0-01E

Cargo Net hooks (if equipped) Luggage Compartment Cover Luggage Compartment Board
(if equipped) (if equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
83RM064
You can hook an optional net to these EXAMPLE

hooks. 61MM0B109 61MM0B035
These hooks are not designed for large or Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug- Your vehicle is equipped with the luggage
heavy items. gage compartment is hidden from view by compartment board in the luggage com-
a luggage compartment cover. partment. You can place luggage or other
NOTICE cargos on the board or under the board.
To avoid breaking the hooks, do not WARNING You can also place tall luggage by remov-
hang large or heavy items. ing the board from the luggage compart-
Do not carry items on top of the lug- ment.
gage compartment cover, even if they
are small and light. Objects on top of
the cover could be thrown about in
an accident, causing injury, or could
obstruct the driver’s rear view.
5-18
83RM0-01E

WARNING Roof Rails or Roof Rack

Objects that extend higher than the Anchors (if equipped)
luggage compartment cover (if
equipped) can obstruct the driver’s Roof rails
rear view, which can cause an acci-
dent. These objects can also become
damaged or can damage the tailgate.
Do not carry items that extend higher
than the luggage compartment cover.
CAUTION EXAMPLE
If you are not careful when handling 61MM0B036
the luggage board, you could be
The luggage compartment board can be
injured.
held open as shown in the illustration.
Handle the luggage board carefully
when removing or installing it.
NOTICE
83RM026
If the luggage compartment board is
held open while driving, it can be Roof rack anchors
damaged.
Do not hold open the board while
EXAMPLE
driving.
80J082
5-19
83RM0-01E

You can use the roof rails or the roof rack • Do not carry items so large that they
anchors to attach the optional roof rack hang over the bumpers or the sides of Frame Hooks
which is available at your SUZUKI dealer. the vehicle, or block your view.
If you use a roof rack, observe the instruc- • Secure the front and rear ends of long Your SUZUKI does not recommend you
tions and precautions in this section and items – such as wood panels, surfboards use the frame hooks for towing another
provided with the roof rack. and so forth – to both the front and rear vehicle. SUZUKI was originally designed to
of the vehicle. You should protect the tow your vehicle on the road emergency
• Make sure the roof rack is securely painted surfaces of the vehicle from towing.
installed. scuffing caused by tie-down ropes. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an
• To mount various types of cargo (such • Check periodically to make sure the roof emergency, refer to “Towing” in “EMER-
as skis, bicycles, etc.) properly, use suit- rack is securely installed and free from GENCY SERVICE” section.
able attachments which are available damage.
from your SUZUKI dealer. Be sure to
install the attachments properly and
• For vehicles with roof rack anchors, WARNING
make sure the anchors are covered with
securely according to the instructions the caps when not in use. Observe the following instructions
provided. Do not mount cargo directly on when using frame hooks. The towing
the roof panel. The cargo can damage hook or vehicle body may break and
the roof panel. WARNING cause serious injury or damage:
• The gross weight of the roof rack plus • Abrupt maneuvers or failure to • Do not use the frame hooks for
cargo must not exceed the loading properly secure cargo can allow towing another vehicle.
capacity. the cargo to fly off the vehicle and • Avoid pulling the vehicle to get out
– Roof rails: 75 kg (165 lbs) hit others, causing personal injury of severe snowy, muddy or sandy
– Roof rack anchors: 50 kg (110 lbs) or property damage. conditions, sudden starts or erratic
Also, do not let the gross vehicle weight • Mount cargo securely and avoid driving maneuvers which could
(fully loaded vehicle including driver, abrupt maneuvers such as “jack- cause excessive stress on the tow-
passengers, cargo, roof load and trailer rabbit” starts, sharp turns, fast cor- ing hook.
tongue weight) exceed the Gross Vehi- nering and sudden braking. Check In such case, we recommend that
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed in the periodically to make sure that you contact a professional service.
“SPECIFICATIONS” section of this man- cargo is securely fastened.
ual. • Large, bulky, long, or flat items can
• Mount and secure the cargo onto the affect vehicle aerodynamics or be
roof rack properly according to the caught by the wind, and can reduce
instructions provided. Be sure to stow vehicle control resulting in an acci-
the heaviest items at the bottom and dis- dent and personal injury. Drive cau-
tribute the cargo as evenly as possible. tiously at a safely reduced speed
when carrying this type of cargo.
5-20
83RM0-01E

To install the hook (1), follow the procedure

Front below. EXAMPLE (C)
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(1) (1)
(A)
(A)
(B)
83RM028
2) Remove the cover (C) by using a jack

61MM0B039
83RM027 handle (A) covered with a soft cloth as
The towing hook (1) is provided on the 1) Pick up the towing hook (1), jack handle shown in the illustration.
front of the vehicle for use in emergency (A) and wheel brace (B) stowed in the
situations only. luggage compartment. NOTE:
Do not use excessive force as it may dam-
age the cover strap.
5-21
83RM0-01E

Rear
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(1) (B)
EXAMPLE
(1)
83RM029 83RM030 (2)
3) Install the towing hook (1) by hand. 4) To tighten the towing hook (1), turn it
clockwise by using a wheel brace (B) 61MM0B043
NOTE: until the hook (1) is securely installed. The frame hook (2) is provided on the rear
We recommend that fasten the cover with of the vehicle for use in emergency situa-
tape to prevent damage during towing. To remove the towing hook (1), reverse the tions and sea shipping purposes only.
procedure used to install the towing hook.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
never use the towing hook (1) for
trailer / train shipping and sea ship-
ping purposes.
5-22
83RM0-01E

Other Hooks WARNING Heating and Air Conditioning

Do not use the hooks (3), (4) and the System
EXAMPLE frame holes (5) for towing purpose.
These hooks and holes may break There are three types of heating and air
and cause serious injury or damage. conditioning systems as follows:
• Heating System
• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
(3)
System
• Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning
System (Climate Control)
(4)
(5)
61MM0A112
The hooks (3) (if equipped) and frame

holes (5) are provided for trailer/train ship-
ping purposes only. The hooks (4) are pro-
vided for sea shipping purpose only.
5-23
83RM0-01E

Side outlet
Air Outlet
(1) (2)
1 1
OPEN
2
2
CLOSE
4 4 3
61MM0B046
5 Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally,

to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
5 Move the dial (2) to open or close the out-
let.
5*
EXAMPLE 5*
61MM0B045
1. Windshield defroster outlet

2. Side defroster outlet
3. Side outlet
4. Center outlet
5. Floor outlet
* if equipped
5-24
83RM0-01E

Center outlet
Heating System
(1) (1)
Description of Controls
(2)
1 2 3
0 4
61MM0B047
Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
CAUTION (1) (4) (3)
Prolonged exposure to hot air from the heater or air conditioner could result in 61MM0B048
low temperature burns. All vehicle occupants, particularly children, the elderly,
those with special needs, individuals with delicate skin, and sleeping individuals, Temperature selector (1)
should maintain sufficient distance from the air outlets to prevent prolonged This is used to select the temperature by
exposure to hot airflow. turning the selector.
Blower speed selector (2)

This is used to turn on the blower and to
select blower speed by turning the selec-
tor.
5-25
83RM0-01E

Air flow selector (3) Bi-level (b) Heat & defrost (d)
(c)
(b) (d)
61MM0B050 61MM0B052
Temperature-controlled air comes out of Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and cooler air comes out the floor outlets, the windshield defroster
(a) (e)
of the center and side outlets. When the outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
temperature selector (1) is in the fully side outlets.
COLD position or fully HOT position, how-
ever, the air from the floor outlets and the Defrost (e)
61MM0A019
air from the center and side outlets will be
This is used to select one of the functions the same temperature.
described below.
Heat (c)
Ventilation (a)
61MM0B053
Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the windshield defroster outlets, the side
defroster outlets and the side outlets.
61MM0B051
61MM0B049 Temperature-controlled air comes out of
Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets and the side outlets, also
the center and side air outlets. comes out of the windshield defroster out-
lets and also comes slightly out of the side
defroster outlets.
5-26
83RM0-01E

Air intake selector (4) Head cooled/Feet warmed heating

System Operating Instructions Select “BI-LEVEL” and “FRESH AIR”, the
temperature selector to the desired tem-
Natural ventilation perature position, and the blower speed
Select “VENTILATION” and “FRESH AIR”, selector to the desired blower speed posi-
the temperature selector to the desired tion. Unless the temperature selector is in
temperature position, and the blower the fully COLD position or fully HOT posi-
(f) (g) speed selector to “OFF”. Fresh air will flow tion, the air that comes out of the center
61MM0A020 through the vehicle during driving. and side outlets will be cooler than the air
This selector is used to select the following Forced ventilation that comes out of the floor outlets.
modes. The control settings are the same as for Defrosting/Feet warmed heating
natural ventilation except you set the Select “HEAT & DEFROST” and “FRESH
Fresh Air (f) blower speed selector to a position other AIR”, the temperature selector to the
When this mode is selected, the indicator than “OFF”. desired temperature position, and the
light will go off and outside air is used. blower speed selector to HIGH. When the
Normal heating (using outside air)
Recirculated Air (g) Select “HEAT” and “FRESH AIR”, the tem- windshield has become clear, set the
When this mode is selected, the indicator perature selector to the desired tempera- blower speed selector to the desired
light will come on, outside air is shut out ture position and the blower speed selector blower speed position.
and inside air is recirculated. This mode is to the desired blower speed position. Set- Defrosting
suitable when driving through dusty or pol- ting the blower speed selector to a higher Select “DEFROST” and “FRESH AIR”, the
luted air such as in a tunnel, or when blower speed position increases heating temperature selector to the desired tem-
attempting to quickly cool down the inte- efficiency. perature position (higher temperature pro-
rior. vides more efficient defrosting), and the
Quick heating (using recirculated air)
The control settings are the same as for blower speed selector to HIGH. When the
“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR” windshield has become clear, set the
are switched alternately each time the air normal heating except you select “RECIR-
CULATED AIR”. If you use this heating blower speed selector to the desired
intake selector is pushed. blower speed position.
method for an extended period of time, the
NOTE: air in the vehicle can become contami-
If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an nated and the windows can become misty.
extended period of time, the air in the vehi- Therefore, use this method only for quick
cle can become contaminated. Therefore, heating and change to the normal heating
you should occasionally select “FRESH method as soon as possible.
AIR”.
5-27
83RM0-01E

Air flow selector (3)

EXAMPLE Manual Heating and Air
Conditioning System (c)
Description of Controls
(b) (d)
(2)
(a) (e)
1 2 3
0 4
61MM0B054
61MM0A019
NOTE:
This is used to select one of the functions
If you need maximum defrosting, adjust A/C
described below.
the temperature selector to the HOT end
and adjust the side outlets so the air blows Ventilation (a)
on the side window, in addition to the (1) (4) (5) (3)
above Defrosting steps.
61MM0A018
Temperature selector (1)

This is used to select the temperature by
turning the selector.
61MM0B049
Blower speed selector (2)
This is used to turn on the blower and to Temperature-controlled air comes out of
select blower speed by turning the selec- the center and side air outlets.
tor.
5-28
83RM0-01E

Bi-level (b) Heat & defrost (d) Air intake selector (4)
(f) (g)
61MM0B050 61MM0B052 61MM0A020
Temperature-controlled air comes out of Temperature-controlled air comes out of This selector is used to select the following
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out the floor outlets, the windshield defroster modes.
of the center and side outlets. When the outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
temperature selector (1) is in the fully side outlets. Fresh Air (f)
COLD position or fully HOT position, how- When this mode is selected, the indicator
ever, the air from the floor outlets and the Defrost (e) light will go off and outside air is used.
air from the center and side outlets will be
the same temperature. Recirculated Air (g)
When this mode is selected, the indicator
Heat (c) light will come on, outside air is shut out
and inside air is recirculated. This mode is
suitable when driving through dusty or pol-
luted air such as in a tunnel, or when
61MM0B053 attempting to quickly cool down the inte-
Temperature-controlled air comes out of rior.
defroster outlets and the side outlets. “FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”
61MM0B051 are switched alternately each time the air
Temperature-controlled air comes out of intake selector is pushed.
the floor outlets and the side outlets, also
comes out of the windshield defroster out- NOTE:
lets and also comes slightly out of the side If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an
defroster outlets. extended period of time, the air in the vehi-
cle can become contaminated. Therefore,
you should occasionally select “FRESH
AIR”.
5-29
83RM0-01E

Air conditioning switch (5) Head cooled/Feet warmed heating

To turn on the air conditioning system, set System Operating Instructions Select “BI-LEVEL” and “FRESH AIR”, the
the blower speed selector to a position temperature selector to the desired tem-
other than “OFF” and push in the “A/C” Natural ventilation perature position, and the blower speed
switch. With this “A/C” switch operation, a Select “VENTILATION” and “FRESH AIR”, selector to the desired blower speed posi-
indicator light will come on when the air the temperature selector to the desired tion. Unless the temperature selector is in
conditioning system is on. To turn off the temperature position, and the blower the fully COLD position or fully HOT posi-
air conditioning system, push the “A/C” speed selector to “OFF”. Fresh air will flow tion, the air that comes out of the center
switch again. through the vehicle during driving. and side outlets will be cooler than the air
Forced ventilation that comes out of the floor outlets.
During operation of the air conditioner, you
may notice slight changes in engine The control settings are the same as for Normal cooling
speed. These changes are normal, the natural ventilation except you set the Set the air flow selector to “VENTILATION”,
system is designed so that the compressor blower speed selector to a position other the temperature selector to the desired tem-
turns on or off to maintain the desired tem- than “OFF”. perature position and the blower speed
perature. Normal heating (using outside air) selector to the desired blower speed posi-
Select “HEAT” and “FRESH AIR”, the tem- tion, and turn on the “A/C” switch. Setting
Less operation of the compressor results the blower speed selector to a higher
in better fuel economy. perature selector to the desired tempera-
ture position and the blower speed selector blower speed position increases cooling
to the desired blower speed position. Set- efficiency.
ting the blower speed selector to a higher You can switch the air intake selector to
blower speed position increases heating either “FRESH AIR” or “RECIRCULATED
efficiency. AIR” as you desire. Choosing “RECIRCU-
Quick heating (using recirculated air) LATED AIR” increases cooling efficiency.
The control settings are the same as for Quick cooling (using recirculated air)
normal heating except you select “RECIR- The control settings are the same as for
CULATED AIR”. If you use this heating normal cooling except you select “RECIR-
method for an extended period of time, the CULATED AIR” and the highest blower
air in the vehicle can become contami- speed.
nated and the windows can become misty.
Therefore, use this method only for quick
heating and change to the normal heating
method as soon as possible.
5-30
83RM0-01E

NOTE: idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil

• If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for EXAMPLE and helps protect the internal components.
an extended period of time, the air in the
If your air conditioner is equipped with air
vehicle can become contaminated.
filters, clean or replace them as specified
Therefore, you should occasionally
in the “Maintenance Schedule” in the
select “FRESH AIR”.
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-
• If your vehicle has been left in the sun
tion.
with the windows closed, it will cool
faster if you open the windows briefly
NOTE:
while you operate the air conditioner with
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
the air intake selector at “FRESH AIR”
refrigerant HFO-1234yf, commonly called
and the blower at high speed.
“R-1234yf”. R-1234yf replaced R-134a for
automotive applications. Other refriger-
Dehumidifying
ants are available, but only R-1234yf
Set the air flow selector to a desired air 61MM0B054
should be used in your vehicle.
flow selector position, the temperature NOTE:
selector to the desired temperature posi- If you need maximum defrosting:
tion and the blower speed selector to the NOTICE
• select “DEFROST” and “FRESH AIR”,
desired blower speed position. Also select • set the blower speed selector to HIGH, Using the wrong refrigerant may
“FRESH AIR” and turn on the “A/C” switch. • adjust the temperature selector to the damage your air conditioning sys-
HOT end, tem. Use R-1234yf only. Do not mix or
NOTE: • turn on the “A/C” switch, and replace the R-1234yf with other refrig-
Because the air conditioner dehumidifies • adjust the side outlets so the air blows erants.
the air, turning it on will help keep the win- on the side windows.
dows clear, even when blowing heated air NOTE:
using the “DEFROST” or “HEAT & For the air conditioning refrigerant of Rus-
DEFROST” functions. Maintenance sia models, refer to “For Russia” in the
If you do not use the air conditioner for a “SUPPLEMENT” section.
long period, such as during winter, it may
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
5-31
83RM0-01E

(1) Left hand drive vehicle:

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System Driver’s temperature selector
(Climate Control) Right hand drive vehicle:
Passenger’s temperature selector
(2) Left hand drive vehicle:
Passenger’s temperature selector
Description of Controls Right hand drive vehicle:
Driver’s temperature selector
EXAMPLE (3) “DUAL” switch
(4) Blower speed selector
(5) Air intake selector
(1) (8) (11) (3) (2) (6) “MODE” switch
(7) Defrost switch
(8) Air conditioning switch
(9) “AUTO” switch
(10) “OFF” switch
(11) Display
A/C DUAL
REAR
FRONT
OFF AUTO MODE
(5) (10) (4) (9) (6) (7)
61MM0A021
5-32
83RM0-01E

Temperature selector (1) / (2) “DUAL” switch (3) Blower speed selector (4)
Every time you press the “DUAL” switch
(3), the temperature control mode switches (4)
between the following:
(1) / (2)
Individual control mode (indicator ON):
The driver and passenger can make
temperature adjustments inde-
pendently from their own temperature
selectors.
Combined control mode (indicator OFF): AUTO M
If a temperature adjustment is made
61MM0A022
from the driver’s temperature selector
(1) or (2), the same adjustment is made
Turn the temperature selector (1) / (2) to automatically on the passenger side. (9)
adjust the temperature. The display (11)
61MM0A023
shows the selected temperature. NOTE:
If the passenger’s temperature selector (1) Air flows out at a higher rate when you
NOTE: press the right switch and at a lower rate
If you turn the temperature selector (1) / (2) or (2) is turned while in the combined con-
trol mode, the individual control mode is when you press the left switch.
until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,
the climate control system will operate at automatically set. If the “AUTO” switch (9) is pushed, the
maximum heating or cooling. The tempera- blower speed will vary automatically as the
ture of the air from the outlets may change NOTE: climate control system maintains the
suddenly while “LO” or “HI” is displayed, When you change the units of temperature selected temperature.
but this is normal. in the information display, the automatic
heating and air conditioning system tem-
perature display units will be changed
automatically. Refer to “Information Dis-
play” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section
for details.
5-33
83RM0-01E

Air intake selector (5) FRESH AIR (b) Ventilation (c)

When this mode is selected, outside air is
(5) introduced.
NOTE:
If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an
extended period of time, the air in the vehi-
cle can become contaminated. Therefore,
you should occasionally select “FRESH 61MM0B049
AIR”. Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the center, side and rear outlets.
“MODE” switch (6)
Bi-level (d)
(a) (b)
(c)
61MM0A024
Push the air intake selector (5) to change

between the following modes. (d)
If the “AUTO” switch (9) is pushed, the air MODE

intake will vary automatically as the climate 61MM0B050
control system maintains the selected tem- (e)
perature. the floor, center, side, rear and rear floor
(6)
outlets.
RECIRCULATED AIR (a) (f )
When this mode is selected, outside air is
shut off and inside air is recirculated. This 61MM0A025
mode is suitable when driving through an
Push the “MODE” switch (6) to change
area with polluted air such as a tunnel, or
among the following functions. The indica-
when attempting to quickly cool down the
tion of the selected mode appears on the
vehicle.
display.
If the “AUTO” switch (9) is pushed, the air
flow will vary automatically as the climate
control system maintains the selected tem-
perature.
5-34
83RM0-01E

Heat (e) Defrost switch (7) NOTE:

When you push the defrost switch (7), the
“FRESH AIR” mode will be automatically
selected and the air conditioning switch will
automatically turn on (“A/C” will appear on
the display). In cold weather, air flows out
of the defroster outlets but the air condi-
tioning does not turn on even though the A/
61MM0B051 C indicator comes on as well as the defrost
FRONT
Temperature-controlled air comes out of indicator.
the floor and rear floor, also comes out of
the windshield defroster outlets and also
comes slightly out of the side defroster out- (7)
lets and the side outlets.
61MM0A026
Heat & defrost (f)
Push the defrost switch (7) to turn on the
defroster.
Defrost
61MM0B055

the floor and rear floor outlets, the wind-
shield defroster outlets, the side defroster 61MM0B056
outlets and the side outlets.
defroster outlets and the side outlets.
5-35
83RM0-01E

Air conditioning switch (8) passenger can make different temperature

System Operating Instructions adjustments from their own temperature
selectors. The individual control mode is
(8) Automatic operation also selected automatically when the pas-
senger’s temperature selector (1) or (2) is
turned.
To turn the climate control system off, push
the “OFF” switch (10).
A/C OFF AUTO NOTE:
If the “AUTO” on the display blinks, there is
a problem in the heating system and/or air
conditioning system. You should have the
OFF AU system inspected by an authorized
(10) (9)
61MM0A027
SUZUKI dealer.
The air conditioning switch (8) is used to NOTE:
turn on and off the air conditioning system 61MM0A028 • To find the temperature at which you are
only when the blower is on. To turn on the most comfortable, start with the 22°C
air conditioning system, push in the switch; You can let the climate control system
work automatically. To set the system for (72°F) setting, for example.
“A/C” will appear on the display and the • If you turn the temperature selector (1) /
indicator on the switch will come on. To fully-automatic operation, follow the proce-
dure below. (2) until “HI” or “LO” appears on the dis-
turn off the air conditioning system, push in play, the climate control system will
the switch again; “A/C” and the indicator 1) Start the engine. operate at maximum heating or cooling.
will go off. 2) Push the “AUTO” switch (9). • To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather
You can use the air conditioning switch (8) 3) Set the desired temperature by turning or hot air in hot weather, the system will
to manually turn the air conditioner on or off the driver’s temperature selector (1) or delay turning on the blower until warmed
according to your preference. When you (2). or chilled air is available.
turn the air conditioning switch off, the cli- • If your vehicle has been left in the sun
The blower speed, air intake and air flow
mate control system cannot lower the with the windows closed, it will cool
are controlled automatically to maintain the
inside temperature below outside tempera- faster if you open the windows briefly.
set temperature. However, the air flow is
ture. • Even under automatic operation, you
not changed to the “Defrost” position auto-
can set individual selectors to the man-
matically.
ual mode. The manually selected func-
If the individual control mode is selected tions are maintained, and the other
with the “DUAL” switch (3), the driver and
5-36
83RM0-01E

functions remain under automatic opera- Manual operation start using it again. To help maintain opti-
tion. You can manually control the climate con- mum performance and durability of your air
• If the windshield and/or the front door trol system. Set the selectors to the conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
windows are fogged, push the defrost desired positions. Operate the air conditioner at least once a
switch (7) to turn on the defroster, or month for one minute with the engine
push the “MODE” switch (6) to change EXAMPLE idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
the air flow to the “Heat & defrost” posi- and helps protect the internal components.
tion to defog the windows.
• To return the blower speed selector (4), If your air conditioner is equipped with air
air intake selector (5), and “MODE” filters, clean or replace them as specified
switch (6) to automatic operation, push in the “Maintenance Schedule” in the
the “AUTO” switch (9). “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-
tion.
(13) EXAMPLE NOTE:
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
refrigerant HFO-1234yf, commonly called
“R-1234yf”. R-1234yf replaced R-134a for
61MM0B054
automotive applications. Other refriger-
ants are available, but only R-1234yf
NOTE: should be used in your vehicle.
If you need maximum defrosting:
• push the defrost switch (7) to turn on the NOTICE
defroster (the air conditioning system will
come on and the “FRESH AIR” mode will Using the wrong refrigerant may
be selected automatically), damage your air conditioning sys-
(12) • set the blower speed selector to HIGH, tem. Use R-1234yf only. Do not mix or
61MM0B057
• adjust the temperature selector to the replace the R-1234yf with other refrig-
Be careful not to cover the interior tem- “HI” indication on the display, and erants.
perature sensor (12) located between the • adjust the side outlets so the air blows
steering wheel and the climate control on the side windows. NOTE:
panel, or the solar sensor (13) located at For the air conditioning refrigerant of Rus-
the top of the central part of the dash- sia models, refer to “For Russia” in the
board. These sensors are used by the Maintenance “SUPPLEMENT” section.
automatic system to regulate temperature. If you do not use the air conditioner for a
long period, such as during winter, it may
not give the best performance when you
5-37
83RM0-01E

The radio antenna on the roof is remov-

Radio Antenna able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun- Installation of Radio
terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn Frequency Transmitters
Type A it clockwise firmly by hand.
EXAMPLE NOTICE We recommend that you always ask a
SUZUKI dealer about frequency band,
To avoid damage to the radio max output power, antenna position at
antenna: vehicle and specific conditions for installa-
• Remove the antenna when using an tion and/or use before installing a radio
automatic car wash. transmitter in your vehicle. Such equip-
• Remove the antenna when the ments may cause the electronic control
antenna hits anything such as a system to malfunction if they are incor-
low ceiling in a parking garage or rectly installed or they are not suited for the
putting a car cover over your vehi- vehicle.
cle.
63J055
Type B
EXAMPLE
61MM0A113
5-38
83RM0-01E

Audio system (if equipped)
EXAMPLE
83RM051
FM/LW/MW CD PLAYER
5-39
83RM0-01E

Safety Information Notes on Discs

Precautions Cautions on Handling
WARNING
• When the inside of the vehicle is very
If you pay extended attention to cold and the player is used soon after
operating the audio system or view- switching on the heater, condensation
ing the audio system display while may form on the disc or the optical
driving, an accident can occur. If
you set the sound volume too loud, parts of the player and proper playback (A)
it could prevent you from being may not be possible. If condensation

aware of road and traffic conditions. forms on the disc, wipe it off with a soft 52D274
• Keep your eyes on the road and cloth. If condensation forms on the opti- This unit has been designed specifically for
your mind on the drive. Avoid pay- cal parts of the player, do not use the
ing extended attention to operat- playback of compact discs bearing mark
player for about one hour. This will (A) shown above.
ing the audio system or viewing
the audio system display. allow the condensation to disappear No other discs can be played.
• Familiarize yourself with the audio normally.
system controls and operation of • Driving on extremely bumpy roads
the audio system before driving. which cause severe vibrations may
• Preset your favorite radio stations cause sound to skip.
before driving so that you can • This unit uses a precision mechanism.
quickly tune to them using the
Even in the event that trouble arises,
presets.
• Set the sound volume to a level never open the case, disassemble the
that will allow you to continue to unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.
be aware of road and traffic condi- Please bring the unit to an authorized
tions while driving. SUZUKI dealer.
5-40
83RM0-01E

Removing the disc Proper way to hold

the compact disc
52D347 52D348
To remove fingermarks and dust, use a Never stick labels on the surface of the
soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from compact disc or write on the surface with a
the center of the compact disc to the cir- pencil or pen.
52D275 cumference.
To remove the compact disc from its stor-
age case, press down on the center of the
(B)
case and lift the disc out, holding it care- (B)
(C)
fully by the edges.
Always handle the compact disc by the 52D349

edges.
Do not use any solvents such as commer-
Never touch the surface.
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,
or thinner to clean compact discs.
52D277
New discs may have some roughness

around the edges. The unit may not work
or the sound may skip if such discs are
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to
remove the roughness (C) from edges of
the disc before inserting it into the unit.
5-41
83RM0-01E

52D350 52D351
Do not use compact discs that have large Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc. light or any heat source.
Use of such discs will cause damage or
prevent the system from operating prop- NOTE:
erly. • Do not use commercially available CD
protection sheets or discs equipped with
stabilizers, etc.
These may get caught in the internal
mechanism and damage the disc.
• It may be impossible to play CD-R discs
with this unit due to the recording condi-
tions.
• CD-RW discs cannot be played with this
unit.
5-42
83RM0-01E

WARNING
The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are
This is a class I laser product. Use
registered trademarks and are owned by The latest “DECLARATION of CONFOR-
of controls or adjustments or perfor-
the Bluetooth SIG, Ink. MITY” (DoC) is available at the following
mance of procedures other than
address:
those specified herein may result in
Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth®
hazardous radiation exposure. http://www.ptc.panasonic.eu/
ready device whenever requested.
Do not open covers and do not
This unit shares the communication fre- To check DoC, access the above men-
attempt to repair this unit by your-
quency with other private or public wireless tioned URL.
self.
communication equipment such as a wire- And then search DoC by entering the fol-
Refer servicing to qualified person-
less LAN and other wireless communica- lowing Model No. into “Keyword Search”
nel.
tion radios. box in “Downloads” page.
You should stop using this unit whenever
you are notified that your unit disturbs Model No.
other wireless communication immediately. YEP0PTA606A0
5-43
83RM0-01E

Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equip-

ment (private households)
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents
means that used electrical and electronic products should not be
mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these
products to designated collection points, where they will be accepted
on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may
be able to return your products to your local retailer upon the pur-
chase of an equivalent new product.
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human
health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inap-
propriate waste handling. Please contact your local authority for fur-
68LM560
ther details of your nearest designated collection point.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in
accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or
supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.
Declaration of Conformity (Doc)

“Hereby Panasonic Corporation, declares
that this YEP0PTA606A0 is in compliance
with the essential requirements and other
relevant provision of Directive 1999/5/EC”
5-44
83RM0-01E

Turning on/off power

Basic operations Press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1) to turn
on the power. The unit starts to operate in
EXAMPLE the previous setting that the power was
turned off.
Adjusting the volume

(3) Turn “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1).
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;
turning it counterclockwise decreases the
volume.
NOTE:
For the purposes of safe driving, adjust the
audio volume to a level that allows you to
hear sounds outside of the vehicle includ-
ing car horns and particularly emergency
(1) (2) vehicle sirens.
Mute
Press MUTE button (3) to mute the sound.
To cancel the mute, press MUTE button (3)
again.
61MM708
(1) “VOL PUSH PWR” knob

(2) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(3) MUTE button
5-45
83RM0-01E

Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con- Preset-EQ

1) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” trol) Preset-EQ calls up various sound types in
knob (2). The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function accordance with the listening music type.
Each time the knob is pressed, sound automatically adjusts (increases/ 1) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
adjustment will change as follows: decreases) the sound volume in accor- knob (2) several times until “PRESET-
dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control EQ” appears.
is provided with three selectable levels 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume (2).
Preset-EQ (EQ OFF)
adjustment increases together with the Each time the knob is turned, preset
LEVEL number. EQ mode will change as follows:
Bass adjustment (BASS 0)
1) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode
Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)
is selected. OFF (FLAT)
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)
(2) to select the desired AVC adjust- JAZZ
ment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL 2)
Fader adjustment (FADER 0)
ROCK
AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)
POP
CLASSIC
(2) to adjust the sound. HIP-HOP
5-46
83RM0-01E

Listening to the radio Display
EXAMPLE (A)
(B)
68LM561
(1) “RADIO” button

(6) (2) UP button
(3) DOWN button
(1) (4) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(5) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6])
(6) “AS” button
(4)
(A) Band
(B) Frequency
(5) (3) (2)
61MS603
5-47
83RM0-01E

Selecting the reception band Preset memory Auto store mode on/off
Press the “RADIO” button (1). 1) Select the desired station. Press “AS” button (6).
Each time the button is pressed, the recep- 2) Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6]) Each time the button is pressed, the mode
tion band will change as follows: of PRESET buttons (5) to which you is switched as follows:
want to store the station for 2 seconds
or longer.
FM1 FM2 DAB1 (if equipped)
AS mode on AS mode off
Auto store
MW LW DAB2 (if equipped) Hold down “AS” button (6) for 2 seconds or
longer.
6 stations in good reception will automati-
Seek tuning cally be stored to PRESET buttons (5) in Radio reception
Press UP button (2) or DOWN button (3). order, starting from a station whose fre- Radio reception can be affected by envi-
The unit stops searching for a station at a quency is the lowest. ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio
frequency where a broadcast station is signal’s power and distance from the sta-
available. NOTE:
tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may
• Auto store can be released by pressing
interfere or deflect radio reception, causing
NOTE: “AS” button (6) while auto store is under
poor reception. Poor reception or radio
If AF is on, the unit searches for RDS sta- way.
static can also be caused by electric cur-
tions only. • When the auto store is performed, the
rent from overhead wires or high voltage
station previously stored in the memory
power lines.
Manual tuning at the position is overwritten.
Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (4). • When there are fewer than 6 stations that
The frequency being received is displayed. can be stored even if 1 round of auto
store operation is performed, no station
will be stored at the remaining PRESET
buttons (5).
• 6 stations can be preset for FM1 and
FM2 in common, and 6 stations for MW
in auto store mode.
• If AF is on, the unit searches for RDS
stations only.
5-48
83RM0-01E

Using the RDS Functions Display
EXAMPLE (A) (B)
(C)
68LM562
(1) TA button
(3) (2) RDM/PTY button
(2) (3) RPT/AF button
(4) Up button
(6)
(5) Down button
(6) DISP button
(A) Band
(B) Channel number
(C) Programme service (PS) name
(1) (5) (4)
83RM052
5-49
83RM0-01E

TA (Traffic Announcement) on/off PTY (Program Type) search AF (Alternative Frequency) on/off
Press the TA button (1). 1) Press the RDM/PTY button (2) to Press the RPT/AF button (3).
Each time it is pressed, TA adjustment is select PTY mode. Each time it is pressed, AF adjustment is
changed as follows: 2) Press the RDM/PTY button (2) while changed as follows:
PTY is displayed.
Each time it is pressed, PTY adjust-
OFF TP ON TA ON ment is changed as follows: AF-ON/REG-OFF
AF-ON/REG-ON
NEWS
NOTE: AF-OFF/REG-OFF
• For listening to only traffic information, SPORTS
activate TA. Once traffic information
starts, the volume changes automatically. TALK AF: If the reception condition becomes
• The “TP” indicator lights up when TP poor, the frequency of the same program
(Traffic Programme) is ON. It blinks when POP with good reception is automatically
no TP data is received. searched.
• The “TA” indicator lights while TA is acti- CLASSICS REG: With regard to the automatically
vated. On the other hand, the “TA” indi- searched frequency with AF activated, the
cator blinks if the TP data cannot be alternative frequency of the same program
received. 3) Press the Up button (4) or the Down is searched within the present region when
• If the Up button (4) or the Down button button (5) while PTY is displayed. REG is activated.
(5) is pressed while TA or TP is set to on Search begins.
NOTE:
the unit searches for a TP station. NOTE: The “AF” indicator lights up when AF is
• If no TP station is received, the unit dis- If no PTY information is received, the unit ON. In addition to that, the “REG” indicator
plays “TP NOTHING”. displays “NOPTY”. lights up when REG is ON.
5-50
83RM0-01E

TA Standby
At the moment traffic information is
received while the source is set to CD,
USB, iPod®, or Bluetooth®audio with TA
activated, the source is automatically
changed to radio. After reception of traffic
information, the source immediately before
radio resumes.
NOTE:
If no TP station can be received while the
unit stands by for TA, it automatically
searches for a TP station.
EON (Enhanced Other Network)

When the EON data is received with TP or
TA activated, the “EON” indicator lights
and the traffic information from a network
other than the station now received is
allowed to be received.
Emergency Announcement Reception

Emergency announcements are automati-
cally received and displayed.
5-51
83RM0-01E

Listening to a CD Display
EXAMPLE (A)
(2) (1)
(B)
(1) Insertion slot

(2) EJECT button
(6) (3) “CD” button
(4) UP button
(7) (5) DOWN button
(3) (8) (6) “RPT” button
(7) “RDM” button
(8) “DISP” button
(A) Track number

(B) Play time
NOTE:
This product does not support 8 cm CD
(sometimes called as “mini single CD”, “3-
(5) (4) inch CD”, “CD3”, etc.).
61MM711
5-52
83RM0-01E

NOTICE NOTICE
• Never insert your finger or hand If you forcefully try to push an
into the CD insertion slot. Never ejected CD inside the unit before auto
(A) insert foreign objects. reloading, the disc surface might be
• Never insert a CD with glue coming scratched.
out from adhesive tape or a rental Before reloading a CD, remove it
• CDs or CD-ROMs without mark (A) can- CD label or with a trace indicating from the unit completely.
not be used. that adhesive tape or a rental CD
• Some discs recorded in CD-R/CD-RW label has been removed. This may Listening to a CD
format may sometimes be impossible to cause the CD not to eject or result When a CD is inserted, playback will auto-
use. in a malfunction. matically start.
When a CD is already inside the unit,
Loading a CD press “CD” button (3) to start playback.
Insert a CD in the insertion slot (1).
When the CD is loaded, it starts to play. Selecting a track
• Press UP button (4) to listen to the next
Ejecting a CD track.
Press EJECT button (2). • Press DOWN button (5) twice to listen to
When the ignition switch is in “LOCK” posi- the previous track.
• A CD is to be inserted with its label side tion or the engine switch is in “LOCK” When DOWN button (5) is pressed
up. (OFF) mode, the CD remained ejected for once, the track currently being played
• When there is a CD already in the unit, it around 15 seconds or longer will automati- will start from the beginning again.
is impossible to insert another CD with- cally be drawn inside the unit. (Auto reload
out ejecting the CD in the unit. Do not function) Fast forwarding/rewinding a track
use force to insert a CD into the CD The backup eject function: • Hold down UP button (4) to fast forward
insertion slot. This function allows you to eject a CD by the track.
pressing EJECT button (2) even when the • Hold down DOWN button (5) to fast
ignition switch is in “LOCK” position or the rewind the track.
engine switch is in “LOCK” (OFF) mode.
5-53
83RM0-01E

Random playback Display change

Press “RDM” button (7). Press “DISP” button (8).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows: will change as follows:
OFF TRACK RANDOM Play time
Disc title
Track title
• TRACK RANDOM
The random indicator “RDM” will light.
The tracks in the loaded disc will be NOTE:
played in random order. • “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
is no text information in the disc currently
Repeat playback being played.
Press “RPT” button (6). • If text data contains more than 16 char-
Each time the button is pressed, the mode acters, “>” mark will appear at the right
will change as follows: end. Holding down “DISP” button (8) for
1 second or longer can display the next
page.
OFF TRACK REPEAT
• TRACK REPEAT
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.
5-54
83RM0-01E

Listening to an MP3/WMA/AAC disc Display
EXAMPLE (A) (B)
(D) (C)

(2) UP button
(4) (3) DOWN button
(4) “RPT” button
(5) (5) “RDM” button
(6) (6) “DISP” button
(1) (A) Folder number

(B) Track number
(C) Play time
(D) Disc type
(3) (2)
61MM712
5-55
83RM0-01E

Selecting a folder Random playback Repeat playback

Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) Press “RDM” button (5). Press “RPT” button (4).
to select a folder. Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows: will change as follows:
Selecting a track
• Press UP button (2) to listen to the next
track.
• Press DOWN button (3) twice to listen to OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT
the previous track.
When DOWN button (3) is pressed
once, the track currently being played
will start from the beginning again.
• FOLDER RANDOM • FILE REPEAT
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track The random indicator “F.RDM” will light. The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
• Hold down UP button (2) to fast forward The tracks in the current folder will be The track currently being played will be
played in random order. played repeatedly.
the track.
• Hold down DOWN button (3) to fast • ALL RANDOM • FOLDER REPEAT
The random indicator “RDM” will light. The repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.
rewind the track.
The tracks in the loaded disc will be All tracks in the currently selected folder
played in random order. will be played repeatedly.
5-56
83RM0-01E

Display change Points to remember when making MP3/

Press “DISP” button (6). Notes on MP3/WMA/AAC WMA/AAC files
Each time the button is pressed, display What is MP3? Common
will change as follows: • An abbreviation of “MPEG audio layer3”, • High bit rate and high sampling fre-
MP3 is an audio compression format quency are recommended for high qual-
that has become the standard format ity sounds.
Play time among PC users. Its merit is that the • Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not
original audio data is compressed to recommended. Selecting VBR may
Folder name approximately 1/10 and high sound qual- cause display of incorrect playing time
ity is maintained. This means that it is and jumpiness of playback.
File name possible to store the data of approxi- • Playback sound quality varies depend-
mately 10 music CDs on a single CD-R/ ing on the encoding environment. For
Album name (MP3, AAC only) RW disc, which in turn makes it possible details, refer to the user manual of the
to play music for a long time without hav- encoding software and the writing soft-
Track title ing to change the disc. ware in use.
What is WMA? NOTICE
Artist name • An abbreviation of “Windows Media
Audio,” WMA is an audio compression Never use “.mp3”, “.wma” or “.m4a”
format developed by Microsoft. as a file name extension if it is not in
NOTE: • WMA files for which the DRM (Digital the MP3/WMA/AAC format file. Fail-
• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there Rights Management) function is on can- ure to observe this may result in
is no text information in the disc currently not be played. damage to the speaker due to noise
being played. • Windows MediaTM and the Windows® production.
• If text data contains more than 16 char- logo are trademarks or registered trade-
acters, “>” mark will appear at the right marks of Microsoft Corporation in the
end. Holding down “DISP” button (6) for United States and other countries.
page. What is AAC?
• An abbreviation of “Advanced Audio
Coding,” AAC is an audio compression
format used by MPEG2 and MPEG4.
5-57
83RM0-01E

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a CD Compression formats

media MP3
• It is recommended not to write both CD- • Bit rate:
DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files on a MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
disc. MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
• If both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
files are on the same disc, tracks may • Sampling frequency:
not be played in the correct order or MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/
some tracks may not be played at all. 48 kHz
• When storing both MP3 data and WMA MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/
data on the same disc, sort and place 24 kHz
them in different folders. MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/
• Do not write files other than MP3/WMA/ 12 kHz
AAC files and unnecessary folders on a
disc. WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
• MP3/WMA/AAC files should be named • Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
to meet the standards and the file sys- • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
tem specifications as shown below. * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
• The file extension “.mp3”, “.wma” or not supported.
“.m4a” should be assigned to files based
on their format independently. AAC*
• You may encounter a trouble in playing • Bit rate: ABR 16 k - 320 kbps
MP3/WMA/AAC files or displaying infor- • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
mation of MP3/WMA/AAC files depend- * Apple Lossless is not supported.
ing on the writing software or CD
recorder in use. Supported file systems
• This unit does not have a playlist func- ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, Romeo
tion.
• It is recommended to write discs in Disc- Maximum number of files/folders
at-Once mode even though Multi-ses- • Maximum number of files: 512
sion mode is supported. These modes • Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
are the methods for writing audio data in • Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
CD. • Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)
5-58
83RM0-01E

Listening to files stored in a USB device Display
EXAMPLE (A) (B)
(D) (C)
(1) “USB” button

(5) (3) UP button
(4) DOWN button
(6) (5) “RPT” button
(2)
(A) Folder number
(B) Track number
(C) Play time
(D) File type
NOTICE
(1) (4) (3)
Do not connect any USB device other
than a USB memory or a USB audio
player. Do not connect multiple USB
devices to the USB connector using a
61MM713 USB hub, etc. Supplying power to
multiple USB devices from the con-
nector could cause overheating and
smoking.
5-59
83RM0-01E

Selecting a USB device mode Random playback • FOLDER REPEAT

Press “USB” button (1). Press “RDM” button (6). The repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode All the tracks in the folder currently
will change as follows: will change as follows: selected will be played repeatedly.
Display change
USB (iPod®) (if equipped) Press “DISP” button (7).
OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM Each time the button is pressed, display
Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) will change as follows:
Selecting a folder • FOLDER RANDOM Play time

Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (2) The random indicator “F.RDM” will light.
to select the desired folder. The tracks in the currently selected Folder name
folder will be played in random order.
Selecting a track • ALL RANDOM File name
• Press UP button (3) to listen to the next The random indicator “RDM” will light.
track. The tracks in the connected USB device Album name (MP3, AAC only)
• Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to will be played in random order.
the previous track. Track title
When DOWN button (4) is pressed Repeat playback
once, the track currently being played Press “RPT” button (5). Artist name
will start from the beginning again. Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track NOTE:
• Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward • “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
the track. is no text information in the disc currently
• Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT being played.
rewind the track. • If text data contains more than 16 char-
acters, “>” mark will appear at the right
end. Holding down “DISP” button (7) for
• FILE REPEAT page.
played repeatedly.
5-60
83RM0-01E

USB device connection Compression formats

Notes on USB device • When connecting a USB device, check MP3
Compatible USB devices that the connector is pushed all the way • Bit rate:
• USB mass storage class into the port. MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
For details as to whether your USB • Do not leave the USB device for long MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
memory/USB audio is compatible with periods of time inside the vehicle where MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
USB mass storage class, please contact the temperature can rise too high. • Sampling frequency:
the USB memory/USB audio manufac- • Back up any important data beforehand. MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
turer. We cannot accept responsibility for any MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHz
• USB standard compatibility 1.1/2.0 full lost data. MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz
speed • It is recommended not to connect a USB
• File system FAT12/16/32, VFAT device that contains data files other than WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
• Maximum current less than 1.0 A MP3/WMA/AAC format. • Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
• If devices such as USB hub, extension • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
cable are connected to the audio sys- Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
tem, it may not be recognized. In such USB device not supported.
case, connect the USB device directly to • Playback or display may not be possible
the audio system. depending on the type of USB device in AAC*
• Devices such as MP3 player/mobile use or the condition of the recording. • Bit rate: ABR 16 k - 320 kbps
phone/digital camera may not be recog- • Depending on the connected USB mem- • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
nized by the audio system for playing ory, the files may be played in different * Apple Lossless is not supported.
music. order from the stored one.
Maximum number of files/folders
• Maximum number of files: 2500
• Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
• Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)
5-61
83RM0-01E

Listening to an iPod® Display
EXAMPLE (A)
(B) (C)
(1) “USB” button

(5) (3) UP button
(4) DOWN button
(6) (5) “RPT” button
(2) (8) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6])
(A) Track title

(B) Track number
(C) Play time
(1) (8) (4) (3)
61MM714
5-62
83RM0-01E

Selecting an iPod® mode Random playback Display change

Press “USB” button (1). Press “RDM” button (6). Press “DISP” button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows: will change as follows: will change as follows:
USB (iPod®) (if equipped) Playlist name /

OFF SONG RANDOM ALBUM RANDOM Track title (Playlist mode only)
®
Bluetooth audio (if equipped)
Artist name /
Track title
• SONG RANDOM Album name /
Selecting a track The random indicator “RDM” will light.
• Press UP button (3) to listen to the next Track title
The tracks in the iPod® will be played in
track. random order.
• Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to Track title /
• ALBUM RANDOM Play time
the previous track. The random indicator “F.RDM” will light.
When DOWN button (4) is pressed The albums in the iPod® will be played in
once, the track currently being played random order. NOTE:
will start from the beginning again. If text data contains more than 16 charac-
Repeat playback ters, “>” mark will appear at the right end.
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track Press “RPT” button (5). Holding down “DISP” button (7) for 1 sec-
• Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward Each time the button is pressed, the mode ond or longer can display the next page.
the track. will change as follows:
• Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast
rewind the track.
OFF SONG REPEAT
• SONG REPEAT
played repeatedly.
5-63
83RM0-01E

Playing mode selection iPod® connection

1) Press the button numbered [6] of PRE- Notes on iPod® • Make sure to detach the iPod® after
SET buttons (8) for 1 second or longer. Supported iPod® turning the ignition switch to “LOCK”
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob • iPod® touch (5th generation) position or pressing the engine switch to
(2). • iPod® touch (4th generation) change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
Each time the knob is turned, the mode • iPod® touch (3rd generation) (OFF). The iPod® may not be shut down
will change as follows: • iPod® touch (2nd generation) when it is being connected and may
• iPod® touch (1st generation) result in battery depletion.
• iPod® classic • Do not connect iPod® accessories such
PLAYLIST • iPod® nano (7th generation) as an iPod® remote control or head-
• iPod® nano (6th generation) phones while connecting the iPod® with
ARTIST • iPod® nano (5th generation) the unit. The unit may not operate cor-
• iPod® nano (4th generation) rectly.
ALBUM • iPod® nano (3rd generation)
• iPod® nano (2nd generation)
SONGS • iPod® nano (1st generation)
• iPod® (5th generation)
GENRE • iPhone® 5
• iPhone® 4S
• iPhone® 4
3) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” • iPhone® 3GS
knob (2) to select the desired mode. • iPhone® 3G
• iPhone®
NOTE:
* Some functions may not be available
• When the button numbered [6] of PRE-
depending on the model of iPod®.
SET buttons (8) is pressed, the previous
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
mode will be displayed.
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
* iPhone® is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other coun-
tries.
* Apple is not responsible for the opera-
tion of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
5-64
83RM0-01E

Bluetooth® hands-free (if equipped) Steering switch
EXAMPLE
(4)
(5)
(6)
(2) (1)
(3) (7)
(4) Bluetooth® setup button

61MM715 (5) OFF HOOK button
(1) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (6) ON HOOK button
(2) “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (7) “VOL” switch
(3) PRESET buttons
5-65
83RM0-01E

Phone registration NOTE: Adjusting the ring volume

• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous • Turn “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (2) while a
To use the hands-free function with this menu will be displayed. call is coming in.
unit, it is required to register the phone • When registering an additional phone, Turning it clockwise increases the vol-
in advance. repeat Step from 1). ume; turning it counterclockwise
decreases the volume.
NOTE: Receiving a call • Press “VOL” switch (7) during a call.
• Up to 5 phones can be registered. Press OFF HOOK button (5) to receive a Pressing “+” of the switch increases the
• To set up a new phone, disconnect the call. volume; pressing “-” of the switch
audio player from the unit. Connect the decreases the volume.
audio player again after phone setup is Ending a call
completed if necessary. Press ON HOOK button (6) to end a call. Adjusting the call or ringtone volume
• When attempts to establish the pairing Follow the instructions below to adjust the
fail within 120 seconds, the connecting Rejecting a call (only for supported call or ringtone volume.
operation will be canceled. Try to estab- models) 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
lish the pairing again or refer to the man- Press ON HOOK button (6) to reject a The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
ual of the phone in use for how to incoming call. played.
establish the pairing with the phone. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). Adjusting the listening volume (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- • Turn “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (2) during press the knob (1) to determine the
played. a call. selection.
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob Turning it clockwise increases the vol- 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and ume; turning it counterclockwise (1) to select “Sound Setting”, and press
press the knob (1) to determine the decreases the volume. the knob (1) to determine the selection.
selection. • Press “VOL” switch (7) during a call. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob Pressing “+” of the switch increases the (1) to select “Call Volume” or “Ringtone
(1) to select “Pairing”, and press the volume; pressing “-” of the switch Volume”, and press the knob (1) to
knob (1) to determine the selection. decreases the volume. determine the selection.
4) Select “CAR AUDIO” from the Blue- The current call or ringtone volume will
tooth® menu of the phone and establish be displayed.
the pairing. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
Refer to the manual of the phone in use (1) to select the desired call or ringtone
for further information. volume, and press the knob (1) to
5) Enter the passkey displayed on the unit determine the selection.
to the phone.
6) Press ON HOOK button (6).
5-66
83RM0-01E

NOTE: Dialing using missed/incoming/ NOTE:

When selecting “Go Back”, the previous outgoing calls • When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
menu will be displayed. Follow the instructions below to dial to the menu will be displayed.
previously dialed number again. • Pressing “Confirm” after selecting “Add
Selecting the ringtone Speed Dial” can register the selected
NOTE:
Follow the instructions below to select a number in the speed dial.
Up to 10 previously dialed phone numbers
ringtone. • Pressing “Confirm” after selecting
can be stored. (10 each for dialed,
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). “Delete” can delete the selected number
received and missed call)
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- from the call history.
played.
1) Press OFF HOOK button (5).
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob Deletion of call history
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
(1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and Follow the instructions below to delete a
press the knob (1) to determine the be displayed. missed/incoming/outgoing call history.
selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 1) Press OFF HOOK button (5).
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “Missed Calls”, “Incoming The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
(1) to select “Sound Setting”, and press Calls” or “Outgoing Calls”, and press
be displayed.
the knob (1) to determine the selection. the knob (1) to determine the selection.
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob To dial from the dialed history or the
(1) to select “Setup Phonebook”, and
(1) to select “Ringtone”, and press the received history, select “Missed Calls”,
press the knob (1) to determine the
knob (1) to determine the selection. “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls”
selection.
The current ringtone will be sounded. respectively.
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Delete History”, and press
(1) to select the desired ringtone, and (1) to select the desired number, and
the knob (1) to determine the selection.
press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the
selection. selection.
(1) to select “Missed Calls”, “Incoming
Calls”, or “Outgoing Calls”, and press
NOTE: (1) to select “Dial”, and press the knob
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous (1) or OFF HOOK button (5) to dial to
menu will be displayed. the selected number.
(1) to select a number to be deleted or
“ALL”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
mine the selection.
(1) to select “Delete?” or “Delete All?”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
5-67
83RM0-01E

7) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 7) Transfer contacts from the phone. NOTE:
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the When the registration is completed, the When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
knob (1) to complete the deletion. “Setup Phonebook” will be displayed. menu will be displayed.
NOTE:
NOTE: Making a call by phonebook
• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous Follow the instructions below to dial a num-
menu will be displayed.
menu will be displayed. ber registered in phonebook.
• Up to 1000 numbers can be registered in
Phonebook.
Registration in Phonebook The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
Follow the instructions below to register be displayed.
Transfer of call history (Call History)
phone numbers in the Phonebook of the 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
Follow the instructions below to transfer
unit. (1) to select “Phonebook”, and press
call history of the registered phone.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). the knob (1) to determine the selection.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
played. (1) to select the initial of the name you
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob played. would like to make a call, and press the
(1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob knob (1) to determine the selection.
press the knob (1) to determine the (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and The registered numbers will be dis-
selection. press the knob (1) to determine the played in sequence. If names have
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection. been registered together with numbers,
(1) to select “Setup Phonebook”, and 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob the names will be displayed.
press the knob (1) to determine the (1) to select “Call History”, and press 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
selection. the knob (1) to determine the selection. (1) to select “Dial”, and press the knob
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to determine the selection.
(1) to select “Add Contacts”, and press (1) to select “Call History?”, and press 5) Press OFF HOOK button (5).
the knob (1) to determine the selection. the knob (1) to determine the selection. The displayed number or the number
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob registered with the displayed name will
(1) to select “Overwrite All” or “Add One (1) to select “Confirm”, and press the be dialed.
Contact”, and press the knob (1) to knob (1) to transfer the call history from
determine the selection. the phone.
The “Rest of Memory XXXX: Ok?” will
be displayed.
6) Press or turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH
SOUND” knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
selection.
5-68
83RM0-01E

Deletion of registered data (Delete Registration in speed dial When the assignment is completed, the
Entry) Follow the instructions below to assign a “Setup Phonebook” will be displayed.
Follow the instructions below to delete a number to one of PRESET buttons (3) to
NOTE:
number registered in phonebook. use as the speed dial.
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
played. played.
One-touch call (Speed dial)
Follow the instructions below to dial the
(1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and
number assigned to each of PRESET but-
press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the
tons (3).
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
(1) to select “Setup Phonebook”, and (1) to select “Setup Phonebook”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the be displayed.
selection. selection. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “Speed Dials”, and press
(1) to select “Delete Contacts”, and (1) to select “Add Speed Dial”, and the knob (1) to determine the selection.
press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the 3) Press one of PRESET buttons (3).
selection. selection. If no number is assigned, “No Entry” is
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob displayed.
(1) to select a number to be deleted, (1) to select a number to be assigned, 4) Press OFF HOOK button (5).
and press the knob (1) to determine the and press the knob (1) to determine the The selected number will be dialed.
(1) to select “Delete?”, and press the (1) to select “Choose Preset”, and
knob (1) to determine the selection. press the knob (1) to determine the
7) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection.
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the 7) Press one of PRESET buttons (3) to
knob (1) to complete the deletion. which the selected number is to be
assigned. If a number is already
NOTE:
assigned to the selected button, a con-
firmation message will be displayed.
Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the
knob (1) to complete the assignment.
5-69
83RM0-01E

Deletion of speed dial (Del Speed Dial) Display of device data (Device Name) Reset to the factory defaults
Follow the instructions below to delete the Follow the instructions below to display the Follow the instructions below to reset all
number assigned for the speed dial. BD (Bluetooth® Device) address and the settings to the factory defaults.
1) Press OFF HOOK button (5). device name. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
be displayed. The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob played. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Speed Dials”, and press 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
the knob (1) to determine the selection. (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the
3) Press one of PRESET buttons (3) to press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
which the number to be deleted is selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
assigned. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “Initialize”, and press the
If the number is not registered, “No (1) to select “Bluetooth Info”, and press knob (1) to determine the selection.
Entry” is displayed. the knob (1) to determine the selection. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “All Initialize”, and press
(1) to select “Delete”, and press the (1) to select “Device Name” or “Device the knob (1) to determine the selection.
knob (1) to determine the selection. Address”, and press the knob (1) to dis- 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob play the device name or the BD (Blue- (1) to select “Confirm”, and press the
(1) to select “Del Speed Dial”, and tooth® Device) address. knob (1) to start the reset.
selection. NOTE: NOTE:
6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob When selecting “Go Back”, the previous When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the menu will be displayed. menu will be displayed.
knob (1) to complete the deletion.
NOTE:
5-70
83RM0-01E

Selection of phone (Select Phone) List of phones (List Phones) 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
Follow the instructions below to select a Follow the instructions below to display the (1) to select “New Passkey”, and press
phone to be paired with from the registered names of the registered phones in the knob (1) to determine the selection.
phones. sequence. 5) Press or turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). SOUND” knob (1) to select “Confirm”.
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
played. played. (1) to select a number for the first digit,
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob and press the knob (1) to determine the
(1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and selection. Select and determine num-
press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the bers for the second, third and fourth
selection. selection. digits in order in the same manner.
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob When not entering up to the eighth
(1) to select “List Phone”, and press the (1) to select “List Phone”, and press the digit, enter blanks for the successive
knob (1) to determine the selection. knob (1) to determine the selection. digits.
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob The names of the registered phones 7) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select a phone to be paired with, are displayed in sequence. (1) to determine the passkey setting.
NOTE: NOTE:
selection.
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
menu will be displayed. menu will be displayed.
(1) to select “Select”, and press the
knob (1) to determine the selection.
Passkey setting (Set Passkey)
NOTE: Follow the instructions below to set the
• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous security number (passkey).
menu will be displayed. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
• The Bluetooth® ready audio device will The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
be disconnected when the phone is played.
selected. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
selection.
(1) to select “Passkey”, and press the
5-71
83RM0-01E

Deletion of phone information (Delete BT function on/off (BT Power)

Phone) Follow the instructions below to turn on/off
Follow the instructions below to delete the the Bluetooth® function.
registered phone information. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
played. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
(1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the
press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “BT Power”, and press the
(1) to select “List Phone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
knob (1) to determine the selection. 4) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob knob (1) to select “BT Power On” or “BT
(1) to select a phone to be deleted, and Power Off”.
NOTE:
selection.
• When the BT function is turned off, the
connection between this unit and the
(1) to select “Delete Phone”, and press
registered phone in use will be discon-
nected.
• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
(1) to select “Delete?”, and press the
NOTE:
5-72
83RM0-01E

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) Steering switch
EXAMPLE
(6)
(5)
Display
(2)
(A)
(B)
(1) (4) (3) (1) “USB” button

(3) UP button
(4) DOWN button
61MM720
(6) Bluetooth® setup button
(A) Track number

(B) Play time
5-73
83RM0-01E

Registration of audio devices NOTE: Fast forwarding/rewinding a track

• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous • Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward
To use Bluetooth® ready audio devices menu will be displayed. the track.
with this unit, it is required to register the • When registering additional audio • Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast
devices. devices, repeat Step from 1). rewind the track.
NOTE:
NOTE: Selecting the Bluetooth® audio mode
Some functions may not be available
• To set up a new audio player, disconnect Press “USB” button (1).
depending on Bluetooth® audio.
the phone from the unit. Connect the Each time the button is pressed, the mode
phone after audio player setup is com- will change as follows:
Display change
pleted if necessary. Press “DISP” button (5).
• When attempts to establish the pairing Each time the button is pressed, display
fail within 120 seconds, the connecting USB (iPod®) (if equipped)
will change as follows:
operation will be canceled. Try to estab-
lish the pairing again or refer to the audio Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)
player manual for assistance with the
pairing process. Play time
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). Selecting a group (only for supported
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- models) Track name
played. Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (2)
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob to select a group. Artist name
(2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
press the knob (2) to determine the Selecting a track Album name
selection. • Press UP button (3) to listen to the next
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob track. NOTE:
(2) to select “Pairing”, and press the • Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to If text data contains more than 16 charac-
knob (2) to determine the selection. the previous track. ters, “>” mark will appear at the right end.
4) Select “CAR AUDIO” from the Blue- When DOWN button (4) is pressed Holding down “DISP” button (5) for 1 sec-
tooth® menu of the audio player and once, the track currently being played ond or longer can display the next page.
establish the pairing. will start from the beginning again.
Refer to the manual of the audio player
in use for further information.
5) Enter the passkey displayed on the unit
to the audio player.
5-74
83RM0-01E

Selection of audio device (Select Audio) List of audio devices (List Audio) 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
Follow the instructions below to select an Follow the instructions below to display the (2) to select “New Passkey”, and press
audio device to be paired with from the names of the registered audio devices in the knob (2) to determine the selection.
registered audio devices. sequence. 5) Press or turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). SOUND” knob (2) to select “Confirm”.
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
played. played. (2) to select a number for the first digit,
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob and press the knob (2) to determine the
(2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and selection. Select and determine num-
press the knob (2) to determine the press the knob (2) to determine the bers for the second, third and fourth
selection. selection. digits in order in the same manner.
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob When not entering up to the eighth
(2) to select “List Audio”, and press the (2) to select “List Audio”, and press the digit, enter blanks for the successive
knob (2) to determine the selection. knob (2) to determine the selection. digits.
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob The names of registered audio devices 7) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(2) to select an audio device to be will be displayed in sequence. (2) to determine the passkey setting.
used, and press the knob (2) to deter-
NOTE: NOTE:
mine the selection.
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
menu will be displayed. menu will be displayed.
(2) to select “Select”, and press the
Passkey setting (Set Passkey)
Follow the instructions below to set the
security number (Passkey).
knob (2) to complete the pairing.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).
NOTE: The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous played.
menu will be displayed. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
• The phone will be disconnected when (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
the Bluetooth® ready audio device is press the knob (2) to determine the
selected. selection.
(2) to select “Passkey”, and press the
5-75
83RM0-01E

Deletion of audio device information

(Delete Audio) Disclaimer for Bluetooth® function Remote audio controls (if equipped)
Follow the instructions below to delete the • Depending on compatibility of mobile Controlling basic functions of the audio
registered audio device information. phone models, no Bluetooth® function system is available using the switches on
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). can be used, or some Bluetooth® func- the steering wheel.
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- tions may be restricted.
played. • Connectivity or voice quality may get
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob affected depending on circumstances.
(2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and • After the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
press the knob (2) to determine the (2) (3)
position or the engine switch is pressed
selection. to change the ignition mode to “ON”, the
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob audio system takes few seconds to
(2) to select “List Audio”, and press the detect and connect to the Bluetooth®
knob (2) to determine the selection. device (if already paired).
(2) to select an audio device to be
deleted, and press the knob (2) to (1) (4)
determine the selection.
(2) to select “Delete”, and press the
(2) to select “Delete?”, and press the
knob (2) to complete the deletion.
NOTE:
5-76
83RM0-01E

Adjusting the volume Selecting the radio station (FM1, FM2,

• To increase the volume, hold down “+” of AM mode)
“VOL” switch (1). The volume will con- • To select the next preset station, press
tinue to increase until the switch is “ ” of the switch (4) only for a moment.
<
released. • To select the previous preset station,

• To decrease the volume, hold down “-” of press “ ” of the switch (4) only for a
<
“VOL” switch (1). The volume will con- moment.

tinue to decrease until the switch is • To scan a higher frequency radio station,
released. press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 second
<
• To mute the sound, press the switch (2). or longer.

• To scan a lower frequency radio station,
Selecting the mode press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 second
<
Press the switch (3). or longer.

Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows: Selecting the track (CD, USB (iPod®),
Bluetooth® audio mode)
• To skip to the next track, press “ ” of the
<
FM1 (Radio) switch (4) only for a moment.

• To skip to the previous track, press “ ” of
<
FM2 (Radio) the switch (4) twice only for a moment.

When the switch (4) is pushed down
CD once only for a moment, the track cur-
rently being played will start from the
Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) beginning again.
USB (iPod®) (if equipped) Fast forwarding/rewinding a track
• To fast forward a track, press “ ” of the
<
AM (Radio) switch (4) for 1 second or longer.

• To fast rewind a track, press “ ” of the
<
switch (4) for 1 second or longer.

It is possible to turn on the audio system
by pressing the switch (3).
5-77
83RM0-01E

The anti-theft function is intended to dis-

Anti-theft feature
courage thefts. For example, when the
audio system is installed in another vehi-
EXAMPLE cle, it will become unable to operate.
This function works by entering a Personal
Identification Number (PIN).
When the unit is disconnected from its
power source, such as when the audio
system is removed or the battery is discon-
nected, the unit will become inoperable
until the PIN is reentered.
(1) (4)
(2) (3)
61MM717
(1) “VOL PUSH PWR” knob

(2) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6])
(3) UP button
5-78
83RM0-01E

Setting the anti-theft function Canceling the anti-theft feature Confirming the Personal Identification
1) Press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1) to To cancel the anti-theft function, delete the Number (PIN)
power off. registered PIN. When the main power source is discon-
2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1] 1) Press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1) to nected such as when the battery is
and [6] of PRESET buttons (2) and power off. replaced, etc., it is required to enter the
press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1). 2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1] PIN to operate the unit again.
“SECURITY” will be displayed. and [6] of PRESET buttons (2) and 1) Set the ignition switch to “ACC” posi-
3) Press UP button (3) and the button press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1). tion or the ignition mode to “ON”.
numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2) “PIN ENTRY” will be displayed. “SECURITY” will be displayed.
simultaneously. 3) Press UP button (3) and the button 2) Press UP button (3) and the button
4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2) numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2)
as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] simultaneously. simultaneously.
- [4] of PRESET buttons (2). 4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered 3) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered
5) Hold down “TUNE/FLD PUSH as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] as PIN using the buttons numbered [1]
SOUND” knob (4) for 1 second or lon- - [4] of PRESET buttons (2). - [4] of PRESET buttons (2).
ger to set the anti-theft function. 5) Hold down “TUNE/FLD PUSH 4) Hold down “TUNE/FLD PUSH
SOUND” knob (4) for 1 second or lon- SOUND” knob (4) for 1 second or lon-
NOTE:
ger to delete the registered PIN. The ger.
Take a note of the registered PIN and keep
indication “----” will be displayed and When the same PIN as registered is
it for the future use.
the anti-theft function will be canceled. entered, the power of the audio system
will be turned off automatically and it
NOTE:
will become operable again.
To change your PIN, first delete your cur-
rent PIN, and then set a new one. NOTE:
If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR”
and the total number of incorrect entry
attempts will be displayed.
If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times or
more, “HELP” will be displayed and the
audio system will become inoperable.
5-79
83RM0-01E

Troubleshooting
When encountering a problem, check and follow the instructions below.
If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
Problem Possible cause Possible solution
Common
When “SECURITY” is displayed, enter
the ID.
Unable to operate The security function is on.
When “HELP” is displayed, contact your
Unable to turn on the power
Fuse is blown. Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
(No sound is produced)
Radio
It may not be exactly tuned in to the sta-
Much noise Tune it in exactly to the station.
tion.
There may be no station emitting signals
Pick up a station by manual tuning.
powerful enough.
Unable to receive by auto tuning
If AF is on, the unit searches for RDS sta-
Turn off AF.
tions only.
CD
The disc is dirty. Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.

Sound skips or noise produced
The disc has a major scratch or is Replace the disc with the one which has
warped. no scratch and warp.
5-80
83RM0-01E

Problem Possible cause Possible solution
MP3/WMA/AAC
The disc contains unsupported formatted
No playback Check the file format.
data.
Sound skipping may occur when playing
Sound skips or noise produced It is not recommended to play VBR files.
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files.
USB
There is no supported format file to play
Check the file format.
Playback does not start when the USB on this unit.
device is connected The current consumption of the USB Use a USB device with a current con-
device exceeds 1.0 A. sumption lower than 1.0 A.
Bluetooth®
The distance between this unit and the
Bluetooth® ready device is too far, or a Change the location of the Bluetooth®
metallic object may be located between ready device.
the Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.
Pairing failed
Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® function of the Bluetooth® ready device. (Some devices have the
ready device is off. power saving function that automatically
activates after a certain time.)
Your current location may be out of ser- Drive your vehicle to the service area of
Unable to receive a call
vice area. the phone.
The voice quality of hands-free is low Another wireless device may be located Switch off the wireless device or keep it
(Distortion, noise etc.) near the unit. away from the unit.
5-81
83RM0-01E

Error display messages
Display Possible cause Possible solution
CD
Insert the disc with its label side up.
Check the disc if it is not warped or is free of flaws.
“ERROR 1” The disc cannot be read.
When “ERROR 1” does not disappear even when a nor-
mal disc is inserted, contact your dealer.
When the CD is in the unit, press the CD eject button to
The player developed an error of an
“ERROR 3” remove the disc.
unidentified cause.
When the disc cannot be ejected, contact your dealer.
USB/iPod®
“ERROR 1” The USB device is disconnected. Check the connection of the USB device.
Impossible to communicate correctly with Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
“ERROR 2”
the USB device. Check the USB device.
Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
“ERROR 3” Inoperable due to an unidentified cause. When “ERROR 3” does not disappear, contact your
dealer.
The current consumption of the USB
“ERROR 4” Check the USB device.
device exceeds 1.0 A.
5-82
83RM0-01E

Display Possible cause Possible solution
Bluetooth®
Disconnect the Bluetooth® ready device and connect it
The player developed an error of an again.
“ERROR 1”
unidentified cause. When “ERROR 1” does not disappear, contact your
dealer.
“CONNECTION
Failed to establish pairing or connection Try to establish the pairing or connection again.
FAILED”
Delete registered data of unnecessary number in phone-
Reached the limit for the number of phone-
“MEMORY FULL” book and try to transfer the register phone numbers in
book data in transfer
the phonebook again.
“NOT AVAILABLE” Inoperable during driving Operate the system after pulling over your car.
5-83
83RM0-01E

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

Vehicle Loading ................................................................... 6-1
Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 6-1
54G215
83RM0-01E

Vehicle Loading WARNING Trailer Towing

Your vehicle was designed for specific Never overload your vehicle. The
weight capacities. The weight capacities of gross vehicle weight (sum of the
your vehicle are indicated by the Gross weights of the vehicle, all the occu-
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the pants, accessories, cargo plus trailer
Permissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW, nose weight if towing a trailer) must
front and rear). The GVWR and PAW (front never exceed the Gross Vehicle
and rear) are listed in the “SPECIFICA- Weight Rating (GVWR). In addition,
TIONS” section. never distribute a load so that the
weight on either the front or rear axle
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall exceeds the Permissible maximum
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including Axle Weight (PAW).
all the occupants, accessories and cargo
plus the trailer nose weight if towing a 60A185
trailer). WARNING
PAW – (Front and Rear) Maximum permis- While towing a trailer can adversely affect
Always distribute cargo evenly. To handling, durability, and fuel economy,
sible weight on an individual axle. avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle can be used to tow a trailer
your vehicle, always secure cargo to which does not exceed the towing capacity
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and prevent it from shifting if the vehicle
actual loads at the front and rear axles can specified below:
moves suddenly. Place heavier
only be determined by weighing the vehi- objects on the floor and as far for-
cle. Compare these weights to the GVWR Maximum towing capacity
ward in the cargo area as possible. (trailer, cargo & tow bar)
and PAW (front and rear). If the gross vehi- Never pile cargo higher than the top
cle weight or the load on either axle of the seat backs. Gasoline engine model
exceeds these ratings, you must remove Braked trailer: 1200 kg (2646 lbs)
enough weight to bring the load down to Unbraked trailer: 400 kg (882 lbs)
the rated capacity.
Diesel engine model
Braked trailer:
• M/T: 1500 kg (3307 lbs)
• TCSS: 1200 kg (2646 lbs)
Unbraked trailer:
• M/T: 600 kg (1323 lbs)
• TCSS: 400 kg (882 lbs)
6-1
83RM0-01E


WARNING DRIVING” section. WARNING
For vehicles equipped with the radar Never attach safety chains to the
brake support system, if your vehicle Tow Bars bumper of your vehicle. Secure con-
is used to tow a trailer, press the nections so that they cannot come
“Radar Brake Support OFF” switch Only use a tow bar that is designed to loose.
and turn off the radar brake support attach to the chassis of your vehicle, and a
system. If not, unexpected accidents hitch that is designed to bolt to this tow bar.
related to the system being turned on We recommend that you use a genuine Trailer Lights
may occur. SUZUKI tow bar (available as options), or
equivalent. Make sure your trailer is equipped with
lights which meet local requirements.
WARNING Always check for the proper operation of
NOTICE all trailer lights before you start to tow.
Trailer towing puts additional stress Never use a tow bar which attaches
on the engine, drive train, and brakes to the axle or the bumper of your WARNING
of your vehicle. Never tow a trailer vehicle.
during the first 960 km (600 miles) of Never connect trailer lights directly
vehicle operation. into your vehicle’s electrical system,
Safety Chains or electrical system damage may
occur.
Always attach safety chains between your
NOTICE vehicle and trailer. Cross safety chains
For automatic transaxle vehicles, do under the nose of the trailer so that the Brakes
not use “D” range when towing on a nose will not drop to the road if the trailer
steep hill. Towing in “D” range when becomes separated from the tow bar. Fol-
driving on a steep hill can cause low the manufacturer’s recommendation WARNING
automatic transaxle fluid overheat- for attaching safety chains. Always leave If trailer brakes are used, you should
ing without warning, which can result just enough slack to permit full turning. follow all instructions provided by
in transaxle damage. Never allow safety chains to drag on the the manufacturer. Never connect to
road. the brake system of your vehicle and
NOTE: never take an electrical supply
If your vehicle has a parking sensor sys- directly from the wiring harness.
tem, set the system to the trailer mode via
the information display. When this mode is
set, the rear corner and rear center sen-
sors are inhibited from operating. Refer to
6-2
83RM0-01E

pler, with the trailer fully loaded and the

Tires coupler at its normal towing height. This WARNING
weight can be measured using a bathroom
scales. Never overload your trailer or your
WARNING vehicle. Gross trailer weight must
When towing a trailer, it is very The weight of your loaded trailer (Gross never exceed the “Towing capacity”.
important for your vehicle and trailer Trailer Weight) should never exceed the Gross vehicle weight (sum of the
to have properly inflated tires. Your “Towing capacity”. weights of the vehicle, all the occu-
vehicle’s tires should be inflated to Distribute cargo in your trailer so that nose pants, accessories including tow
the pressures listed on your vehicles weight is about 10% of gross trailer weight, bars and a trailer hitch, cargo and
Tire Information Label. If laden pres- but does not exceed “Maximum vertical trailer nose weight) must never
sures are listed on the label, the tires load on trailer hitch point”. You should exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
should be inflated to the laden pres- measure gross trailer weight and nose ing (GVWR) listed in the “SPECIFICA-
sures. Inflate trailer tires according to weight before towing to make sure that TIONS” section.
the specifications provided by the your load is properly distributed.
trailer manufacturer.
Additional Trailer Towing Warnings
WARNING
Mirrors Improper weight distribution of your WARNING
Check to see if your vehicle’s mirrors meet trailer may result in poor vehicle han-
dling and swaying of the trailer. Connect trailer lights and hook up
local requirements for mirrors used on tow- safety chains every time you tow.
ing vehicles. If they do not, you must install Always make sure that trailer nose
the required mirrors before you tow. weight is about 10% of gross trailer
weight, but does not exceed “Maxi-
mum vertical load on trailer hitch NOTICE
Vehicle/Trailer Loading point”. Also make sure that the cargo Because towing a trailer puts addi-
To load your vehicle and trailer properly, is properly secured. Failure to tional stress on your vehicle, more
you must know how to measure gross observe this requirement may result frequent maintenance will be
trailer weight and trailer nose weight. in an accident. required than under normal driving
conditions. Follow the schedule for
Gross Trailer Weight is the weight of the “Maintenance Recommended under
trailer plus all the cargo in it. You can mea- Severe Driving Conditions”.
sure gross trailer weight by putting the fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
Nose Weight is the downward force
exerted on the tow bar by the trailer cou-
6-3
83RM0-01E


Your vehicle will handle differently (Continued) (Continued)
when towing a trailer. For your safety • If the trailer has over-run brakes, • Avoid “riding” the brakes. This
and the safety of others, you should apply the brakes gradually to avoid could cause the brakes to over-
observe the following precautions: snatching caused by the trailer heat resulting in reduced braking
• Practice turning, stopping, and wheels locking. efficiency. Use engine braking as
reversing before you begin towing • Slow down before corners and much as possible.
in traffic. Do not tow in traffic until maintain a steady speed while cor- • Because of the added trailer
you are confident that you can han- nering. Deceleration or accelera- weight, your engine may overheat
dle the vehicle and trailer safely. tion while cornering can result in on hot days when going up long or
• Never exceed towing speed limits loss of control. Remember that a steep hills. Pay attention to your
or 80 km/h (50 mph), whichever is larger than normal turning radius is engine temperature gauge. If it indi-
lower. needed because the trailer wheels cates overheating, pull off the road
• Never drive at a speed that causes will be closer than vehicle wheels and stop in a safe place. Refer to “If
shaking or swaying of the trailer. If to the inside of the turn. the Engine Overheats” in “EMER-
you notice even the slightest sign • Avoid sudden acceleration and GENCY SERVICE” section.
of shaking or swaying, slow down. stopping of the vehicle. Do not
• When roads are wet, slippery or make quick maneuvers unless they
rough, drive at a slower speed than are necessary.
you would on dry, smooth roads. • Slow down in cross winds and be
Failure to slow down when road prepared for gusts of wind from
conditions are bad can result in large passing vehicles.
loss of control. • Be careful when overtaking other
• Always have someone guide you vehicles. Be sure to allow enough
when reversing. room for your trailer before you
• Allow adequate stopping distance. change lanes, and signal well in
Stopping distance is increased advance.
when you tow a trailer. For each 16 • Slow down and shift into a lower
km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at gear before you reach long or steep
least one vehicle and trailer length downhill grades. It is hazardous to
between you and the vehicle attempt downshifting while you are
ahead. Follow at a greater distance descending a hill.
if roads are wet or slippery. (Continued)
(Continued)
6-4
83RM0-01E

Trailer hitch installation points

WARNING
(Continued)
When starting out after parking:
1) Depress the clutch and start the
engine.
2) Shift into gear, release the parking
brake, and slowly pull away from
the chocks.
(1) (1)
3) Stop, apply the brakes firmly and “a” (1) (1)
hold them.
4) Have another person remove the
chocks.
60A186
61MM0B111
WARNING (1) Side

When parking your vehicle and con- Maximum vertical load on trailer hitch
nected trailer, always use the follow- point (EU)
ing procedure: 75 kg (165 lbs)
1) Apply the vehicle’s brakes firmly.
Maximum permissible overhang “a”
2) Have another person place wheel
895 mm (35.2 in.)
chocks under the wheels of the
vehicle and the trailer while you
are holding the brakes.
3) Slowly release the brakes until the
wheel chocks absorb the load.
4) Fully engage the parking brake.
5) Manual transaxle – turn off the
engine, then shift into reverse or
first gear.
Automatic transaxle or TCSS –
shift into “P” (Park) and turn off
the engine.
(Continued)
6-5
83RM0-01E

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2
Periodic Maintenance Schedule (except for Russia)
- For K10C engine and K14C engine model ...................... 7-3
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving
Conditions (except for Russia)
- For K10C engine and K14C engine model ...................... 7-8
- For D16AA engine model ................................................. 7-13
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving
Conditions (except for Russia)
- For D16AA engine model ................................................. 7-18
Drive Belt ............................................................................. 7-23
7
Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 7-24
Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-30
Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 7-33
Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 7-35
60G410 Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-37
TCSS Actuation Tank Fluid ................................................ 7-40
Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 7-40
Fuel Filter (Diesel engine) .................................................. 7-40
Brakes .................................................................................. 7-41
Steering ................................................................................ 7-43
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-43
Battery .................................................................................. 7-46
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-49
Headlight Aiming ................................................................. 7-52
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-53
Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-63
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-67
Air Conditioning System .................................................... 7-67
83RM0-01E

WARNING WARNING
• When the engine is running, keep • Keep used oil, coolant, and other
hands, clothing, tools, and other fluids away from children and pets.
objects away from the fan and drive Dispose of used fluids properly;
belt. Even though the fan may not never pour them on the ground,
60B128S
be moving, it can automatically into sewers, etc.
turn on without warning.
WARNING • When it is necessary to do service
work with the engine running, make
You should take extreme care when sure that the parking brake is set
working on your vehicle to prevent fully and the transaxle is in Neutral
accidental injury. Here are a few pre-
cautions that you should be espe- (for manual transaxle vehicles) or
cially careful to observe: Park (for automatic transaxle or
• To prevent damage or unintended TCSS vehicles).
activation of the air bag system or • Do not touch ignition wires or other
seat belt pretensioner system, be ignition system parts when starting
sure the battery is disconnected and the engine or when the engine is
the ignition switch has been in the running, or you could receive an
“LOCK” position or the ignition electric shock.
mode has been “LOCK” (OFF) for at • Be careful not to touch a hot
least 90 seconds before performing engine, exhaust manifold and
any electrical service work on your pipes, muffler, radiator and water
SUZUKI. Do not touch air bag sys- hoses.
tem components, seat belt preten- • Do not allow smoking, sparks, or
sioner system components or wires. flames around fuel or the battery.
The wires are wrapped with yellow Flammable fumes are present.
tape or yellow tubing, and the cou- • Do not get under your vehicle if it is
plers are yellow for easy identifica- supported only with the portable
tion. jack provided in your vehicle.
• Do not leave the engine running in
garages or other confined areas. • Be careful not to cause accidental
(Continued) short circuits between the positive
and negative battery terminals.
(Continued)
7-1
83RM0-01E

Maintenance Schedule NOTICE

The following table shows the times when Whenever it becomes necessary to
you should perform regular maintenance replace parts on your vehicle, it is
on your vehicle. This table shows in miles, recommended that you use genuine
kilometers and months when you should SUZUKI replacement parts or their
perform inspections, adjustments, lubrica- equivalent.
tion and other services. These intervals
should be shortened if driving is usually
done under severe conditions (refer to
“Maintenance Recommended under
Severe Driving Conditions”).
WARNING
SUZUKI recommends that mainte-
nance on items marked with an aster-
isk (*) be performed by your
authorized SUZUKI dealer or a quali-
fied service technician. If you are
qualified, you may perform mainte-
nance on the unmarked items by
referring to the instructions in this
section. If you are not sure whether
you can successfully complete any of
the unmarked maintenance jobs, ask
your authorized SUZUKI dealer to do
the maintenance for you.
7-2
83RM0-01E


- For K10C engine and K14C engine model
“R” : Replace or Change
“I” : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary
NOTE:
This table shows the service schedule up to 180000 km (108000 miles). Beyond 180000 km (108000 miles), perform the same services
at the same intervals shown in the chart.
NOTE:
For the Periodic Maintenance Schedule of Russian models, refer to “For Russia” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section.
7-3
83RM0-01E

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 15 30 45 60 75 90

odometer reading or months, whichever comes miles (x1000) 9 18 27 36 45 54
first. months 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, *Adjustment, *Replacement – – I – – R
1-2. Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R
Refer to “Oil Change Request Light” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
1-3. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#1) First time only: Replace at 150000 km (90000 miles) or 96 months.
Second time and after: Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles) or 48 months.
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – R – – R
*1-4. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – I – I – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs When unleaded fuel is used Iridium plug – – – R – –
Spark plugs When leaded fuel is used, refer to “Severe Driving Condition” schedule.
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road I I R I I R
Dusty condition Refer to “Severe Driving condition” schedule.
*3-2. Fuel lines – I – I – I
*3-3. Fuel tank – – I – – I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system – – – – – I
#1: Be sure to perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
If you use the engine coolant other than the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) for replacement, follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC: Stan-
dard (Green).
7-4
83RM0-01E

first. months 84 96 108 120 132 144
ENGINE
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs When unleaded fuel is used Iridium plug – R – – – R
FUEL
*3-3. Fuel tank – – I – – I
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
dard (Green).
7-5
83RM0-01E


odometer reading or months, whichever miles (x1000) 9 18 27 36 45 54
comes first. months 12 24 36 48 60 72
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads I I I I I I
Brake drums and shoes (if equipped) – I – I – I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes – I – I – I
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – R – R
*5-4. Brake (Pedal and fluid level) I I I I I I
5-5. Brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only) I – – – – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – R – R – R
*6-2. Clutch (Pedal and fluid level) I I I I I I
6-3. Tires/Wheels I I I I I I
*6-4. Wheel bearings – I – I – I
*6-5. Drive axle boots/Propeller shafts (4WD) – – I – – I
*6-6. Suspension system – I – I – I
*6-7. Steering system – I – I – I
*6-8. Manual transaxle oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” (I: 1st 15000 km only) I – R – – R
*6-9. Automatic transaxle Fluid leak check – I – I – I
*6-10. Transfer oil (4WD) Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Replace every 150000 km (90000 miles) or 120 months.
*6-11. Rear differential oil (4WD) Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
6-12. All latches, hinges and locks – I – I – I
*6-13. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) – I R – I R
#2: Clutch fluid is supplied from brake fluid reservoir.
WARNING
The shock absorbers are filled with high pressure gas. Never attempt to disassemble them or throw them into a fire. Avoid
storing them near a heater or heating device. When scrapping the absorber, the gas must be released from the absorber
safely. Ask your dealer for assistance.
7-6
83RM0-01E

BRAKE
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – R – R
5-5. Brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only) – – – – – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” (I: 1st 15000 km only) – – R – – R
NOTE:
4WD: 4-wheel drive
7-7
83RM0-01E

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions (except for Russia)

- For K10C engine and K14C engine model
Follow this schedule if your vehicle is mainly operated under one or more of the following conditions:
• When most trips are less than 6 km (4 miles).
• When most trips are less than 16 km (10 miles) and outside temperature remains below freezing.
• Idling and/or low-speed operation in stop-and-go traffic.
• Operating in extremely cold weather and/or on salted roads.
• Operating in rough and/or muddy areas.
• Operating in dusty areas.
• Repeated high speed drive or high engine revolutions.
• Towing a trailer, if admitted.
Schedule should also be followed if the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial applications.
NOTE:
For the Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions of Russian models, refer to “For Russia” in the “SUPPLEMENT”
section.
7-8
83RM0-01E

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45

odometer reading or months, whichever comes miles (x1000) 4.5 9 13.5 18 22.5 27
first. months 6 12 18 24 30 36
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, *Adjustment, *Replacement – I – I – R
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – – – – R
*1-4. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – – – I – –
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs Iridium plug – – – R – –
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element*1 Inspect every 2500 km (1500 miles).
*3-2. Fuel lines – – – I – –
*3-3. Fuel tank – – – – – I
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – –
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system – – – – – –
dard (Green).
7-9
83RM0-01E


first. months 42 48 54 60 66 72
ENGINE
*1-4. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – I – – – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs Iridium plug – R – – – R
FUEL
*3-2. Fuel lines – I – – – I
*3-3. Fuel tank – – – – – I
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
dard (Green).
7-10
83RM0-01E


odometer reading or months, whichever miles (x1000) 4.5 9 13.5 18 22.5 27
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads – I – I – I
Brake drums and shoes (if equipped) – – – I – –
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes – – – I – –
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – – – R – –
*5-4. Brake (Pedal and fluid level) – I – I – I
5-5. Brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only) – I – – – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – – – R – –
*6-2. Clutch (Pedal and fluid level) – I – I – I
6-3. Tires/Wheels – I – I – I
*6-5. Drive axle boots/Propeller shafts (4WD) – I – I – I
*6-6. Suspension system – – – I – –
*6-7. Steering system – – – I – –
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” – – – R – –
*6-9. Automatic transaxle Fluid leak check – – – I – –
*6-10. Transfer oil (4WD) – – – R – –
*6-11. Rear differential oil (4WD) – – – R – –
6-12. All latches, hinges and locks – – – I – –
*6-13. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*2 – I – I – R
WARNING
7-11
83RM0-01E


BRAKE
Brake drums and shoes (if equipped) – I – – – I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes – I – – – I
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – – – R
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – R – – – R
*6-6. Suspension system – I – – – I
*6-7. Steering system – I – – – I
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” – R – – – R
*6-9. Automatic transaxle Fluid leak check – I – – – I
*6-10. Transfer oil (4WD) – R – – – R
*6-11. Rear differential oil (4WD) – R – – – R
6-12. All latches, hinges and locks – I – – – I
NOTE:
4WD: 4-wheel drive
NOTE:
This table shows the service schedule up to 90000 km (54000 miles).
Beyond 90000 km (54000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.
*1 Inspect more frequently if the vehicle is used under dusty conditions.
*2 Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases.
7-12
83RM0-01E

Periodic Maintenance Schedule (except for Russia) - For D16AA engine model
NOTE:
This table shows the service schedule up to 240000 km (150000 miles). Beyond 240000 km (150000 miles), perform the same services
at the same intervals shown in the chart.
NOTE:
For the Periodic Maintenance Schedule of Russian models, refer to “For Russia” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section.
7-13
83RM0-01E


first. months 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Ribbed belt – I – R – I
*1-2. Camshaft timing belt Replace every 140000 km (87500 miles) or 60 months.
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter Synthetic oil Replace when the oil change request light blinks or every 24 months.
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) Replace every 40000 km (25000 miles) or 36 months.
FUEL
2-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road Inspect every 20000 km (12500 miles) or 12 months.
*2-3. Fuel filter Replace every 60000 km (37500 miles).
*2-4. Fuel tank – I – I – I
dard (Green).
7-14
83RM0-01E

first. months 84 96 108 120 132 144
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Ribbed belt – R – I – R
*1-2. Camshaft timing belt Replace every 140000 km (87500 miles) or 60 months.
FUEL
2-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road Inspect every 20000 km (12500 miles) or 12 months.
*2-4. Fuel tank – I – I – I
dard (Green).
7-15
83RM0-01E


BRAKE
*3-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – R – R
CHASSIS AND BODY
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” – R – R – R
*4-11. TCSS actuation tank fluid (TCSS) Inspect every 105000 km (65625miles) or 72 months.
WARNING
7-16
83RM0-01E

BRAKE
*3-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – R – R
CHASSIS AND BODY
NOTE:
4WD: 4-wheel drive
7-17
83RM0-01E

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions (except for Russia)

- For D16AA engine model
NOTE:
For the Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions of Russian models, refer to “For Russia” in the “SUPPLEMENT”
section.
7-18
83RM0-01E


odometer reading or months, whichever comes miles (x1000) 6.25 12.5 18.75 25 31.25 37.5
first. months 6 12 18 24 30 36
ENGINE
*1-2. Camshaft timing belt Replace every 36 months.
FUEL
*2-2. Fuel lines – – – I – –
*2-4. Fuel tank – – – I – –
dard (Green).
7-19
83RM0-01E


odometer reading or months, whichever comes miles (x1000) 43.75 50 56.25 62.5 68.75 75
first. months 42 48 54 60 66 72
ENGINE
*1-2. Camshaft timing belt Replace every 36 months.
FUEL
*2-2. Fuel lines – I – – – I
*2-4. Fuel tank – I – – – I
dard (Green).
7-20
83RM0-01E


odometer reading or months, whichever miles (x1000) 6.25 12.5 18.75 25 31.25 37.5
BRAKE
*3-3. Brake fluid (#2) – – – R – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
*4-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – – – R – –
*4-5. Drive axle boots/Propeller shafts (4WD) – – – I – –
WARNING
7-21
83RM0-01E


odometer reading or months, whichever miles (x1000) 43.75 50 56.25 62.5 68.75 75
BRAKE
*3-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – – – R
CHASSIS AND BODY
*4-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – R – – – R
*4-5. Drive axle boots/Propeller shafts (4WD) – I – – – I
NOTE:
4WD: 4-wheel drive
NOTE:
7-22
83RM0-01E

(For K10C engine model)

Drive Belt For Gasoline Engine Model
(2) (1)
(For M16A engine model)
WARNING (4)
(2) (1) (b) (a)
When the engine is running, keep
hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away (4)
from the moving fan and drive belts. (b) (a)
Make sure the drive belt tension is correct.

If the belt is too loose, insufficient battery (3) (6) (5)
charging, engine overheating, poor power
steering, poor air conditioning, or exces-
sive belt wear can result. When you press (3) (6) (5)
the belt with your thumb midway between (c)
68PM00701
the pulleys, there should be a deflection (1) Front (2) Rear

according to the following chart. 61MS2A003 (3) Generator (4) Water pump
The belts should also be examined to (1) Front (2) Rear (5) Air conditioner compressor
ensure that they are not damaged.
(3) Generator (4) Water pump (6) Idler pulley
If you need to replace or adjust the belt
have it done by your SUZUKI dealer. (5) Air conditioner compressor Drive belt deflection (100 N (10 kg, 22
(6) Idler pulley lbs) press)
Drive belt deflection (100 N (10 kg, 22 (a) 6.2 - 7.1 mm (0.24 - 0.28 in.)
lbs) press) (b) 4.4 - 5.0 mm (0.17 - 0.20 in.)
(a) 6.5 - 7.9 mm (0.26 - 0.31 in.)
(b) 4.8 - 6.2 mm (0.19 - 0.24 in.)
(c) 7 - 8 mm (0.28 - 0.31 in.)
7-23
83RM0-01E

(For K14C engine model) SAE 0W-20 (1) is the best choice for good
Engine Oil and Filter fuel economy, and good starting in cold
(2) (1) weather.
(4) Specified Oil NOTE:
(b) (a) We recommend you to use the SUZUKI
M16A engine model GENUINE OIL. To purchase it, see your
SUZUKI dealer.
K10C and K14C engine model

10W-40
(3) (6) (5)
10W-30
(1)
5W-30
10W-40
54P020701 0W-20
(1)
10W-30
(1) Front (2) Rear o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
o 5W-30
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
(3) Generator (4) Water pump o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
(5) Air conditioner compressor o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
(6) Idler pulley
68LM20702
Drive belt deflection (100 N (10 kg, 22 (1) Preferred
lbs) press)
54P120705
(a) 7.1 - 8.0 mm (0.28 - 0.31 in.) Be sure that the engine oil you use comes
(b) 4.9 - 5.6 mm (0.19 - 0.22 in.) under the quality classification as listed (1) Preferred
below:
• ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5 Check that the engine oil you use comes
For Diesel Engine Model • API SL, SM, SN under the quality classification as listed
• ILSAC GF-3, GF-4, GF-5 below:
The drive belts tension is adjusted auto- • ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5
matically. Select the appropriate oil viscosity accord-
ing to the above chart. • API SL, SM, SN
• ILSAC GF-3, GF-4, GF-5
Select the appropriate oil viscosity accord-
ing to the above chart.
7-24
83RM0-01E

SAE 5W-30 (1) is the best choice for good (For Diesel Engine Model)
fuel economy and good starting in cold Oil Level Check
weather.
(For Gasoline Engine Model) (3)
NOTE:
We recommend that you use SUZUKI gen-
uine oil. To purchase it, see your SUZUKI
dealer.
(2) (1)
D16AA engine model
Be sure that the engine oil you use comes
under the quality classification of ACEA
C2.
SAE 0W-30 is the best choice for good fuel
economy, and good starting in cold 84E012
weather. (1) MIN
80G064 (2) MAX
NOTICE (3) Engine oil dipstick
Use only the recommended ACEA Upper
C2. Use of non-recommended engine EXAMPLE Lower It is important to keep the engine oil at the
oil will cause a damage of the diesel correct level for proper lubrication of your
engine and DPF®. vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with
the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level
indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle
is on a slope. The oil level should be
checked either before starting the engine
or at least 5 minutes after stopping the
engine.
The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-
ored yellow for easy identification.
52D084
7-25
83RM0-01E

Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with a NOTE:
clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way When the soot particles accumulated in Refilling
into the engine, then remove it again. The the DPF® are combusted, the amount of
oil on the stick should be between the the engine oil may increase due to the dilu- EXAMPLE
upper and lower limits shown on the stick. tion with the fuel. This is not a vehicle mal-
If the oil level indication is near the lower function. The soot particles accumulated in
limit, add enough oil to raise the level to the DPF® are combusted automatically
the upper limit. during driving. However, they may not be Open Close
combusted in the following cases.
NOTICE
• When you drive at low speed for a long
Failure to check the oil level regularly time.
could lead to serious engine trouble • When you repeat a short-time or short-
due to insufficient oil. distance driving.
NOTICE 1) When the DPF® warning light comes

on, drive at a speed of 50 km/h (31 81A147
(For Diesel Engine Model) mph) or higher for more than 25 min- Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly
Do not top up the oil over the MAX utes to regenerate the DPF® properly. through the filler hole to bring the oil level
limit. Too much oil causes serious For details, refer to “Diesel Particulate
engine trouble. to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful
Filter” in the OPERATING YOUR VEHI- not to overfill. Too much oil is almost as
CLE. bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the
2) When the oil change request light engine and allow it to idle for about a min-
blinks, change the engine oil and oil fil- ute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutes
ter, and reset the oil life monitoring sys- and check the oil level again.
tem. To reset the oil life monitoring
system, consult your SUZUKI dealer.
3) When the engine oil level exceeds the
MAX level on the dipstick, consult your
SUZUKI dealer.
7-26
83RM0-01E

Changing Engine Oil and Filter

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
Drain the engine oil while the engine is still
warm.
Open Close
EXAMPLE
56KN054 60G306
2) Remove the oil filler cap. Tightening torque for drain plug
3) Place a drain pan under the drain plug. Gasoline engine :
4) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug 35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb-ft)
61MM0B061 and drain out the engine oil. Diesel engine :
1) Remove the bolts and screws, then 20 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14.8 lb-ft)
remove the engine under cover. CAUTION
The engine oil temperature may be
WARNING
high enough to burn your fingers New and used oil can be hazardous.
when the drain plug is loosened. Wait Children and pets may be harmed by
until the drain plug is cool enough to swallowing new or used oil. Keep
touch with your bare hands. new and used oil and used oil filters
away from children and pets.
Repeated, prolonged contact with
used engine oil may cause skin can-
cer.
Brief contact with used oil may irri-
tate skin.
(Continued)
7-27
83RM0-01E

NOTE:
WARNING (For Diesel Engine Model) Replace the Oil Filter
• Whenever the engine oil is changed, the
(Continued) oil life monitoring must be reset to moni- NOTE:
To minimize your exposure to used tor the next oil change timing properly (For Diesel Engine Model)
oil, wear a long-sleeve shirt and whether the oil change request light Since special procedures and tools are
moisture-proof gloves (such as dish- blinks or not and whatever the remaining required, it is recommended that you trust
washing gloves) when changing oil. If distance of oil life on the information dis- this job to your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
oil contacts your skin, wash thor- play shows. To reset the oil life monitor-
oughly with soap and water. ing, consult your SUZUKI dealer. 1) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil-
Launder any clothing or rags if wet • For more information of the oil change ter counterclockwise and remove it.
with oil. request light and oil life monitoring, refer 2) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount-
Recycle or properly dispose of used to “Oil Change Request Light” and “Infor- ing surface on the engine where the
oil and filters. mation Display” in the “BEFORE DRIV- new filter will be seated.
ING” section. 3) Smear a little engine oil around the rub-
5) Reinstall the drain plug with new gas- ber gasket of the new oil filter.
ket. Tighten the plug with a wrench to 4) Screw on the new filter by hand until the
the specified torque. filter gasket contacts the mounting sur-
face.
NOTE:
(For Gasoline Engine Model with oil
change request light)
• Whenever the engine oil is changed, the
oil life monitoring must be reset to moni-
tor the next oil change timing properly
whether the oil change request light
blinks or not. To reset the oil change
request light, consult your SUZUKI
dealer. If you reset it by yourself, refer to
“Setting Mode” in “Information Display”
in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
• For more information of the oil change
request light, refer to “Oil Change
Request Light” in the “BEFORE DRIV-
ING” section.
7-28
83RM0-01E

(For Gasoline Engine Model) Tightening (viewed from filter top) (For Diesel Engine Model)
(1)
(2)
54G092 54G093 79J142
(1) Loosen (1) Oil filter (1) Loosen

(2) Tighten (2) 3/4 turn (2) Tighten
NOTICE
To tighten the oil filter properly, it is
Important to accurately identify the
position at which the filter gasket
first contacts the mounting surface.
7-29
83RM0-01E

5) Tighten the filter specified turn from the

point of contact with the mounting sur- Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks Engine Coolant
face (or to the specified torque) using 1) Pour oil through the filler hole and
an oil filter wrench. install the filler cap.
Tightening torque for oil filter For the approximate capacity of the oil, Selection of Coolant
3/4 turn or refer to the “Capacities” item in the
Gasoline engine : “SPECIFICATIONS” section.
2) Start the engine and look carefully for NOTICE
14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft)
Diesel engine : leaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Run SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant;
30 Nm (3.1 kg-m, 22.1 lb-ft) the engine at various speeds for at least SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant is
5 minutes. already diluted to the proper percent-
3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min- age. Do not dilute with distilled water
NOTICE utes. Check the oil level again and add additionally. Doing so may result in
To prevent oil leakage, make sure oil if necessary. Check for leaks again. the possibility of freezing coolant
that the oil filter is tight, but do not and/or overheating.
over-tighten it. NOTICE
To maintain optimum performance and
• When replacing the oil filter, it is durability of your engine, use SUZUKI
recommended that you use a genu- Genuine Coolant or equivalent.
ine SUZUKI replacement filter. If
you use an aftermarket filter, make NOTE:
sure it is of equivalent quality and If you use the engine coolant other than
follow the manufacturer’s instruc- the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) for replace-
tions. ment, follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC:
• Oil leaks from around the oil filter Standard (Green). To see the detail of the
or drain plug indicate incorrect maintenance schedule, refer to “Periodic
installation or gasket damage. If Maintenance Schedule” in this section.
you find any leaks or are not sure This type of coolant is best for your cooling
that the filter has been properly system as it:
tightened, have the vehicle • Helps maintain proper engine tempera-
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. ture.
• Gives proper protection against freezing
and boiling.
• Gives proper protection against corro-
sion and rust.
7-30
83RM0-01E

Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-

age your cooling system. Your authorized Coolant Level Check NOTICE
SUZUKI dealer can help you select the Check the coolant level at the reservoir
proper coolant. SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant;
tank, not at the radiator. With the engine SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant is
cool, the coolant level should be between already diluted to the proper percent-
NOTICE the “FULL” and “LOW” marks. age. Do not dilute with distilled water
To avoid damaging your cooling sys- additionally. Doing so may result in
tem: Adding Coolant the possibility of freezing coolant
• Always use a high quality ethylene and/or overheating.
glycol base non-silicate type cool-
ant diluted with distilled water at WARNING
the correct mixture concentration. Swallowing engine coolant can cause
NOTICE
• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/ severe injury or death. Inhaling cool- SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) cool-
50 coolant to distilled water and in ant mist or vapors or getting coolant ant;
no case higher than 70/30. Concen- in your eyes could result in severe • The mixture you use should con-
trations greater than 70/30 coolant injury. tain 50% concentration of anti-
to distilled water will cause over- • Do not drink antifreeze or coolant freeze.
heating conditions. solution. If swallowed, do not • If the lowest ambient temperature
• Do not use straight coolant nor induce vomiting. Immediately con- in your area is expected to be –
plain water (except SUZUKI LLC: tact a poison control center or a 35°C (–31°F) or below, use higher
Super (Blue)). physician. concentrations up to 60% following
• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi- • Avoid inhaling coolant mist or hot the instructions on the antifreeze
tives. They may not be compatible vapors. If inhaled, remove to a container.
with your cooling system. fresh air area.
• Do not mix different types of base • If coolant gets in the eyes, flush
coolants. Doing so may result in with water and seek medical atten-
accelerated seal wear and/or the tion.
possibility of severe overheating • Wash thoroughly after handling
and extensive engine/automatic coolant.
transaxle damage. • Keep engine coolant out of the
reach of children and pets.
7-31
83RM0-01E

(For Gasoline Engine Model) If the coolant level is below the “LOW” (For Diesel Engine Model)
mark, more coolant should be added.
M16A engine models Remove the reservoir tank cap and add
coolant until the reservoir tank level FULL
reaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill the
reservoir tank above the “FULL” mark.
NOTICE
When putting the cap on the reser-
voir tank, line up the mark on the cap
and the mark on the tank. Failure to
FULL follow this can result in coolant leak-
age. LOW
LOW
61MM459
61MM2A001
K10C and K14C engine models WARNING

It is hazardous to remove the reser-
voir tank cap (degassing tank cap) for
a diesel engine when the water tem-
perature is high, because scalding
fluid and steam may be blown out
under pressure. Wait until the coolant
temperature has lowered before
removing the cap.
FULL If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, more coolant should be added.
LOW When the engine is cool, remove the
degassing tank cap by turning it anticlock-
83RM031 wise slowly to release any pressure. And
add coolant until the degassing tank level
reaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill the
degassing tank above the “FULL” mark.
7-32
83RM0-01E

Coolant Replacement Air Cleaner

Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there
SUZUKI dealer for coolant replacement. will be greater intake resistance, resulting
in decreased power output and increased
fuel consumption.
(For M16A engine model)
(5)
(4)
(2)
61MM0B064
(3)
3) Unclamp the side clamps, and remove
the element from the air cleaner case. If
it appears to be dirty, replace it with a
(1) new one.
4) Clamp the side clamps or tighten the
bolts securely.
61MM0B063
1) Remove the air cleaner inlet hose (1).

2) Remove the bolts (2), loosen the bolt
(3) and lift the air cleaner case (4)
directly above.
NOTICE
When lifting the air cleaner, make sure
the air cleaner does not interfere the
engine oil dipstick (5) to avoid dam-
age the dipstick.
7-33
83RM0-01E

(For K10C engine model) (For K14C engine model)
68PM00705
83RM069 83RM032
3) Unclamp the side clamps and remove
1) Lift the engine cover directly above. 1) Lift the engine cover directly above.
new one.
4) Clamp the side clamps securely.
(2) 5) Put the engine cover back into place.
(1)
(1)
68PM00734
2) Remove the bolts (1) and lift the air

cleaner case (2) directly above.
7-34
83RM0-01E

(For D16AA engine model)

Spark Plugs
Replacing and inspection spark

plugs
For Gasoline Engine Model
(For K10C engine model)
Since special procedures, materials and
tools are required, it is recommended that
you trust this job to your authorized
SUZUKI dealer.
54P020702
2) Unclamp the side clamps and remove

new one.
3) Clamp the side clamps securely.
61MM0A126
4) Put the engine cover back into place.
Unclamp the side clamps and remove the
element from the air cleaner case. If it
appears to be dirty, replace it with a new
one.
Clamp the side clamps securely.
7-35
83RM0-01E

(For M16A and K14C engine models)

To access the spark plug: EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
1) Lift the air cleaner case up.
• For M16A engine, refer to “Air
Cleaner” in this section. Correct Wrong
(6)
(2) (1) (5)

(3)
83RM017 78K179
2) If necessary, disconnect the coupler (6)

while pushing the release lever. NOTICE
(4) 3) Remove the bolts.
4) Pull the ignition coils straight out. • When pulling the ignition coils out,
83RM033 do not pull on the cable. Pulling on
• For K14C engine, lift the engine NOTE: the cable can damage it.
cover directly above, loosen the bolt When installation, make sure the wires, • When servicing the iridium/plati-
(1) and pull the air cleaner outlet couplers, sealing rubber of air cleaner assy num spark plugs (slender center
hose (2) out, pull the air cleaner inlet and washers, are correctly returned in electrode type plugs), do not touch
hose (3) out, remove the bolts (4), place. the center electrode, as it is easy to
then lift the air cleaner case (5) up. damage.
7-36
83RM0-01E

Loosen
Gear Oil
NOTE:
TCSS models are equipped with the tran-
Tighten saxle that requires infrequent mainte-
nance. You will never have to add and/or
change the oil. However, you should check
for oil leaks periodically. If you find any
leaks, ask your SUZUKI dealer to have the
transaxle inspected.
Manual Transaxle Oil/Transfer Oil

60G160 54G106
(4WD)/Rear Differential Oil (4WD)
Spark plug gap “a” When adding gear oil, use gear oil with the
NOTICE appropriate viscosity and grade as shown
M16A engine models: in the chart below.
• When installing the spark plugs, K16HPR-U11
screw them in with your fingers to 1.0 – 1.1 mm (0.039 – 0.043 in.) We highly recommend you use:
avoid stripping the threads. “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” for manual tran-
K14C engine models:
Tighten the spark plugs with a saxle gear oil.
ILZKR7D8
torque wrench to 25 Nm (2.5 kg-m,
0.7 – 0.8 mm (0.027 – 0.031 in.)
18.4 lb-ft) for M16A engine models Manual transaxle oil
or 18 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13.5 lb-ft) for
K14C engine models. Do not allow NOTICE
contaminants to enter the engine When replacing spark plugs, you
through the spark plug holes when should use the brand and type speci- 75W
the plugs are removed. fied for your vehicle. For the speci- o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
• Never use spark plugs with the fied plugs, refer to the o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
wrong thread size. “SPECIFICATIONS” section at the
end of this book. If you wish to use a 54P120706
brand of spark plug other than the
specified plugs, consult your SUZUKI
dealer.
7-37
83RM0-01E

We highly recommend you use: Diesel engine, 6-speed manual transaxle

“SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-85” for transfer Gear Oil Level Check
oil (4WD) and rear differential oil (4WD).
5-speed manual transaxle
Transfer oil (4WD) EXAMPLE
Rear differential oil (4WD)
75W-85
o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
(1)
71LMT0701 (3)
83RM004
(3) Oil filler and level plug

52LM021
(1) Oil filler and level plug Transfer (4WD)
Gasoline engine, 6-speed manual transaxle

EXAMPLE
(4)
(2)
EXAMPLE
83RM002
54P120701 (4) Oil filler and level plug

(2) Oil filler and level plug
7-38
83RM0-01E

Rear differential (4WD) To check the gear oil level, use the fol-
lowing procedure: CAUTION
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with After driving the vehicle, the gear oil
the parking brake applied. Then, stop temperature may be high enough to
the engine. burn you. Wait until the oil filler and
2) Remove the oil filler and level plug. level plug is cool enough to touch
(5) with your bare hands before inspect-
For the manual transaxle;
3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the ing gear oil level.
oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If
gear oil does not flow from the plug NOTICE
hole, add oil through the filler plug hole
until oil flows a little from the plug hole. When tightening the plug, apply the
EXAMPLE following sealing compound or
For the transfer and rear differential; equivalent to the plug threads to pre-
83RM003 3) Check the inside of the hole with your vent oil leakage.
(5) Oil filler and level plug finger. If the oil level comes up to the
bottom of the plug hole, the oil level is SUZUKI Bond No. “1217G”
correct. If so, reinstall the plug.
4) If the oil level is low, add gear oil
through the oil filler and level plug hole Gear Oil Change
until the oil level reaches the bottom of Since special procedures, materials and
the filler hole, then reinstall the plug. tools are required, it is recommended that
Tightening torque for oil filler and level you trust this job to your authorized
plug SUZUKI dealer.
Manual transaxle (1) or (3):
21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)
Manual transaxle (2):
27 Nm (2.7 kg-m, 19.5 lb-ft)
Transfer (4) / Rear differential (5):
23 Nm (2.3 kg-m, 17.0 lb-ft)
7-39
83RM0-01E

TCSS Actuation Tank Fluid Clutch Pedal Fuel Filter (Diesel engine)
If the fuel filter warning light comes on
Level Check, Add or Change of fluid Fluid Control Clutch when driving, there is a possibility to have
water in the fuel filter. Drain water as soon
Since special procedures are required, it is as possible. Have your vehicle inspected
recommended that you trust this job to by an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
61MM0B067
Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-

tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.
If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully
depressed, have the clutch inspected by
your SUZUKI dealer. If the clutch fluid level
is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the “MAX”
line with SAE J1704 or DOT4 brake fluid.
7-40
83RM0-01E

Brakes WARNING WARNING

Failure to follow the guidelines below Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-
can result in personal injury or seri- lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-
Brake Fluid ous damage to the brake system. tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,
• If the brake fluid in the reservoir do not induce vomiting. Immediately
drops below a certain level, the contact a poison control center or a
brake warning light on the instru- physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,
ment panel will come on (the flush eyes with water and seek medi-
engine must be running with the cal attention. Wash thoroughly after
parking brake fully disengaged). handling. Solution can be poisonous
Should the light come on, immedi- to animals. Keep out of the reach of
ately ask your SUZUKI dealer to children and animals.
inspect the brake system.
• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in NOTE:
the brake system which should be With disc brakes, the fluid level can be
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer expected to gradually fall as the brake
immediately. pads wear.
• Do not use any fluid other than SAE
61MM0B067 J1704 or DOT4 brake fluid. Do not
use reclaimed fluid or fluid that has Brake Pedal
Check the brake fluid level by looking at
the reservoir in the engine compartment. been stored in old or open contain- Check if the brake pedal stops at the regu-
Check that the fluid level is between the ers. It is essential that foreign parti- lar height without “spongy” feeling when
“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluid cles and other liquids are kept out you depress it. If not, have the brake sys-
level is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the of the brake fluid reservoir. tem inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. If
“MAX” line with SAE J1704 or DOT4 brake you doubt the brake pedal for the regular
fluid. height, check it as follows:
CAUTION
Brake fluid can harm your eyes and
damage painted surfaces. Use cau-
tion when refilling the reservoir.
7-41
83RM0-01E

Parking Brake
EXAMPLE
54G108 60G104S
Pedal to floor carpet minimum dis-

tance “a”: 59 mm (2.3 in.) WARNING 54G109
If you experience any of the following Ratchet tooth specification “b”:

With the engine running, measure the dis- 4th – 9th
tance between the brake pedal and floor problems with your vehicle’s brake
system, have the vehicle inspected Lever pull force (1):
carpet when the pedal is depressed with 200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs)
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. The immediately by your SUZUKI dealer.
minimum distance required is as specified. • Poor braking performance
• Uneven braking (brakes not work- Check the parking brake for proper adjust-
Since your vehicle’s brake system is self- ment by counting the number of clicks
adjusting, there is no need for pedal ing uniformly on all wheels.)
• Excessive pedal travel made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly
adjustment. pull up on the parking brake lever to the
If the pedal to floor carpet distance as • Brake dragging
• Excessive noise point of full engagement. The parking
measured above is less than the minimum brake lever should stop between the speci-
distance required, have your vehicle fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. should be securely locked. If the parking
brake is not properly adjusted or the
NOTE: brakes drag after the lever has been fully
When measuring the distance between the released, have the parking brake inspected
brake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to and/or adjusted by your SUZUKI dealer.
include the floor mat or rubber on the floor
wall in your measurement.
7-42
83RM0-01E

Brake Discs Steering Tires

Brake location Minimum thickness
EXAMPLE
Front wheels 20.0 mm (0.8 in.)
Rear wheels 8.0 mm (0.3 in.)
If the measured thickness or inner diame-

ter of the most worn part exceeds the “c”
value indicated above, the parts should be
replaced with a new one. The measure-
ment involves disassembling each brake
and requires the use of a micrometer,
which must be done according to the
instructions described in the relevant ser- EXAMPLE
vice manual or available from the relevant 68LM708 80JS025
repair information site.
Steering wheel play “c”: The front and rear tire pressure specifica-
0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.) tions for your vehicle are listed on the Tire
Information Label. Both the front and rear
Check the play of the steering wheel by tires should have the specified tire pres-
gently turning it from left to right and measure.
suring the distance that it moves before Note that the value does not apply to the
you feel slight resistance. The play should compact spare tire, if equipped.
be between the specified values.
NOTE:
Check that the steering wheel turns easily The tire inflation pressure will change due
and smoothly without rattling by turning it to changes in atmospheric pressure, tem-
all the way to the right and to the left while perature or tire temperature when driving.
driving very slowly in an open area. If the To reduce the chance that the low tire
amount of free play is outside the specifi- pressure warning light (if equipped) will
cation or you find anything else to be come on due to normal changes in tem-
wrong, an inspection must be performed perature and atmospheric pressure, it is
by your SUZUKI dealer. important to check and adjust the tire pres-
sures when the tires are cold. Tires that
7-43
83RM0-01E

appear to be at the specified pressure

when checked after driving, when the tires Tire Inspection
EXAMPLE
are warm, could have pressure below the Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a
specification when the tires cool down. month by performing the following checks:
Also, tires that are inflated to the specified
pressure in a warm garage may have pres- 1) Measure the air pressure with a tire
sure below the specification when the vehi- gauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-
cle is driven outside in very cold sary. Remember to check the spare
temperature. If you adjust the tire pressure tire, too.
in a garage that is warmer than the outside
temperature, you should add 1 kPa to the WARNING
recommended cold tire inflation pressure • Air pressures should be checked
for every 0.8°C difference between garage when the tires are cold or you may
temperature and outside temperature. get inaccurate readings.
• Check the inflation pressure from 54G136
time to time while inflating the tire (1) Tread wear indicator
gradually, until the specified pres- (2) Indicator location mark
sure is obtained.
• Never underinflate or overinflate 2) Check that the depth of the tread
the tires. groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).
Underinflation can cause unusual To help you check this, the tires have
handling characteristics or can molded-in tread wear indicators in the
cause the rim to slip on the tire grooves. When the indicators appear
bead, resulting in an accident or on the tread surface, the remaining
damage to the tire or rim. depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Overinflation can cause the tire to or less and the tire should be replaced.
burst, resulting in personal injury. 3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and
Overinflation can also cause damage. Any tires with cracks or other
unusual handling characteristics damage should be replaced. If any tires
which may result in an accident. show abnormal wear, have them
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.
7-44
83RM0-01E

CAUTION NOTICE Tire Rotation

Hitting curbs and running over rocks Replacing the original tires with tires 4-tire rotation
can damage tires and affect wheel of a different size may result in false
alignment. Be sure to have tires and speedometer or odometer readings.
wheel alignment checked periodi- Check with your SUZUKI dealer
cally by your SUZUKI dealer. before purchasing replacement tires
that differ in size from the original
4) Check for loose wheel bolts. tires.
5) Check that there are no nails, stones or
other objects sticking into the tires.
NOTICE
WARNING For 4WD models, replacing a tire with
one of a different size, or using differ-
• Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires
ent brands among the four tires can
which are all the same type and
result in damage to the drive train.
size. This is important to ensure
proper steering and handling of the 54G114
vehicle. Never mix tires of different To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to
size or type on the four wheels of prolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-
your vehicle. The size and type of trated. Tires should be rotated every 10000
tires used should be only those km (6000 miles). After rotation, adjust front
approved by SUZUKI as standard and rear tire pressures to the specification
or optional equipment for your listed on your vehicle’s Tire Information
vehicle. Label.
• Replacing the wheels and tires
equipped on your vehicle with cer-
tain combinations of aftermarket
wheels and tires can significantly
change the steering and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Therefore, use only those wheel
and tire combinations approved by
SUZUKI as standard or optional
equipment for your vehicle.
7-45
83RM0-01E

Note that two or more compact spare tires

Compact Spare Tire (if equipped) should not be used on one vehicle simulta- Battery
neously.
WARNING WARNING
The compact spare tire and wheel are • Batteries produce flammable
intended for temporary emergency hydrogen gas. Keep flames and
use only. Continuous use of this sparks away from the battery or an
spare can result in tire failure and explosion may occur. Never smoke
loss of control. Always observe these when working in the vicinity of the
precautions when using this spare: battery.
• Your vehicle will handle differently • When checking or servicing the
with this temporary spare. battery, disconnect the negative
• Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) cable. Be careful not to cause a
speed. short circuit by allowing metal
• Replace this spare with a standard objects to contact the battery posts
54G115
tire and wheel as soon as possible. and the vehicle at the same time.
(1) Wear indicator • Use of this spare will reduce • To avoid harm to yourself or dam-
(2) Indicator location mark ground clearance. age to your vehicle or battery, fol-
• Recommended air pressure for this low the jump starting instructions
Your vehicle comes equipped with the spare is 420 kPa (60 psi). in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”
compact spare tire. The compact spare is • Do not use tire chains on the com- section of this manual if it is neces-
designed to save space in your storage pact spare. If you must use tire sary to jump start your vehicle.
area, and its lighter weight makes it easier chains, rearrange the wheels so • Diluted sulfuric acid spilled from
to install if a flat tire occurs. It is only standard tires and wheels are fitted battery can cause blindness or
intended for temporary emergency use, to the front axle. severe burns. Use proper eye pro-
until the conventional tire can be repaired • The compact spare tire has a much tection and gloves. Flush eyes or
or replaced. The inflation pressure of the shorter tread life than the conven- body with ample water and get
compact spare tire should be checked at tional tires on your vehicle. medical care immediately if suf-
least monthly. Use a quality pocket-type Replace the tire as soon as the fered. Keep batteries out of the
inflation pressure gauge and set at 420 tread wear indicator appears. reach of children.
kPa (60 psi). At the same time, check that • When replacing the compact spare
the tire is stored securely. If it is not, tighten tire, use a replacement tire with the
it. exact same size and construction.
7-46
83RM0-01E

Replacement of the battery

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (1)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
52KM160 51KM039
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery that To remove the battery:

requires infrequent maintenance. You will 1) Disconnect the negative cable (1).
never have to add water. You should, how- 2) Disconnect the positive cable (2).
ever, periodically check the battery, battery 3) Remove the bracket bolt (3) and
61MS2A006
terminals and battery hold-down bracket remove the bracket (4).
for corrosion. Remove corrosion using a NOTE: 4) Remove the battery.
stiff brush and ammonia mixed with water, (For Diesel Engine Model)
or baking soda mixed with water. After To approach the battery, loosen the bolts, To install the battery:
removing corrosion, rinse with clean water. push the locks and remove the suction 1) Install the battery in the reverse order of
pipe (1). removal.
If your vehicle is not going to be driven for
2) Tighten the bracket bolt and battery
a month or longer, disconnect the cable
cables securely.
from the negative terminal of the battery to
help prevent discharge.
NOTE:
When the battery is disconnected, some of
the vehicle’s function will be initialized and/
or deactivated.
These function are required to reset after
the battery is reconnected.
7-47
83RM0-01E

(Battery label) mation about disposing or recycling of the

WARNING used battery, consult your SUZUKI dealer.
Batteries contain toxic substances
including sulfuric acid and lead. They
could have potential negative conse-
quences for the environment and (5)
human health. Used battery must be
disposed or recycled according to
the local law and must not be dis-
carded with ordinary household
waste. Make sure not to tip over the
battery when you remove it from the
vehicle. Otherwise, sulfuric acid
could run out and you might get
Pb (6)
injury. 51KM042
(5) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol

(6) Chemical symbol of “Pb”
NOTICE
After stopping the engine, controller The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (5)
and system are operated for a while. located on the battery label indicates that
Therefore, before removing the bat- used battery should be collected sepa-
tery, wait for more than one minute rately from ordinary household trash.
after turning the ignition switch to The chemical symbol of “Pb” (6) indicates
“OFF” or changing the ignition mode the battery contains more than 0.004%
to “LOCK” (OFF). lead.
By ensuring the used battery is disposed

or recycled correctly, you will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health, which
could otherwise be caused by inappropri-
ate trash handling of the battery. The recy-
cling of materials will help to conserve
natural resources. For more detailed infor-
7-48
83RM0-01E

Fuses Fuses in the Engine Compartment
Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as

described below:
Main fuse (1)
The main fuse takes current directly from (6)
the battery. (2)
Primary fuses (3)

These fuses are between the main fuse (43) (44) (45)
and individual fuses, and are for electrical (4)

(7)
load groups.
(5)
Individual fuses 54P000707
These fuses are for individual electrical cir-
cuits.
61MM0B068 MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro- 50 A FL7*1, *2
vided in the fuse box. (1)
(8) (20) (31) (36) 60 A FL7*3
(32) (37)
(9) (21) (33) (38) 50 A FL6*1, *2
(10) (22) (34) (39) (2)
(11) (23)
(35) (40) 80 A FL6*3
(12)
(24)
(13)
(14)
(3) 100 A FL5
(15) (25)
(16) (26) (4) 80 A FL4
(27) (41)
(17) (28)
(29)
(5) 100 A FL3
(18) (42)
(19) (30) 60 A FL2*1, *2
(6)
100 A FL2*3
54P000706
100 A FL1*1, *2
(7)
63J095 120 A FL1*3
(8) 7.5 A Ignition-1 signal 2*3
7-49
83RM0-01E

Radiator fan 2*2, *3 The main fuse, primary fuses and some of the
(9) 30 A (31) 15 A Transaxle 4 (TCSS)*3
individual fuses are located in the engine
(10) 20 A Front fog light Transaxle 5 compartment. If the main fuse blows, no elec-
(32) 15 A trical component will function. If a primary fuse
(AT IDL/TCSS)
(11) 7.5 A Headlight 2 blows, no electrical component in the corre-
(33) 7.5 A Starting signal sponding load group will function. When
(12) 25 A Headlight 3
(34) 15 A Headlight (Left) replacing the main fuse, a primary fuse or an
(13) 25 A ESP® control module individual fuse, use a genuine SUZUKI
(35) 15 A Headlight high (Left) replacement.
(14) 25 A Headlight
10 A FI*2 To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-
(15) 30 A Back up (36) vided in the fuse box. The amperage of each
7.5 A FI 2*3 fuse is shown in the back of the fuse box
(16) 30 A DCDC 2 (AT IDL)*2 cover.
(37) 20 A INJ DRV*2, *3
(17) 40 A Ignition switch
(38) 15 A FI*3
(18) 40 A ESP® motor
(39) 15 A Headlight (Right)
(19) 30 A Starting motor
*3 (40) 15 A Headlight high (Right)
(20) 7.5 A Transaxle 3 (TCSS)
(41) 50 A Ignition switch 2*3
(21) 30 A Fuel heater*3
(42) 50 A Battery*3
(22) 30 A Radiator fan
(43) 40 A Sub heater*3
(23) 30 A Transaxle 2
(44) 40 A Sub heater 3*3
(24) 40 A T/M pump
(45) 40 A Sub heater 2*3
(25) 30 A DCDC
(26) 30 A FI main*2, *3 *1: M16A engine models
*2: K10C and K14C engine models
FI*1 *3: D16AA engine models
(27) 20 A
Fuel pump*2, *3
(28) 10 A Air compressor
(29) 15 A Transaxle 1 (GAS AT)
(30) 30 A Blower fan
7-50
83RM0-01E

Fuses under the Dash Board

EXAMPLE
OK
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)
(23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29)
(30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36)
BLOWN
60G111 68LM701
EXAMPLE
WARNING 61MM0B070 PRIMARY FUSE
If the main fuse or a primary fuse (1) 30 A Seat belt
blows, be sure to have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI (2) 20 A Power window timer
dealer. Always use a genuine SUZUKI (3) 15 A Steering lock
replacement. Never use a substitute
such as a wire even for a temporary (4) 20 A Rear defogger
repair, or extensive electrical damage
and a fire can result. (5) 20 A Sunroof
(6) 10 A DRL
NOTE:
Make sure that the fuse box always carries (7) 10 A Heated mirror
spare fuses. (1) (8) 7.5 A Starting signal
61MM0B071
(9) 15 A Accessory socket 2
NOTE: (10) 30 A Power window
To approach the fuses, remove the screws
(11) 10 A Hazard
and remove the cover (1).
7-51
83RM0-01E

(12) 7.5 A BCM (34) 10 A Meter

Headlight Aiming
(13) 15 A Ignition coil (35) 7.5 A Ignition-2 signal
(14) 10 A ABS control module (36) 20 A Seat heater recommend you take your vehicle to your
(15) 15 A Accessory socket SUZUKI dealer for headlight alignment.
(16) 10 A A-STOP controller

(17) 15 A Horn
(18) 10 A Stop light
(19) 10 A Air bag
(20) 10 A Back-up light
(21) 15 A Wiper / Washer OK BLOWN
(22) 30 A Front wiper
(23) 10 A Dome light
81A283
(24) 15 A 4WD
(25) 7.5 A RR fog lamp WARNING
(26) – Blank Always be sure to replace a blown
fuse with a fuse of the correct amper-
(27) 7.5 A Ignition-1 signal age. Never use a substitute such as
(28) 15 A Radio 2 aluminum foil or wire to replace a
blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and
(29) 10 A Accessory socket 3 the new one blows in a short period
(30) 15 A Radio of time, you may have a major electri-
cal problem. Have your vehicle
(31) 10 A Tail lamp inspected immediately by your
SUZUKI dealer.
(32) 20 A D/L
(33) 7.5 A Cruise control
7-52
83RM0-01E

1) Open the engine hood.

Bulb Replacement Headlights
Low beam
LED headlights
EXAMPLE
CAUTION
recommend you take your vehicle to your
• Light bulbs can be hot enough to SUZUKI dealer for bulb replacement.
burn your finger right after being
turned off. This is true especially Halogen headlights
for halogen headlight bulbs.
Replace the bulbs after they
become cool enough.
• The headlight bulbs are filled with
pressurized halogen gas. They can
burst and injure you if they are hit
or dropped. Handle them carefully.
• To avoid injury by sharp-edged 80JM071
parts of the body, wear gloves and
a long-sleeved shirt when replacing For the low beam;
light bulbs. (2) 2) Disconnect the coupler by pushing the
(1) lock release. Turn the bulb holder coun-
terclockwise and remove it.
NOTICE
The oils from your skin may cause a 83RM065
halogen bulb to overheat and burst (1) Low beam
when the lights are on. Grasp a new (2) High beam
bulb with a clean cloth.
NOTICE
Frequent replacement of a bulb indi-
cates the need for an inspection of
the electrical system. This should be
carried out by your SUZUKI dealer.
7-53
83RM0-01E

High beam
Side Turn Signal Light (if equipped)
(4)
(3)
(5)
83RM080
83RM079
3) Push the retaining spring (4) forward
For the high beam;
and unhook it. Then remove the bulb 64J195
2) Turn the bulb holder (3) counterclock-
(5). As the bulb is built-in type, the light assem-
wise and remove it.
bly must be replaced. Remove the light
assembly by sliding the light housing left-
ward with your finger.
7-54
83RM0-01E

Front Turn Signal Light (1) (2)

Front Position Light (2) (1) EXAMPLE
(Vehicle with the halogen headlights)

(2)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
83RM081 61MM0B078
1) Open the engine hood. To remove the (3) Removal

(1) bulb holder of the front turn signal light (4) Install
(1) or the front position light (2) from the
83RM066 light housing, turn the holder counter- 2) To remove the bulb of the front turn sig-
nal light (1) from the bulb holder, push
clockwise and pull it out.
in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise.
To install a new bulb, push it in and turn
it clockwise.
To remove and install the bulb of the
front position light (2), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
7-55
83RM0-01E

(Vehicle with the LED headlights)

Front Fog Light (if equipped)
(2) EXAMPLE
1) Start the engine. Turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of the replac-
ing fog light to replace the bulb easily.
Then turn off the engine.
(1)
83RM035
83RM068
3) Remove the clips (2) by prying it off with
To replace the bulb of the front turn signal
a flat blade screwdriver as shown in the
light (1), follow the procedure for the front
illustration.
turn signal light bulb replacement of the
vehicle with the halogen headlights. EXAMPLE (1)
83RM034
2) Remove the screws (1).
EXAMPLE
83RM036
4) Open the end of the cover inside the

fender.
7-56
83RM0-01E

1) To approach the daytime running light,

Daytime Running Light open the end of the cover inside the
EXAMPLE (if equipped) front fender. Refer to the procedure for
the bulb replacement of the “Front Fog
Models without front fog light Light” in this section.
EXAMPLE
80JM071
5) Disconnect the coupler by pushing the

lock release. Turn the bulb holder coun-
83RM083
75RM244
Models with front fog light
2) Disconnect the coupler by pushing the
lock release. Turn the bulb holder coun-
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s specification,
the daytime running light is located under
the front fog light, but the replace method
is same as the above.
83RM084
7-57
83RM0-01E

Rear Combination Light

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(3)
(1)
(4)
(3) / (4)
(5)
(6)
(2)
61MM0B083 61MM0B084
2) To remove the bulb holder of the rear (5) Removal

61MM0B082 turn signal light (3) or the bulb type tail/ (6) Install
1) Remove the bolts (1) and pull the light brake light (4) (if equipped) from the
light housing, turn the holder counter- 3) To remove the bulb of the rear turn sig-
housing (2) straight. nal light (3) or the bulb type tail/brake
clockwise and pull it out.
light (4) (if equipped) from bulb holder,
push in the bulb and turn it counter-
clockwise. To install a new bulb, push it
in and turn it clockwise.
7-58
83RM0-01E

2) Disconnect the coupler (3) by pushing

Reversing Light the lock release. Turn the bulb holder of
EXAMPLE
the reversing light (4) counterclockwise
and remove it.
EXAMPLE
(2)
(1)
(4)
61MM0B085 (5)
NOTE: (6)
When reinstalling the light housing, make 61MM0B088
sure the clips are properly attached. 1) Open the tailgate. Remove the clips (1)
61MM0B090
by prying it off with a flat blade screw-
driver as shown in the illustration. Then, (5) Removal
pull out the trim (2). (6) Install
3) To remove and install the bulb of the
reversing light (4), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
(4)
(3)
61MM0B089
7-59
83RM0-01E

License Plate Light High-mount Stop Light
(2)
(1)
61MM0B087 (1)
EXAMPLE
61MM0B086 license plate light (2), simply pull out or 80J100
1) Turn the cover (1) counterclockwise to push in the bulb. 1) Open the tailgate, and remove the nuts
remove it. (1) as shown in the illustration.
7-60
83RM0-01E

EXAMPLE
(3) (4) (3)
(5)
(6)
(2)
(7)
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
63J127 80JM076 61MM0B091
2) Close the tailgate. Remove the high- 3) Pushing the unguiform prongs (3) (6) Removal
mount stop light housing (2) from the inward and remove the bulb holder (4). (7) Install
tailgate.
high-mount stop light (5), simply pull out
or push in the bulb.
7-61
83RM0-01E

Front (with overhead console) Center (with sunroof)

Rear Fog Light
recommend you take your vehicle to your CLOSE
SUZUKI dealer for bulb replacement. T I LT

PUSH
OPEN
Interior Light
Remove the lens by using a flat blade
screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as
shown. To install it, simply push it back in.
Front (without overhead console)
61MM0A129 61MM0A130
Center (without sunroof) Luggage compartment (if equipped)
61MM0A207
60G115 61MM0B072
7-62
83RM0-01E

Glove Box Light (if equipped) Wiper Blades

SUZUKI dealer for bulb replacement. (1)
EXAMPLE
61MM0B096
2) Push the damper (1) leftward to remove

the grove box.
54G129
EXAMPLE
If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-
61MM0B095 aged, or make streaks when wiping,
1) Press inward on both side of the glove replace the wiper blades.
box to unclamp it. To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-
cedures below.
NOTICE
To avoid scratching or breaking the
(2) window, do not let the wiper arm
strike the window while replacing the
EXAMPLE wiper blade.
61MM0B097

glove box light (2), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
7-63
83RM0-01E

NOTE: 3) Pull the locked end of the wiper blade

Some wiper blades may be different from firmly to unlock the blade and slide the
the ones described here depending on blade out as shown.
vehicle specifications. If so, consult your (1)
SUZUKI dealer for proper replacement EXAMPLE
method.
For windshield wipers:

(3)
EXAMPLE (2)
EXAMPLE
61MM0A210 (3)
2) Open the lock (1), slide the wiper frame

and remove it from the arm (2) as
71LMT0708
shown.
(3) Retainer
EXAMPLE
4) If the new blade is provided without the
two metal retainers (3), move them
61MM0A208
from the old blade to the new one.
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-
dow.
NOTE:
When raising both of the front wiper arms,
pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first.
When returning the wiper arms, lower the
passenger’s side wiper arm first.
Otherwise, the wiper arms may interfere
with each other. 61MM0A211
7-64
83RM0-01E

EXAMPLE (3) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

(4)
(A)
(4)
(B)
(3)
(3)
61MM0B098 61MM0A212 61MM0A213
(A) Up (4) Locked end

(B) Down
5) Install the new blade in the reverse
NOTE:
order of removal, with the locked end
When you install the metal retainers (3),
(4) positioned toward the wiper arm.
make sure the direction of metal retainers
Make sure the blade is properly
as shown in the above illustrations.
retained by all the hooks. Lock the
blade end into place.
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making
sure that the lock lever is snapped
securely into the arm.
7-65
83RM0-01E

For rear wipers:

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
65D151 54G135
NOTE: (1) Retainer

Do not flex the wiper blade frame end more
than necessary. If you do, it can break off. 4) If the new blade is provided without the
two metal retainers, move them from
the old blade to the new one.
5) Install the new blade in the reverse
order of removal.
Make sure the blade is properly
retained by all the hooks.
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the
reverse order of removal.
80G146
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-

dow.
2) Remove the wiper frame from the arm
as shown.
3) Slide the blade out as shown.
7-66
83RM0-01E

Check that there is washer fluid in the tank

Windshield Washer Fluid by looking at the washer fluid level gauge Air Conditioning System
which is attached to the cap of the washer
fluid tank. If the fluid level is near empty, If you do not use the air conditioner for a
EXAMPLE refill it. Use a good quality windshield long period, such as during winter, it may
washer fluid, diluted with water as neces- not give the best performance when you
sary. start using it again. To help maintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air
WARNING conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
Do not use “anti-freeze” solution in month for one minute with the engine
the windshield washer reservoir. This idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
can severely impair visibility when and helps protect the internal components.
sprayed on the windshield, and also
damage your vehicle’s paint.
NOTICE
80JM078
Damage may result if the washer
motor is operated with no fluid in the
EXAMPLE washer tank.
66J116
7-67
83RM0-01E

Replacement of the Air Conditioner

Filter (if equipped)
SUZUKI dealer for the air conditioner filter
replacement.
1) To approach the air conditioner filter,

remove the glove box. Refer to the pro-
cedure for the bulb replacement of the
“Glove Box Light” in this section.
(1)
(2)
(3)
61MM0A131
2) Remove the cover (1) and pull out the

air conditioner filter (2).
NOTE:
When you install a new filter, make sure
the UP mark (3) faces upward.
7-68
83RM0-01E

MEMO
7-69
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 8-1
Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-1
Flat Tire Repair Kit (if equipped) ........................................ 8-5
Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-8
Towing .................................................................................. 8-9
If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 8-10
If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 8-11
If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 8-11
60G411
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire Changing Tool WARNING Jacking Instructions

After using the tire changing tools, be
sure to stow them securely or they
EXAMPLE can cause injury if an accident
occurs.
CAUTION
(1) The jack should be used only to
change wheels. It is important to read
(2) the jacking instructions in this sec-
tion before attempting to use the
(3)
jack.
75F062
61MM0B100
1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.
(1) Jack (if equipped) 2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift
(2) Wheel brace into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has an
(3) Jack handle automatic transaxle or TCSS, or shift
into “R” (Reverse) if your vehicle has a
The tire changing tools are stowed in the manual transaxle.
luggage compartment.
Refer to “Luggage Compartment” in the WARNING
“ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS”
section. (1) • Be sure to shift into “P” (Park) for
an automatic transaxle or TCSS
vehicle, or into “R” (Reverse) for a
80J048
manual transaxle vehicle when you
To remove the spare tire (if equipped), turn jack up the vehicle.
its bolt (1) counterclockwise and remove it. • Never jack up the vehicle with the
transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-
wise, unstable jack may cause an
accident.
8-1
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher if 7) Continue to raise the jack slowly and
your vehicle is near traffic. smoothly until the tire clears the
4) Block the front and rear of the wheel ground. Do not raise the vehicle more
diagonally opposite of the wheel being than necessary.
lifted.
5) Place the spare wheel near the wheel WARNING
being lifted as shown in the illustration
in case that the jack slips. • Use the jack only to change wheels
on level, hard ground.
• Never jack up the vehicle on an
inclined surface.
• Never raise the vehicle with the
jack in a location other than the
specified jacking point (shown in
63J100
the illustration) near the wheel to
be changed.
• Make sure that the jack is raised at
least 25 mm (1 inch) before it con-
tacts the flange. Use of the jack
when it is within 25 mm (1 inch) of
being fully collapsed may result in
failure of the jack.
54G253
• Never get under the vehicle when it
is supported by the jack.
• Never run the engine when the
vehicle is supported by the jack
and never allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
63J101
6) Position the jack at an angle as shown

in the illustration and raise the jack by
turning the jack handle clockwise until
the jack-head groove fits around the
jacking bar beneath the vehicle body.
8-2
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
Rear jacking point for garage jack (2)

To Raise the Vehicle with a Garage NOTICE
Jack EXAMPLE
Never apply a garage jack to the
• Apply the garage jack to one of the exhaust pipe, side under spoiler (if
points indicated below. equipped), engine undercover or rear
• Always support the raised vehicle with torsion beam.
jack stands (commercially available) at
the points indicated below.
NOTE:
Front jacking point for garage jack (1) For more details, please contact an autho-
EXAMPLE
(2) Changing Wheels
61MM0B043 To change a wheel, use the following pro-
Application point for jack stand (3) cedure:
or two-column lift 1) Remove the jack (if equipped), tools
and spare wheel from the vehicle.
EXAMPLE 2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel
bolts.
3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking
instructions in this section).
WARNING
• Be sure to shift into “P” (Park) in
automatic transaxle or TCSS, or
shift into “R” (Reverse) in manual
transaxle when you jack up the
(3) (3) vehicle.
• Never jack up the vehicle with the
61MM0B103 transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-
wise, unstable jack may cause an
(1) accident.
83RM037
8-3
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
4) Remove the wheel bolts and wheel.

Full Wheel Cover (if equipped)
EXAMPLE
(1)
81A057
(2) Tightening torque for wheel bolt

100 Nm (10.2 kg-m, 74.0 lb-ft) 60G309
(1) or (2) Flat end tool

(3) 7) Lower the jack and fully tighten the
bolts in a crisscross fashion with a Your vehicle includes two tools, a wheel
wrench as shown in the illustration. brace and a jack crank, one of which has a
flat end.
(4)
WARNING Use the tool with the flat end to remove the
61MM0A209 Use genuine wheel bolts and tighten full wheel cap, as shown above.
5) Before installing the new wheel, clean them to the specified torque as soon
as possible after changing wheels. EXAMPLE
any mud or dirt off from the surface of
the wheel (1), hub (2), thread part (3) Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly
and surface of the wheel bolts (4) with a tightened wheel bolts may come
clean cloth. Clean the hub carefully; it loose or fall off, which can result in
may be hot from driving. an accident. If you do not have a
6) Install the new wheel and replace the torque wrench, have the wheel bolt
wheel bolts with their cone shaped end torque checked by an authorized 54G117
facing the wheel. Tighten each bolt SUZUKI dealer. When installing the cover, make sure that it
snugly by hand until the wheel is is positioned so that it does not cover or
securely seated on the hub. foul the air valve.
8-4
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
IMPORTANT Flat tire repair kit contents

Flat Tire Repair Kit The Flat Tire Repair Kit cannot be used
(if equipped) in the following cases. Consult a (5)
SUZUKI Dealer or a Roadside Assis-
The flat tire repair kit is stowed in the lug- tance Service.
gage compartment. • Cuts or piercing in the tire tread
Refer to “Luggage Compartment” in the larger than approx. 4 mm. (3) (4)
“ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS” • Cuts in the tire side wall. (1) (2)
section. • Tire damage caused by driving with
considerably reduced tire pressure or
even with deflated tire.
WARNING • The tire bead completely unseated
Failure to follow the instructions in outside of the rim.
this section for using the flat tire • The rim damaged.
repair kit can result in an increased Small punctures in the tire tread,
risk of loss of control and an acci- caused by a nail or a screw, can be
dent. sealed with the Flat Tire Repair Kit.
Carefully read and follow the instruc- Do not remove nails or screws from the (3)
tions in this section. tire during an emergency repair. EXAMPLE
61MM0A090
(1) Air compressor

(2) Sealant bottle
(3) Speed restriction sticker
(with air compressor)
(4) Air hose
(5) Power plug
8-5
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
WARNING How to Perform an Emergency 10 min. Max.

Repair
Flat tire repair kit sealant is harmful if
swallowed, or it comes in contact 1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground. required
with skin or eyes. If swallowed, do Set the parking brake firmly and shift air pressure
not induce vomiting. Give plenty of into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has a CVT
(2)
water (if possible charcoal slurry) or TCSS, or shift into “R” (Reverse) if
and seek medical attention immedi- your vehicle has a manual transaxle.
ately. If sealant gets in eyes, flush Turn on the hazard warning flasher if
eyes with water and seek medical your vehicle is near traffic.
attention. Wash thoroughly after han- Block the front and rear of the wheel
dling. Solution can be poisonous to diagonally opposite of the wheel being
(1)
animals. Keep out of the reach of repaired. (3)
children and animals. 2) Take out the sealant bottle and the (4)
compressor. 61MM0A091
3) At the top of the compressor, remove (1) Tire valve
NOTICE the cap that covers the socket for the (2) Air hose
sealant bottle, then screw the bottle into (3) Compressor
Be sure to replace the sealant before the socket. (4) Power plug
expiry date indicated on the label of 4) Unscrew the valve cap from the tire
the sealant bottle. To purchase new valve.
sealant, see your SUZUKI dealer. NOTICE
5) Connect the air hose of the air com-
pressor to the tire valve. Do not operate the compressor for
6) Connect the power plug of the com- longer than 10 minutes. It can cause
pressor to the accessory socket. Start overheating of the compressor.
the engine. Switch on the compressor.
Inflate the tire to the required air pres- If the required air pressure cannot be
sure. reached within 5 minutes, move the vehi-
cle a few meters ahead and back to spread
the sealant over the entire tire. Then,
inflate the tire again.
If the required air pressure still cannot be
reached, the tire may be severely dam-
aged. In this case, the Flat Tire Repair Kit
cannot provide the necessary seal. Con-
8-6
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
sult a SUZUKI Dealer or a Roadside Assis- consult a SUZUKI Dealer or a Road-

tance Service. side Assistance Service. How to Use the Kit’s Compressor to
Inflate a Tire
NOTE: WARNING
If over inflated, deflate air by loosening the 1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.
screw of the filler hose. Be sure to check the tire pressure Set the parking brake firmly and shift
and confirm the completion of the into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has a CVT
7) Affix the speed restriction label from the emergency repair after 10 km (6 mile) or TCSS, or shift into “R” (Reverse) if
air compressor in the driver’s field of of running. your vehicle has a manual transaxle.
view. 2) Take out the compressor.
8) Make a short drive immediately after 3) Unscrew the valve cap from the tire
NOTICE valve.
inflating to the required air pressure.
Drive carefully with a maximum speed Have the tire renewed at the nearest 4) Connect the air hose of the compressor
of 80 km/h (50 mph). SUZUKI Dealer. When repair to reuse to the tire valve.
9) Carry on driving carefully to the nearest the sealed tire, consult a tire repair 5) Connect the power plug of the com-
SUZUKI Dealer or a tire repair shop. shop. pressor to the accessory socket. Start
The wheel can be reused after wiping the engine. Switch on the compressor.
WARNING sealant off completely with cloth in Inflate the tire to the required air pres-
order not to rust, but the tire valve sure.
Do not affix the speed restriction and tire pressure monitoring system
label to the air bag. Also do not affix (TPMS) sensor must be renewed. NOTICE
it to the warning light indicator or to Dispose of the sealant bottle at a
the speedometer. Do not operate the compressor for
SUZUKI dealer or in accordance with longer than 10 minutes. It can cause
your regional codes and practices. overheating of the compressor.
10)After 10 km (6 mile) running, check the After using the sealant bottle, replace
tire pressure with the pressure gauge of it with a new bottle from your SUZUKI
the compressor. If the air pressure is dealer.
indicated more than 220 kPa (2.2 bar),
the emergency repair is completed.
But, if the air pressure is indicated less
than the required air pressure, correct
the tire pressure to the required air
pressure. If the tire pressure has
dropped below 130 kPa (1.3 bar), the
Flat Tire Repair Kit cannot provide the
necessary seal. Do not drive on and
8-7
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
Jump Starting Instructions NOTICE

Your vehicle should not be started by (1)
pushing or towing. This starting 4
WARNING
method could result in permanent
• Never attempt to jump start your damage to the catalytic converter. 1
vehicle if the battery appears to be Use jump leads to start a vehicle with
frozen. Batteries in this condition a weak or flat battery.
may explode or rupture if jump
starting is attempted. (3) 3 2
• When making jump lead connec- When Jump Starting Your Vehicle,
tions, be certain that your hands Use the Following Procedure: (2)
and the jump leads remain clear EXAMPLE
from pulleys, belts, or fans. 1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump start
54MN259
• Batteries produce flammable your vehicle. Position the good 12-volt
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and battery close to your vehicle so that the 3) Make jump lead connections as follows:
sparks away from the battery or an jump leads will reach both batteries. 1. Connect one end of the first jump
explosion may occur. Never smoke When using a battery installed on lead to the positive (+) terminal of
when working in the vicinity of the another vehicle, DO NOT LET THE the flat battery (1).
battery. VEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parking 2. Connect the other end to the positive
• If the booster battery you use for brakes fully on both vehicles. (+) terminal of the booster battery
jump starting is installed in another 2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except (2).
vehicle, make sure the two vehicles those necessary for safety reasons (for 3. Connect one end of the second jump
are not touching each other. example, headlights or hazard lights). lead to the negative (–) terminal of
• If your battery discharges repeat- the booster battery (2).
edly, for no apparent reason, have 4. Make the final connection to an
your vehicle inspected by an unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.
authorized SUZUKI dealer. engine mount bracket (3)) of the
• To avoid harm to yourself or dam- engine of the vehicle with the flat
age to your vehicle or battery, fol- battery (1).
low the jump starting instructions
below precisely and in order.
If you are in doubt, call for qualified
road service.
8-8
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
WARNING Towing 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) Automatic

Transaxle
Never connect the jump lead directly If you need to have your vehicle towed,
to the negative (–) terminal of the dis- Automatic transaxle vehicles may be
contact a professional service. Your dealer towed using either of the following meth-
charged battery, or an explosion may can provide you with detailed towing
occur. ods.
instructions.
1) From the front, with the front wheels
WARNING lifted and the rear wheels on the
CAUTION ground. Before towing, make sure that
Connect the jump lead to the engine For vehicles equipped with the radar the parking brake is released.
mount bracket securely. If the jump brake support system, if your vehicle 2) From the rear, with the rear wheels
lead disconnects from the engine is towed with the engine on, press lifted and a dolly under the front wheels.
mount bracket because of vibration the “Radar Brake Support OFF”
at the start of the engine, the jump switch and turn off the radar brake NOTICE
lead could be caught in the drive support system. If not, unexpected
accidents related to the system being Towing the 2WD vehicle with the
belts. front wheels on the ground can result
turned on may occur.
in damage to the automatic transaxle.
4) If the booster battery you are using is
fitted to another vehicle, start the NOTICE
engine of the vehicle with the booster
battery. Run the engine at moderate Observe the following instructions
speed. when towing your vehicle.
5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the • To help avoid damage to your vehi-
flat battery. cle during towing, proper equip-
6) Remove the jump leads in the exact ment and towing procedures must
reverse order in which you connected be used.
them. • Using the frame hook, tow your
vehicle on paved roads for short
distances at low speed.
8-9
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
2-Wheel Drive (2WD) Manual Tran- 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) If the Starter Does Not Operate
saxle Your vehicle should be towed under one of
Manual transaxle vehicles may be towed the following conditions: 1) Try turning the ignition switch to the
using either of the following methods. “START” position or try pressing the
1) With all four wheels on a flat-bed truck. engine switch to change the ignition
1) From the front, with the front wheels 2) With the front or rear wheels lifted and a mode to “START” with the headlights
lifted and the rear wheels on the dolly under the other wheels. turned on to determine the battery con-
ground. Before towing, make sure that dition. If the headlights go excessively
the parking brake is released. NOTICE dim or go off, it usually means that
2) From the rear, with the rear wheels either the battery is flat or the battery
lifted and the front wheels on the Towing the 4WD automatic transaxle
vehicle with four wheels on the terminal contact is poor. Recharge the
ground, provided the steering and battery or correct battery terminal con-
drivetrain are in operational condition. ground can result in damage to the
automatic transaxle and/or the 4WD tact as necessary.
Before towing, make sure that transaxle 2) If the headlights remain bright, check
is in neutral, the steering wheel is system.
the fuses. If the reason for failure of the
unlocked (vehicle without keyless push starter is not obvious, there may be a
start system - the ignition key should be major electrical problem. Have the vehi-
in the “ACC” position) (vehicle with key- cle inspected by your authorized
less push start system - the ignition SUZUKI dealer.
mode is “ACC”), and the steering wheel
is secured with a clamping device
designed for towing service.
NOTICE
The steering column is not strong
enough to withstand shocks trans-
mitted from the front wheels during
towing. Always unlock the steering
wheel before towing.
8-10
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
NOTE:
If the Engine is Flooded If the engine refuses to start, the starter If the Engine Overheats
motor automatically stops after a certain
(Vehicle without Keyless Push Start period of time. After the starter motor has The engine could overheat temporarily
System) automatically stopped or there is anything under severe driving conditions. If the
If the engine is flooded with gasoline, it abnormal in the engine starting system, engine coolant temperature gauge indi-
may be hard to start. If this happens, press the starter motor runs only while the cates overheating during driving:
the accelerator pedal all the way to the engine switch is held pressed.
floor and hold it there while cranking the 1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.
2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and
engine.
• For gasoline engine model, do not oper- park.
ate the starter motor for more than 12 3) Let the engine run at the normal idle
speed for a few minutes until the indica-
seconds.
• For diesel engine model, do not operate tor is within the normal, acceptable tem-
perature range between “H” and “C”.
the starter motor for more than 30 sec-
onds.
WARNING
(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start Sys- If you see or hear escaping steam,
tem) stop the vehicle in a safe place and
If the engine is flooded with gasoline, it immediately turn off the engine to let
may be hard to start. If this happens, press it cool. Do not open the hood when
the accelerator pedal all the way to the steam is present. When the steam
floor and hold it there while cranking the can no longer be seen or heard, open
engine. the hood to see if the coolant is still
• For gasoline engine model, do not oper- boiling. If it is, you must wait until it
ate the starter motor for more than 12 stops boiling before you proceed.
seconds.
• For diesel engine model, do not operate
the starter motor for more than 30 sec-
onds.
8-11
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
If the temperature indication does not

come down to within the normal, accept-
able range:
1) Turn off the engine and check that the
water pump belt and pulleys are not
damaged or slipping. If any abnormality
is found, correct it.
2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.
If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”
line, look for leaks at the radiator, water
pump, and radiator and heater hoses. If
you locate any leaks that may have
caused the overheating, do not run the
engine until these problems have been 79J007
corrected.
3) If you do not find a leak, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir and then the WARNING
radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine • It is hazardous to remove the radia-
Coolant” in the “INSPECTION AND tor cap (or degassing tank cap for a
MAINTENANCE” section.) diesel engine) when the water tem-
perature is high, because scalding
NOTE: fluid and steam may be blown out
If your engine overheats and you are under pressure. The cap should
unsure what to do, contact your SUZUKI only be taken off when the coolant
dealer. temperature has lowered.
• To help prevent personal injury,
keep hands, tools and clothing
away from the engine cooling fan
and air-conditioner fan (if
equipped). These electric fans can
automatically turn on without warn-
ing.
8-12
83RM0-01E

EMERGENCY SERVICE
MEMO
8-13
83RM0-01E

APPEARANCE CARE
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1
Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 9-2
60G412 9
83RM0-01E

APPEARANCE CARE
4) High temperatures will cause an accel- Remove foreign material deposits

Corrosion Prevention erated rate of corrosion to parts of the Foreign material such as salts, chemicals,
vehicle which are not well ventilated to road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and
It is important to take good care of your permit quick drying. industrial fall-out may damage the finish of
vehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listed your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.
below are instructions for how to maintain This information illustrates the necessity of
Remove these types of deposits as quickly
your vehicle to prevent corrosion. Please keeping your vehicle (particularly the
as possible. If these deposits are difficult to
read and follow these instructions carefully. underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It
wash off, an additional cleaner may be
is equally important to repair any damage
required. Be sure that any cleaner you use
to the paint or protective coatings as soon
is not harmful to painted surfaces and is
Important Information About Corro- as possible.
specifically intended for your purposes.
sion Follow the manufacturer’s directions when
How to Help Prevent Corrosion using these special cleaners.
Common causes of corrosion
1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, mois- Repair finish damage
Wash your vehicle frequently
ture, or chemicals in hard-to-reach Carefully examine your vehicle for damage
The best way to preserve the finish on your
areas of the vehicle underbody or to the painted surfaces. Should you find
vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to
frame. any chips or scratches in the paint, touch
keep it clean with frequent washing.
2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to them up immediately to prevent corrosion
Wash your vehicle at least once during the
treated or painted metal surfaces from starting. If the chips or scratches have
winter and once immediately after the win-
resulting from minor accidents or abra- gone through to the bare metal, have a
ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the
sion by stones and gravel. qualified body shop make the repair.
underside, as clean and dry as possible.
If you frequently drive on salted roads,
Environmental conditions which accel- Keep passenger and luggage compart-
your vehicle should be washed at least
erate corrosion ments clean
once a month during the winter. If you live
1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate
near the ocean, your vehicle should be
air or industrial pollution will all acceler- under the floor mats and may cause corro-
washed at least once a month throughout
ate the corrosion of metal. sion. Occasionally, check under these
the year.
2) High humidity will increase the rate of mats to ensure that this area is clean and
corrosion particularly when the tem- For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehi- dry. More frequent checks are necessary if
perature range is just above the freez- cle Cleaning” section. the vehicle is used off road or in wet
ing point. weather.
3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertiliz-
for an extended period of time may pro- ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-
mote corrosion even though other body rosive by nature. These products should
sections may be completely dry. be transported in sealed containers. If a
9-1
83RM0-01E

APPEARANCE CARE
spill or leak does occur, clean and dry the

area immediately. Vehicle Cleaning Cleaning the Interior
Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti- Vinyl upholstery

lated area Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-
Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly gent mixed with warm water. Apply the
ventilated area. If you often wash your solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft
vehicle in the garage or if you frequently cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to
drive it in when wet, your garage may be loosen dirt.
damp. The high humidity in the garage Rub the surface with a clean, damp cloth
may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet to remove dirt and the soap solution. If
vehicle may corrode even in a heated some dirt still remains on the surface,
garage if the ventilation is poor. repeat this procedure.
WARNING Fabric upholstery

Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Do not apply additional undercoating Using a mild soap solution, rub stained
or rust preventive coating on or 76G044S areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove
around exhaust system components soap, rub the areas again with a cloth
such as the catalytic converter, dampened with water. Repeat this until the
exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could be WARNING stain is removed, or use a commercial fab-
started if the undercoating substance When cleaning the interior or exterior ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a
becomes overheated. of the vehicle, NEVER USE flammable fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-
solvents such as lacquer thinners, facturer’s instructions and precautions.
gasoline, benzene or cleaning materi-
als such as bleaches or strong
household detergents. The materials
could cause personal injury or dam-
age to the vehicle.
9-2
83RM0-01E

APPEARANCE CARE
Leather upholstery Seat belts

Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Clean seat belts with a mild soap and NOTICE
Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution, water. Do not use bleach or dye on the
wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth. belts. They may weaken the fabric in the Do not use chemical products that
To remove soap, wipe the areas again with belts. contain silicon to wipe electrical
a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the components such as the air condi-
areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this Vinyl floor mats tioning system, audio, navigation
until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl system, or other switches. These will
commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt with water or mild soap. Use a brush to cause damage to the components.
or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, help loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc- rinse the mat thoroughly with water and
tions and precautions. Do not use solvent dry it in the shade. Cleaning the Exterior
type cleaners or abrasive cleaners.
Carpets
NOTE: Remove dirt and soil as much as possible NOTICE
• In order to keep leather upholstery look- with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap
ing good, it should be cleaned at least It is important that your vehicle be
solution, rub stained areas with a clean kept clean and free from dirt. Failure
twice a year. damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas
• If leather upholstery becomes wet, to keep your vehicle clean may result
again with a cloth dampened with water. in fading of the paint or corrosion to
immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper Repeat this until the stain is removed, or
or a soft cloth. Water may cause leather various parts of the vehicle body.
use a commercial carpet cleaner for
to harden and shrink if it is not wiped off. tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,
• When parking on sunny days, select a carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc- Caring for Aluminum Wheels
shady place or use a sunshade. If tions and precautions. NOTE:
leather upholstery is exposed to direct • Do not use an acidic or alkaline deter-
sunlight for a long time, it may discolor Instrument panel and console gent to wash aluminum wheels. These
and shrink. Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. types of detergent will cause permanent
• As is common with natural materials, Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezed spots, discoloration and cracks on fin-
leather is inherently irregular in grain and damp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirt ished surfaces.
cowhide has spots in its natural state. is removed. • Do not use a bristle brush and soap con-
These do not affect the performance of taining an abrasive material. These will
the leather in any way. damage finished surfaces.
9-3
83RM0-01E

APPEARANCE CARE
Washing by hand 2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.

Washing Remove dirt and mud from the body
exterior with running water. You may
WARNING use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use
hard materials which can scratch the
• Never attempt to wash and wax paint or plastic. Remember that the
your vehicle with the engine run- headlight covers or lenses are made of
ning. plastic in many cases.
• When cleaning the underside of the
body and fender, where there may NOTICE
be sharp-edged parts, you should
wear gloves and a long-sleeved To avoid damage to the paint or plas-
shirt to protect your hands and tic surface, do not wipe the dirt off
arms from being cut. without ample water. Be sure to fol-
• After washing your vehicle, care- low above procedure.
fully test the brakes before driving 60B212S
to make sure they have maintained 3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild
their normal effectiveness. When washing the vehicle, park it where detergent or car wash soap using a
direct sunlight does not fall on it and follow sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or
the instructions below: cloth should be frequently soaked in the
CAUTION 1) Flush the underside of body and wheel soap solution.
housings with pressurized water to
If your vehicle is equipped with an remove mud and debris. Use plenty of
rain-sensing wiper system, place the water.
NOTICE
wiper control lever in the “OFF” posi- When using a commercial car wash
tion. If the lever is left in the “AUTO” NOTICE product, observe the cautions speci-
position, the wipers could unexpect- fied by the manufacturer. Never use
edly operate and cause an injury, and When washing the vehicle: strong household detergents or
could also be damaged. • Avoid directing steam or hot water soaps.
of more than 80°C (176°F) on plas-
tic parts.
• To avoid damaging engine compo- 4) Once the dirt has been completely
nents, do not use pressurized removed, rinse off the detergent with
water in the engine compartment. running water.
5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle body
with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it
to dry in the shade.
9-4
83RM0-01E

APPEARANCE CARE
6) Check carefully for damage to painted Washing by an automatic car wash

surfaces. If there is any damage, Waxing
“touch-up” the damage following the NOTICE
procedure below:
1. Clean all damaged spots and allow If you use an automatic car wash,
them to dry. make sure that your vehicle’s body
2. Stir the paint and “touch-up” the parts, such as spoilers, cannot be
damaged spots lightly using a small damaged. If you are in doubt, consult
brush. the car wash operator for advice.
3. Allow the paint to dry completely.
Washing by a high-pressure cleaner
NOTICE
If you use a high-pressure cleaner,
keep away the nozzle from your vehi-
cle sufficiently.
• Bringing the nozzle to your vehicle 60B211S
too close or pointing the nozzle to After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-
the opening of front grill or bumper ishing are recommended to further protect
etc. can cause damage and mal- and beautify the paint.
function of the vehicle body and
parts. • Only use waxes and polishes of good
• Pointing the nozzle to the weather- quality.
strip of door glasses, doors and the • When using waxes and polishes,
sunroof (if equipped) can allow observe the precautions specified by the
water to enter the cabin. manufacturers.
9-5
83RM0-01E

GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification .......................................................... 10-1
Fuel Consumption ............................................................... 10-2
84MM01001
10
83RM0-01E

GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification Engine Serial Number

EXAMPLE (for some vehicles)
Chassis Serial Number
EXAMPLE
68LM101
The chassis and/or engine serial numbers

are used to register the vehicle. They are 60G128
also used to assist your dealer when The engine serial number is stamped on
ordering or referring to special service the cylinder block as shown in the illustra-
63J104 information. Whenever you have occasion tion.
to consult your SUZUKI dealer, remember
to identify your vehicle with this number.
Should you find the number difficult to
read, you will also find it on the identifica-
tion plate.
EXAMPLE
79J019
10-1
83RM0-01E

GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuel Consumption
For Europe Euro VI

M/T: Manual transaxle 2WD: 2-wheel drive
A/T: Automatic transaxle 4WD: 4-wheel drive
TCSS: Twin Clutch System by Suzuki
K10C K14C D16AA

2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD
M/T 6.3/140 6.6/147
Urban (L/100km)/CO2 (g/km) A/T 6.5/144 6.7/150 - -
TCSS - - - - -
M/T 4.9/109 5.2/116
Extra-urban (L/100km)/CO2 (g/km) A/T 4.9/109 5.2/115 - -
TCSS - - - - -
M/T 5.4/120 5.6/127
Combined (L/100km)/CO2 (g/km) A/T 5.4/122 5.7/128 - -
TCSS - - - - -
NOTE:
As these data are obtained under certain specific conditions, actual fuel consumption of your vehicle will be different from these data.
10-2
83RM0-01E

GENERAL INFORMATION
MEMO
10-3
83RM0-01E

SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M/T: Manual transaxle Gasoline: Gasoline engine model 2WD: 2-wheel drive
A/T: Automatic transaxle Diesel: Diesel engine model 4WD: 4-wheel drive
TCSS: Twin Clutch System by Suzuki
ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mm (in.)

Overall length 4300 (169.3)
Overall width 1785 (70.3)
Overall height 1580 – 1585 (62.2 – 62.4)
Wheelbase 2600 (102.4)
Track Front 1535 (60.4)
Rear 1505 (59.3)
Ground clearance 180 (7.1)
11
11-1
83RM0-01E

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Mass (weight) UNIT: kg (lbs) M16A K10C K14C D16AA

engine models engine models engine models engine models
Curb mass (weight) 1085 – 1155 1090 – 1160 1150 – 1175 1240 – 1290
2WD
(2392 – 2546) (2403 – 2557) (2535 – 2590) (2734 – 2844)
M/T
1170 – 1220 1200 – 1225 1215 – 1240 1335 – 1360
4WD
(2579 – 2690) (2646 – 2701) (2679 – 2734) (2943 – 2998)
1130 – 1180 1160 – 1185 1170 – 1195
2WD –
(2491 – 2601) (2557 – 2612) (2579 – 2635)
A/T
1195 – 1245 1225 – 1250 1235 – 1260
4WD –
(2635 – 2745) (2701 – 2756) (2723 – 2778)
1355 – 1380
TCSS 4WD – – –
(2987 – 3042)
Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating 1720 (3792) 1730 (3814) 1730 (3814) 1860 (4101)
Permissible maximum Axle Weight Front 1040 (2293) 1040 (2293) 1040 (2293) 1040 (2293)
Rear 910 (2006) 910 (2006) 910 (2006) 910 (2006)
11-2
83RM0-01E

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Engine
Type M16A (DOHC) K10C K14C D16AA (DOHC)
Number of cylinders 4 3 4 
Bore 78.0 mm (3.07 in.) 73.0 mm (2.87 in.) 73.0 mm (2.87 in.) 79.5 mm (3.12 in.)
Stroke 83.0 mm (3.27 in.) 79.5 mm (3.13 in.) 82.0 mm (3.23 in.) 80.5 mm (3.16 in.)
Piston displacement 1586 cm3 998 cm3 1373 cm3 1598 cm3
(1586 cc, 96.8 cu.in) (998 cc, 60.9 cu.in) (1373 cc, 83.8 cu.in) (1598 cc, 97.5 cu.in)
Compression ratio 11.0 : 1 10.0 : 1 9.9 : 1 16.5 : 1
ITEM: Electrical
Standard spark plug M16A engine models DENSO K16HPR-U11
Gasoline K10C engine models NGK ILZKR7D8
K14C engine models NGK ILZKR7D8
Battery without ENG A-STOP system 12V 44Ah 350A(EN)
Gasoline
with ENG A-STOP system 12V 60Ah 540A(EN)
Diesel 12V 72Ah 630A(EN)
Fuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.
11-3
83RM0-01E

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Lights WATTAGE BULB No.

Headlight Halogen headlight Low beam 12V 55W H11
High beam 12V 55W H7
LED headlight LED –
Front fog light (if equipped) 12V 35W H8
12V 55W H11
Position light 12V 5W W5W
LED –
Daytime running light 12V 13W P13W
LED –
Turn signal light Front 12V 21W PY21W
Rear 12V 21W PY21W
Side turn signal light 12V 5W –
LED –
Tail/brake light 12V 21/5W P21/5W
LED –
High mount stop light 12V 5W W5W
Reversing light 12V 16W W16W
License plate light 12V 5W W5W
Rear fog light 12V 21W P21W
11-4
83RM0-01E

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Lights WATTAGE BULB No.

Interior light Glove box light (if equipped) 12V 1.4W –
Footwell light (if equipped) / LED –
Instrument panel pocket light (if equipped)
Center (without sunroof) 12V 10W –
Other lights 12V 5W W5W
Vanity mirror light (if equipped) 12V 3W –
11-5
83RM0-01E

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Wheels and Tires

Tire size, front and rear 215/60R16 95H*1, 215/55R17 94V*1
Rim size 215/60R16 tire: 16X6 1/2J
215/55R17 tire: 17X6 1/2J
Tire pressures For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label located on the
driver’s door lock pillar.
When loaded up to 4 people, Eco Tire Pressure as listed below is recom-
mended to achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible.1)
Front 280 kPa (2.80 kg/cm2, 41 psi)
Rear 260 kPa (2.60 kg/cm2, 38 psi)
Recommended snow chain (for Europe) Radial thickness: 10 mm, axial thickness: 10 mm
Recommended snow tire 215/60R16*2 or 215/55R17*2
NOTE:
1) If loading over 4 people, follow the specified tire pressure listed on the Tire Information Label.
*1 If you cannot prepare tires with the specified load index rate and speed symbol, prepare tires with higher load index rate and speed
symbol.
*2 If you prepare snow tires;
•Make sure they are tires of the same size, structure and load capacity as the originally installed tires.
•Mount the snow tires on all four wheels.
•Please understand that the maximum permissible speed of snow tires is generally less than the originally installed tires.
Consult your SUZUKI dealer or supplier for further information.
11-6
83RM0-01E

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Recommended Fuel/Lubricants and Capacities (approx.)

Fuel See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” section. 47 L (10.3 Imp gal)
Engine oil Classification: ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5
API SL, SM or SN 3.9 L (6.9 Imp pt)
M16A engine models
ILSAC GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5 (replacement with oil filter)
Viscosity: SAE 0W-20
Gasoline K10C engine models
K14C engine models
Classification: ACEA C2 5.65 L (9.9 Imp pt)
Diesel
Viscosity: SAE 0W-30 (replacement with oil filter)
Engine 5.8 L (10.2 Imp pt)
M/T
coolant M16A engine (including reservoir tank)
models 6.2 L (10.9 Imp pt)
A/T
(including reservoir tank)
5.4 L (9.5 Imp pt)
M/T
K10C engine (including reservoir tank)
Gasoline
A/T SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) Coolant
5.5 L (9.7 Imp pt)
M/T
K14C engine (including reservoir tank)
A/T
7.2 L (12.7 Imp pt)
Diesel
11-7
83RM0-01E

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Recommended Fuel/Lubricants and Capacities (approx.)

Manual transaxle oil M16A engine models 2.5 L (4.4 Imp pt)
K10C engine models 2.5 L (4.4 Imp pt)
“SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W”
K14C engine models 2.8 L (4.9 Imp pt)
D16AA engine models 2.1 L (3.7 Imp pt)
Automatic transaxle oil M16A engine models 5.8 L (10.2 Imp pt)
K10C and K14C “SUZUKI AT OIL AW-1”
6.2 L (10.9 Imp pt)
engine models
TCSS transaxle oil “SUZUKI TCSS GEAR OIL 0001” or “PETRONAS
TCSS 2.1 L (3.7 Imp pt)
TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE”
TCSS actuation tank “SUZUKI TCSS ACTUATOR FLUID 1001” or
TCSS 0.8 L (1.4 Imp pt)
fluid “PETRONAS TUTELA CS SPEED”
Transfer oil 4WD “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-85” 0.93 L (1.6 Imp pt)
Rear differential oil 4WD “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-85” 0.8 L (1.4 Imp pt)
Brake fluid / Clutch fluid Refill to the proper oil level
according to the instructions in
SAE J1704 or DOT4
the “INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE” section.
11-8
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
SUPPLEMENT
For Israel and Russia .......................................................... 12-1
For Russia ............................................................................ 12-1
12
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
For Israel and Russia For Russia Periodic Maintenance Schedule

(for Russia)
- For M16A engine model
Theft Deterrent Light Air Conditioning System
NOTE: “I” : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning or replace as necessary
refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around NOTE:
1993 for automotive applications. Other This table shows the service schedule up
refrigerants are available, including recy- to 180000 km (108000 miles). Beyond
cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used 180000 km (108000 miles), perform the
in your vehicle. same services at the same intervals shown
in the chart.
NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may
damage your air conditioning sys-
EXAMPLE tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or
61MM0A050 replace the R-134a with other refrig-
This light will blink with the ignition switch erants.
in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the
ignition mode “LOCK” (OFF) or “ACC”. The
blinking light is intended to deter theft by
leading others to believe that the vehicle is
equipped with a security system.
12-1
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
• For Item 2-1. “Nickel plugs”, replace every 50000 km if the local law requires.
first. months 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE
*1-2. Valve clearance – I – I – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs When unleaded fuel is used (Standard type) Nickel plug – – R – – R
FUEL
*3-3. Fuel tank – – I – – I
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
dard (Green).
12-2
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
first. months 84 96 108 120 132 144
ENGINE
*1-2. Valve clearance – I – I – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs When unleaded fuel is used (Standard type) Nickel plug – – R – – R
FUEL
*3-3. Fuel tank – – I – – I
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
dard (Green).
12-3
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

BRAKE
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – R – R
CHASSIS AND BODY
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” (I: 1st 15000 km only) I – R – – R
WARNING
12-4
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
BRAKE
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – R – R
CHASSIS AND BODY
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” (I: 1st 15000 km only) – – R – – R
NOTE:
4WD: 4-wheel drive
12-5
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions (for Russia)

- For M16A engine model
12-6
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

first. months 6 12 18 24 30 36
ENGINE
*1-2. Valve clearance – – – I – –
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs (Standard type) Nickel plug Replace every 10000 km (6000 miles) or 8 months.
FUEL
*3-2. Fuel lines – – – I – –
*3-3. Fuel tank – – – – – I
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – –
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system – – – – – –
dard (Green).
12-7
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

first. months 42 48 54 60 66 72
ENGINE
*1-2. Valve clearance – I – – – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs (Standard type) Nickel plug Replace every 10000 km (6000 miles) or 8 months.
FUEL
*3-2. Fuel lines – I – – – I
*3-3. Fuel tank – – – – – I
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
dard (Green).
12-8
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

BRAKE
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – – – R – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – – – R – –
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” – – – R – –
*6-9. Automatic transaxle Fluid leak check – – – I – –
*6-10. Transfer oil (4WD) – – – R – –
*6-11. Rear differential oil (4WD) – – – R – –
WARNING
12-9
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

BRAKE
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – – – R
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – R – – – R
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” – R – – – R
*6-9. Automatic transaxle Fluid leak check – I – – – I
*6-10. Transfer oil (4WD) – R – – – R
*6-11. Rear differential oil (4WD) – R – – – R
NOTE:
4WD: 4-wheel drive
NOTE:
12-10
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
Periodic Maintenance Schedule (for Russia) - For K14C engine model

NOTE:
This table shows the service schedule up to 120000 km (72000 miles). Beyond 120000 km (72000 miles), perform the same services at
the same intervals shown in the chart.
12-11
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

first. months 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, *Adjustment, *Replacement Inspect every 40000 km (24000 miles) or 48 months.
*1-4. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – – I – – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs When unleaded fuel is used Iridium plug – – – – – R
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road I I I R I I
*3-2. Fuel lines – – I – – I
*3-3. Fuel tank – – – I – –
*4-1. PCV valve Inspect every 90000 km (54000 miles) or 108 months.
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system Inspect every 90000 km (54000 miles) or 108 months.
dard (Green).
12-12
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

first. months 84 96 108 120 132 144
ENGINE
*1-4. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – – I – – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs When unleaded fuel is used Iridium plug – – – – – R
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road I R I I I R
*3-2. Fuel lines – – I – – I
*3-3. Fuel tank – I – – – I
dard (Green).
12-13
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

BRAKE
Brake drums and shoes (if equipped) Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*6-4. Wheel bearings Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*6-5. Drive axle boots/Propeller shafts (4WD) Inspect every 40000 km (24000 miles) or 36 months.
*6-6. Suspension system Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*6-7. Steering system Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” First time only: Inspect at 10000 km (6000 miles) or 12 months.
*6-9. Automatic transaxle Fluid leak check Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
6-12. All latches, hinges and locks – – I – – I
*6-13. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) First set maintenance: Inspect at 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Replace at 40000 km (25000 miles) or 36 months.
Second time and after: Repeat “First set maintenance” every 40000 km (25000 miles) or 36 months.
WARNING
12-14
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

BRAKE
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-4. Wheel bearings Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” First time only: Inspect at 10000 km (6000 miles) or 12 months.
6-12. All latches, hinges and locks – – I – – I
*6-13. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) First set maintenance: Inspect at 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
NOTE:
4WD: 4-wheel drive
12-15
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions (for Russia)

- For K14C engine model
12-16
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

first. months 6 12 18 24 30 36
ENGINE
*1-4. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – – – – – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs Iridium plug – – – – – R
FUEL
*3-2. Fuel lines – – – – – I
*3-3. Fuel tank Inspect every 40000 km (24000 miles) or 48 months.
dard (Green).
12-17
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

first. months 42 48 54 60 66 72
ENGINE
*1-4. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – – – – – I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs Iridium plug – – – – – R
FUEL
*3-2. Fuel lines – – – – – I
*3-3. Fuel tank Inspect every 40000 km (24000 miles) or 48 months.
dard (Green).
12-18
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

BRAKE
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months
*6-4. Wheel bearings – – I – – I
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*6-10. Transfer oil (4WD) Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*6-11. Rear differential oil (4WD) Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
6-12. All latches, hinges and locks – – – – – I
*6-13. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*2 First set maintenance: Inspect at 15000 km (9000 miles) or 12 months.
Inspect at 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
WARNING
12-19
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT

BRAKE
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-4. Wheel bearings – – I – – I
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*6-10. Transfer oil (4WD) Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*6-11. Rear differential oil (4WD) Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
6-12. All latches, hinges and locks – – – – – I
*6-13. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*2 First set maintenance: Inspect at 15000 km (9000 miles) or 12 months.
Inspect at 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
NOTE:
4WD: 4-wheel drive
NOTE:
12-20
83RM0-01E

SUPPLEMENT
MEMO
12-21
83RM0-01E

INDEX
INDEX Average Speed .....................................................................2-67

B
Symbols Battery...................................................................................7-46
“AIR BAG” Light ......................................................... 2-52, 2-90 Bluetooth® audio..................................................................5-73
“ENG A-STOP OFF” Light................................................... 2-97 Bluetooth® hands-free .........................................................5-65
“ENG A-STOP” Indicator Light........................................... 2-96 Brake Assist System................................................... 3-72, 3-96
“FAR/NEAR setting” switch................................................ 3-94 Brake Fluid............................................................................ 7-41
“Radar Brake Support OFF” Switch .................................. 3-96 Brake Pedal.................................................................. 3-12, 7-41
Numerics Brake System Warning Light ..............................................2-87
4WD Warning Light.............................................................. 2-94 Brakes ...................................................................................7-41
6-Speed Automatic Transaxle ............................................ 3-22 Braking..................................................................................3-71
A Brightness Control...............................................................2-65
Accelerator Pedal ................................................................ 3-12 Bulb Replacement................................................................7-53
Accessory Socket.................................................................. 5-8 C
Adaptive Cruise Control System Warning Light............... 2-98 Cargo Net hooks ..................................................................5-18
Adding Coolant .................................................................... 7-31 Catalytic Converter ................................................................ 4-1
Air Cleaner............................................................................ 7-33 Central Door Locking System............................................... 2-3
Air Conditioning System..................................................... 7-67 Changing Engine Oil and Filter...........................................7-27
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......................................... 3-72 Changing Wheels ................................................................... 8-3
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ................. 2-88 Charging Light...................................................................... 2-89
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ....................................... 3-74 Chassis Serial Number ........................................................ 10-1
Anti-theft feature.................................................................. 5-78 Child Restraint...................................................................... 2-42
Assist Grips.......................................................................... 5-11 Child Restraint System for Countries applied for
Audio system ....................................................................... 5-39 UN Regulation No.16............................................................2-42
Auto Dimming Rearview Mirror .......................................... 2-23 Child Restraint Systems......................................................2-39
Automatic Brake System .................................................... 3-96 Child-Proof Locks (rear door) ............................................... 2-5
Automatic Headlight Leveling System Warning Light ..... 2-92
13
Clock .....................................................................................2-67
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System Clutch Pedal ................................................................ 3-12, 7-40
(Climate Control).................................................................. 5-32 Coat Hooks ...........................................................................5-11
Automatic Lights Operation ............................................. 2-100 Compact Spare Tire .............................................................7-46
Average Fuel Consumption ................................................ 2-67 Coolant Level Check............................................................7-31
13-1
83RM0-01E

INDEX
Coolant Replacement .......................................................... 7-33 Engine Switch......................................................................... 3-5

Corrosion Prevention ............................................................ 9-1 ESP® OFF Indicator Light........................................... 2-89, 3-75
Cruise Control...................................................................... 3-57 ESP® OFF Switch ................................................................. 3-75
Cup Holder and Storage Area............................................. 5-13 ESP® Warning Light.................................................... 2-88, 3-75
D Exhaust Gas Warning ............................................................ 3-1
Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................... 3-1 F
Daytime Running Light ....................................................... 7-57 Flat Tire Repair Kit ................................................................. 8-5
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) System.......................... 2-103 Floor Mats .............................................................................5-17
Dead Lock System................................................................. 2-4 Fluid Control Clutch.............................................................7-40
Diesel Engine ......................................................................... 1-2 Folding Rear Seats...............................................................2-29
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®) .......................................... 3-19 Footrest.................................................................................5-16
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF®) Warning Light ................. 2-96 Footwell Lights....................................................................... 5-6
Door Locks ............................................................................. 2-2 For Israel and Russia........................................................... 12-1
Drive Belt .............................................................................. 7-23 For Russia.............................................................................12-1
Drive mode indicator ........................................................... 2-71 Forward Collision Warning .................................................3-94
Driving on Hills ...................................................................... 4-3 Four-mode 4WD System......................................................3-36
Driving on Slippery Roads.................................................... 4-4 Frame Hooks ........................................................................5-20
Driving Range ...................................................................... 2-67 Front Air Bags ...................................................................... 2-52
E Front Armrest with Console Box ........................................5-14
Electric Mirrors .................................................................... 2-23 Front Bottle Holder .............................................................. 5-14
Electric Power Steering Light............................................. 2-92 Front Cup Holders................................................................5-14
Electric Window Controls ................................................... 2-19 Front Fog Light.....................................................................7-56
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) .................................. 3-73 Front Fog Light Switch ...................................................... 2-103
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................................. 2-33 Front Passenger Air Bag Deactivation System................. 2-61
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) .......................................... 3-102 Front Position Light .............................................................7-55
ENG A-STOP System (Engine Auto Stop Start System) .. 3-42 Front Seat Back Pocket .......................................................5-15
Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-30 Front Seat Heater ................................................................. 2-26
Engine Hood........................................................................... 5-2 Front Seats ...........................................................................2-24
Engine Oil and Filter............................................................ 7-24 Front Turn Signal Light .......................................................7-55
Engine Oil Consumption....................................................... 3-2 Fuel Consumption................................................................10-2
Engine Serial Number ......................................................... 10-1 Fuel Filler Cap ........................................................................ 5-1
13-2
83RM0-01E

INDEX
Fuel Filter (Diesel engine) ................................................... 7-40 Highway Driving ..................................................................... 4-3
Fuel Filter Warning Light (For Diesel Engine Model) ....... 2-95 Hill Hold Control System .....................................................3-76
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-64 Horn..................................................................................... 2-111
Fuel Recommendation .......................................................... 1-1 How the ABS Works.............................................................3-73
Full Wheel Cover.................................................................... 8-4 I
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-49 If the Engine is Flooded.......................................................8-11
Fuses in the Engine Compartment .................................... 7-49 If the Engine Overheats .......................................................8-11
Fuses under the Dash Board.............................................. 7-51 If the Starter Does Not Operate...........................................8-10
G If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck .................................................... 4-5
Gasoline Engine..................................................................... 1-1 Ignition Key Reminder ........................................................... 2-2
Gasoline/Ethanol blends....................................................... 1-1 Ignition Switch........................................................................ 3-3
Gasoline/Methanol blends .................................................... 1-1 Illumination Indicator Light .................................................2-93
Gear Oil................................................................................. 7-37 Immobilizer System ............................................................... 2-1
Gear Oil Change................................................................... 7-39 Immobilizer/Keyless Push Start System Warning Light... 2-91
Gear Oil Level Check........................................................... 7-38 Improving Fuel Economy ...................................................... 4-2
Gear Position ....................................................................... 2-71 Information Display.............................................................. 2-66
Gearshift Indicator...................................................... 2-71, 3-33 Inside Rearview Mirror.........................................................2-22
Glove Box ............................................................................. 5-11 Installation of Child Restraint with Top Strap ...................2-48
Glove Box Light ............................................................ 5-6, 7-63 Installation of Radio Frequency Transmitters...................5-38
Glow Plug Indicator Light ................................................... 2-95 Installation with ISOFIX type Anchorages .........................2-46
H Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts .........................2-46
Halogen headlights.............................................................. 7-53 Instantaneous Fuel Consumption ......................................2-67
Handling the Radar Sensor................................................. 3-97 Instrument Cluster ...............................................................2-63
Hazard Warning Switch..................................................... 2-106 Instrument Panel Pocket .....................................................5-13
Head Restraints .......................................................... 2-26, 2-29 Interior Light .................................................................. 5-5, 7-62
Headlight Leveling Switch ................................................ 2-104 Interior Workable Area for Engine Starting,
Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview Ignition Mode Selection and
Mirrors Switch.................................................................... 2-111 “Remote Controller Outside” Warning ................................ 3-9
Heating and Air Conditioning System ............................... 5-23 J
Heating System.................................................................... 5-25 Jacking Instructions .............................................................. 8-1
High-mount Stop Light........................................................ 7-60 Jump Starting Instructions ................................................... 8-8
13-3
83RM0-01E

INDEX
K Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving

Keyless Entry System Transmitter ............................. 2-6, 2-13 Conditions (for Russia) - For K14C engine model ..........12-16
Keyless Push Start System .................................................. 3-6 Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving
Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller ........... 2-6, 2-7 Conditions (for Russia) - For M16A engine model............12-6
Keys ........................................................................................ 2-1 Maintenance Schedule .......................................................... 7-2
L Malfunction Indicator Light .................................................2-90
Lap-Shoulder Belt................................................................ 2-33 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ..................5-28
Lap-Shoulder Belt with Detachable Connector ................ 2-34 Manual mode ............................................................... 3-23, 3-30
LED Headlight Warning Light ............................................. 2-93 Manual Transaxle ................................................................. 3-20
LED headlights..................................................................... 7-53 Manual Transaxle Oil ........................................................... 7-37
License Plate Light .............................................................. 7-60 Master Warning Indicator Light .......................................... 2-98
Light Reminder Buzzer...................................................... 2-102 Mirrors...................................................................................2-22
Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-98 O
Lighting Operation............................................................... 2-99 Odometer ..............................................................................2-71
Listening to a CD ................................................................. 5-52 Oil Change Request Light ................................................... 2-94
Listening to an iPod® .......................................................... 5-62 Oil Level Check ....................................................................7-25
Listening to an MP3/WMA/AAC disc.................................. 5-55 Oil Life ...................................................................................2-67
Listening to files stored in a USB device .......................... 5-59 Oil Pressure Light ................................................................2-89
Listening to the radio .......................................................... 5-47 Open Door Warning Light ................................................... 2-91
Low Fuel Warning Light ...................................................... 2-92 Outside Rearview Mirrors....................................................2-23
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ............................. 2-85, 3-78 Outside Rearview Mirrors Folding Switch .........................2-24
Luggage Compartment ......................................................... 5-7 Overhead Console ...............................................................5-12
Luggage Compartment Board ............................................ 5-18 P
Luggage Compartment Cover ............................................ 5-18 Parking Brake .......................................................................7-42
Luggage Compartment Hooks ........................................... 5-17 Parking Brake Lever ............................................................3-10
Luggage Compartment Pocket........................................... 5-16 Parking Sensors...................................................................3-61
M Pedal......................................................................................3-11
Main Beam (high beam) Indicator Light ............................ 2-93 Periodic Maintenance Schedule (except for Russia)
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving - For D16AA engine model ..................................................7-13
Conditions (except for Russia).................................... 7-8, 7-18 Periodic Maintenance Schedule (except for Russia)
- For K10C engine and K14C engine model......................... 7-3
13-4
83RM0-01E

INDEX
Periodic Maintenance Schedule (for Russia) S

- For K14C engine model .................................................. 12-11 Seat Adjustment.......................................................... 2-24, 2-27
Periodic Maintenance Schedule (for Russia) Seat Belt Inspection.............................................................2-39
- For M16A engine model .................................................... 12-1 Seat Belt Pretensioner System ...........................................2-49
Pinching Prevention Function............................................ 2-21 Seat Belt Reminder .............................................................. 2-37
Power-Assisted Brakes....................................................... 3-71 Seat Belt Reminder Light ....................................................2-90
R Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ............................ 2-31
Radar Brake Support OFF Indicator Light......................... 2-97 Seat height adjustment lever ..............................................2-25
Radar Brake Support System ............................................. 3-86 Seat position adjustment lever ...........................................2-25
Radar Brake Support System Warning Light.................... 2-97 Seatback angle adjustment lever .............................. 2-25, 2-28
Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-38 Selection of Coolant ............................................................7-30
RDS (Radio Data System) ................................................... 5-49 Selection of Ignition Modes .................................................. 3-7
Rear Armrest with Cup Holders ......................................... 5-15 Selector Position..................................................................2-71
Rear Bottle Holder ............................................................... 5-14 Setting Mode......................................................................... 2-72
Rear Combination Light ...................................................... 7-58 Shopping Hook.....................................................................5-17
Rear Differential Oil ............................................................. 7-37 Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster ......................................2-38
Rear Fog Light ..................................................................... 7-62 Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags ..........................2-56
Rear Fog Light Indicator Light ........................................... 2-93 Side Door Locks..................................................................... 2-2
Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-27 Side Turn Signal Light .........................................................7-54
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch ................................ 2-109 Spark Plugs ..........................................................................7-35
Rearview Camera................................................................. 3-68 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................. 11-1
Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks.................................... 7-30 Specified Oil ......................................................................... 7-24
Refilling................................................................................. 7-26 Speed Limiter .......................................................................3-59
Remote audio controls........................................................ 5-76 Speedometer ........................................................................2-64
Replace the Oil Filter ........................................................... 7-28 Stability Control System......................................................3-74
Replacement of the Battery ................................................ 2-14 Starting the Engine
Replacing Tires and/or Wheels .......................................... 3-85 (Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System).........................3-14
Reversing Light.................................................................... 7-59 Starting the Engine
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors ...................................... 5-19 (Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) ...................3-12
Running-in.............................................................................. 4-1 Steering.................................................................................7-43
Sun Visor ................................................................................ 5-4
13-5
83RM0-01E

INDEX
Sunroof ................................................................................... 5-9 U

Supplemental Restraint System (air bags)........................ 2-51 Universal serial bus (USB) socket......................................5-15
T Using the Transaxle .............................................................3-20
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-64 V
Tailgate ................................................................................... 2-5 Vehicle Cleaning .................................................................... 9-2
TCSS Actuation Tank Fluid................................................. 7-40 Vehicle Identification ........................................................... 10-1
Temperature Gauge............................................................. 2-65 Vehicle Loading...................................................................... 6-1
Theft Deterrent Alarm System ............................................ 2-16 W
Theft Deterrent Light ........................................................... 12-1 Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................. 2-85
Thermometer........................................................................ 2-67 Warning and Indicator Messages ............2-74, 3-37, 3-67, 3-99
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Lock Lever .............................. 2-110 Warning Brake System ........................................................ 3-95
Tire Chains ............................................................................. 4-4 Washing .................................................................................. 9-4
Tire Changing Tool ................................................................ 8-1 Waxing .................................................................................... 9-5
Tire Inspection ..................................................................... 7-44 Windows ............................................................................... 2-19
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......................... 3-77 Windshield Washer ............................................................ 2-109
Tire Rotation......................................................................... 7-45 Windshield Washer Fluid ....................................................7-67
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-43 Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ...............................2-106
Towing .................................................................................... 8-9 Windshield Wipers .............................................................2-106
Traction Control System ..................................................... 3-74 Windshield Wipers with Rain Sensing Function.............2-107
Trailer hitch installation points ............................................ 6-5 Wiper Blades ........................................................................7-63
Trailer Towing ........................................................................ 6-1
Transaxle Warning Light..................................................... 2-91
Transfer Oil........................................................................... 7-37
Trip Meter ............................................................................. 2-71
Turn Signal Control Lever................................................. 2-104
Turn Signal Indicators......................................................... 2-93
Turn Signal Operation ....................................................... 2-105
Twin Clutch System by Suzuki (TCSS).............................. 3-26
13-6
83RM0-01E

83RM0-01E

83RM0-01E

83RM0-01E

83RM0-01E

83RM0-01E

83RM0-01E

Manufacturer: Panasonic Corporation
Model: CQ-JZ33F1AE or CQ-JZ33F0AE
83RM0-01E

̨͇͒͊͗͑͘͡͏ %XOJDULDQ +UYDWVNL &URDWLDQ ÎHVN\ &]HFK
̫͇͇͌͑͒͗͝͏ͦ ͎͇ ͕͙͉͙͙͉͌͘͘͡͏͌ ,]MDYDRVXNODGQRVWL 3URKO£ģHQ¯ RVKRGÝ
̶͕͗͏͎͉͕͋͏͙͌͒͏ 3URL]YRÓDÏL 9¿UREFHFL
D̳͕͋͌͒͏ ͈̳͕͋͌͒͏ D0RGHOL E0RGHOL D0RGHO\ E0RGHO\
͗ͅ͏͋͏͕͌͑͘͞ ͒͏͚͖͔͕͓͕͔͕͌͒͌͝͡͠
͇͋ ͙͇͉͘͘͡͏ ͙͔͌͜͏͌͑͘͞͏ͦ ͇͛͐͒ 3UDYQDRVREDRYODģWHQD]D 2SU£YQÝQ£ RVREDNWHU£ VP¯ Y\KRWRYLW
̶͕͚͙͗͋͑ ̶͇͔͙͕͇͔͊͗͛͌ ͑͗͏͑ VDVWDYOMDQMHWHKQLÏNRJOLVWD WHFKQLFN¿VRXERU
̻͚͔͑͝͏ͦ ̶͕͉͋͏͇͔͊͌ ͔͇ ͇͉͙͕͓͕͈͏͒ 3URL]YRGSDQWRJUDIVNDGL]DOLFD 9¿UREHN=YHG£N
̳͕͋͌͒ )XQNFLMDSRGL]DQMHPRWRUQLKYR]LOD )XQNFH=YHG£Q¯ PRWRURY¿FKYR]LGHO
̹͏͖ 0RGHO 0RGHO
̫͕͚͖͕͖͒͋͏͇͔͘͏͙͔ͦ͊ ̷͏͕͞͏ ̼͏͇͗͑͏ 7LS 7\S
͖͙͇͉͗͌͋ͦ͘͠ ͖͕͗͏͎͉͕͋͏͙͌͒͏͙͌͘ -DJ5\RLFKL+LUDNLNDRSUHGVWDYQLN 1¯ŀHSRGHSVDQ£ RVREDS5\RLFKL
͔͇͙͕͕͙͕ͦ͘͠ ͇͋͌͑͒͗͏͇͗͌͞ SURL]YRÓDÏDRYLPHL]MDYOMXMHPGDVWURM +LUDNLMDNR]£VWXSFHY¿UREFı W¯PWR
͕͖͏͇͔͕͙͕͘ ͖͕͕͚͋͒ ͓͇͔͌͜͏͔͕͞
RSLVDQXQDVWDYNXLVSXQMDYDVYH SURKODģXMHŀHQ¯ŀHXYHGHQ« ]Dě¯]HQ¯
͕͈͕͚͉͇͔͗͋͌ ͕͙͕͉͇͊͗ͦ ͔͇ ͉͘͏͑͞͏
͖͗͏͕͍͒͏͓͏ ͏͎͏͉͇͔͑͘͏ͦ ͔͇ UHOHYDQWQHRGUHGEH VSOĊXMHYģHFKQDQH]E\WQ£ XVWDQRYHQ¯
ವ ̫͏͙͗͌͑͏͉͇ ̵̬ ͕͙͔͕͔͕͘ ವ 'LUHNWLYH(=(=R ವ 6PÝUQLFH(6(6R
͓͇͟͏͔͏͙͌ VWURMHYLPD VWURM¯UHQVWY¯
̸͖͇͉͗͑͏ ͘ ͇͓͕͔͗͜͏͎͏͇͔͗͏ 8SXÉLYDQMHQDXVNODÓHQHQRUPH 2GND]\QDKDUPRQL]RYDQ« QRUP\
͙͇͔͇͙͋͗͘͏ 'UXJHQRUPHLOLVSHFLILNDFLMH 'DOģ¯ QRUP\QHERSDUDPHWU\
̫͚͗͊͏ ͙͇͔͇͙͋͗͘͏ ͏ ͖͌͘͝͏͛͏͇͑͝͏͏ 'DWXP 'DWXP
̫͇͙͇ 3RWSLV 3RGSLV
̶͕͖͋͏͘ ,PHLSUH]LPH -P«QR
̯͓͌
)XQNFLMD3UHGVMHGQLN )XQNFH3UH]LGHQW
̫͍͔͕͙͒͘͡ ̶͎͗͌͏͔͙͋͌
'DQVN'DQLVK 1HGHUODQGV'XWFK (HVWL (VWRQLDQ

2YHUHQVVWHPPHOVHVHUNO¨ULQJ &RQIRUPLWHLWVYHUNODULQJ 9DVWDYXVGHNODUDWVLRRQ
)DEULNDQWHU )DEULNDQWHQ 7RRWMDG
D0RGHOOHU E0RGHOOHU D0RGHOOHQ E0RGHOOHQ D0XGHOLG E0XGHOLG
3HUVRRQGLHZHWWHOLMNJHPDFKWLJGLV
-XULGLVNSHUVRQPHGEHP\QGLJHOVHWLO 7HKQLOLVHGRNXPHQWDWVLRRQL
RPKHWWHFKQLVFKHGRVVLHUVDPHQWH
DWVDPOHGHWWHNQLVNHGRVVLHU VWHOOHQ NRRVWDPLVH·LJXVHJDMXULLGLOLQHLVLN
3URGXNW6DNVHGRQNUDIW 3URGXFW6FKDDUNULN 7RRGHSDQWRJUDDIWXQJUDXG
)XQNWLRQ/ºIWDIPRWRUNºUHWºM )XQFWLH2SNULNNHQYDQDXWR )XQNWVLRRQPRRWRUV·LGXNLW·VWPLQH
0RGHO 0RGHO 0XGHO
7\SH 7\SH 7¾¾S
8QGHUWHJQHGH+U5\RLFKL+LUDNLGHU 2QGHUJHWHNHQGH0U5\RLFKL+LUDNL $OODNLUMXWDQX+U5\RLFKL+LUDNLNHV
UHSU¨VHQWHUHUIDEULNDQWHUQHHUNO¨UHU KLHUWRHGRRUGHIDEULNDQWHQ HVLQGDEWRRWMDWNLQQLWDEN¦HVROHYDJD
KHUPHGDWGHQKHUXQGHUEHVNUHYQH JHPDFKWLJGYHUNODDUWGDWGHXLWUXVWLQJ
HWDOOSRRONLUMHOGDWXGVHDGHYDVWDE
PDVNLQHHULRYHUHQVVWHPPHOVHPHG GLHKLHURQGHUVWDDWEHVFKUHYHQ
YROGRHWDDQDOOHUHOHYDQWH N·LNLGHOHDOOM¦UJQHYDWHGLUHNWLLYLGH
GHUHOHYDQWHEHVWHPPHOVHUL DVMDNRKDVWHOHV¦WHWHOH
YRRUZDDUGHQYDQ
ವ ()GLUHNWLY()RPPDVNLQHU ವ ( PDVLQDGLUHNWLLY(
ವ GH(*PDFKLQHULFKWOLMQ(&
+HQYLVQLQJHUWLOKDUPRQLVHUHGH 5HIHUHQWLHVQDDUGHJHKDUPRQLVHHUGH 9LLWHG¾KWOXVWDWXGVWDQGDUGLWHOH
VWDQGDUGHU QRUPHQ 0XXGVWDQGDUGLGY·LVSHWVLILNDWVLRRQLG
YULJHVWDQGDUGHUHOOHUVSHFLILNDWLRQHU $QGHUHQRUPHQRIVSHFLILFDWLHV .XXS¦HY
'DWR 'DWXP $OONLUL
8QGHUVNULIW +DQGWHNHQLQJ 1LPL
1DYQ 1DDP
$PHWLNRKWSUHVLGHQW
6WLOOLQJ'LUHNWºU )XQFWLH3UHVLGHQW
6XRPL)LQQLVK )UDQ©DLV)UHQFK 'HXWVFK*HUPDQ

9DDWLPXVWHQPXNDLVXXVLOPRLWXV '«FODUDWLRQGHFRQIRUPLW« .RQIRUPLW¦WVHUNO¦UXQJ
9DOPLVWDMDW )DEULFDQWV +HUVWHOOHU

D0DOOLW E0DOOLW D0RGªOHV E0RGªOHV D0RGHOOH E0RGHOOH
3HUVRQQHO«JDOHPHQWDXWRULV«H¢ 9HUDQWZRUWOLFKHUI¾UGLH
+HQNLO¸MRNDRQYDOWXXWHWWX =XVDPPHQVWHOOXQJGHUWHFKQLVFKHQ
NRNRDPDDQWHNQLQHQHULWHOP¦ FRPSLOHUOHGRVVLHUWHFKQLTXH
3URGXLW&ULF¢ SDUDOO«ORJUDPPH 8QWHUODJHQ
7XRWH6DNVLWXQNNL 3URGXNW6FKHUHQKHEHU
7RLPLQWD0RRWWRULDMRQHXYRQQRVWR )RQFWLRQ/HYHUXQY«KLFXOHPRWRULV«
)XQNWLRQ+HEHPRWRU)DKU]HXJ
0RGªOH
0DOOL 0RGHOO
7\SH 7\S
7\\SSL
-HVRXVVLJQ«05\RLFKL+LUDNL 'HU8QWHU]HLFKQHWH+HUU5\RLFKL
$OOHNLUMRLWWDQXWKHUUD5\RLFKL+LUDNL UHSU«VHQWDQWGHVIDEULFDQWVG«FODUH
YDOPLVWDMDQHGXVWDMDLOPRLWWDDW¦WHQ +LUDNL9HUWUHWHUGHV+HUVWHOOHUV
SDUOHVSU«VHQWHVTXHOHGLVSRVLWLIFL HUNO¦UWKLHUPLWGDVVGLHLP)ROJHQGHQ
HWW¦ DOODNXYDWWXNRQHW¦\WW¦¦ GHVVRXVU«SRQG¢ WRXWHVOHV EHVFKULHEHQH0DVFKLQHGLH
VHXUDDYLHQGLUHNWLLYLHQYDDWLPXNVHW GLVSRVLWLRQVFRUUHVSRQGDQWHVGH UHOHYDQWHQ9RUJDEHQGHU)ROJHQGHQ
ವ (<NRQHGLUHNWLLYL(< ವ /DGLUHFWLYHHXURS«HQQH&( 1RUPHQHUI¾OOW
.¦\WHW\W\KGHQPXNDLVWHWXWVWDQGDUGLW UHODWLYHDX[PDFKLQHV ವ (*0DVFKLQHQULFKWOLQLH(*
0XXWN¦\WHW\WVWDQGDUGLWMD 5«I«UHQFHV¢ GHVQRUPHV $QOHKQXQJDQKDUPRQLVLHUWH1RUPHQ
VSHVLILNDDWLRW KDUPRQLV«HV 6RQVWLJH1RUPHQRGHU
$LND $XWUHVQRUPHVRXVS«FLILFDWLRQV 6SH]LILNDWLRQHQ
$OOHNLUMRLWXV 'DWH 'DWXP
1LPL 6LJQDWXUH 8QWHUVFKULIW
1RP 1DPH
$VHPD3UHVLGHQWWL
)RQFWLRQ3U«VLGHQW 3RVLWLRQ'LUHNWRU
83RM0-01E

˃˨˨ˤ˪˦˧˙ *UHHN 0DJ\DU+XQJDULDQ ,WDOLDQR,WDOLDQ 6ORYHQVNR 6ORYHQH (VSD³RO6SDQLVK 6YHQVND6ZHGLVK
˂˛˨˶˰ˤ ˎ˦˰˱˹˱ˤ˱˞˯ 0HJIHOHOēV«JLQ\LODWNR]DW 'LFKLDUD]LRQHGL&RQIRUPLW¢ ,]MDYDRVNODGQRVWL 'HFODUDFLµQGHFRQIRUPLGDG .RQIRUPLWHWVI¸UNODULQJ
ˈ˞˱˞˰˧ˢ˲˞˰˱˛˯˚˯ *\£UWµN )DEEULFDQWHL 3URL]YDMDOHFL )DEULFDQWHV 7LOOYHUNDUH
˞ˊˬ˪˱˚˨ˬ˞ ˟ˊˬ˪˱˚˨ˬ˞ D0RGHOOHN E0RGHOOHN D0RGHOORL E0RGHOORL D0RGHORV E0RGHORV D0RGHOOHU E0RGHOOHU
D0RGHOL E0RGHOL
ˋˬ˩˦˧˹ ˭ˮ˹˰˶˭ˬ ˢ˫ˬ˲˰˦ˬˡˬ˱ˤ˩˚˪ˬ ˪˞ 3HUVRQDOHJDOPHQWHDXWRUL]DGDSDUD -XULGLVNSHUVRQVRP¦UEHK¸ULJDWWI\OOD
$PĳV]DNLI£MO¸VV]H£OO¯W£V£«UWIHOHOēV 3HUVRQDJLXULGLFDDXWRUL]]DWDD 3UDYQDRVHEDSRREODģÏHQD]D
˰˲˪˱˙˫ˢ˦ ˱ˬ ˱ˢ˴˪˦˧˹ ˞ˮ˴ˢ˜ˬ FRQVWLWXLUHOH[SHGLHQWHW«FQLFR LGHQWHNQLVNDILOHQ
MRJLV]HP«O\ FRPSLODUHLOIDVFLFRORWHFQLFR VHVWDYOMDQMHWHKQLÏQHGDWRWHNH 3URGXFWRJDWRHOHYDGRUGHWLMHUD
ˎˮˬ˷˹˪ ˁˮ˺˨ˬ˯ ˭˞˪˱ˬˠˮ˙˳ˬ˲ 7HUP«N3DQWRJUDSKHPHOē 3URGRWWR&ULFDSDQWRJUDIR 3URGXNW3DQWRJUDIGRPNUDIW
ˉˢ˦˱ˬ˲ˮˠ˜˞ ʿ˪˺˵˶˰ˤ ˩ˤ˴˞˪ˬ˧˜˪ˤ˱ˬ˲ ,]GHOHN3DQWRJUDIVNDGYLJDOND )XQFLµQHOHYDFLµQGHYHK¯FXORGH
)XQNFLµ 0RWRURVM£UPĳYHNHPHO«VH )XQ]LRQH6ROOHYDPHQWRGLYHLFRORD 1DPHQ'YLJRYDQMHPRWRUQHJDYR]LOD PRWRU )XQNWLRQ/\IWDPRWRUIRUGRQ
ˬ˴˛˩˞˱ˬ˯ 0RGHOO
0RGHOO PRWRUH 0RGHO 0RGHOR
ˊˬ˪˱˚˨ˬ
7¯SXV 0RGHOOR 7LSR 7\S
˃˜ˡˬ˯ 7LS
$OXO¯URWW0U5\RLFKL+LUDNLDJ\£UWµN 7LSR (ODEDMRILUPDQWH6U5\RLFKL+LUDNL 8QGHUWHFNQDGH5\RLFKL+LUDNLVRP
ˍ ˲˭ˬˠˮ˙˳˶˪˧5\RLFKL+LUDNL 6SRGDMSRGSLVDQLJ5\RLFKL+LUDNL
ˢ˧˭ˮˬ˰˶˭˻˪˱˞˯ ˱ˬ˲˯ ˧˞˱˞˰˧ˢ˲˞˰˱˚˯ N«SYLVHOHW«EHQH]HQQHONLMHOHQWHP ,OVRWWRVFULWWR5\RLFKL+LUDNLFKH HQUHSUHVHQWDFLµQGHORVIDEULFDQWHV I¸UHWU¦GHUWLOOYHUNDUQDI¸UNODUDU
NRWSUHGVWDYQLNSURL]YDMDOFDVWHP GHFODUDSRUODSUHVHQWHTXHOD K¦UPHGDWWPDVNLQHQVRPEHVNULYV
ˡˤ˨˻˪ˢ˦ ˡ˦˞ ˱ˬ˲ ˭˞ˮ˹˪˱ˬ˯ ˹˱˦ ˱˞ KRJ\D]DO£EEOH¯UWJ«SPHJIHOHOD] UDSSUHVHQWDLSURGXWWRULGLFKLDUDFRQ
DO£EELUHQGHOHWHNPLQGHQ ODSUHVHQWHFKHODPDFFKLQDGHVFULWWD L]MDYOMDGDVSRGDMRSLVDQDQDSUDYD P£TXLQDTXHVHGHVFULEHD QHGDQXSSI\OOHUDOODUHOHYDQWD
˩ˤ˴˞˪˛˩˞˱˞ ˭ˬ˲ ˭ˢˮ˦ˠˮ˙˳ˬ˪˱˞˦
N¸YHWHOP«Q\«QHN TXLVRWWRVRGGLVIDWXWWLLUHTXLVLWL L]SROQMXMHYVH]DKWHYDQHSUHGSLVH FRQWLQXDFLµQFXPSOHWRGDVODV EHVW¦PPHOVHUL
˧˞˱˶˱˚ˮ˶ ˭˨ˤˮˬ˺˪ ˹˨ˢ˯ ˱˦˯ ˰˴ˢ˱˦˧˚˯
ˡ˦˞˱˙˫ˢ˦˯ ˱ˤ˯ ವ $](XUµSDL.¸]¸VV«J(. SHUWLQHQWLGL ವ 'LUHNWLYR(6(6RVWURMLK GLVSRVLFLRQHVSHUWLQHQWHVGH ವ (*GLUHNWLYHW(*RP
ವ ˃˲ˮ˶˭˞˷˧˛˯ ˍˡˤˠ˜˞˯ ˃ˈ LU£Q\HOYHDJ«SHNUēO ವ 'LUHWWLYD&(&(UHODWLYDDOOH 6NOLFHYDQMHQDXVNODMHQHVWDQGDUGH ವ /D'LUHFWLYDHXURSHD&( PDVNLQHU
'UXJLVWDQGDUGLLQVSHFLILNDFLMH UHODWLYDDODVP£TXLQDV 5HIHUHQVHUWLOOKDUPRQLVHUDGH
˰˴ˢ˱˦˧˙ ˩ˢ ˱˞ ˩ˤ˴˞˪˛˩˞˱˞ +LYDWNR]£VRNKDUPRQL]£OW PDFFKLQH
'DWXP /DVUHIHUHQFLDVDODVQRUPDV
ʿ˪˞˳ˬˮ˚˯ ˰ˢ ˢ˪˞ˮ˩ˬ˪˦˰˩˚˪˞ ˭ˮ˹˱˲˭˞ V]DEY£Q\RNUD 1RUPHDUPRQL]]DWHGLULIHULPHQWR VWDQGDUGHU
DUPRQL]DGDV
ʶ˨˨˞ ˭ˮ˹˱˲˭˞ ˛ ˭ˮˬˡ˦˞ˠˮ˞˳˚˯ (J\«EV]DEY£Q\RNYDJ\VSHFLILN£FLµN $OWUHQRUPHRVSHFLILFKH 3RGSLV $QGUDVWDQGDUGHUHOOHUVSHFLILNDWLRQHU
2WUDVQRUPDVRHVSHFLILFDFLRQHV
˅˩ˢˮˬ˩ˤ˪˜˞ '£WXP 'DWD ,PH )HFKD 'DWXP
˒˭ˬˠˮ˞˳˛ $O£¯U£V )LUPD 3RORŀDM3UHGVHGQLN )LUPD 8QGHUVNULIW
ʻ˪ˬ˩˞ 1«Y 1RPH 1RPEUH 1DPQ
ˆ˚˰ˤ ˎˮ˹ˢˡˮˬ˯ %HRV]W£V(OQ¸N 3RVL]LRQH3UHVLGHQWH &DUJR3UHVLGHQWH 7LWHO9'
/DWYLHģX /DWYLDQ /LHWXYLģNDL /LWKXDQLDQ 3ROVNL 3ROLVK 7¾UN©H 7XUNLVK
$WELOVWíEDVGHNODUÃFLMD $WLWLNWLHVGHNODUDFLMD 'HNODUDFMD]JRGQRĝFL 8\JXQOXN%H\DQó
5DŀRWÃMVL *DPLQWRMDVDL 3URGXFHQWSURGXFHQFL UHWLFLOHU
D0RGHOLVþL E0RGHOLVþL D0RGHOLVLDL E0RGHOLVLDL D0RGHOH E0RGHOH D0RGHOOHU E0RGHOOHU
-XULGLVNÃ SHUVRQDNXUDLLUDWþDXWV 2VREDSUDZQDXSRZDľQLRQDGR 7HNQLNGRV\D\ó G¾]HQOHPH\H\HWNLOL
-XULGLQLVDVPXRñJDOLRWDVUXRģWL
VDJDWDYRWWHKQLVNRGDWQL VSRU]ÇG]HQLDGRNXPHQWDFML W¾]HONLġL
3URGXNWV 3DQWRJUÃIDGRPNUDWV WHFKQLQñ GRNXPHQWÇ WHFKQLF]QHM
*DPLQ\VWUDSHFLQLVGRPNUDWDV U¾Q.ULNR
)XQNFLMD 0HKÃQLVNRWUDQVSRUWOíG]HNþX 3URGXNWSRGQRĝQLNWUDSH]RZ\ òġOHY0RWRUOXDUD© NDOGóUPD
SDFHOģDQD )XQNFLMDPRWRULQLĵ WUDQVSRUWR )XQNFMDSRGQRV]HQLHSRMD]GµZ
SULHPRQLĵ NÙOLPDV 0RGHO
0RGHOLV PHFKDQLF]Q\FK
7LS
7LSV 0RGHOLV 0RGHO
UHWLFLOHULWHPVLOHGHQYHDġDáóGD
$SDNģÃ SDUDNVWíMLHV5LRLģL+LUDNL 7LSDV 7\S
5\RLFKL+LUDNLNDVSÃUVWÃYUDŀRWÃMXV 1LľHMSRGSLVDQ\UHSUH]HQWXMÇF\ LP]DVó EXOXQDQ%D\5\RLFKL+LUDNLLġ
ĿHPLDXSDVLUDģÛV35\RLFKL+LUDNL
DUģRGRNXPHQWXSD]LĈRNDVWXUSPÃN SURGXFHQWµZ5\RLFKL+LUDNL EXQXQOD\XNDUóGDWDQóPODQDQ
DWVWRYDXMDQWLVJDPLQWRMXVģLXR
DSUDNVWíWÃ LHNÃUWDDWELOVWYLVLHP QLQLHMV]\PRĝZLDGF]DľHRSLVDQH PDNLQHQLQ
SDUHLģNLDNDGŀHPLDXDSUDģ\WL ವ $7(&0DNLQHGLUHNWLILQLQ
SDUHG]ÕWDMLHPQRVDFíMXPLHP ñUHQJLQLDLDWLWLQNDYLVDVVXVLMXVLDVģLĵ SRQLľHMXU]ÇG]HQLHVSHĄQLDZV]\VWNLH
ವ (.'LUHNWíYD1U (.SDU VWRVRZQHZ\PRJL W¾PġDUWODUóQó NDUġóODGóáóQó EH\DQ
WHLVÙVDNWĵ QXRVWDWDV HGHU
PDģíQÃP ವ '\UHNW\Z\PDV]\QRZHM:(
DWVDXFHVX]VDVNDĈRWDMLHP ವ (%GLUHNW\YD(%GÙOPDģLQĵ 2GQLHVLHQLDGRQRUP 8\XPODQGóUóOPóġ VWDQGDUWODUDRODQ
VWDQGDUWLHP 1XRURGRVñ KDUPRQL]XRWXVVWDQGDUWXV ]KDUPRQL]RZDQ\FK UHIHUDQVODU
FLWLVWDQGDUWLYDLVSHFLILNÃFLMDV .LWLVWDQGDUWDLDUEDVSHFLILNDFLMRV ,QQHQRUP\OXEVSHF\ILNDFMH 'LáHUVWDQGDUWYH\DġDUWQDPHOHU
'DWXPV 'DWD 'DWD 7DULK
3DUDNVWV 3DUDģDV 3RGSLV òP]D
9ÃUGV 9DUGDVSDYDUGÙ ,PLÛ LQD]ZLVNR $Gó YH6R\DGó
$PDWV 3UH]LGHQWV 3DUHLJRVSUH]LGHQWDV 6WDQRZLVNR3UH]HV .RQXPX%DġNDQ
3RUWXJX¬V3RUWXJXHVH 5RP¤QÅ 5RPDQLDQ 6ORYHQVN\ 6ORYDN
&HUWLILFDGRGH&RQIRUPLGDGH 'HFODUDĥLHGHFRQIRUPLWDWH 9\KO£VHQLHR]KRGH
)DEULFDQWHV )DEULFDQW)DEULFDQĥL 9¿UREFD9¿UREFRYLD
D0RGHORV E0RGHORV D0RGHOH E0RGHOH D0RGHO0RGHO\ E0RGHO0RGHO\
3HVVRDOHJDOPHQWHDXWRUL]DGDD 3HUVRDQDMXULGLFÅDXWRUL]DWÅVÅ 3U£YQLFN£ RVREDRSU£YQHQ£
UHGDFWH]HGRVDUXOWHKQLF Y\SUDFRYDħ V¼ERUWHFKQLFNHM
UHGLJLUDILFKDW«FQLFD GRNXPHQW£FLH
3URGXWR0DFDFR3DQWRJU£ILFR 3URGXV&ULFPDQXDO
)XQFĥLH5LGLFDUHDYHKLFXOXOXL 9¿URERN3DQWRJUDILFN¿]GYLK£N
)XQ©¥RHOHYDUYH¯FXORVDPRWRU )XQNFLD=GY¯KDQLHPRWRURY«KR
0RGHOR PRWRUL]DW
YR]LGOD
7LSR 0RGHO 0RGHO
2UHSUHVHQWDQWHGRVIDEULFDQWHV6U 7LS 7\S
5\RLFKL+LUDNLFHUWLILFDSHODSUHVHQWH 6XEVHPQDWXOGO5\RLFKL+LUDNL 'ROXSRGS¯VDQ¿]£VWXSFDY¿UREFRY
UHSUH]HQWDQWDOIDEULFDQĥLORUGHFODU S£Q5\RLFKL+LUDNLW¿PWRSUHKODVXMH
TXHRHTXLSDPHQWRDTXLLGHQWLILFDGR
SULQSUH]HQWDIDSWXOFÅHFKLSDPHQWXO ŀHWRWRSRS¯VDQ« VWURMQ« ]DULDGHQLH
HVW£ FRQIRUPHHVDWLVID]WRGRVRV
WHKQLFGHVFULVPDLMRVUHVSHFWÅ VSüĊDYģHWN\SU¯VOXģQ« XVWDQRYHQLD
UHTXLVLWRVGHDFRUGRFRP
FHULQĥHOHHVHQĥLDOHGLQ ವ VPHUQLFHRVWURMRFKDVWURMQ¿FK
ವ $'LUHWLYD&(&(QR¤PELWR
ವ 'LUHFWLYD&(&(SULYLQG ]DULDGHQLDFKÏ(6
GRV(TXLSDPHQWRV0HF¤QLFRV HFKLSDPHQWHOHWHKQLFH 2GND]\QDKDUPRQL]RYDQ« QRUP\
5HIHU¬QFLDVGHQRUPDVDSOLF£YHLV 7ULPLWHULODVWDQGDUGHOHDUPRQL]DWH ÐDOģLHWHFKQLFN« QRUP\DOHER
2XWUDVQRUPDVRXHVSHFLILFD©·HV $OWHVWDQGDUGHVDXVSHFLILFDĥLL ģSHFLILN£FLH
'DWD 'DWD '£WXP
$VVLQDWXUD 6HPQÅWXUD 3RGSLV
1RPH 1XPH 0HQR
(QFDUJR2'LUHWRU*HUDO )XQFĥLD3UHġHGLQWH )XQNFLDSUH]LGHQW
83RM0-01E

Attention and warning
- The JACK may be used only for replacing tyres, not for any other purpose.
PANTOGRAPH JACK - Use the JACK no more than 50 times.
- No-loading person.
- Never get under vehicle raised by jack.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL - Use of defective or inadequately maintained jacks is extremely dangerous.
Meaning of pictogram on caution label

Orange background
Black This symbol indicates a potential hazard that could

result in death or serious injury.
White background
Black This symbol indicates you never get under the

vehicle when it is supported by the jack.
Red
Parts name of Pantograph Jack
A : TOPHOLDER
B : BASE
C : UPPER ARM
D : LOWER ARM
E : HANDLE JOINT
F : JACK SCREW
FIG 1
G : NOMINAL LOAD (t)
Technical Data and Application H1 : MINIMUM HEIGHT (mm)
Y H2 : MAXIMUM HEIGHT (mm)
Manufacturers: G
H3 : PERFORMANCE
ASSURANCE HEIGHT (mm)
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. X : JACK HEIGHT (mm)
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japan Y : LOAD (t)
Tel: 049-248-1661 M : MODEL
Fax:049-284-4340 T : TYPE
X
H1 H3 H2
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA M T G H1 H2 H3
Tel: 0519-327-5284 55L Suzuki Type-Ϩ 0.95 89 327 208
Fax:0519-327-0811 72K Suzuki Type-ϩ 0.95 70 281 175.5
54L Suzuki Type-Ϫ 0.95 80 318 199
81A Suzuki Type-ϫ 1.0 85.5 344 214.75
Please read this INSTRUCTION MANUAL before operation! 77K Suzuki Type-Ϭ 1.25 100.8 436.3 268.55
Norm: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 FIG 2
83RM0-01E

No-Using Conditions
- When temperature under -40ć.
- On miring or sand ground.
- On big gradient road.
- In extreme nature condition: rainstorm, typhoon, cyclone, snowstorm,thunder-storm, etc.
- Loading dangerous heavy, for instance: melted metal, acidity substance, radioactivity
substance or specially crisp goods.
- Contact with hood directly.
- Using on boat.
- The ground with difference in level.
Operation instructions
㻶㻭㻯㻷㻵㻺㻳㻌
Whenever a wheel is changed, always remove any corrosion 㻼㻻㻵㻺㼀㻌
that may be present on inside of wheel and wheel mounting
surface on vehicle.
Details:
Please operate according to the “operation instructions”.
Operate the jack on the level ground while checking the jack
and the load.
Mustn’t operate under raising load, unless the load is fastened
surely.
- Park the car on the flat, level ground and apply the brake
㻶㻭㻯㻷㻵㻺㻳㻌㻼㻻㻵㻺㼀㻌㻶㻭㻯㻷㻌㻴㻭㻺㻰㻸㻱㻌
firmly.
- Set transmission in “reverse”(automatic transmission in
“park”).
- Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
- Remove jacking tools and spare tire from stowage area.
- Block front and rear of wheel diagonally opposite wheel
being removed before operating jack. 㻶㻭㻯㻷㻌㻴㻭㻺㻰㻸㻱㻌㻮㻭㻾㻌
- Loosen, but do not remove wheel nuts by turning wrench counter clockwise.
- Raise jack until jack-head groove fits boss of frame see illustrations.
- Operate jack with slow, smooth motion, using jack handle.
- Raise vehicle so an inflated tire will just clear surface, remove nuts and wheel.
- Install wheel, then slightly tighten each nut, wheel must be seated on hub.
- Lower vehicle, and fully tighten wheel nuts in across-cross sequence by turning wrench
clockwise.
Maintenance
- Please prevent the JACK SCREW from accretion of dirt.
- Check the nameplate, keep the shape same as original.
- No-rejigger the jack’s construction privately.
- After any use, consult immediately your Suzuki Dealer or Service Partner for inspection
and maintenance of the jack.
- If the label (sticker) is damaged, please consult your Suzuki Dealer or Service Partner.
83RM0-01E

Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ (Bulgarian)
ɇɚɢɦɟɧɨɜɚɧɢɹ ɧɚ ɱɚɫɬɢɬɟ ɧɚ ɩɚɧɬɨɝɪɚɮɟɧ ɤɪɢɤ
ɉȺɇɌɈȽɊȺɎȿɇ ɄɊɂɄ ȼɢɠ FIG. 1. ɧɚ ɫɬɪɚɧɢɰɚɬɚ ɧɚ ɚɧɝɥɢɣɫɤɢ ɟɡɢɤ
Ɍɟɯɧɢɱɟɫɤɢ ɯɚɪɚɤɬɟɪɢɫɬɢɤɢ ɢ ɩɪɢɥɨɠɟɧɢɟ
ɊɔɄɈȼɈȾɋɌȼɈ ɁȺ ȿɄɋɉɅɈȺɌȺɐɂə ȼɢɠ FIG. 2. ɧɚ ɫɬɪɚɧɢɰɚɬɚ ɧɚ ɚɧɝɥɢɣɫɤɢ ɟɡɢɤ.
A : ȽɈɊȿɇ ȾɔɊɀȺɑ F : ȼɂɇɌ ɇȺ ɄɊɂɄȺ X : ȼɂɋɈɑɂɇȺ ɇȺ ɄɊɂɄȺ (ɦɦ)
B : ɈɋɇɈȼȺ G : ɇɈɆɂɇȺɅȿɇ ɉɈȾȿɆȿɇ ɄȺɉȺɐɂɌȿɌ (ɬ) Y : ɉɈȾȿɆȿɇ ɄȺɉȺɐɂɌȿɌ (ɬ)
C : ȽɈɊɇɈ ɊȺɆɈ H1 : ɆɂɇɂɆȺɅɇȺ ȼɂɋɈɑɂɇȺ (ɦɦ) M : ɆɈȾȿɅ
D : ȾɈɅɇɈ ɊȺɆɈ H2 : ɆȺɄɋɂɆȺɅɇȺ ȼɂɋɈɑɂɇȺ (ɦɦ) T : Ɍɂɉ
E : ɊɔɄɈɏȼȺɌɄȺ H3 : ɊȺȻɈɌɇȺ ȼɂɋɈɑɂɇȺ ɇȺ ɄɊɂɄȺ (ɦɦ)
ɍɫɥɨɜɢɹ, ɜ ɤɨɢɬɨ ɧɟ ɬɪɹɛɜɚ ɞɚ ɫɟ ɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚ

- ɉɪɢ ɬɟɦɩɟɪɚɬɭɪɢ ɩɨɞ -40°C.
- ȼɜɴɪɯɭ ɧɟɭɫɬɨɣɱɢɜ ɢɥɢ ɩɟɫɴɱɥɢɜ ɬɟɪɟɧ.
ɉɪɨɢɡɜɨɞɢɬɟɥ: - ȼɜɴɪɯɭ ɧɚɤɥɨɧɟɧ ɩɴɬ.
- ȼ ɟɤɫɬɪɟɦɧɢ ɩɪɢɪɨɞɧɢ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɹ: ɩɨɪɨɟɧ ɞɴɠɞ, ɬɚɣɮɭɧɢ, ɰɢɤɥɨɧɢ, ɫɢɥɟɧ ɫɧɟɝɨɜɚɥɟɠ,ɝɪɴɦɨɬɟɜɢɱɧɚ
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. ɛɭɪɹ ɢ ɞɪ.
- Ɉɩɚɫɟɧ ɬɨɜɚɪ, ɧɚɩɪɢɦɟɪ: ɫɬɨɩɟɧ ɦɟɬɚɥ, ɪɚɡɹɠɞɚɳɢ ɤɢɫɟɥɢɧɧɢ ɢɥɢ ɪɚɞɢɨɚɤɬɢɜɧɢ ɜɟɳɟɫɬɜɚ ɢɥɢ
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 əɩɨɧɢɹ ɨɫɨɛɟɧɨ ɤɪɟɯɤɢ ɬɨɜɚɪɢ.
Ɍɟɥ: 049-248-1661 - ȼ ɩɪɹɤ ɤɨɧɬɚɤɬɫ ɤɭɩɟɬɨ.
Ɏɚɤɫ:049-284-4340 - ɂɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟ ɧɚ ɥɨɞɤɚ.
- ȼɴɪɯɭ ɧɚɤɥɨɧɟɧ ɬɟɪɟɧ ɫ ɪɚɡɥɢɤɚ ɜ ɧɢɜɚɬɚ.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. ɂɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɢ ɡɚ ɪɚɛɨɬɚ

ɌɈɑɄȺ ɁȺ
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu ɄɂɌȺɃ ɉɪɢ ɫɦɹɧɚ ɧɚ ɤɨɥɟɥɨ ɜɢɧɚɝɢ ɨɬɫɬɪɚɧɹɜɚɣɬɟ ɫɥɟɞɢɬɟ ɨɬ ɤɨɪɨɡɢɹ,
ɉɈȼȾɂȽȺɇȿ
ɧɚɬɪɭɩɚɥɢ ɫɟ ɨɬ ɜɴɬɪɟɲɧɚɬɚ ɫɬɪɚɧɚ ɧɚ ɞɠɚɧɬɚɬɚ ɢ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɧɚɬɚ ɋ ɄɊɂɄ
Ɍɟɥ: 0519-327-5284 ɩɨɜɴɪɯɧɨɫɬ ɧɚ ɝɥɚɜɢɧɚɬɚ ɧɚ ɤɨɥɟɥɨɬɨ.
Ɏɚɤɫ:0519-327-0811 ɂɧɮɨɪɦɚɰɢɹ:
Ɇɨɥɹ, ɪɚɛɨɬɟɬɟ ɜ ɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɢɟ ɫ "ɂɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɢ ɡɚ ɟɤɫɩɥɨɚɬɚɰɢɹ".
ɉɨɫɬɚɜɟɬɟ ɤɪɢɤɚ ɜɴɪɯɭ ɪɚɜɧɚ ɩɨɜɴɪɯɧɨɫɬ ɢ ɫɥɟɞɟɬɟ ɤɚɤɬɨ ɤɪɢɤɚ,
ɬɚɤɚ ɢ ɬɨɜɚɪɚ.
Ɇɨɥɹ, ɩɪɨɱɟɬɟɬɟ ɬɨɜɚ ɊɔɄɈȼɈȾɋɌȼɈ ɁȺ ȿɄɋɉɅɈȺɌȺɐɂə ɩɪɟɞɢ ɪɚɛɨɬɚ! ɇɟ ɪɚɛɨɬɟɬɟ ɩɨɞ ɩɨɜɞɢɝɚɧɢɹ ɬɨɜɚɪ, ɨɫɜɟɧ ɚɤɨ ɬɨɜɚɪɴɬ ɧɟ ɟ ɭɫɬɨɣɱɢɜɨ
ɡɚɤɪɟɩɟɧ.
- ɉɚɪɤɢɪɚɣɬɟ ɚɜɬɨɦɨɛɢɥɚ ɧɚ ɪɚɜɧɚ, ɯɨɪɢɡɨɧɬɚɥɧɚ ɩɨɜɴɪɯɧɨɫɬ ɢ
ɋɬɚɧɞɚɪɬ: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 ɢɡɬɟɝɥɟɬɟ ɞɨɤɪɚɣ ɪɴɱɧɚɬɚ ɫɩɢɪɚɱɤɚ.
- ȼɤɥɸɱɟɬɟ ɧɚ „ɡɚɞɧɚ“ ɩɪɟɞɚɜɤɚ (ɩɪɢ ɚɜɬɨɦɚɬɢɱɧɢ ɬɪɚɧɫɦɢɫɢɢ,
ɩɨɫɬɚɜɟɬɟ ɜ ɩɨɥɨɠɟɧɢɟ „Park“). ɊɔɄɈɏȼȺɌɄȺ ɇȺ
- ȼɤɥɸɱɟɬɟ ɩɪɟɞɭɩɪɟɞɢɬɟɥɧɢɬɟ ɫɢɝɧɚɥɧɢ ɫɜɟɬɥɢɧɢ. ɌɈɑɄȺ ɁȺ ɉɈȼȾɂȽȺɇȿ
ɋ ɄɊɂɄ
ɄɊɂɄȺ
Ɉɛɨɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɹ ɡɚ ɩɨɜɢɲɟɧɨ ɜɧɢɦɚɧɢɟ ɢ ɩɪɟɞɭɩɪɟɠɞɟɧɢɹ - ɂɡɜɚɞɟɬɟ ɤɪɢɤɚ ɢ ɩɪɢɧɚɞɥɟɠɧɨɫɬɢɬɟ ɦɭ ɢ ɪɟɡɟɪɜɧɚɬɚ ɝɭɦɚ

ɨɬɦɹɫɬɨɬɨ ɡɚ ɫɴɯɪɚɧɟɧɢɟ.
- ɄɊɂɄɔɌ ɦɨɠɟ ɞɚ ɫɟ ɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚ ɫɚɦɨ ɡɚ ɫɦɹɧɚ ɧɚ ɝɭɦɢ, ɚ ɧɟ ɡɚ ɞɪɭɝɢ ɰɟɥɢ.
- ɉɪɟɞɢ ɞɚ ɪɚɛɨɬɢɬɟ ɫ ɤɪɢɤɚ, ɛɥɨɤɢɪɚɣɬɟ ɩɪɟɞɧɨɬɨ ɢ ɡɚɞɧɨ ɤɨɥɟɥo
- ɂɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɣɬɟ ɄɊɂɄȺ ɧɟ ɩɨɜɟɱɟ ɨɬ 50 ɩɴɬɢ. ɩɨ ɞɢɚɝɨɧɚɥ ɢ ɨɬ ɩɪɨɬɢɜɨɩɨɥɨɠɧɚɬɚ ɫɬɪɚɧɚ ɧɚ ɤɨɥɟɥɨɬɨ, ɤɨɟɬɨ ɳɟ
- ɇɟ ɩɨɜɞɢɝɚɣɬɟ ɚɜɬɨɦɨɛɢɥ, ɜ ɤɨɣɬɨ ɫɟ ɧɚɦɢɪɚɬ ɯɨɪɚ. ɫɜɚɥɹɬɟ.
- ɇɢɤɨɝɚ ɧɟ ɜɥɢɡɚɣɬɟ ɩɨɞ ɚɜɬɨɦɨɛɢɥ, ɩɨɜɞɢɝɧɚɬ ɧɚ ɤɪɢɤ. - Ɋɚɡɯɥɚɛɟɬɟ, ɛɟɡ ɞɚ ɪɚɡɜɢɜɚɬɟ ɞɨɤɪɚɣ, ɤɨɥɟɫɧɢɬɟ ɝɚɣɤɢ ɫɴɫ
ɡɚɜɴɪɬɚɧɟ ɧɚ ɤɥɸɱɚ ɨɛɪɚɬɧɨ ɧɚ ɱɚɫɨɜɧɢɤɚ.
- ɂɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨ ɧɚ ɩɨɜɪɟɞɟɧɢ ɢɥɢ ɧɟɩɪɚɜɢɥɧɨ ɩɨɞɞɴɪɠɚɧɢ ɤɪɢɤɨɜɟ ɟ ɢɡɤɥɸɱɢɬɟɥɧɨ ɨɩɚɫɧɨ. ɊɔɄɈɏȼȺɌɄȺ ɇȺ ɄɊɂɄȺ
- ɉɨɜɞɢɝɧɟɬɟ ɤɪɢɤɚ, ɞɨɤɚɬɨ ɤɚɧɚɥɚ ɜɴɪɯɭ ɝɥɚɜɚɬɚ ɧɚ ɤɪɢɤɚ ɨɛɯɜɚɧɟ
ɢɡɩɴɤɧɚɥɚɬɚ ɱɚɫɬ ɧɚ ɪɚɦɚɬɚ – ɜɢɠ ɢɥɸɫɬɪɚɰɢɹɬɚ.
Ɂɧɚɱɟɧɢɟ ɧɚ ɩɢɤɬɨɝɪɚɦɢɬɟ ɧɚ ɩɪɟɞɭɩɪɟɞɢɬɟɥɧɢɬɟ ɟɬɢɤɟɬɢ - Ɋɚɛɨɬɟɬɟ ɫ ɤɪɢɤɚ ɫ ɛɚɜɧɢ, ɩɥɚɜɧɢ ɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɹ, ɤɚɬɨ ɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɬɟ ɪɴɤɨɯɜɚɬɤɚɬɚ.
- ɉɨɜɞɢɝɧɟɬɟ ɚɜɬɨɦɨɛɢɥɚ, ɬɚɤɚ ɱɟ ɧɚɞɭɬɚɬɚ ɝɭɦɚ ɟɞɜɚ ɞɚ ɫɟ ɨɬɥɟɩɢ ɨɬ ɩɨɜɴɪɯɧɨɫɬɬɚ, ɫɥɟɞ ɤɨɟɬɨ
Ɉɪɚɧɠɟɜ ɮɨɧ ɪɚɡɜɢɣɬɟ ɝɚɣɤɢɬɟ ɢ ɫɜɚɥɟɬɟ ɤɨɥɟɥɨɬɨ.
- ɉɨɫɬɚɜɟɬɟ ɤɨɥɟɥɨɬɨ ɢ ɥɟɤɨ ɡɚɜɢɣɬɟ ɜɫɹɤɚ ɨɬ ɝɚɣɤɢɬɟ, ɤɨɥɟɥɨɬɨ ɬɪɹɛɜɚ ɞɨɛɪɟ ɞɚ ɥɟɝɧɟ ɜɴɪɯɭ
ɑɟɪɧɨ ɝɥɚɜɢɧɚɬɚ.
Ɍɨɡɢ ɫɢɦɜɨɥ ɨɡɧɚɱɚɜɚ ɩɨɬɟɧɰɢɚɥɧɚ ɨɩɚɫɧɨɫɬ, ɤɨɹɬɨ ɦɨɠɟ
- ɋɩɭɫɧɟɬɟ ɚɜɬɨɦɨɛɢɥɚ ɢ ɡɚɬɟɝɧɟɬɟ ɞɨɤɪɚɣ ɤɨɥɟɫɧɢɬɟ ɝɚɣɤɢ ɜ ɩɨɫɥɟɞɨɜɚɬɟɥɧɨɫɬ ɧɚ ɤɪɴɫɬ, ɤɚɬɨ
ɞɚ ɞɨɜɟɞɟ ɞɨ ɫɦɴɪɬ ɢɥɢ ɫɟɪɢɨɡɧɨ ɧɚɪɚɧɹɜɚɧɟ. ɜɴɪɬɢɬɟ ɤɥɸɱɚ ɩɨ ɱɚɫɨɜɧɢɤɚ.
ɉɨɞɞɪɴɠɤɚ
- ɇɟ ɞɨɩɭɫɤɚɣɬɟ ɧɚɬɪɭɩɜɚɧɟ ɧɚ ɡɚɦɴɪɫɹɜɚɧɢɹ ɜɴɪɯɭ ȼɂɇɌȺ ɇȺ ɄɊɂɄȺ .
- ɉɪɨɜɟɪɟɬɟ ɞɚɧɧɢɬɟ ɜɴɪɯɭ ɬɚɛɟɥɤɚɬɚ ɫ ɬɟɯɧɢɱɟɫɤɢ ɯɚɪɚɤɬɟɪɢɫɬɢɤɢ, ɩɨɞɞɴɪɠɚɣɬɟ ɤɪɢɤɚ ɜ ɢɡɩɪɚɜɧɨ
Ȼɹɥ ɮɨɧ ɫɴɫɬɨɹɧɢɟ.
- ɇɟ ɩɪɟɞɩɪɢɟɦɚɣɬɟ ɨɩɢɬɢ ɫɚɦɢ ɞɚ ɩɪɟɩɪɚɜɹɬɟ ɤɨɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɹɬɚ ɧɚ ɤɪɢɤɚ.
ɑɟɪɧɨ Ɍɨɡɢ ɫɢɦɜɨɥ ɩɨɤɚɡɜɚ, ɱɟ ɧɢɤɨɝɚ ɧɟ ɬɪɹɛɜɚ ɞɚ ɜɥɢɡɚɬɟ ɩɨɞ - ɋɥɟɞ ɜɫɹɤɨ ɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟ ɧɟɡɚɛɚɜɧɨ ɫɟ ɫɜɴɪɠɟɬɟ ɫ ȼɚɲɢɹ Suzuki ɞɢɥɴɪ ɢɥɢ ɫɟɪɜɢɡɟɧ ɩɚɪɬɧɶɨɪ ɡɚ
ɚɜɬɨɦɨɛɢɥ, ɩɨɜɞɢɝɧɚɬ ɧɚ ɤɪɢɤ. ɩɪɟɝɥɟɞ ɢ ɩɨɞɞɪɴɠɤɚ ɧɚ ɤɪɢɤɚ.
ɑɟɪɜɟ - Ⱥɤɨ ɟɬɢɤɟɬɴɬ (ɫɬɢɤɟɪɴɬ) ɟ ɩɨɜɪɟɞɟɧ, ɦɨɥɹ ɫɜɴɪɠɟɬɟ ɫɟ ɫ ȼɚɲɢɹ Suzuki ɞɢɥɴɪ ɢɥɢ ɫɟɪɜɢɡɟɧ
ɩɚɪɬɧɶɨɪ.
83RM0-01E

Hrvatski (Croatian)
Nazivi dijelova pantografske dizalice
Pantografska dizalica Vidi FIG. 1. na stranici na engleskom jeziku.
UPUTE ZA UPORABU Tehniþki podaci i primjena

Vidi FIG. 2. na stranici na engleskom jeziku.
A : NOSAý F : OPRUGA DIZALICE X : VISINA DIZALICE (mm)
B : BAZA G : NAZIVNA NOSIVOST (t) Y : NOSIVOST (t)
C : GORNJI KRAK H1 : MINIMALNA VISINA (mm) M : MODEL
D : DONJI KRAK H2 : MAKSIMALNA VISINA (mm) T : TIP
E : ZGLOB ZA POLUGU H3 : OPTIMALNA VISINA (mm)
Uvjeti u kojima je zabranjena uporaba dizalice

- Temperatura niža od -40°C.
Proizvoÿaþi: - Klizavo i pjeskovito tlo.
- Cesta s velikim nagibom.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Ekstremni vremenski uvjeti: pljusak, tajfun, ciklon, snježna meüava,grmljavinsko nevrijeme i sl.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japan - Vozila s opasnim i teškim teretom, primjerice: rastaljeni metal, kiseline, radioaktivne tvari ili osobito lomljiv
Tel: 049-248-1661 teret.
Faks:049-284-4340 - Izravan kontakt s poklopcem motora vozila.
- Na brodu.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Neravno tlo.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu KINA
Upute za rad
Tel: 0519-327-5284 PODIZNA
Kod zamjene kotaþa uvijek provjerite ima lina unutrašnjem dijelu kotaþa ili TOýKA
Faks:0519-327-0811
površini za postavljanje kotaþa ostataka korozije.
Dodatne upute:
Molimo vas da se pridržavate uputa za rad.
Prije uporabe proþitati UPUTE ZA UPORABU!
Nakon provjere dizalice i optereüenja dizalicu upotrijebite na ravnoj podlozi.
Vozilo ne smijete podizati ako je pod optereüenjem, osim ako teret nije
Norma: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 stabiliziran.
- Vozilo parkirajte na ravnoj površini i þvrsto pritegnite ruþnu koþnicu.
- Mjenjaþ postavite u vožnju unatrag (vozila s automatskim prijenosom
Obavijesti i upozorenja postavite u položaj za parkiranje). PODIZNA TOýKA POLUGA DIZALICE
- DIZALICA se može koristiti samo za zamjenu guma, ne u bilo koju drugu svrhu. - Upalite sva þetiri pokazivaþa smjera.
- DIZALICU je dozvoljeno upotrijebiti najviše 50 puta. - Iz prtljažnika izvadite alat za dizalicu i rezervni kotaþ.
- U vozilu se ne smiju nalaziti putnici. - Prije uporabe dizalice blokirajte prednji i stražnji dio kotaþa koji se
- Nikada ne zalazite ispod vozila podignutog dizalicom. nalazi dijagonalno u odnosu na kotaþ koji mijenjate.
- Korištenje neispravnih ili nepravilno održavanih dizalica je izuzetno opasno. - Okretanjem francuskog kljuþa suprotno od kazaljke na satu olabavite
vijke na kotaþu, ali ih nemojte ukloniti.
ŠIPKA DIZALICE
Znaþenje piktograma na naljepnici upozorenja - Podižite dizalicu dok udubina na nosaþu ne legne u izboþinu podvozja,
kako je prikazano na ilustraciji.
Naranþasta pozadina - Dizalicom upravljajte polaganim, ravnomjernim pokretima polugom.
- Vozilo podignite od tla tek toliko da probušena guma malo odstoji od tla pa uklonite vijke i kotaþ.
Crno Ovaj simbol oznaþava potencijalnu opasnost od ozbiljnih - Postavite kotaþ, a potom lagano priþvrstite vijke, kotaþ mora sjesti na glavþinu.
ozljeda i smrti. - Spustite vozilo pa do kraja zategnite vijke okretanjem francuskog kljuþa u smjeru kazaljke na satu.
Održavanje
- Sprijeþite nakupljanje prljavštine na OPRUZI DIZALICE.
- Provjerite nazivnu ploþicu, mora zadržati svoj izvorni oblik.
Bijela pozadina - Nemojte samostalno obavljati promjene na dizalici.
Ovaj simbol oznaþava zabranu zalaženja ispod vozila - Nakon svake uporabe, odmah kontaktirajte vašeg Suzuki dobavljaþa ili servisnog partnera za pregled i
Crno
podignutog dizalicom. održavanje dizalice.
Crven - Ako je oznaka (naljepnica) ošteüena, molimo kontaktirajte svog Suzuki dobavljaþa ili servisnog partnera.
83RM0-01E

ýesky (Czech)
Názvy souþástí zvedáku Pantograph
NģŽKOVÝ ZVEDÁK Viz FIG. 1 na anglické stránce
NÁVOD K POUŽITÍ Technické údaje a použití

Viz FIG. 2 na anglické stránce.
A : HORNÍ DRŽÁK F : ŠROUB ZVEDÁKU X : VÝŠKA ZVEDÁKU (mm)
B : ZÁKLADNA G : NOMINÁLNÍ ZATÍŽENÍ (t) Y : ZATÍŽENÍ (t)
C : HORNÍ RAMENO H1 : MINIMÁLNÍ VÝŠKA (mm) M : MODEL
D : DOLNÍ RAMENO H2 : MAXIMÁLNÍ VÝŠKA (mm) T : TYP
E : DRŽADLO H3 : VÝŠKA PRO ZAJIŠTċNÍ VÝKONNOSTI (mm)
Podmínky, pĜi nichž se výrobek nemá používat

- PĜi teplotČ pod -40°C.
Výrobce: - Na štČrku nebo na písku.
- Na silnici s velkým sklonem.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD.
- V extrémních pĜírodních podmínkách: bouĜe, tajfun, cyklon, snČhová bouĜe, bouĜe s deštČm atd.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japonsko
- Zvedání nebezpeþných nákladĤ, napĜíklad: svaĜovaný kov, kyseliny, radioaktivní látky nebo speciální
Tel: 049-248-1661
kĜehké zboží.
Fax:049-284-4340
- PĜímý kontakt s kapotou.
- Používání na lodi.
- ZemČ s odlišnou výškou.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu ýÍNA
Tel: 0519-327-5284 Provozní pokyny BOD
Fax:0519-327-0811 PĜi výmČnČ kol vždy odstraĖte korozi, která mĤže být na vnitĜku kola a ZVEDÁNÍ
povrchu pro upevnČní kola na vozidle.

Podrobnosti:
PĜed zahájením þinnosti si tento NÁVOD K POUŽITÍ peþlivČ pĜeþtČte! Používejte podle „pokynĤ k použití“.
Zvedák používejte na rovné zemi a kontrolujte zvedák i náklad.
Nevstupujte pod zvednutý náklad, pokud náklad není bezpeþnČ upevnČn.
Norma: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008
- Zaparkujte vĤz na rovné ploché zemi a zatáhnČte parkovací brzdu.
- ZaĜaćte zpáteþku (automatickou pĜevodovku do stupnČ „park“).
- ZapnČte výstražná svČtla.
- VyjmČte zvedák a náhradní pneumatiku.
UpozornČní a varování - ZajistČte pĜední a zadní kola úhlopĜíþnČ proti demontovanému kolu, BOD ZVEDÁNÍ DRŽADLO ZVEDÁKU
- ZVEDÁK se smí používat pouze k výmČnČ pneumatik a k žádným jiným úþelĤm. než zvedák použijete.
- ZVEDÁK nepoužívejte více než padesátkrát. - Matice kola povolte, ale nevyndávejte je - otoþte klíþem doleva.
- Nezvedejte osoby.
- ZvednČte zvedá, dokud se drážka nedostane do styku s rámem, viz
- Nikdy nevstupujte pod vozidlo zvednuté pouze zvedákem.
obrázky.
- Používání vadných þi nedostateþnČ udržovaných zvedákĤ je nesmírnČ nebezpeþné.
- Používejte zvedák pomalu, plynule pomocí držadla.
DRŽADLO ZVEDÁKU
- ZvednČte vozidlo tak, aby nahuštČná pneumatika byla tČsnČ nad zemí,
Významy symbolĤ na štítku pro upozornČní
demontujte matice a kolo.
Oranžové pozadí - Nainstalujte kolo, pak mírnČ utáhnČte každou matici, kolo musí být
nasazeno na náboji.
ýerný Tento symbol oznaþuje možné riziko, které by mohlo vést k - SpusĢte vozidlo a utáhnČte matice kĜížem proti sobČ, otáþejte klíþem doprava.
úmrtí nebo vážnému zranČní.
Údržba
- ZabraĖte tomu, aby se na ŠROUBU ZVEDÁKU usadily neþistoty.
- Zkontrolujte jmenný štítek a tvar udržujte stejný jako pĤvodnČ.
- Neupravujte konstrukci zvedáku sami.
Bílé pozadí
- Po jakémkoli použití se obraĢte na prodejce Suzuki þi na servisního partnera, aby provedl prohlídku a
ýerný Tento symbol oznaþuje zákaz vstupování pod vozidlo
údržbu zvedáku.
podepĜené zvedákem.
- Pokud se štítek (nálepka) poškodí, obraĢte se prosím na svého prodejce Suzuki nebo servisního partnera.
ýerve
83RM0-01E

Dansk (Danish)
Delenes betegnelse for Saksedonkraft
DONKRAFT Se FIG 1 på den engelsksprogede side.
BRUGSANVISNING Tekniske data og anvendelse

Se FIG 2 på den engelsksprogede side.
A : LØFTEBAKKE F : DONKRAFTENS SKRUE X : LØFTEHØJDE (mm)
B : BASE G : NOMINEL LØFTEKAPACITET (t) Y : BELASTNING (t)
C : ØVRE ARM H1 : MINIMUMSHØJDE (mm) M : MODEL
D : NEDRE ARM H2 : MAKSIMUMSHØJDE (mm) T : TYPE
E : HÅNDTAGETS LED H3 : HØJDE FOR SIKKER BETJENING (mm)
Betingelser, hvor donkraften ikke må bruges

- Temperatur under -40 °C.
Fabrikanter:
- På mudret eller sandet underlag.
- På stærkt hældende veje.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD.
- Under ekstreme vejrforhold: kraftigt regnvejr, tyfon, cyklon, snestorm, tordenvejr mv.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japan
- Tungt eller farligt gods, fx: smeltet metal, syrer, radioaktive stoffer eller særligt skrøbelige varer.
Tel: 049-248-1661
- Direkte kontakt med køretøjets understel.
Fax:049-284-4340
- På et skib.
- På underlag med niveauforskelle.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA Brugsanvisning LØFTE-
Tel: 0519-327-5284 Når du skifter hjul, skal du altid fjerne eventuel rust, PUNKT
der måtte findes inde i hjulet eller på køretøjets hjulmonteringsoverflade.

Fax:0519-327-0811
Nærmere anvisninger:
Gå frem ifølge brugervejledningen.
Brug donkraften på et jævnt underlag, og hold øje med både donkraften og
Læs denne BRUGSANVISNING før brug!
lasten.
Du må ikke foretage indgreb under en løftet last,med mindre lasten er gjort
Standard: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 sikkert fast.
- Parker køretøjet på et fladt, jævnt underlag, og træk bremsen godt.
- Sæt gearkassen i bakgear (en automatisk gearkasse sættes
HÅNDTAG
Advarsel på ”parkering”). LØFTEPUNKT
- DONKRAFTEN må kun anvendes til udskiftning af dæk, ikke til andre formål. - Tænd katastrofeblinket.
- Brug ikke DONKRAFTEN flere end 50 gange. - Tag donkraftens redskaber og reservehjulet ud af deres
- Løft aldrig mennesker. opbevaringsrum.
- Kravl aldrig ind under et køretøj, der er løftet med en donkraft. - Bloker foran og bag på det hjul, der sidder diagonalt i forhold til det hjul,
- Brug af defekte eller utilstrækkeligt vedligeholdte donkrafte, er ekstremt farligt. der fjernes, inden donkraften bruges.
- Løsn hjulmøtrikkerne uden at fjerne dem ved at dreje skruenøglen DONKRAFTSTANG
Betydning af piktogrammet på advarselsmærket mod uret.

- Løft donkraften, indtil rillerne i donkraftens løftebakke passer til rammen - se illustrationerne.
Orange baggrund - Betjen donkraften ved hjælp af donkraftens håndtag med langsomme, jævne bevægelser.
- Løft køretøjet, så et oppustet dæk netop vil være frit af underlaget. Fjern møtrikkerne, og tag hjulet af.
Sort Dette symbol angiver en mulig fare, der kan medføre dødsfald - Sæt det nye hjul på plads, og stram hver møtrik lidt. Hjulet skal sidde på et nav.
eller alvorlig skade. - Sænk køretøjet ned, og stram hjulmøtrikkerne fuldstændigt skiftevis i en overfor/diagonalt-sekvens ved at
dreje skruenøglen med uret.
Vedligeholdelse
- Pas på at undgå, at DONKRAFTENS SKRUE samler snavs.
Hvid baggrund - Tjek typeskiltet. Bevar den originale form.
Dette symbol betyder, at du aldrig må kravle ind under et - Det er forbudt selv at foretage ændringer på donkraftens konstruktion.
Sort
køretøj, der er løftet med donkraften. - Efter ethvert brug, skal du øjeblikkeligt konsultere din Suzuki-forhandler eller servicepartner, for eftersyn og
Rød vedligeholdelse af donkraften.
- Hvis mærkaten (etiketten) er beskadiget, skal du rådføre dig med din Suzuki-forhandler eller
servicepartner.
83RM0-01E

Nederlands (Dutch)
Naam van de onderdelen van de Schaarkrik
SCHAARKRIK Zie FIG 1 op de Engelse pagina.
Technische gegevens en toepassing

GEBRUIKERSHANDLEIDING Zie FIG 2 op de Engelse pagina.
A : BOVENKANT F : KRIKSCHROEF X : HOOGTE KRIK(mm)
B : BASIS G : NOMINALE LADING (t) Y : LADING (t)
C : BOVENARM H1 : MINIMUMHOOGTE (mm) M : MODEL
D : ONDERARM H2 : MAXIMUMHOOGTE (mm) T : TYPE
E : SCHARNIER VAN DE HENDEL H3 : WERKHOOGTE (mm)
Niet gebruiken in de volgende gevallen

- Wanneer de temperatuur lager is dan -40°C.
Fabrikanten: - Op een gladde of zanderige ondergrond.
- Op een sterk hellende weg.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Bij extreme weersomstandigheden: regen en storm, tyfoon, tornado, sneeuwstorm,onweer, etc.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japan - Voor het laden van gevaarlijke stoffen, bijv.: gesmolten metaal, zure stoffen, radioactieve stoffen en fragiele
Tel: 049-248-1661 goederen.
Fax:049-284-4340 - In direct contact met de motorkap.
- Op een boot.
- Op een onregelmatige ondergrond.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA Gebruiksaanwijzing KRIK-
Tel: 0519-327-5284 Als een wiel wordt gewisseld, verwijder dan altijd eerst corrosiedie op de STEUNPUNT
Fax:0519-327-0811 wiel of de wielas van het voertuig aanwezig is.

Details:
Volg de “gebruiksaanwijzing” nauwkeurig op.
Lees deze GEBRUIKERSHANDLEIDING voor gebruik! Zet de krik op een stabiele ondergrond, controleer hem en controleer de
lading.
Mag niet onder een stijgende lading worden gebruikt, tenzij de lading
Norm: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008
bevestigd is
- Parkeer de wagen op een vlakke, egale ondergrond en trek de
handrem stevig aan.
Let op en waarschuwing - Zet de versnelling in de “achteruit” (automatische versnellingsbak in KRIK STEUNPUNT
KRIKHENDEL
- De krik mag alleen worden gebruikt voor het vervangen van banden, niet voor andere doeleinden. “parkeerstand”).
- Niet meer dan 50 maal gebruiken. - Zet het alarmknipperlicht aan.
- Er mag niemand in de auto zitten. - Neem het gereedschap en het reservewiel uit de daarvoor bestemde
ruimte.
- Ga nooit onder een voertuig dat door een krik is opgetild.
- Blokkeer de voor- en achterkant van het wiel dat tegenover het te
- Gebruik van defecte of onvoldoende onderhouden krikken is zeer gevaarlijk.
verwijderen wiel ligt voordat u de krik gebruikt. KRIKHENDEL
- Draai de moeren tegen de klok in los.
Betekenis van het pictogram op het waarschuwingslabel
- Schroef de krik omhoog totdat de uitsparing in het kriksteunpunt past, zie illustraties.
Oranje achtergrond - Bedien de krik met langzame, vloeiende bewegingen, met behulp van de hendel.
- Krik de auto zover op dat de opgeblazen band niet de ondergrond zal raken, verwijder de moeren en het
Zwart Dit symbool geeft potentieel gevaar aan dat tot ernstig letsel wiel.
- Breng het andere wiel aan, schroef de moeren licht vast, het wiel moet op de wielas vastzitten.
of de dood kan leiden.
- Laat de wagen zakken en draai de moeren kruiselings en klokgewijs geheel aan. .
Onderhoud
- Zorg ervoor dat de krik niet vuil wordt.
Witte achtergrond - Check het naamplaatje, sla de krik in de oorspronkelijke vorm op.
- Demonteer de krik niet zelf.
Zwart Dit symbool geeft aan dat u nooit onder een apparaat moet - Na ieder gebruik dient u onmiddellijk uw Suzuki-dealer of Servicepartner te raadplegen voor de inspectie
gaan dat door de krik opgetild is. en het onderhoud van de krik.
Rood - Als het label (de sticker) beschadigd is, neemt u contact op met uw Suzuki-dealer of Servicepartner.
83RM0-01E

Eesti (Estonian)
Pantograaf tungraua detailid
PANTOGRAPH-TUNGRAUD Vaadake ingliskeelselt lehelt FIG. 1
Tehniline info ja rakendamine

KASUTUSJUHEND Vaadake ingliskeelselt lehelt FIG. 2
A : ÜLEMINE KINNITI F : JÕUKRUVI X : KRUVI KÕRGUS (mm)
B : ALUS G : NOMINAALKOORMUS (t) Y : KOORMUS (t)
C : ÜLEMINE ÕLG H1 : MINIMAALNE KÕRGUS (mm) M : MUDEL
D : ALUMINE ÕLG H2 : MAKSIMAALNE KÕRGUS (mm) T : TÜÜP
E : SANGA LIIGEND H3 : JÕUDLUSE TAGATUD KÕRGUS (mm)
Kasutada ei tohi alljärgnevatel tingimustel:

- kui temperatuur on alla -40°C
Tootjad: - mudasel või liivasel pinnal
- kallakul
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - äärmuslikes loodustingimustes: vihmasadu, taifuun, tsüklon, lumetorm, äikesetorm, jne
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Jaapan - ohtliku koorma korral, näiteks: sulatatud metall, happeline aine, radioaktiivne aine või kergesti purunevad
Tel: 049-248-1661 kaubad
Faks: 049-284-4340 - otsene kontakt lükanduksega
- kasutamine paadis
- erineva kõrgusega põrandad.
Nr. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu HIINA Kasutamise juhised TUNGRAUA
SANG
Tel: 0519-327-5284 Igakordsel ratta vahetamisel tuleb alati eemaldada korrosioon,mida võib
Faks: 0519-327-0811 leiduda ratta siseküljel või sõidukil rattapaigaldusekohal.
Detailid.
Palun kasutage seadet vastavalt „kasutamise juhistele”.
Kasutage tungrauda horisontaalsel pinnal, kontrollides sõidukit ja
Palun lugege seda KASUTUSJUHENDIT enne kasutamist!
tungrauda.
Kasutamine ei ole lubatud koorma tõstmisel, enne kui kooremei ole kindlalt
Norm: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008
kinnitatud.
- Parkige sõiduk tasasel horisontaalsel pinnal ning tõmmake käsipidur
Tähelepanu ja hoiatus TUNGRAUA SANG
TUNGRAUA KÄEPIDE
kindlalt peale.
- Antud TUNGRAUD on kasutamiseks ainult rehvivahetuseks ja mitte mistahes muul eesmärgil.
- Jätke sisse „tagurdamise käik” (automaatkäigukasti korral „parkimine”).
- Ärge kasutage TUNGRAUDA rohkem kui 50 korda.
- Lülitage sisse ohutuled.
- Sõidukis ei tohi viibida inimesi.
- Võtke hoiupaigast tungraud ja selle juurde kuuluvad tööriistad ning
- Ärge kunagi ronige tungrauaga tõstetud sõiduki alla.
tagavararatas.
- Vigaste või korralikult hooldamata tungraudade kasutamine on äärmiselt ohtlik.
- Vahetatava ratta suhtes diagonaalselt paiknevad esimene ja tagumine
ratas tuleb tõkestada enne tungraua kasutamist. TÕSTEPUNKT
Piktogrammi tähendus hoiataval sildil.
- Keerates mutrivõtmega vastupäeva, lõdvestage, kuid ärge eemaldage ratta mutreid.
Oranž taust - Tõstke tungrauda kõrguseni, kus tungrauapea renn sobitub juhtraamiga, vaata jooniseid.
- Kasutage tungrauda aeglaste, ühtlaste liigutustega, kasutades tungraua käepidet.
Must See märk viitab võimalikule ohule, mis võib lõppeda tõsise - Tõstke sõidukit kuni vahetatav ratas on maast lahti, eemaldage mutrid ja ratas.
vigastuse või surmaga. - Paigaldage ratas, siis pingutage kergelt iga mutrit, ratas peab sobituma rattarummule.
- Laske sõiduk alla ja pingutage mutrid tugevalt risti üle ühe, keerates mutrivõtit päripäeva.
Hooldus
- Palun vältige TUNGRAUA KRUVI määrdumist.
Valge taust - Kontrollige andmeplaati, säilitage originaalvorm.
- Mitte muuta iseseisvalt tungraua konstruktsiooni.
Must See märk hoiatab, et tungraua kasutamise ajal ei tohi ronida
- Pärast iga kasutamist pöörduge tungraua ülevaatuses ja hoolduseks viivitamatult oma Suzuki edasimüüja
sõiduki alla.
Punane või teenindusesindaja poole.
- Kahjustatud sildi (kleebise) korral pöörduge oma Suzuki edasimüüja või teenindusesindaja poole.
83RM0-01E

Suomi (Finnish)
Saksitunkin osat
SAKSITUNKKI Katso FIG. 1 englanninkieliseltä sivulta.
KÄYTTÖOHJE Tekniset tiedot ja käyttö

Katso FIG. 2 englanninkieliseltä sivulta.
A : NOSTIN F : SÄÄTÖRUUVI X : TUNKIN KORKEUS (mm)
B : ALUSTA G : NIMELLINEN NOSTOKYKY (t) Y : NOSTOVOIMA (t)
C : YLÄVARSI H1 : ALIN KORKEUS (mm) M : MALLI
D : ALAVARSI H2 : YLIN KORKEUS (mm) T : TYYPPI
E : KAMMEN PAIKKA H3 : NOSTOKORKEUS (mm)
Ei saa käyttää seuraavissa tapauksissa

- Kun lämpötila on alle -40 °C.
Valmistajat: - Lieju- tai hiekkamaastossa.
- Jyrkällä mäellä.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Äärimmäisissä ilmasto-olosuhteissa: sademyrsky, pyörremyrsky (sykloni, taifuuni), lumimyrsky, ukonilma
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japan jne.
Puh.: 049-248-1661 - Vaarallisten raskaiden lastien kuljetuksessa, kuten: sulametalli, happamat aineet, radioaktiiviset aineet tai
Faksi: 049-284-4340 eritoten irtotavarat.
- Suorassa kosketuksessa koriin.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Laivalla, veneellä jne.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA - Epätasaisella maaperällä.
Puh.: 0519-327-5284
Käyttöohjeet NOSTO-KO
Faksi: 0519-327-0811
Kun pyörä vaihdetaan, puhdista aina ruoste, HDAT
jota voi olla pyörän sisäpinnoilla ja pyörän asennuspinnallaautossa.

Yksityiskohdat:
Lue tämä KÄYTTÖOHJE ennen käyttöä! Toimi “käyttöohjeiden” mukaisesti.

Käsittele tunkkia tasaisella maaperällä, kun tarkistat sitäja kuormaa.
Standardi: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 Älä työskentele ylös nostetun kuorman alla, ellei sitä ole tuettuvarmalla
tavalla.
- Pysäköi auto tasaiselle, vaakasuoralle pinnalle ja kiristä jarru.

- Kytke vaihteisto peruutusvaihteelle (automaattivaihteistossa
Huomautukset ja varoitukset pysäköintiasentoon). KAMPI㻌
NOSTOKOHTA
- TUNKKIA voi käyttää ainoastaan renkaiden vaihtoon, ei mihinkään muuhun tarkoitukseen. - Sytytä varoitusvalot.
- Käytä TUNKKIA alle 50 kertaa. - Ota nostotyökalut ja varapyörä esille.
- Ei saa käyttää henkilöiden nostoon. - Aseta kiilat vaihdettavaa pyörää vinosti vastapäätä olevan pyörän
- Älä koskaan mene pelkän tunkin varassa olevan auton alle. eteen ja taakse ennen kuin käytät tunkkia.
- Viallisten tai puutteellisesti ylläpidettyjen tunkkien käyttö on erittäin vaarallista. - Löysää pyöränmutterit (älä poista niitä) kääntämällä avainta
vastapäivään.
KAMMEN VARSI㻌
Varotuskuvakkeiden merkitys - Nosta tunkkia, kunnes tunkin päässä oleva ura asettuu auton
runkorakenteessa olevaan kohoumaan (katso kuvista).
Oranssi pohjaväri - Nosta tunkkia hitaasti ja tasaisesti kampea käyttäen.
- Nosta autoa, kunnes rengas nousee irti maasta ja irrota mutterit ja pyörä.
Musta Osoittaa mahdollista vaaratilannetta, joka voi johtaa - Asenna varapyörä ja kiristä mutterit kevyesti. Pyörän on oltava hyvin napakeskiöllä.
kuolemaan tai vakavaan loukkaantumiseen. - Laske auto alas ja kiristä pyöränmutterit kunnolla ristiin, myötäpäivään.
Huolto
- Pidä TUNKIN SÄÄTÖRUUVI puhtaana.
Valkoinen pohjaväri - Tarkista nimikilpi. pidä se alkuperäisessä kunnossa.
Osoittaa kieltoa mennä auton alle, kun se on pelkän tunkin - Tunkkiin ei saa tehdä rakennemuutoksia itse.
Musta
varassa. - Minkä tahansa käytön jälkeen kysy heti lisäohjeita Suzuki-jälleenmyyjältäsi tai huoltokumppaniltasi tunkin
Punaine tarkastukseen ja huoltoon liittyvissä asioissa.
- Jos etiketti (tarra) on vahingoittunut, ota yhteys Suzuki-jälleenmyyjääsi tai huoltokumppaniin.
83RM0-01E

Français (French)
Désignation des pièces du cric à parallélogramme
CRIC PANTOGRAPHE Voir FIG 1. du document anglais.
Données techniques et application

MANUEL D'UTILISATION Voir FIG 2. du document anglais.
A : PLATEFORME DE F : CRIC À VIS X : HAUTEUR CRIC (mm)
SUPPORT CHARGE
B : EMBASE G : CHARGE NOMINALE (tonne) Y : CHARGE (tonne)
C : BRAS SUPÉRIEUR H1 : HAUTEUR MINIMALE (mm) M : MODÈLE
D : BRAS INFÉRIEUR H2 : HAUTEUR MAXIMALE (mm) T : TYPE
E : LEVIER H3 : HAUTEUR OPTIMALE (mm)
D'ARTICULATION
Utilisation interdite dans les conditions suivantes

Fabricants : - Lorsque la température est inférieure à -40° C.
- Sur sol boueux ou sablonneux.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Sur une forte pente.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japon - Dans des conditions naturelles extrêmes : tempête, typhon, cyclone, tempête de neige, orage, etc.
Tél : 049-248-1661 - En cas de chargement lourd ou dangereux, par exemple : métal en fusion, substance acide, substance
radioactive ou marchandises particulièrement friables.
Fax : 049-284-4340
- Contact direct avec le capot.
- Utilisation sur un bateau.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Sur un sol irrégulier.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINE
Instructions d'utilisation
Tél : 0519-327-5284 POINTS DE
Lors du remplacement d'une roue, toujours éliminer toute corrosion LEVAGE
Fax : 0519-327-0811 détectée à l'intérieur de la roue et sur la surface d'installation de la roue sur
le véhicule.
Remarques :
Lire attentivement le présent MANUEL D'INSTRUCTION avant toute utilisation ! Respecter les "instructions d'utilisation".
Utiliser le cric sur un sol plat sans oublier de contrôler le cric et la charge.
Norme : EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 Ne pas utiliser le cric en cas de charge supplémentaire, saufsi la charge
est correctement fixée.
- Garer la voiture sur un sol plat et mettre correctement le frein à main.
- Mettre la boîte de vitesses sur marche arrière (sur "parking" sur une
Attention et avertissement boîte automatique). EMPLACEMENT DE
MISE SUR CRIC
LEVIER DU CRIC
- Le CRIC ne doit être utilisé que pour remplacer les pneus, pas à d'autres fins. - Allumer les feux de détresse.
- Ne pas utiliser le CRIC plus de 50 fois. - Sortir les outils du cric et la roue de rechange du compartiment de
- Ne pas utiliser le cric lorsqu'une personne est dans le véhicule. stockage.
- Ne jamais se glisser sous le véhicule mis sur cric. - Mettre des cales à l'avant et à l'arrière de la roue opposée en
diagonale à la roue à changer avant d'utiliser le cric.
- L'utilisation de crics défectueux ou mal entretenus peut se révéler extrêmement dangereuse.
- Desserrer, mais ne pas retirer les écrous en tournant la clé dans le
sens antihoraire. CAME DU LEVIER DU CRIC
Signification des pictogrammes sur l'étiquette d'avertissement
- Monter le cric jusqu'à ce que la tête dentelée du cric entre en contact
Fond orange avec la partie du châssis prévue à cet effet. Voir illustrations.
- Actionner le cric avec des mouvements lents et fluides, à l'aide du levier.
Noir - Soulever le véhicule de sorte qu'un pneu gonflé frôle juste le sol, déposer les écrous et la roue.
Ce symbole indique un danger potentiel pouvant causer des
- Installer la roue, puis resserrer légèrement chaque écrou, la roue doit reposer sur l'essieu.
blessures ou un décès. - Descendre le véhicule et serrer complètement les écrous en étoile (en serrant un à un les écrous opposés)
en tournant la clé dans le sens horaire.
Maintenance
- Éviter toute accumulation de saleté sur le CRIC À VIS.
Fond blanc - Vérifier la plaque signalétique, s'assurer que la forme est restée inchangée.
Ce symbole indique de ne jamais se glisser sous le véhicule - Ne pas modifier la structure du cric.
Noir
lorsqu'il est monté sur cric. - Après toute utilisation, consultez immédiatement votre concessionnaire ou le service après-vente
Roug partenaire Suzuki pour procéder au contrôle et à l’entretien du cric.
- Si l'étiquette (autocollant) est endommagée, veuillez consulter votre concessionnaire ou le service
après-vente partenaire Suzuki.
83RM0-01E

Deutsch (German)
Teilename Scherenwagenheber
SCHERENWAGENHEBER Siehe FIG. 1 auf der englischen Seite.
Technische Daten und Anwendung

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG Siehe FIG. 2 auf der englischen Seite.
A : OBENHALTERUNG F : HUBSPINDEL X : HUBHÖHE (mm)
B : BASIS G : NENNLAST (t) Y : LAST (t)
C : OBERER ARM H1 : MINDESTHÖHE (mm) M : MODELL
D : UNTERER ARM H2 : MAXIMALE HÖHE (mm) T : TYP
E : GRIFFGELENK H3 : LEISTUNGSGARANTIE HÖHE (mm)
Nicht unter folgenden Bedingungen verwenden

- Bei Temperaturen unter -40°C.
Hersteller: - Auf Schmutz oder Sandboden.
- Straßen mit starker Neigung.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Extreme Wetterbedingungen: Regensturm, Taifun, Zyklon, Schneesturm,Gewitter, usw.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japan - Laden von gefährlichen schweren Materialien, z.B.: geschmolzenes Metall, säurehaltige Substanz,
radioaktiven Substanzen oder besonders körnige Waren.
Tel: 049-248-1661
- Direkter Kontakt mit der Motorhaube.
Fax:049-284-4340
- Verwendung auf einem Boot.
- Unebener Boden.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA
Bedienungsanleitung
HUB
Wenn ein Reifen gewechselt wird, entfernen Sie immer denRost, der sich PUNKT
Tel: 0519-327-5284
innen am Rad und an der Montagefläche am Fahrzeug befinden kann.
Fax:0519-327-0811
Details:
Bitte gemäß “Bedienungsanleitung” verwenden.
Verwenden Sie den Wagenheber auf ebenem Boden und prüfen den Hub
Bitte lesen Sie diese BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG vor Gebrauch! und die Last.
Nicht unter angehobener Last verwenden, es sei denn die Last
Norm: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 Ist sicher befestigt.
- Parken Sie das Auto auf einem flachen, ebenen Boden und ziehen die
Bremse fest an. WAGENHEBER HEBEL
HUBPUNKT
- Legen Sie den Rückwärtsgang ein (Automatikgetriebe in “Park”
Achtung und Warnung
Stellung).
- Der WAGENHEBER darf nur für den Reifenwechsel verwendet werden, nicht für andere Zwecke.
- Stellen sie die Warnblinkanlage ein.
- Verwenden Sie den WAGENHEBER nicht öfter als 50-mal. - Holen Sie den Wagenheber und den Ersatzreifen aus dem Stauraum.
- Keine Personen befördern. - Blockieren Sie vor Verwendung des Wagenhebers die Vorder- und
- Begeben Sie sich niemals unter ein Fahrzeug in angehobener Position. Hinterräder, die sich diagonal gegenüberliegen.
- Die Verwendung von beschädigten oder nicht ausreichend gewarteten Wagenhebern ist extrem gefährlich. - Lösen Sie die Radmuttern durch Drehen des Schraubschlüssels HANDGRIFF
gegen den Uhrzeigersinn, aber entfernen Sie die Muttern nicht.

Bedeutung der Piktogramme auf dem Warnschild - Heben Sie den Wagenheber, bis die Nut des Wagenheberkopfs in den Bolzenrahmen passt, s. Abb.
- Bedienen Sie den Wagenheber mit langsamer, ruhiger Bewegung mit dem Hebel.
Hintergrund orange
- Heben Sie das Fahrzeug so an, dass ein aufgepumpter Reifen sich soeben vom Boden abhebt, entfernen
Sie Muttern und Rad.
Schwarz Dieses Symbol weist auf eine mögliche Gefahr hin, die zum - Installieren Sie das Rad, ziehen leicht jede Mutter fest, das Rad muss auf der Nabe sitzen.
Tode oder schweren Verletzungen führen kann. - Senken Sie das Fahrzeug und ziehen die Radmuttern in kreuzweiser Reihenfolge durch Drehen des
Schraubenschlüssels im Uhrzeigersinn fest.
Wartung
- Bitte schützen Sie die HUBSPINDEL vor Schmutzansammlung.
Weißer Hintergrund - Prüfen Sie das Typenschild, Originalformat bewahren.
Dieses Symbol weist darauf hin, dass Sie sich niemals unter - Die Konstruktion des Wagenhebers nicht selbst verändern.
Schwarz
das Fahrzeug begeben dürfen, wenn es angehoben ist. - Wenden Sie sich nach jeglichem Gebrauch umgehend an Ihren Suzuki-Vertragshändler oder
Rot Servicepartner für die Inspektion und Wartung des Wagenhebers.
- Wenn das Etikett (der Aufkleber) beschädigt ist, wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Suzuki-Vertragshändler
oder Servicepartner.
83RM0-01E

ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ (Greek)
ȅȞȩȝĮĲĮ İȟĮȡĲȘȝȐĲȦȞ ĲȠȣ ȖȡȪȜȠȣ ʌĮȞĲȠȖȡȐĳȠȣ
īȇȊȁȅȈ ȆǹȃȉȅīȇǹĭȅȊ ǹȞĮĲȡȑȟĲİ ıĲȠ FIG. 1 ıĲȘȞ ĮȖȖȜȚțȒ ıİȜȓįĮ.
ȉİȤȞȚțȐ įİįȠȝȑȞĮ țĮȚ İĳĮȡȝȠȖȒ

ǼīȋǼǿȇǿǻǿȅ ȅǻǾīǿȍȃ ȋȇǾȈǾȈ ǹȞĮĲȡȑȟĲİ ıĲȠ FIG. 2 ıĲȘȞ ĮȖȖȜȚțȒ ıİȜȓįĮ.
A : ǺǹȈǾ ȀȅȇȊĭǾȈ F : ȀȅȋȁǿǹȈ īȇȊȁȅȊ X : ȊȌȅȈ ǹȆȅ ȉȅ ǼǻǹĭȅȈ (mm)
B : ǺǹȈǾ G : ȅȃȅȂǹȈȉǿȀȅ ĭȅȇȉǿȅ (t) Y : ĭȅȇȉǿȅ (t)
C : ǹȃȍ ǺȇǹȋǿȅȃǹȈ H1 : ǼȁǹȋǿȈȉȅ ȊȌȅȈ (mm) M : ȂȅȃȉǼȁȅ
D : Ȁǹȉȍ ǺȇǹȋǿȅȃǹȈ H2 : ȂǼīǿȈȉȅ ȊȌȅȈ (mm) T : ȉȊȆȅȈ
E : ȈȊȃǻǼȈȂȅȈ ȋǼǿȇȅȁǹǺǾȈ H3 : ȊȌȅȈ ǻǿǹȈĭǹȁǿȈǾȈ ǹȆȅǻȅȈǾȈ (mm)
ȈȣȞșȒțİȢ ĮʌĮȖȩȡİȣıȘȢ ȤȡȒıȘȢ

- ǵĲĮȞ Ș șİȡȝȠțȡĮıȓĮ İȓȞĮȚ ȤĮȝȘȜȩĲİȡȘ Įʌȩ -40°C.
- Ȉİ ȜĮıʌȦȝȑȞȠ Ȓ ĮȝȝȫįİȢ ȑįĮĳȠȢ.
ȀĮĲĮıțİȣĮıĲȑȢ: - Ȉİ įȡȩȝȠ ȝİ ȝİȖȐȜȘ țȜȓıȘ.
- Ȉİ ĮțȡĮȓİȢ țĮȚȡȚțȑȢ ıȣȞșȒțİȢ: țĮĲĮȚȖȓįĮ, ĲȣĳȫȞĮȢ, țȣțȜȫȞĮȢ, ȤȚȠȞȠșȪİȜȜĮ, țĮĲĮȚȖȓįĮ ȝİ țİȡĮȣȞȠȪȢ, ț.Ȝʌ.
- ǵĲĮȞ ĲȠ ĳȠȡĲȓȠ ʌİȡȚȜĮȝȕȐȞİȚ İʌȚțȓȞįȣȞĮ ĮȞĲȚțİȓȝİȞĮ Ȓ ȠȣıȓİȢ, ȖȚĮ ʌĮȡȐįİȚȖȝĮ: ȜȚȦȝȑȞȠ ȝȑĲĮȜȜȠ, ȩȟȚȞȘ
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD.
ȠȣıȓĮ, ȡĮįȚİȞİȡȖȒ ȠȣıȓĮ Ȓ ȚįȚĮȓĲİȡĮ țȠĳĲİȡȐ ĮȞĲȚțİȓȝİȞĮ.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 ǿĮʌȦȞȓĮ - ǵĲĮȞ ȕȡȓıțİĲĮȚ ıİ ȐȝİıȘ İʌĮĳȒ ȝİ ĲȠ țĮʌȩ.
ȉȘȜ.: 049-248-1661 - ǵĲĮȞ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚİȓĲĮȚ ıİ ȕȐȡțĮ.
ĭĮȟ: 049-284-4340 - Ȉİ ȑįĮĳȠȢ ʌȠȣ ʌĮȡȠȣıȚȐȗİȚ įȚĮĳȠȡȑȢ ıĲȠ ȪȥȠȢ.
ȅįȘȖȓİȢ ȤȡȒıȘȢ
ȈǾȂǼǿȅ
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. ǵʌȠĲİ ĮȜȜȐȗİĲİ ĲȡȠȤȩ, ĮʌȠȝĮțȡȪȞİĲİ ʌȐȞĲĮ ȠʌȠȚĮįȒʌȠĲİ įȚȐȕȡȦıȘ ǹȃȊȌȍȈǾȈ
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu Ȁǿȃǹ ȣʌȐȡȤİȚ ıĲȠ İıȦĲİȡȚțȩ ĲȠȣ ĲȡȠȤȠȪ țĮȚ ıĲȘȞ İʌȚĳȐȞİȚĮ ıțİȜİĲȠȪ ĲȠȣ ĲȡȠȤȠȪ
ȉȘȜ.: 0519-327-5284 ĲȠȣ ȠȤȒȝĮĲȠȢ.
ȁİʌĲȠȝȑȡİȚİȢ:
ĭĮȟ: 0519-327-0811
ȃĮ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚİȓĲİ ĲȠȞ ȖȡȪȜȠ ıȪȝĳȦȞĮ ȝİ ĲȚȢ «ȅįȘȖȓİȢ ȤȡȒıȘȢ».
ȃĮ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚİȓĲİ ĲȠȞ ȖȡȪȜȠ ıİ İʌȓʌİįȠ ȑįĮĳȠȢ țĮĲȐ ĲȠȞ ȑȜİȖȤȠ ĲȠȣ
ȖȡȪȜȠȣ țĮȚ ĲȠȣ ĳȠȡĲȓȠȣ.
ǻȚĮȕȐıĲİ ĮȣĲȩ ĲȠ ǼīȋǼǿȇǿǻǿȅ ȋȇǾȈǾȈ ʌȡȠıİțĲȚțȐ ʌȡȚȞ Įʌȩ ĲȘ ȤȡȒıȘ. ǹʌĮȖȠȡİȪİĲĮȚ Ș ȤȡȒıȘ ĲȠȣ țȐĲȦ Įʌȩ ĮȞȣȥȦȝȑȞȠ ĳȠȡĲȓȠ, ĲȠ ȠʌȠȓȠ įİȞ ȑȤİȚ
įİșİȓĮıĳĮȜȫȢ.
ȆȡȩĲȣʌȠ: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 - ȈĲĮșȝİȪıĲİ ĲȠ ĮȣĲȠțȓȞȘĲȠ ıİ ȓıȚȠ, İʌȓʌİįȠ ȑįĮĳȠȢ țĮȚ ĲȡĮȕȒȟĲİ ĲȠ
ȤİȚȡȩĳȡİȞȠ ȖİȡȐ.
ȋǼǿȇȅȁǹǺǾ īȇȊȁȅȊ
- ȇȣșȝȓıĲİ ĲȠ țȚȕȫĲȚȠ ĲĮȤȣĲȒĲȦȞ ıĲȘȞ «ȩʌȚıșİȞ» (ıİ ĮȣĲȩȝĮĲȠ țȚȕȫĲȚȠ ȈǾȂǼǿȅ ǹȃȊȌȍȈǾȈ
ĲĮȤȣĲȒĲȦȞ ıĲȘ «ıĲȐșȝİȣıȘ»).

ȆȡȠıȠȤȒ țĮȚ ʌȡȠİȚįȠʌȠȓȘıȘ - ǹȞȐȥĲİ ĲĮ ĳȫĲĮ țȚȞįȪȞȠȣ.
- ȅ īȇȊȁȅȈ ȝʌȠȡİȓ ȞĮ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚİȓĲĮȚ ȝȩȞȠ ȖȚĮ ĮȞĲȚțĮĲȐıĲĮıȘ İȜĮıĲȚțȫȞ, ȩȤȚ ȖȚĮ ȠʌȠȚȠȞįȒʌȠĲİ ȐȜȜȠ - ǹʌȠȝĮțȡȪȞİĲİ ĲĮ İȡȖĮȜİȓĮ ĮȞȪȥȦıȘȢ țĮȚ ĲȠȞ İʌȚʌȜȑȠȞ ĲȡȠȤȩ Įʌȩ ĲȘȞ
ıțȠʌȩ. ʌİȡȚȠȤȒ ĮʌȠșȒțİȣıȘȢ.
- ȆȡȚȞ ĲȘ ȤȡȒıȘ ĲȠȣ ĲȡȠȤȠȪ, țȜİȓıĲİ ĲȠ ȝʌȡȠıĲȚȞȩ țĮȚ ȠʌȓıșȚȠ ȝȑȡȠȢ ĲȠȣ
- ȂȘȞ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚİȓĲİ ĲȠȞ īȇȊȁȅ ʌĮȡĮʌȐȞȦ Įʌȩ 50 ĳȠȡȑȢ.
ĲȡȠȤȠȪ įȚĮȖȦȞȓȦȢ ĮʌȑȞĮȞĲȚ Įʌȩ ĲȠȞ ĲȡȠȤȩ ʌȠȣ șĮ ĮȜȜĮȤșİȓ.
- ȂȘȞ ĮȞȣȥȫȞİĲİ ĲȠ ȩȤȘȝĮ ȝİ ȐĲȠȝȠ ȝȑıĮ ıİ ĮȣĲȩ. - ȋĮȜĮȡȫıĲİ, ĮȜȜȐ ȝȘȞ ĮʌȠȝĮțȡȪȞİĲİ ĲĮ ʌİȡȚțȩȤȜȚĮ ȖȣȡȓȗȠȞĲĮȢ ĲȠ ȇǹǺǻȅȈ ȋǼǿȇȅȁǹǺǾȈ īȇȊȁȅȊ
- ǻİȞ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ʌȠĲȑ ȞĮ ȕȡȓıțİıĲİ țȐĲȦ Įʌȩ ĲȠ ȩȤȘȝĮ ʌȠȣ ȑȤİȚ ĮȞȣȥȦșİȓ ȝİ ȖȡȪȜȠ. țȜİȚįȓ ĮȡȚıĲİȡȩıĲȡȠĳĮ.
- Ǿ ȤȡȒıȘ İȜĮĲĲȦȝĮĲȚțȫȞ Ȓ ĮȞİʌĮȡțȫȢ ıȣȞĲȘȡȘȝȑȞȦȞ ȖȡȪȜȦȞ İȓȞĮȚ İȟĮȚȡİĲȚțȐ İʌȚțȓȞįȣȞȘ. - ȈȘțȫıĲİ ĲȠȞ ȖȡȪȜȠ ȝȑȤȡȚ Ș İıȠȤȒ ĲȘȢ țİĳĮȜȒȢ ĲȠȣ ȖȡȪȜȠȣ ȞĮ İĳĮȡȝȩıİȚ ȝİ ĲȘȞ İȖțȠʌȒ ĲȠȣ ıțİȜİĲȠȪ
(įİȓĲİ İȚțȩȞİȢ).
ȈȘȝĮıȓĮ İȚțȠȞȠȖȡȐȝȝĮĲȠȢ ıİ İĲȚțȑĲĮ ʌȡȠĳȪȜĮȟȘȢ - ȋȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚȒıĲİ ĲȠȞ ȖȡȪȜȠ ȝİ ĮȡȖȒ, ĮʌĮȜȒ țȓȞȘıȘ ȝİ ĲȘ ȕȠȒșİȚĮ ĲȘȢ ȤİȚȡȠȜĮȕȒȢ.
- ǹȞȣȥȫıĲİ ĲȠ ȩȤȘȝĮ ȫıĲİ ȞĮ ȣʌȐȡȤİȚ ȤȫȡȠȢ ȖȚĮ ĲȘȞ ĲȠʌȠșȑĲȘıȘ ĲȠȣ ĳȠȣıțȦȝȑȞȠȣ İȜĮıĲȚțȠȪ, ĮĳĮȚȡȑıĲİ
ȆȠȡĲȠțĮȜȓ ĳȩȞĲȠ ĲĮ ʌİȡȚțȩȤȜȚĮ țĮȚ ĲȠȞ ĲȡȠȤȩ.
- ǼȖțĮĲĮıĲȒıĲİ ĲȠȞ ĲȡȠȤȩ țĮȚ ȝİĲȐ ıĳȓȟĲİ İȜĮĳȡȐ țȐșİ ʌİȡȚțȩȤȜȚȠ ȑĲıȚ ȫıĲİ țȐșİ ĲȡȠȤȩȢ ȞĮ ĲȠʌȠșİĲȘșİȓ
ȂĮȪȡȠ ȉȠ ıȪȝȕȠȜȠ ȣʌȠįİȚțȞȪİȚ ȩĲȚ ʌȡȩțİȚĲĮȚ ȖȚĮ įȣȞȘĲȚțȩ țȓȞįȣȞȠ, Ƞ ıĲȘȞ ʌȜȒȝȞȘ.
- ȋĮȝȘȜȫıĲİ ĲȠ ȩȤȘȝĮ țĮȚ ıĳȓȟĲİ ʌȜȒȡȦȢ ĲĮ ʌİȡȚțȩȤȜȚĮ ıİ țĮĲȐ ȝȒțȠȢ įȚĮıĲĮȣȡȠȪȝİȞȘ ĮțȠȜȠȣșȓĮ
ȠʌȠȓȠȢ șĮ ȝʌȠȡȠȪıİ ȞĮ ʌȡȠțĮȜȑıİȚ șȐȞĮĲȠ Ȓ ıȠȕĮȡȩ
ȖȣȡȓȗȠȞĲĮȢ ĲȠ țȜİȚįȓ įİȟȚȩıĲȡȠĳĮ.
ĲȡĮȣȝĮĲȚıȝȩ.
ȈȣȞĲȒȡȘıȘ
- ȆȡȠĳȣȜȐȟĲİ ĲȠȞ țȠȤȜȓĮ ĲȠȣ ȖȡȪȜȠȣ Įʌȩ ıȣȖțȑȞĲȡȦıȘ ĮțĮșĮȡıȚȫȞ.
- ȃĮ İȜȑȖȤİĲİ ĲȘȞ ʌȚȞĮțȓįĮ țĮȚ ȞĮ įȚĮĲȘȡİȓĲİ ĲȠ ıȤȒȝĮ ıĲȘȞ ĮȡȤȚțȒ ĲȠȣ ȝȠȡĳȒ.
ǱıʌȡȠ ĳȩȞĲȠ - ǹʌĮȖȠȡİȪİĲĮȚ Ș İʌĮȞĮȡȡȪșȝȚıȘ ĲȘȢ țĮĲĮıțİȣȒȢ ĲȠȣ ȖȡȪȜȠȣ Įʌȩ ĲȘȞ ʌȜİȣȡȐ ıĮȢ.
ȉȠ ıȪȝȕȠȜȠ ȣʌȠįİȚțȞȪİȚ ȩĲȚ įİȞ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ʌȠĲȑ ȞĮ ȕȡȓıțİıĲİ - ȂİĲȐ Įʌȩ țȐșİ ȋȡȒıȘ, ıȣȝȕȠȣȜİȣĲİȓĲİ ȐȝİıĮ ĲȠȞ ǹȞĲȚʌȡȩıȦʌȠ ĲȘȢ Suzuki Ȓ ĲȠȞ ȈȣȞİȡȖȐĲȘ Service ȖȚĮ
ȂĮȪȡȠ
țȐĲȦ Įʌȩ ĲȠ ȩȤȘȝĮ ȩĲĮȞ ĮȣĲȩ ıĲȘȡȓȗİĲĮȚ ıĲȠȞ ȖȡȪȜȠ. ĲȠȞ ȑȜİȖȤȠ țĮȚ ĲȘ ıȣȞĲȒȡȘıȘ ĲȠȣ ȖȡȪȜȠȣ.
ȀȩțțȚȞȠ - ǼȐȞ Ș ǼĲȚțȑĲĮ (ĮȣĲȠțȩȜȜȘĲȠ) ȑȤİȚ ȣʌȠıĲİȓ ȗȘȝȚȐ, ʌĮȡĮțĮȜȠȪȝİ ıȣȝȕȠȣȜİȣĲİȓĲİ ĲȠȞ ǹȞĲȚʌȡȩıȦʌȠ ĲȘȢ
Suzuki Ȓ ĲȠȞ ȈȣȞİȡȖȐĲȘ Service.
83RM0-01E

Magyar (Hungarian)
A pantográfos emelĘ alkatrészeinek neve
PANTOGRÁF EMELė Lásd az FIG 1 az angol nyelvĦ oldalon.
MĦszaki adatok és alkalmazás

HASZNÁLATI ÚTMUTATÓ Lásd az FIG 1 az angol nyelvĦ oldalon.
A : FELSė TARTÓ F : EMELėCSAVAR X : EMELÉSI MAGASSÁG (mm)
B : ALAP G : NÉVLEGES TERHELÉS (t) Y : TERHELÉS (t)
C : FELSė KAR H1 : MINIMUM MAGASSÁG (mm) M : MODELL
D : ALSÓ KAR H2 : MAXIMUM MAGASSÁG (mm) T : TÍPUS
E : FOGANTYÚ CSUKLÓ H3 : A TELJESÍTėKÉPESSÉGET BIZTOSÍTÓ MAGASSÁG (mm)
A használatot kizáró körülmények

- -40°C alatti hĘmérséklet.
Gyártók: - Ingoványos vagy homokos talaj.
- ErĘsen emelkedĘ út.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - SzélsĘséges természeti körülmények: vihar, tájfun, ciklon, hóvihar, villámlásal járó vihar stb.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japán - Veszélyes, nehéz rakomány, például: olvasztott fém, savas anyag, radioaktív anyag vagy határozottan
Tel.: 049-248-1661 törékeny termékek.
Fax: 049-284-4340 - Közvetlen érintkezés a motorháztetĘvel.
- Hajón való használat.
- Egyenetlen talaj.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu KÍNA Használati utasítások EMELÉSI
Tel.: 0519-327-5284 Valahányszor kereket cserél, mindig távolítsa el a korróziót,ami a kerék PONT
Fax: 0519-327-0811 belsejében és a kerék jármĦre szerelendĘ felületén található.

Részletek:
Kérjük, a "használati utasításoknak" megfelelĘen mĦködtesse.
Kérjük, a mĦködtetés elĘtt olvassa el ezt a HASZNÁLATI ÚTMUTATÓT! Az emelĘt egyenes talajon mĦködtesse, ellenĘrizve az emelĘt és a
terhelést.
Ne mĦködtesse rakománnyal együtt, hacsak a rakomány nincs
Szabvány: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008
biztonságosan rögzítve.
- Parkolja az autót sima, egyenes talajra, és húzza be a féket szorosan.
- Állítsa a váltót "hátramenetbe" (az automata váltót "parkoló" állásba). EMELÉSI PONT EMELė FOGANTYÚ
Figyelemfelhívás és figyelmeztetés - Kapcsolja be a vészvillogót.

- Az EMELė csak kerékcseréhez használható, egyéb mĦveletre nem. - Vegye elĘ az emelĘszerszámokat és a pótkereket a rakodótérbĘl.
- Az EMELėT ne használja több mint 50 alkalommal. - Az emelĘ mĦködtetése elĘtt blokkolja elölrĘl és hátulról az
- Ne emelje meg személlyel együtt. eltávolítandó kerékkel átellenes kereket.
- A kulcsot az óramutató járásával ellentétes irányba fordítva lazítsa ki,
- Soha ne másszon az emelĘvel megemelt jármĦ alá.
de ne távolítsa el a kerékanyákat.
- A hibás vagy nem megfelelĘen karbantartott emelĘ használata rendkívül veszélyes.
- Emelje meg az emelĘt, amíg az emelĘfej vájatai el nem érik a váz EMELė FOGANTYÚ RÚDJA
munkalécét, lásd ábrák.

A figyelmeztetĘ címkén lévĘ piktogram jelentése
- Az emelĘt lassú, sima mozdulatokkal mĦködtesse, az emelĘ fogantyú segítségével.
NarancsszínĦ háttér - Emelje fel a jármĦvet éppen annyira, hogy egy felfújt abroncs épp csak a talaj fölé emelkedjen, távolítsa el
az anyákat és a kereket.
Fekete Ez a szimbólum olyan lehetséges veszélyt jelez, amely - Szerelje fel a kereket, utána enyhén szorítsa meg az összes anyát; a keréknek az agyra kell illeszkednie.
- Eressze le a jármĦvet, majd teljesen szorítsa meg a kerékanyákat keresztirányban haladva, a kulcs
halálhoz vagy súlyos sérüléshez vezethet.
óramutató járása szerinti irányba fordításával.
Karbantartás
- Kérjük, akadályozza meg, hogy az EMELėCSAVARBAN kosz halmozódjon fel.
Fehér háttér - EllenĘrizze az adattáblát, Ęrizze meg az eredeti alakját.
- Ne szerelje szét az emelĘ szerkezetét.
Fekete Ez a szimbólum azt jelzi, hogy soha ne másszon be a jármĦ - Minden használat után azonnal vegye fel a kapcsolatot egy Suzuki-értékesítĘvel vagy szervizpartnerrel az
alá, amikor azt az emelĘ tartja meg. emelĘ bevizsgálásához és karbantartásához.
Piros - Amennyiben a címke (matrica) sérült, kérjük forduljon a Suzuki forgalmazójához vagy szervizpartneréhez.
83RM0-01E

Italiano (Italian)
Nome dei componenti del Cric a pantografo
CRIC A PANTOGRAFO Vedi FIG 1 pagina in inglese.
MANUALE D’ISTRUZIONI Dati tecnici e applicazione

Vedi FIG 2 pagina in inglese.
A : SUPPORTO F : VITE CRIC X : ALTEZZA CRIC (mm)
B : BASE G : PORTATA NOMINALE (t) Y : PORTATA (t)
C : BRACCIO SUP. H1 : ALTEZZA MIN (mm) M : MODELLO
D : BRACCIO INF. H2 : ALTEZZA MAX (mm) T : TIPO
E : GIUNTO MANOVELLA H3 : ALTEZZA DI PRESTAZIONE GARANTITA (mm)
Condizioni di non utilizzo

- Temperature inferiori a -40 °C.
Fabbricanti: - Su terreno sabbioso o fangoso.
- Su strada con elevata pendenza.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD.
- In condizioni climatiche estreme: temporali, tifoni, cicloni, bufere di neve,tempeste, etc.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Giappone
- Sollevamento di oggetti molto pericolosi, ad esempio: metallo fuso, sostanze acide, sostanze radioattive o
Tel: 049-248-1661 merci particolarmente fredde.
Fax:049-284-4340 - A diretto contatto col vano motore.
- Su un’imbarcazione.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Su terreno con dislivelli.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CINA
Istruzioni di funzionamento PUNTO DI
Tel: 0519-327-5284 Ogni volta che si cambia una ruota, togliere sempre tutte le tracce di APPLICAZIONE
Fax:0519-327-0811 corrosione eventualmente presenti all’interno della ruota e sulla superficie
di montaggio della ruota sul veicolo.
Particolari:
Leggere il presente MANUALE D’ISTRUZIONI prima di utilizzare il prodotto! Effettuare le operazioni seguendo le “istruzioni di funzionamento”.
Usare il cric su un terreno livellato controllando sia il cric che il carico.
Norma: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 Non operare al di sotto di un carico sollevato, a meno che il carico non sia
stato fissato saldamente.
- Parcheggiare il veicolo su un terreno livellato e in piano; azionare il
freno a fondo. MANOVELLA CRIC
PUNTO DI APPLICAZIONE
Avvertenze di sicurezza - Mettere il cambio in “retromarcia” (cambio automatico in posizione
- Il CRIC può essere utilizzato solo per la sostituzione di pneumatici, non per qualsiasi altro scopo. “parcheggio”).
- Utilizzare il CRIC non più di 50 volte. - Accendere le luci di emergenza.
- Non sollevare persone. - Tirare fuori gli attrezzi di sollevamento e la ruota di scorta
- Non infilarsi mai sotto un veicolo sollevato con il crick. dall’alloggiamento.
- L’uso di cric difettosi o non adeguatamente tenuti in efficienza è estremamente pericoloso. - Prima di inserire il cric, bloccare anteriormente e posteriormente la
ruota diagonalmente opposta a quella da togliere. BARRA MANOVELLA CRIC
Significato deI pittogrammI delle etichette di avvertenza - Allentare ma non togliere i bulloni ruota con una chiave girandola in senso antiorario.
- Sollevare il cric finché la scanalatura della sua parte superiore si inserisce nell’incavo del telaio, vedi figure.
Fondo arancione - Azionare il cric con movimenti lenti e uniformi, utilizzando la manovella del cric.
- Sollevare il veicolo in modo che uno pneumatico gonfiato si stacchi appena da terra; togliere i bulloni e la
Nero Questo simbolo indica un potenziale pericolo che può ruota.
causare la morte o gravi lesioni. - Installare la ruota e poi serrare un po’ ciascun bullone in modo che la ruota resti in sede sul mozzo.
- Abbassare il veicolo e serrare a fondo i bulloni in ordine incrociato girando la chiave in senso orario.
Manutenzione
- Evitare che sulla VITE DEL CRIC si formino accumuli di sporcizia.
Fondo bianco - Controllare la targhetta identificativa, mantenere la stessa forma dell’originale.
- Non riconvertire la costruzione del cric da soli.
Questo simbolo indica che non si deve mai infilarsi sotto il
Nero - Dopo ogni utilizzo, consultare immediatamente il proprio rivenditore Suzuki o un partner di assistenza per
veicolo quando è sollevato con il cric. l’ispezione e la manutenzione del cric.
Rosso
- Se l’etichetta (adesivo) è danneggiata, consultare un rivenditore Suzuki o un partner di assistenza.
83RM0-01E

Latviešu valoda (Latvian)
PantogrƗfa domkrata detaƺas nosaukums
DOMKRATS-PANTOGRƖFS Skat FIG. 1 attƝlu lapƗ angƺu valodƗ.
Tehniskie dati un izmantojums

LIETOŠANAS ROKASGRƖMATA Skat FIG. 2 attƝlu lapƗ angƺu valodƗ.

A: AUGŠƜJAIS TURƜTƖJS F: DOMKRATA SKRǋVE X: DOMKRATA AUGSTUMS (mm)
B: PAMATNE G: NOMINƖLƖ SLODZE (t) Y: SLODZE (t)
C: AUGŠƜJƖ SVIRA H1: MINIMƖLAIS AUGSTUMS (mm) M: MODELIS
D: APAKŠƜJƖ SVIRA H2: MAKSIMƖLAIS AUGSTUMS (mm) T: TIPS
E: ROKTURA SAVIENOJUMS H3: IZPILDƮJUMA NODROŠINƖJUMA AUGSTUMS (mm)

ApstƗkƺi, kƗdos izmantošana ir aizliegta
- Ja temperatǌra ir zemƗka par -40°C.
RažotƗji:
- Uz dubƺainas vai smilšainas virsmas.
- StƗvƗ nogƗzƝ.
„RIKENKAKI CO., LTD.” - EkstremƗlos laikapstƗkƺos: lietusgƗzes, taifǌna, ciklona, sniegputeƼa,pƝrkona negaisa utt. laikƗ.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214, JapƗna - NedrƯkst celt bƯstamas kravas, piemƝram: izkausƝtu metƗlu, skƗbas vielas, radioaktƯvas vielas vai Ưpaši
TƗlr.: 049-248-1661 trauslas preces.
Fakss: 049-284-4340 - NedrƯkst tieši saskarties ar pƗrsegu.
- NedrƯkst lietot uz kuƧa.
- NedrƯkst izmantot uz nelƯdzenas virsmas.
„CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD.”
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu, ƶƮNA Lietošanas instrukcija
PACELŠANAS
TƗlr.: 0519-327-5284 Ik reizi mainot riteni, notƯriet koroziju riteƼa iekšpusƝun uz transportlƯdzekƺa PUNKTS㻌
Fakss: 0519-327-0811 riteƼa montƝšanas virsmas.

Papildu informƗcija:

Lǌdzu, rƯkojieties tƗ, kƗ norƗdƯts “Lietošanas instrukcijƗ”

PƗrbaudot domkratu un paceƺamo kravu, novietojiet domkratu uz lƯdzenas
Lǌdzam pirms darbƯbu uzsƗkšanas izlasƯt šo LIETOŠANAS ROKASGRƖMATU! virsmas.
Papildu kravu drƯkst pacelt vienƯgi tad, ja tƗ ir droši nostiprinƗta
Standarts: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 - Novietojiet automobili uz gludas, lƯdzenas virsmas un iedarbiniet
stƗvbremzi.
- PƗrnesumkƗrbas sviru novietojiet pozƯcijƗ „atpakaƺgaita” (automƗtiskƗs

pƗrnesumkƗrbas sviru pozƯcijƗ „park”). PACELŠANAS DOMKRATA ROKTURIS㻌

- IeslƝdziet avƗrijas gaismas. PUNKTS
BrƯdinƗjumi! - No glabƗšanas nodalƯjuma izƼemiet domkrata aprƯkojumu un rezerves
- DOMKRATU drƯkst izmantot vienƯgi riepu nomaiƼai, nevis jebkƗdiem citiem nolǌkiem. riteni.
- Neizmantojiet DOMKRATU vairƗk par 50 reizƝm. - Pirms domkrata izmantošanas, no priekšas un aizmugures nobloƷƝjiet
- Nav paredzƝts cilvƝku pacelšanai. riteni, kas atrodas pa diagonƗli no mainƗmƗ riteƼa.
- Nekad nelieniet zem transportlƯdzekƺa, kas pacelts ar domkratu - AtbrƯvojiet, bet nenoskrǌvƝjiet uzgriežƼus, atslƝgu pagriežot pretƝji
- DefektƯvu domkratu vai domkratu, kuriem nav veikta atbilstoša tehniskƗ apkope, izmantošana ir ƗrkƗrtƯgi pulksteƼrƗdƯtƗja virzienam. DOMKRATA ROKTURA STIENIS㻌
bƯstama. - Paceliet domkratu lƯdz domkrata galviƼas rieva ietilpst rƗmƯ, skat. attƝlu.
- Darbiniet domkratu lƝni un piesardzƯgƗm kustƯbƗm, izmantojot domkrata rokturi.
BrƯdinƗjuma uzlƯmes piktogrammas nozƯme - Paceliet transportlƯdzekli tƗ, lai tukšƗ riepa nedaudz atrautos no zemes, noƼemiet uzgriežƼus un riteni.
- UzstƗdiet riteni un viegli piegrieziet katru uzgriezni, ritenim ir jƗnostiprinƗs uz rumbas.
Oranžs fons - Nolaidiet transportlƯdzekli un pievelciet uzgriežƼus krusteniskƗ secƯbƗ, atslƝgu griežot pulksteƼrƗdƯtƗja
virzienƗ.
Melns Šis simbols apzƯmƝ potenciƗlu bƯstamƯbu, kas var izraisƯt nƗvi Apkope
vai radƯt smagus ievainojumus. - Raugieties, lai uz DOMKRATA SKRǋVES nekrƗtos netƯrumi.
- PƗrbaudiet nosaukuma plƗksni, jo tai ir jƗsaglabƗjas sƗkotnƝjƗ formƗ.
- NedrƯkst patstƗvƯgi veikt domkrata izjaukšanu.
Balts fons - PƝc jebkuras izmantošanas nekavƝjoties sazinieties ar Suzuki dƯleri vai servisa partneri, lai veiktu
domkrata apskati un tehnisko apkopi.
Melns Šis simbols nozƯmƝ, ka Jǌs nekƗdƗ gadƯjumƗ nedrƯkstat lƯst - Ja etiƷete (uzlƯme) ir bojƗta, lǌdzu, sazinieties ar Suzuki dƯleri vai servisa partneri.
zem transportlƯdzekƺa, ja tas ir pacelts ar domkratu.
Sarkans

83RM0-01E

lietuviškai (Lithuanian)
Trapecinio domkrato daliǐ pavadinimas
TRAPECINIS DOMKRATAS Žr. 1 FIG. angliškame puslapyje.
Techniniai duomenys ir naudojimas

INSTRUKCIJǏ VADOVAS Žr. 2 FIG. angliškame puslapyje.
A : VIRŠUTINIS LAIKIKLIS F : DOMKRATO SRAIGTAS X : DOMKRATO AUKŠTIS (mm)
B : PAGRINDAS G : VARDINƠ APKROVA (t) Y : APKROVA (t)
C : VIRŠUTINIS PETYS H1 : MAŽIAUSIAS AUKŠTIS (mm) M : MODELIS
D : APATINIS PETYS H2 : DIDŽIAUSIAS AUKŠTIS (mm) T : TIPAS
E : RANKENOS JUNGTIS H3 : EKSPLOATACINIǏ SAVYBIǏ UŽTIKRINIMO AUKŠTIS (mm)
Netinkamos naudojimo sąlygos

- Kai temperatǌra žemesnơ kaip -40°C.
Gamintojai: - Ant purvo ar smơlơto grindinio.
- Ant kelio su dideliu nuolydžiu.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Sudơtingomis gamtinơmis sąlygomis: liǌtis su audra, taifǌnas, ciklonas, pǌga,audra ir t. t.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japonija - Kelti pavojingą krovinƳ, pvz.: lydytą metalą, rǌgštines, radioaktyvias medžiagas ar itin birias medžiagas.
Tel.: 049-248-1661 - Tiesioginis kontaktas su gaubtu.
Faks.:049-284-4340 - Naudoti laive.
- Ant skirtingǐ lygiǐ paviršiaus.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. Eksploatavimo instrukcijos KƠLIMO
Nr. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu KINIJA Keiþiant ratą visuomet pašalinkite koroziją,kuri gali bǌti ratǐ viduje ir ant rato VIETA
Tel.: 0519-327-5284 tvirtinimo paviršiaus.
Faks.:0519-327-0811 Detali informacija:
Dirbkite laikydamiesi „eksploatavimo instrukcijǐ“.
Naudokite domkratą ant lygaus paviršiaus, patikrindami domkratą ir keliamą
Perskaitykite šƳ INSTRUKCIJǏ VADOVĄ prieš naudodami gaminƳ! krovinƳ.
Negalima dirbti po pakeltu kroviniu, nebent krovinys yra saugiaipritvirtintas.
Norma: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 - Pastatykite automobilƳ ant lygaus, horizontalaus paviršiaus ir Ƴjunkite
stabdƳ.
- Ʋjunkite atbulinĊ pavarą („stovơjimo“ padơtƳ, jei automobilis yra su KƠLIMO VIETA
DOMKRATO RANKENA
automatine pavarǐ dơže).

Perspơjimas ir Ƴspơjimas
- Ʋjunkite Ƴspơjamąsias mirksinþias šviesas.
- DOMKRATAS naudojamas tik padangǐ keitimui, jis netinka naudoti kitais tikslais.
- Išimkite kơlimo Ƴrankius ir atsarginĊ padangą iš saugojimo vietos.
- DOMKRATĄ naudokite ne daugiau kaip 50 kartǐ.
- Prieš naudodami domkratą užblokuokite Ƴstrižai priešais nuimamą ratą
- Keliamame automobilyje neturi bǌti žmoniǐ.
esanþio rato priekƳ ir galą.
- Niekada nelƳskite po domkratu pakeltu automobiliu.
- Atlaisvinkite rato veržles, bet jǐ neišimkite, sukdami raktą prieš
- Ypaþ pavojinga naudoti sugedusƳ ar netinkamai prižiǌrimą domkratą. DOMKRATO RANKENOS
laikrodžio rodyklĊ.
- Kelkite domkratą, kol jo galvutơs griovelis Ƴsistatys Ƴ iškilimą rơme, žr. iliustracijas.
Perspơjimo etiketơs piktogramǐ reikšmơ
- Rankena sukite domkratą lơtais, sklandžiais judesiais.
Oranžinis fonas - Kelkite automobilƳ tiek, kad pripǌsta padanga šiek tiek pakiltǐ nuo paviršiaus, ištraukite veržles ir nuimkite
ratą.
Juoda Šis simbolis nurodo galimą pavojǐ, kuris gali bǌti mirtinas - Uždơkite ratą, po to šiek tiek priveržkite kiekvieną veržlĊ, ratas turi prisispausti ant stebulơs.
arba sukelti sunkius sužalojimus. - Nuleiskite automobilƳ ir iki galo kryžmiškai priveržkite rato veržles, sukdami raktą pagal laikrodžio rodyklĊ.
Priežiǌra
- Saugokite DOMKRATO SRAIGTĄ, kad ant jo nesusikauptǐ nešvarumai.
- Patikrinkite duomenǐ lentelĊ, išsaugokite originalią formą.
Baltas fonas - Nekeiskite domkrato konstrukcijos patys.
- Jei taip atsitiktǐ, iš karto kreipkitơs Ƴ „Suzuki“ pardavimo atstovą ar Techninơs priežiǌros partnerƳ, kad
Juoda Šis simbolis rodo, kad niekada neturơtumơte lƳsti po
apžiǌrơtǐ ir pataisytǐ domkratą.
automobiliu, kai jƳ laiko domkratas.
Raud - Jei etiketơ (lipdukas) pažeistas, kreipkitơs Ƴ „Suzuki“ pardavimo atstovą ar Techninơs priežiǌros partnerƳ.
83RM0-01E

Polski (Polish)
Nazwy czĊĞci podnoĞnika trapezowego
PODNOĝNIK TRAPEZOWY Patrz FIG. 1 na stronie w jĊzyku angielskim.
Dane techniczne i zastosowanie

INSTRUKCJA OBSàUGI Patrz FIG. 1 na stronie w jĊzyku angielskim.
A : GàOWICA F : ĝRUBA PODNOĝNIKA X : WYSOKOĝû PODNOSZENIA (mm)
B : PODSTAWA G : OBCIĄĩENIE NOMINALNE (t) Y : OBCIĄĩENIE (t)
C : GÓRNE RAMIĉ H1 : MINIMALNA WYSOKOĝû (mm) M : MODEL
D : DOLNE RAMIĉ H2 : MAKSYMALNA WYSOKOĝû (mm) T : TYP
E : UCHWYT KORBY H3 : WYSOKOĝû SKUTECZNA PODNOSZENIA (mm)
Kiedy nie wolno uĪywaü podnoĞnika

- JeĞli temperatura jest niĪsza niĪ -40°C.
Producenci: - Na mokrym podáoĪu lub piachu.
- Na bardzo nachylonych drogach.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - W skrajnych warunkach pogodowych: burze z deszczem, tajfuny, cyklony, burze ĞnieĪne,burze z
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japonia piorunami itp.
- Do podnoszenia niebezpiecznych, ciĊĪkich obiektów, np.: roztopiony metal, kwasy, substancje
Tel.: 049-248-1661
radioaktywne lub wyjątkowo kruche przedmioty.
Faks: 049-284-4340
- W przypadku bezpoĞredniego kontaktu z maską samochodu.
- Na áodziach.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - JeĞli podáoĪe jest nierówne.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu, CHINY
Instrukcja obsáugi PUNKT
Tel.: 0519-327-5284
Zawsze przed wymianą koáa usuwaj wszelkie Ğlady korozjiobecne po PODNOSZENIA
Faks: 0519-327-0811 wewnĊtrznej stronie koáa lub na powierzchni montaĪowej pojazdu.
Szczegóáy:
Obsáuguj podnoĞnik zgodnie z instrukcją obsáugi.
Przed uĪyciem produktu przeczytaj tĊ INSTRUKCJĉ OBSàUGI! UĪywaj podnoĞnika na páaskim podáoĪu i monitoruj podnoĞnik oraz
obciąĪenie.
Norma: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 Nie wchodĨ pod podnoszone obciąĪenie, chyba Īe obciąĪenie zostaáo
odpowiedniozabezpieczone.
- Zaparkuj samochód na páaskiej, równej powierzchni i mocno zaciągnij
hamulec.
WaĪne informacje i ostrzeĪenia - Ustaw bieg na „wsteczny” (w przypadku skrzyni automatycznej na PUNKT PODNOSZENIA
KORBA PODNOĝNIKA
- PODNOĝNIK moĪe byü uĪywany wyáącznie w celu wymiany opon, w Īadnych innych celach. „parkowanie”).
- Nie uĪywaj PODNOĝNIKA wiĊcej niĪ 50 razy. - Wáącz Ğwiatáa awaryjne.
- Zabrania siĊ podnoszenia samochodów z ludĨmi w Ğrodku. - Wyjmij podnoĞnik i zapasowe koáo z bagaĪnika.
- Nigdy nie wchodĨ pod pojazd podniesiony podnoĞnikiem. - Przed uĪyciem podnoĞnika zablokuj przód i tyá koáa po przekątnej od
wymienianego koáa.
- UĪywanie uszkodzonych lub niewáaĞciwie konserwowanych podnoĞników jest bardzo niebezpieczne.
- Poluzuj (ale nie usuwaj) nakrĊtki koáa, obracając klucz w kierunku
HAK KORBY
przeciwnym do ruchu wskazówek zegara.
Znaczenie piktogramu na naklejce ostrzegawczej
- PodnieĞ podnoĞnik, tak aby rowek w gáowicy objąá wystĊp ramy, jak pokazano na rysunkach.
PomaraĔczowe táo - Obsáuguj podnoĞnik powolnymi i páynnymi uchami za pomocą korby.
- PodnieĞ pojazd na taką wysokoĞü, aby napompowana opona nieznacznie odstawaáa od podáoĪa. Zdejmij
Czarny nakrĊtki i koáo.
Ten symbol oznacza potencjalne zagroĪenie, które moĪe
- ZaáóĪ koáo, nastĊpnie delikatnie dokrĊü kaĪdą nakrĊtkĊ. Koáo musi spoczywaü na piaĞcie.
skutkowaü Ğmiercią lub powaĪnymi urazami. - OpuĞü pojazd i caákowicie dokrĊü nakrĊtki w kolejnoĞci po przekątnej, obracając klucz w kierunku
zgodnym z ruchem wskazówek zegara.
Konserwacja
- Usuwaj ze ĝRUBY PODNOĝNIKA wszelki nagromadzony brud.
Biaáe táo - Sprawdzaj tabliczkĊ znamionową. Zachowaj oryginalny ksztaát.
Ten symbol oznacza, Īe nie naleĪy nigdy wchodziü pod - Nie modyfikuj samodzielnie konstrukcji podnoĞnika.
Czarny
pojazd podniesiony podnoĞnikiem. - Po kaĪdym UĪyciu, naleĪy natychmiast skontaktowaü siĊ ze sprzedawcą Suzuki lub partnerem
Czerwony serwisowym w celu kontroli lub konserwacji podnoĞnika.
- JeĞli etykieta (naklejka) jest uszkodzona, naleĪy skontaktowaü siĊ ze sprzedawcą Suzuki lub Partnerem
serwisowym.
83RM0-01E

Português (Portuguese)
Designação das peças do macaco pantográfico
MACACO PANTOGRÁFICO Ver FIG. 1 nas instruções em inglês.
Dados Técnicos e Utilização

MANUAL DE INSTRUÇÕES Ver FIG. 2 nas instruções em inglês.
A : PLATAFORMA SUPERIOR F : EIXO DO MACACO X : ALTURA DO MACACO (mm)
B : BASE G : CARGA NOMINAL (tonelada) Y : CARGA (tonelada)
C : BRAÇO SUPERIOR H1 : ALTURA MÍNIMA (mm) M : MODELO
D : BRAÇO INFERIOR H2 : ALTURA MÁXIMA (mm) T : TIPO
E : JUNTA DE ARTICULAÇÃO H3 :ALTURA DE UTILIZAÇÃO SEGURA (mm)
Não usar nas seguintes condições

- Temperaturas abaixo dos -40°C.
Fabricantes: - Chão instável ou de areia.
- Estradas muito inclinadas
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Condições meteorológicas extremas: tempestade, furacão, ciclone, nevão, trovoadas, etc.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japão - Cargas perigosas e pesadas tais como: metal fundido, substâncias ácidas, substâncias radioativas ou
Tel.: 049-248-1661 materiais frágeis.
Fax: 049-284-4340 - Em contacto direto com a carroçaria.
- Dentro de um barco.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Chão desnivelado. PONTOS DE
APOIO
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA Instruções de utilização
Tel.: 0519-327-5284 Ao trocar uma roda, remova qualquer vestígio de ferrugempresente
Fax: 0519-327-0811 no interior da roda ou na superfície de montagemda roda do veículo.
Descrição:
Por favor siga as instruções de acordo com as "instruçõesde utilização".
Por favor leia o manual de instruções antes da utilização! Utilize o macaco num chão nivelado enquanto o instala e verifique a carga.
Não deve utilizar o macaco com cargas muito pesadas salvose estas
Norma: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 estiverem amarradas de forma segura.
- Estacione o carro num local plano, chão nivelado e trave o carro MANIVELA DO MACACO
PONTO DE APOIO
de forma segura.
- Coloque a transmissão em "marcha-atrás" (transmissão
Cuidado e perigo automática em "estacionar (P)" ).
- O macaco apenas pode ser usado para substituir pneus e nunca para qualquer outro propósito. - Ligue os quatro piscas.
- Não utilize o macaco mais de 50 vezes. - Retire as peças do macaco e a roda suplente da mala.
- Não utilizar para elevar pessoas. - Trave a roda da frente e de trás diagonalmente opostas à roda
CABO DA MANIVELA
- Nunca fique debaixo de um veículo elevado por um macaco. que vai trocar antes de colocar o macaco. DO MACACO
- O uso de macacos defeituosos ou com manutenção inadequada é extremamente perigoso. - Solte, mas não retire completamente as porcas parafusos da
roda no sentido dos ponteiros do relógio.
Significado do pictograma na etiqueta de perigo - Eleve o macaco até chegar à altura necessária de acordo com o indicado na tabela da figura acima.
- Manuseie o macaco com precaução, movimentos lentos, ao utilizar a manivela do macaco.
Fundo laranja - Eleve o veículo até conseguir retirar a roda de forma a não raspar o chão, retire as porcas parafusos e a
roda.
Preto Este símbolo assinala um perigo potencial que pode resultar - Instale a roda, aperte levemente cada porca parafuso, a roda deve ficar bem centrada.
em morte ou ferimentos graves. - Depois de descer o veículo, aperte firmemente as porcas parafusos uma por uma no sentido contrário
aos ponteiros do relógio.
Manutenção
- Por favor mantenha o EIXO DO MACACO limpo e sem sujidade acumulada.
Fundo branco - Verifique a placa de identificação, mantenha a forma original.
- Não altere por sua iniciativa a estrutura do macaco.
Preto Este símbolo assinala a interdição de se colocar debaixo de
- Depois de qualquer Utilização, consulte imediatamente o seu Concessionário Suzuki ou Parceiro de
um veículo quando este está a ser elevado por um macaco.
Vermelho Assistência para inspeção ou manutenção do Macaco.
- Se a Etiqueta (autocolante) estiver danificada, por favor, consulte o seu Concessionário Suzuki ou
Parceiro de Assistência.
83RM0-01E

Română (Romanian)
Denumirea pieselor cricului manual
CRIC PANTOGRAF ConsultaĠi FIG 1 pe pagina în engleză.
Date tehnice úi utilizare

MANUAL DE INSTRUCğIUNI ConsultaĠi FIG 2 pe pagina în engleză.
A: PLATFORMA F: ùURUBUL CRICULUI X: ÎNĂLğIMEA CRICULUI (mm)
B: TALPA G: SARCINA NOMINALĂ (t) Y: SARCINA (t)
C: BRAğUL SUPERIOR H1: ÎNĂLğIMEA MINIMĂ (mm) M: MODELUL
D: BRAğUL INFERIOR H2: ÎNĂLğIMEA MAXIMĂ (mm) T: TIPUL
E: ARTICULAğIA PT. LEVIER H3: ÎNĂLğIMEA PENTRU ATINGEREA PERFORMANğEI (mm)
CondiĠii în care este interzisă utilizarea

- Când temperatura este sub -40°C.
- Pe teren noroios sau nisipos.
FabricanĠi:
- Pe o pantă abruptă.
- În condiĠii meteorologice extreme: furtună cu ploaie, taifun, ciclon, furtună de zăpadă,furtună cu descărcări
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD.
electrice etc.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japonia
- Dacă vehiculul este încărcat cu produse grele sau periculoase, cum ar fi: metal topit, acid, substanĠe
Tel.: 049-248-1661 radioactive sau produse fragile.
Fax: 049-284-4340 - Contact direct cu capota.
- Utilizarea pe o ambarcaĠiune.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Teren denivelat.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA
InstrucĠiuni de utilizare PUNCTUL
Tel.: 0519-327-5284 Când înlocuiĠi o roată, îndepărtaĠi întotdeauna ruginacare poate fi prezentă DE FIXARE
Fax: 0519-327-0811 pe interiorul roĠii úi pe suprafaĠa de montare a roĠii pe vehicul.
Detalii:
UtilizaĠi cricul conform instrucĠiunilor de utilizare.
CitiĠi acest MANUAL DE INSTRUCğIUNI înainte de utilizare! UtilizaĠi cricul pe un teren plan, verificând cricul úi sarcina.
Nu utilizaĠi cricul dacă vehiculul este încărcat, decât dacăîncărcătura este
Norma: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 bine fixată.
- ParcaĠi maúina pe un teren orizontal úi plan úi acĠionaĠi ferm frâna de
mână.
- AduceĠi transmisia în marúarier (transmisia automată în poziĠia de MANETA CRICULUI
AtenĠionări úi avertismente parcare). PUNCTUL DE
FIXARE
- CRICUL poate fi folosit doar pentru înlocuirea anvelopelor, nu în alte scopuri. - PorniĠi luminile de avarie.
- UtilizaĠi CRICUL de cel mult 50 de ori. - ScoateĠi instrumentele pentru cric úi roata de rezervă din
- În vehicul nu trebuie să se afle nicio persoană. compartimentul acestora.
- Nu intraĠi niciodată sub vehiculul ridicat pe cric. - Înainte de a utiliza cricul, blocaĠi partea din faĠă úi din spate a roĠii care
- Utilizarea cricurilor defecte sau întreĠinute necorespunzător este extrem de periculoasă. este diagonal opusă faĠă de roata care urmează a fi desfăcută.
- DestrângeĠi, dar nu înlăturaĠi prizoanele rotind cheia în sens antiorar. LEVIERUL CRICULUI
SemnificaĠia pictogramelor de pe eticheta de atenĠionare - RidicaĠi cricul până când adâncitura de pe capul cricului se potriveúte pe partea în relief a pragului, ca în
ilustraĠii.
Fundal portocaliu - AcĠionaĠi cricul cu o miúcare lentă úi lină, folosind maneta cricului.
- RidicaĠi vehiculul astfel încât anvelopa umflată să fie doar puĠin ridicată de la sol, iar apoi îndepărtaĠi
Negru Acest simbol indică un pericol potenĠial care ar putea duce la prizoanele úi roata.
moarte sau la accidentare gravă. - MontaĠi roata, iar apoi strângeĠi uúor fiecare prizon; roata trebuie să se afle pe butuc.
- CoborâĠi vehiculul úi strângeĠi complet prizoanele în cruce, rotind cheia în sens orar.
ÎntreĠinerea
- Nu lăsaĠi să se adune murdărie pe ùURUBUL CRICULUI.
Fundal alb - VerificaĠi plăcuĠa cu denumirea úi păstraĠi forma iniĠială.
Acest simbol vă interzice să intraĠi sub vehicul când vehiculul - Nu dezasamblaĠi úi nu reasamblaĠi cricul.
Negru
- După fiecare utilizare, consultaĠi imediat dealerul Suzuki sau partenerul de service pentru verificarea úi
este ridicat pe cric.
Roúu întreĠinerea cricului.
- Dacă eticheta (autocolantul) este deteriorată, vă rugăm să consultaĠi dealerul Suzuki sau partenerul de
service.
83RM0-01E

Slovensky (Slovak)
Názvy dielov pantografického zdviháka
PANTOGRAFICKÝ ZVIHÁK Pozri FIG. 1 v anglickom texte.
Technické parametre a použitie

NÁVOD NA POUŽITIE Pozri FIG. 2 v anglickom texte.
A : HORNÁ PODPERA F : SKRUTKA ZDVIHÁKA X : VÝŠKA ZDVIHÁKA (mm)
B : ZÁKLADNÁ DOSKA G : MENOVITÉ ZAġAŽENIE (v tonách) Y : ZAġAŽENIE (v tonách)
C : HORNÉ RAMENO V1 : MINIMÁLNA VÝŠKA (mm) M : MODEL
D : SPODNÉ RAMENO V2 : MAXIMÁLNA VÝŠKA (mm) T : TYP
E : KčB KďUKY V3 : PREVÁDZKOVÁ VÝŠKA (mm)
Podmienky, za ktorých sa zdvihák nesmie používaĢ

- Pri teplote pod -40°C.
Výrobcovia: - Na rozbahnenej alebo piesþitej pôde.
- Na ceste s veĐkým sklonom.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Pri extrémnych klimatických podmienkach: búrka, tajfún, cyklón, snehová búrka,búrka s prítomnosĢou
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japonsko bleskov, atć.
Tel.: 049-248-1661 - Zdvíhanie veĐmi Ģažkých predmetov, napríklad: roztavený kov, kyselinové látky, rádioaktívne látky alebo
mimoriadne krehké predmety.
Fax:049-284-4340
- Priamy kontakt s kapotou.
- Používanie na lodi.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Nerovný povrch.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu, ýÍNA
Tel.: 0519-327-5284 Návod na používanie ZDVÍHACÍ
Pri výmene kolesa vždy odstráĖte koróziu, ktorá môže byĢ prítomná na BOD
Fax:0519-327-0811
vnútornej strane kolesa a na náboji kolesa.
Podrobnosti:
Pred používaním si preþítajte tento NÁVOD NA OBSLUHU! Pri práci postupujte podĐa „návodu na obsluhu“.
FunkþnosĢ zdviháka a bremeno kontrolujte na rovnom povrchu.
Pri používaní sa záĢaž nesmie zvyšovaĢ, ak bremeno nie je riadne
Technická norma: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 upevnené.
- Vozidlo zaparkujte na rovnom a pevnom povrchu a zatiahnite
parkovaciu brzdu.
- V prípade ruþnej prevodovky zaraćte „spiatoþku“
Upozornenia a výstrahy ZDVÍHACÍ BOD
KďUKA ZDVIHÁKA
(v prípade automatickej prevodovky páku prepnite do polohy „Park“).
- Zdvihák je nie je možné použiĢ na žiadne iné úþely okrem výmeny pneumatík.
- Zapnite výstražné svetlá.
- Tento zdvihák nepoužívajte viac ako 50-krát.
- Z batožinového priestoru vyberte nástroje na zdvíhanie a rezervné
- Nesmie sa používaĢ na zdvíhanie osôb.
koleso.
- Nikdy nepracujte pod vozidlom, keć je zdvihnuté pomocou zdviháka.
- Pred zdvíhaním zaistite koleso nachádzajúce sa uhloprieþne od kolesa,
- Používanie vadných alebo nedostatoþne udržiavaných zdvihákov je veĐmi nebezpeþné.
ktoré sa bude zdvíhaĢ tak, že spredu a zozadu vložíte kliny.
- Matice uvoĐnite otáþaním kĐúþa na matice doĐava, ale neodstraĖujte ich. TYý KďUKY ZDVIHÁKA
Význam piktogramov a výstražných štítkov - Zdvihák zdvíhajte, kým zúbkovaná podpera ložnej plochy zapadne do rámu (pozri obrázok).
Oranžové pozadie - Zdvihák zdvíhajte pomalým a plynulým otáþaním kĐuky zdviháka.
- Vozidlo zdvihnite do takej výšky, aby koleso s nahustenou pneumatikou bolo mierne nad povrchom,
ýierna odstráĖte matice a koleso.
Tento symbol oznaþuje potenciálne nebezpeþenstvo, ktoré by
- Založte koleso, potom mierne utiahnite každú maticu tak, aby koleso pevne dosadalo na náboj kolesa.
mohlo maĢ za následok smrĢ alebo vážne zranenie.
- Vozidlo spustite a matice úplne dotiahnite nakríž otáþaním kĐúþa doprava.
Údržba
- Na SKRUTKE ZDVIHÁKA nesmú byĢ žiadne neþistoty.
- Zdvihák uchovávajte v pôvodnom tvare. Pozrite si typový štítok.
Biele pozadie
- PoužívateĐ nesmie upravovaĢ konštrukciu zdviháka.
ýierna Tento symbol znamená zákaz pracovaĢ pod vozidlom, keć je - Po každom použití sa okamžite obráĢte na vášho dodávateĐa alebo servisného partnera Suzuki kvôli
zdvihnuté pomocou zdviháka. kontrole a údržbe zdviháka.
ýervená - V prípade poškodenia štítka (nálepky) sa obráĢte na svojho dodávateĐa alebo servisného partnera Suzuki.
83RM0-01E

Slovensko (Slovene)
Nazivi delov dvigalke
DVIGALKA S PANTOGRAFSKIM SISTEMOM Glejte FIG. 1 v angleškem delu navodil.
Tehniþni podatki in lastnosti

NAVODILA ZA UPORABO Glejte FIG. 2 v angleškem delu navodil.
A : ZGORNJI NOSILEC F : VIJAK DVIGALKE X : VIŠINA DVIGALKE (mm)
B : PODNOŽJE G : NAZIVNA OBREMENITEV (t) Y: OBREMENITEV (t)
C : ZGORNJA ROýICA H1 : MINIMALNA VIŠINA (mm) M : MODEL
D : SPODNJA ROýICA H2 : NAJVEýJA VIŠINA (mm) T : TIP
E : ZGLOB ROýICE H3 : VIŠINA Z ZAGOTOVLJENO ZMOGLJIVOSTJO (mm)
Pogoji, pri katerih uporaba ni dovoljena

- Ko je temperatura nižja od -40°C
Proizvajalca: - Na blatni ali pešþeni podlagi
- Na cesti z velikim naklonom.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - V izrednih vremenskih razmerah: neurje, tajfun, tornado, snežni vihar, nevihta itd.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japonska - Dvigovanje nevarnih bremen, na primer stopljene kovine, kislin, radioaktivnih snovi ali posebno krhkih
Tel.: 049-248-1661 snovi.
Faks: 049-284-4340 - Neposreden stik z motornim pokrovom
- Uporaba na plovilih
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Uporaba na terenu z razliþnimi nivoji
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu KITAJSKA Navodila za uporabo DVIŽNA
Tel.: 0519-327-5284 Kadarkoli zamenjate kolo, vedno odstranite rjo,ki se nahaja na površini MESTA
Faks: 0519-327-0811 platišþa ali pesta vozila
Podrobnosti:
Prosimo uporabljajte napravo kot je navedeno v navodilih za uporabo.
Prosimo preberite pred uporabo ta NAVODILA ZA UPORABO! Dvigalko uporabljajte na ravni površini, preverite dvigalko in breme.
Ne upravljajte pod dvignjenim bremenom, razen þe je slednji varnopritrjen.
Standard: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 - Parkirajte vozilo na ravni površini in dobro pritegnite roþno zavoro.
- Prestavite menjalnih v vzvratno prestavo (položaj "park" pri
avtomatskih menjalnikih)
- Vklopite varnostne utripalke. ROýICA DVIGALKE
Obvestilo in opozorilo DVIŽNO MESTO
- Vzemite orodje za dviganje in rezervno kolo iz njegovega ležišþa.
- DVIGALKO lahko uporabljate le za menjavo pnevmatik in ne za druge namene.
- Še preden uporabite dvigalko, blokirajte prednji in zadnji del kolesa, ki
- DVIGALKO lahko uporabite najveþ 50-krat.
je diagonalno nasproti kolesa, ki ga nameravate menjati.
- Ne dvigujte, kadar so v vozilu osebe.
- Z vrtenjem kljuþa v nasprotni smeri urnih kazalcev razrahljajte, vendar
- Nikoli se ne zadržujte pod vozilom, dvignjenim z dvigalko.
ne odstranite kolesnih vijakov.
- Uporaba okvarjenih ali neustrezno vzdrževanih dvigalk je zelo nevarna.
- Dvigajte dvigalko, dokler njena glava ne doseže šasije - glejte slike.
DROG ROýICE DVIGALKE
- Dvigajte z enakomernimi, poþasnimi gibi roþice dvigalke.
Pomen znakov na opozorilnih etiketah
- Dvignite vozilo toliko, da se pnevmatika malo dvigne od površine, odstranite matice in kolo.
Oranžno ozadje - Zamenjajte kolo in nato rahlo privijte vsako matico, pri þemer mora kolo nasesti na pesto.
- Spustite vozilo, z vrtenjem kljuþa v smeri urnih kazalcev do konca privijte matice po navzkrižnem zaporedju
ýrno Ta simbol opozarja na morebitni nevarnost, ki lahko povzroþi
Vzdrževanje
resne ali smrtno nevarne poškodbe. - Prosimo prepreþite kopiþenje neþistoþ na DVIGALKI
- Preverite plošþico s podatki, ohranite prvotno obliko.
- Prepovedano je spreminjanje konstrukcije dvigalke.
- Po vsaki uporabi se takoj obrnite na prodajalca opreme Suzuki ali servisnega partnerja za pregled in
Belo ozadje vzdrževanje dvigalke.
- ýe je etiketa (nalepka) poškodovana, se obrnite na prodajalca opreme Suzuki ali servisnega partnerja.
ýrno Ta simbol opozarja, da ne smete biti nikoli pod vozilom, ki je
dvignjeno z dvigalko.
Rdeþe
83RM0-01E

Español (Spanish)
Nombre de las piezas del gato elevador de tijera
GATO PANTÓGRAFO Consulte FIG 1 en la página en inglés.
Datos técnicos y aplicación

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES Consulte FIG 2 en la página en inglés.
A: SOPORTE SUPERIOR F: TORNILLO DEL GATO X: ALTURA DEL GATO (mm)
B: BASE G: CARGA NOMINAL (ton) Y: CARGA (ton)
C: BRAZO SUPERIOR H1: ALTURA MÍNIMA (mm) M: MODELO
D: BRAZO INFERIOR H2: ALTURA MÁXIMA (mm) T: TIPO
E: MANIVELA H3: ALTURA DE GARANTÍA DE RENDIMIENTO (mm)
No utilizar en estas condiciones:

- Cuando la temperatura sea inferior a -40°C.
Fabricantes: - En un terreno con barro o de arena.
- En una carretera con mucha pendiente.
RIKENKAKI CO. - En condiciones meteorológicas extremas: tormenta, tifón, ciclón, tormenta de nieve, tormenta eléctrica, etc.
- Carga peligrosa, pesada, por ejemplo: metal fundido, sustancia ácida, sustancia radiactiva o mercancía
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japón
especialmente frágil.
Tel.: 049-248-1661 - Contacto con el capó directamente.
Fax:049-284-4340 - Uso en un barco.
- Terreno con desnivel.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO Machinery Co., LTD. Instrucciones de uso PUNTO DE
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA Cada vez que se cambia una rueda, elimine siempre la corrosiónque ELEVACIÓ
Tel.: 0519-327-5284 pueda presentar en su interior y en la superficie de montajede la rueda en
Fax:0519-327-0811 el vehículo.
Detalles:
Por favor, siga las "Instrucciones de uso".
Utilice el gato sobre un terreno llano, mientras hace lascomprobaciones
Por favor, ¡lea este MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES antes de usar el equipo! del mismo y de la carga.
No debe utilizarse añadiendo una carga, a menos que la carga se sujete de
Norma: EN 1494:2000 + A1: 2008 forma segura
- Aparque el coche en un terreno plano y llano y eche el freno de mano
con firmeza. MANGO DEL GATO
- Ponga la marcha en "marcha atrás" (cambio automático en "aparcar").
PUNTO DE ELEVACIÓN
Atención y advertencias - Encienda las luces de emergencia.

- El GATO debe usarse exclusivamente para cambiar neumáticos, no para ningún otro propósito. - Retire las herramientas del gato y la rueda de repuesto de la zona de
colocación.
- No utilice el GATO más de 50 veces.
- Antes de utilizar el gato, bloquee la parte delantera y trasera de la
- Ninguna persona a bordo.
rueda situada en diagonal con la rueda que se ha de retirar.
- Nunca se meta debajo del vehículo elevado con el gato. - Afloje, pero sin retirar las tuercas de las ruedas, girando la llave en
-
BARRA DEL MANGO DEL GATO
Usar gatos averiados o inapropiadamente mantenidos es extremadamente peligroso. sentido contrario a las agujas de un reloj.
- Eleve el gato hasta que la ranura de la cabeza del gato encaje en el reborde del bastidor, vea las
Significado del pictograma en la etiqueta de precaución ilustraciones.
- Utilice el gato con un movimiento lento y suave, usando el mango del gato.
Fondo naranja - Eleve el vehículo de tal manera que un neumático inflado justo quede por encima de la superficie, retire
las tuercas y la rueda.
Negro Este símbolo indica un peligro potencial que puede causar la - Instale la rueda y apriete ligeramente cada tuerca, la rueda debe estar apoyada en el cubo central de la
muerte o lesiones graves. misma.
- Baje el vehículo y apriete completamente las tuercas de la rueda en una secuencia lineal de cruz girando
la llave en el sentido de las agujas de un reloj.
Mantenimiento
- Por favor, evite que se acumule suciedad en el TORNILLO DEL GATO.
Fondo blanco
- Compruebe la placa de características, mantenga la misma forma que tenía en origen.
Este símbolo indica que nunca se meta debajo del vehículo - No haga cambios en la construcción del gato si es usted un particular.
Negro
cuando esté sostenido por el gato - Después de cualquier uso, póngase en contacto inmediatamente con su concesionario Suzuki o con un
Rojo servicio técnico asociado para que realicen las tareas de inspección y mantenimiento del gato.
- Si la etiqueta (pegatina) está dañada, consulte con su concesionario Suzuki o con un servicio técnico
asociado.
83RM0-01E

Svenska (Swedish)
Nomenklatur för pantografdomkraften
DOMKRAFT Se FIG 1 på den engelska sidan.
Tekniska data och tillämpning

BRUKSANVISNING Se FIG 2 på den engelska sidan.
A : TOPPHÅLLARE F : DOMKRAFTSSKRUV X : DOMKRAFTSHÖJD (mm)
B : BAS G : NOMINELL BELASTNING (t) Y : LAST (t)
C : ÖVRE ARM H1 :MIN: HÖJD (mm) M : MODELL
D : UNDRE ARM H2 : MAX. HÖJD (mm) T : TYP
E : HANDTAGSFOG H3 : HÖJD SOM GARANTERAR PRESTANDAN (mm)
Förhållanden då domkraften inte får användas

- Då temperaturen understiger -40°C.
Tillverkare: - På lerig eller sandig mark.
- På vägar som lutar mycket.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - I extrema naturförhållanden: regnstorm, tyfon, cyklon, snöstorm, åskstorm osv.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japan - Last av farliga eller tunga ämnen som: smält metall, syror, radioaktiva substanser eller mycket sköra
Tel: 049-248-1661 föremål.
Fax: 049-284-4340 - Direktkontakt med huven.
- Användning på båtar.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. - Mark med olika nivåer.
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu KINA Användningsinstruktioner DOMKRAFTS-
Tel: 0519-327-5284 När du byter ett hjul, ska du alltid avlägsna eventuell rost PUNKT
Fax: 0519-327-0811 som kan finnas på insidan av hjulet och hjulets monteringsyta.
Detaljer:
Utför åtgärderna i ”användningsinstruktioner”.
Läs denna BRUKSANVISNING före användning! Använd domkraften på jämn mark så att du kan kontrollera domkraften och
lasten.
Norm: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 Arbeta inte under upplyft last om inte lasten är fäst ordentligt.
- Parkera bilen på platt, jämn mark och dra åt bromsen ordentligt.
- Ställ växelspaken på ”backväxeln” (automatisk växellåda
på ”parkering”). DOMKRAFTENS
Säkerhetsnormer och varningar DOMKRAFTSPUNKT HANDTAG
- Sätt på varningslampan.
- DOMKRAFTEN får endast användas till att byta däck, inget annat.
- Ta bort domkraftsverktygen och reservdäcket från förvaringsutrymmet.
- Använd DOMKRAFTEN högst 50 gånger.
- Blockera hjulet diagonal motsatt hjulet som ska tas bort bade framtill
- Lyft aldrig upp personer med den.
och baktill innan du använder domkraften.
- Stå aldrig under ett fordon som lyfts upp med domkraft.
- Lossa men ta inte bort hjulmuttrarna genom att vrida nyckeln medurs.
- Användning av en defekt eller bristfälligt underhållen domkraft är extremt farligt.
- Lyft upp domkraften till dess skåra passar in i ramens utrymme som i
Domkraftens vevhandtag
illustrationerna.
Betydelse v symbolen på varningsetiketten
- Använd domkraften med långsamma, mjuka rörelser genom att veva.
Orange bakgrund - Lyft fordonet så att ett pumpat däck är precis ovanför marken. Ta bort muttrarna och hjulet.
- Installera hjulet och dra sedan åt varje mutter något. Hjulet ska sitta på navet.
Svart Denna symbol indikerar en potentiell risk som kan leda till - Sänk ner fordonet och dra åt hjulmuttrarna ordentligt i en korssekvens genom att vrida nyckeln medurs.
livsfara eller allvarliga skador. Underhåll
- Se till att DOMKRAFTSSKRUVEN inte blir smutsig.
- Kontrollera märkplåten och se till att formen förblir som den var ursprungligen.
- Ändra inte på domkraftens konstruktion själv.
Vit bakgrund - Efter varje användning, kontakta omedelbart din Suzuki-återförsäljare eller servicepartner för inspektion
Denna symbol betyder att du aldrig ska stå under fordonet när och underhåll av domkraften.
Svart
- Om etiketten (dekalen) är skadad, kontakta din Suzuki-återförsäljare eller servicepartner.
det är upplyft av domkraften.
Röd
83RM0-01E

Türkçe (Turkish)
Pantograf Krikonun Parçalarnn Adlar
PANTOGRAF KRøKO øngilizce sayfadaki FIG. 1’e baúvurun.
Teknik Veriler ve Uygulamalar

KULLANIM KILAVUZU øngilizce sayfadaki FIG. 2'ye baúvurun.
A : ÜST DESTEK F : KRøKO VøDASI X : KRøKO YÜKSEKLøöø (mm)
B : TABAN G : NOMøNAL YÜK (t) Y : YÜK (t)
C : ÜST KOL H1 : ASGARø YÜKSEKLøK (mm) M : MODEL
D : ALT KOL H2 : AZAMø YÜKSEKLøK (mm) T : TÜR
E : TUTACAK BøRLEùME NOKTASI H3 : PERFORMANS GÜVENCESø VERøLEN YÜKSEKLøK (mm)
Ürünün Kullanlmamas Gereken Koúullar

- Scaklk -40°C'nin altnda oldu÷unda.
ømalatçlar: - Çamurlu ya da kumlu zemin üzerinde.
- Yüksek e÷imli yollarda.
RIKENKAKI CO., LTD. - Frtna, tayfun, kasrga, tipi, gök gürültülü frtna gibi a÷r do÷al koúullarda.
5-6-12 Chiyoda, Sakado-shi, Saitama, 350-0214 Japonya - Erimiú metal, asitli madde, radyoaktif madde gibi tehlikeli a÷rlklar ya da krlgan maddeler yüklenmesi.
Tel: 049-248-1661 - Do÷rudan kaporta ile temas ettirilmesi.
Faks:049-284-4340 - Tekne üzerinde kullanlmas.
- Farkl seviyeli zeminlerde.
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO., LTD. Çalútrma talimatlar KALDIRMA
No. 1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu ÇøN Bir tekerle÷i de÷iútirirken, tekerlek içerisinde ya daraç üzerindeki tekerlek NOKTASI
Tel: 0519-327-5284 monte etme alannda oluúmuú olabilecek paslanma durumlarn ortadan
Faks:0519-327-0811 kaldrn.
Ayrntlar:
Lütfen "çalútrma talimatlarna" uygun úekilde kullann.
Lütfen çalútrmadan önce bu KULLANIM KILAVUZUNU okuyun. Krikoyu, kriko ve yükü kontrol ederek, düz zemin üzerinde çalútrn.
Yüklerin sa÷lam bir úekilde sabitlenmedi÷i durumlarda,yük kaldrma amaçl
Standart: EN 1494:2000+A1:2008 olarak kullanlmamaldr.
- Arabay düz bir zemine park edin ve el frenini skca çekin.
- Arac "geri vitese" aln (otomatik viteste "park" konumu). KRøKO TUTACAöI
KALDIRMA NOKTASI
- Tehlike ikaz flaúörlerini açn.
Dikkat ve uyar
- Kaldrma araçlar ile yedek lasti÷i bagaj alanndan çkarn.
- KRøKO yalnzca lastikleri de÷iútirmek için kullanlabilir, herhangi baúka bir amaç için kullanlamaz.
- Krikoyu çalútrmadan önce çkarlacak lasti÷in karúsndaki
- KRøKOYU 50 defadan fazla kullanmayn.
tekerleklerin önüne ve arkasna takoz yerleútirin.
- Üzerinde insan taúnamaz.
- øngiliz anahtarn saat yönünün tersine çevirerek tekerlek somunlarn
- Asla kriko ile kaldrlan bir aracn altna girmeyin.
gevúetin, ancak çkarmayn.
- Kusurlu veya yetersiz bakm yaplan krikolarn kullanlmas son derece tehlikelidir. KRøKO TUTACAöI ÇUBUöU
- Krikonun üst ksm úasinin alt kalbna gelecek úekilde krikoyu kaldrn.
Çizimlere göz atn.
Uyar etiketlerinin üzerindeki resimlerin anlamlar
- Krikoyu, tutaca÷ kullanarak yavaú ve yumuúak hareketlerle çalútrn.
Turuncu arka plan - Arac, patlamú olan lasti÷in çkabilece÷i kadar kaldrn, somunlar ve tekerle÷i çkarn.
- Tekerle÷i takn ve somunlar teker teker skútrn, tekerle÷in yuvaya tam olarak oturmas gerekmektedir.
Siyah Bu simge, ölüm ya da ciddi yaralanmalara neden olabilecek - Arac indirin ve ingiliz anahtarn saat yönünde çevirerek tekerlek somunlarn çapraz srayla giderek
olas bir tehlikeyi ifade etmektedir. tamamen skútrn.
Bakm
- Lütfen KRøKO VøDASINDA kir birikmesini engelleyin.
- øsimli÷i kontrol edin, ürünün orijinal úeklini koruyun.
Beyaz arka plan. - Krikonun yapsn özel olarak de÷iútirmeyin.
- Herhangi bir Kullanmdan sonra, Krikonun kontrol ve bakm iúlemleri için hemen Suzuki Satcnza veya
Siyah Bu simge, kriko ile desteklenen bir aracn altna girmemeniz
Hizmet Orta÷na danún.
gerekti÷ini ifade etmektedir.
Krmz - E÷er etiket (çkartma) hasar görürse, lütfen Suzuki Satcnza veya Hizmet Orta÷na danún.
83RM0-01E

MEMO
83RM0-01E

BATTERY LABEL SYMBOL MEANINGS
No smoking, no naked flames, no sparks Battery acid
Shield eyes Note operating instructions
Keep away from children Explosive gas
Prepared by
June, 2016
Part No. 99011-83RM0-01E

Printed in Hungary
TP500
83RM0-01E

sx4 2016

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

sx4 2016

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

sx4 2016

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGLISH 22.

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

Fuel recommendation: Brake and clutch fluid:

Engine oil recommendation: TCSS transaxle oil:

Part No. 99011-83RM0-01E June, 2016 Printed in Hungary

Suzuki Red: Magenta 100%, Yellow 100%

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

Fuel recommendation: Brake and clutch fluid:

Engine oil recommendation: TCSS transaxle oil:

Part No. 99011-83RM0-01E June, 2016 Printed in Hungary

Suzuki Red: Magenta 100%, Yellow 100%

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE: The illustrated model is one of the SX4 series.

Copyright © 2016 All Rights Reserved

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Non-Genuine SUZUKI Parts and Accessories

Re-use of Genuine SUZUKI Parts and Accessories

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LHD: Left Hand Drive

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

EXTERIOR, FRONT EXAMPLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

EXTERIOR, REAR EXAMPLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

INTERIOR, FRONT EXAMPLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. Sun Visor (P.5-4)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. Lighting Control Lever (P.2-98)/

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. Adaptive Cruise Control Switch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

INTERIOR, REAR EXAMPLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Diesel Engine NOTICE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To unlock a front door from outside the NOTE:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING Keyless Push Start System